^ Λ " "Zf 
 
 ν» 
 
 S^c 
 
 LIBRARY OF THE 
 
 Ψ 
 
 University of California. 
 
 CIRCULA TIXG BRA X C Η . 
 
 / 
 
 Ecturn iu nr*- week^ ; or a week before the ena c! tre lorn;, 
 
GREEK EXERCISES- 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 ON 
 
 THE SYNTAX 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GEEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 THE REY. WILLIA.AI NEILSON, D. D. 
 
 Λ NEW EDITION, CORRECTED AND ENLARGED. 
 
 TO ΛνΠΙΟΙΣ ARE SCD JOINED, 
 
 eji:ercises in metaphrasis, paraphrasis^ 
 dialects, and prosody. 
 
 TOuET.IER WITH 
 
 AN HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE DIALECTS ; THE DOCTHINK OF 
 
 THE 5IIDDLE VOICE, AVITII EXPLANATORY EXAMPLES; 
 
 Λ STATEMENT OF OPINIONS RESPECTING THE 
 
 GREEK ACCENTS ; AND 
 
 TWO APPENDICES, 
 
 ILLrSTRATIVE OF THE LEADING rRINCIPLES OF THE 
 GREEK. SYNTAX. 
 
 CHARLES ANTHON, 
 
 JlPrcNCT TROrESSOR OF LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW-YORK. 
 
 NEW-YORK: 
 
 SWORDS, STANFORD, AND Co. 
 
 15"2 Broadway. 
 
 Stereotyped by J. Conner 
 
 1S35 
 
3S&07 
 
 Southern Dislrkt of yeic-York; g$. 
 
 Be it ri'ineinl)crn<l, that on the ninth ilay of March, A. D. 1825, in the 
 49th year of the Iinh'pendence of the United Sutesof Aineria», 7'. φ J. 
 Sicor'ds, of the said District, have depositi'd in this Oflice the title of a 
 book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietor:;, in the words fol!owin«^, 
 to wit : 
 
 " Exercises on the S .-ntax of the Grrrk Langtiage. r>y the Rev. ΛΥϋ- 
 liani Ncilson, D. D. Corrected and enlarL'<d. To which are sutjoined, 
 Exercises in Atetaphrasii, Paraphrasis, Dialects, and Prosody : together 
 with an historical Sketch of the Dialects; the Doitrine of the Middle 
 Voice, with ex|)lanalory Examples ; a St;itenient of Opinions resjiecting 
 the Greek Accents; and two Appendices, illustrati\e of the londin;r Prin- 
 ciples of^the Greek Syntax. By Charles Anthon, A<ijunct Professor of 
 Languagt*»! in Colunihia College, New-York. 
 
 in conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled 
 " All Act for tlie Encouragement of Learning, hy securing the Copies of 
 Maps, Charts, and Hooks, to the Authors and Proprietors of such Copiei», 
 during the tinie therein mentioned.•' And also to an Act, entitled "An 
 Act, supplementary to an Act, enlitleil An Act for the Encouragement of 
 Learning, by securing the Copies of Ma|>s, Charts, and l5ot>ks, to the Au- 
 thors and I'roprietors of such Copies, during the times therein mentioned, 
 and extending the lienefits therev>f to the Arts of Designing, Engraving, 
 and Etching Historical and other l^ints." 
 
 JAMES DILL, 
 Clark of the Smithcm District of Aftr- York. 
 
^Aj^.sy 
 
 h ' ) 
 
 TO Λ Η ίζ" 
 
 ; it Hoi ■%«• 
 
 THE REV. WILLIAM HARRIS, U. 1). 
 
 PRESIDENT OF COLUMBIA COLLEGE, SEW-YORK. 
 
 Rev. and dear Sir, 
 
 As a feeble return for numerous acts of kindness, 
 allow me the privilege of inscribing to you this little 
 volume, and of indulging, at the same time, the flatter- 
 ing hope that it may not prove altogether unworthy of 
 your notice. I shall esteem myself peculiarly fortunate, 
 if my humble labours can secure the approbation of one 
 in whom private and public worth are so intimately 
 blended, and under whose fostering care our Institution 
 has made so rapid a progress in the career of improve* 
 ment. 
 
 The work which I take the liberty of presenting, 
 must, of course, stand or fall by its own merits ; yet I 
 cannot omit the present opportunity of trespassing a lit- 
 tle on your kind attention, while I state a few particulars 
 respecting the plan which has been pursued in it, ' The 
 Greek Exercises of Dr. Neilson, long and advantageously 
 known in this country and in Great Britain, had come 
 into very general use, when, by an occurrence unfortu- 
 nately but too common in the case of some of our most 
 valuable school-books, a blow was inflicted which ren- 
 dered the work perfectly useless. From a strange mis- 
 eenception of the true mode of education, an edition of 
 
 a3 
 
( vi) 
 
 the Exercises made its appearance in this country some 
 years hack, with a key actually annexed, and thus the 
 good eflTects of a work which would otherwise have proved 
 so useful an auxiliary to the student, became in an in- 
 stant cornjiletcly neutralized. The conseijucnce has been, 
 tliat the Greek Exercises of Dr. Xeilson have gradually 
 been disused, and are, it is believed, retained at tije pre- 
 sent day by few of our preceptors. The j)eculiar and 
 lasting advantages which result from the practice of 
 Greek and Latin composition, in giving a closer and 
 more accurate view of the granmiatical forms of these 
 languages, must be conceded by all ; and it is therefore 
 a subject of deep regret, that a most valuable branch of 
 classical instiuction should have been for a long time ]'en- 
 deied so utterly unproductive. 
 
 The object of the present work is to suf^ply, if pos- 
 sible, the place of the furmer edition of Dr. Xeilson's 
 Exercises ; in order to accomplish wiiich end, such al- 
 terations and additions have been made as nnist render 
 the key to the previous edition of no value whatever. 
 The general outline las been indeed retained, but the 
 materials of which the volume is composed will be I'ound 
 to be more than two-thirds enlirdy new, Λ\Ίΰ1ο the 
 old seleclions have been pretty generally thrown out, 
 others have licen called in to supply their places lVi)m 
 the best ancient writers, and n<it a tew have been taken 
 from the Greek Exercises ol" Bishop Huniiiig!"uril ami 
 Professor Dunbar. It has been my endeavour t«) select 
 fi^m the two works last mentioned all that a()peared use- 
 ful, and at the same time to procure whatever was valu- 
 able from every other accessible quarter. The second 
 part of the volume, commencing with the Exercises in 
 iMetaphrasis, is all new. Here the plan of Dr. Xeilson 
 appeared radically defective, in annexing• poetical instead 
 vi prose translations to the Exercises in iMetaphrasis, 
 Sec. which his work contained. I have addeil to my se- 
 lections a j)rose version, " horrida qitiiUm el barlnira," 
 yet necessarily so, in order to be of any real use to the 
 student. The Exercises on the Greek Dialects, and also 
 those ill Prosodv, have been all taken from the best wri- 
 
( vii ) 
 
 tcrs of antiquity ; and it is hoped that the History of the 
 Dialects will not prove uninstjuctive. Tlie Doctrine of 
 the Middle Verb, which is next in the order of the vo- 
 lume, will, I trust, not be unacceptable to the pupil, since 
 it will serve to explain v.hat might otherwise appear to 
 him a strange and unaccountable anomaly. The gram- 
 marians of the present day have thought fit to attack the 
 doctrine of the Middle Voice, and have been led to view 
 it merely as another form for the Passive. The Perfect 
 Middle in like manner they have dignified with the np- 
 pellation of the Seconil Perfect Active, insisting that its 
 meaning is never a middle one. I may be unibrtunate 
 in not possessing the same degree of critical acumen 
 with those who imagine that they liave discovered what 
 has hitlierto escaped the observation of the ablest scho- 
 lars, and yet I cajmot but think that attempts such as 
 (ficse, to remove the very landmarks of a language, and 
 ininjciuce confusion and disorder on the ruins of a most 
 beautiful system, are at once unnecessary and uncalled 
 lor. The Doctrine of the Middle Voice, and the Rc- 
 hiarks on the Middle Pc-rfect, as they are given in the 
 present work, must speak for tliemselves. Should the 
 student feel desirous of any farther information on tho 
 subject, he is referred to the adniirable Treatise of Kiisi- 
 ter. 
 
 The Statement of Opinions respecting i!ie Greek Ac- 
 cents presents, in a small compass, the C(jljected opinions 
 of some of the al>U;st scholars on this long-agitate<i to- 
 pic. The student is left to drav,' his ovv'n conclusions. 
 No accents have been given in the present work, because 
 it is my misfortune to consider them as " mute and un- 
 meaning marks ;"' and until vve are taught in what way 
 they were used iuy\ applied by the ancients, 1 shall 
 always consider it the height of classical affectation to 
 talk and argue learnedly of things, respecting the true 
 nature of which the best airn^ng us proicss lo be pro- 
 foundly ignorant. 
 
 The Appendices which are annexed to the volume, 
 Aviil account for the absence from the present edition of 
 
( viii ) 
 
 the chapter on Ellipses. The doctrine of Eljipscs, in 
 itself very plausible and captivating, has been pushed so 
 far by its advocates, as to exhibit a complete tissue of 
 the most egregious trifling. That there are Ellipses in 
 Greek as well as in every other language, no one will 
 deny. The very effect of the gradual improving of α 
 language is to produce them. But tliat they exist in eve- 
 ry sentence, nay, in ulmost every clause or phrase of 
 that sentence, is what can never be assented to. Such 
 a doctrine as this, while it servos to exclude from the 
 view of the student the simple and beautiful principles 
 which regulate the operations of one of the noblest of 
 languages, cannot fail to narrow his views of language 
 in general, and keep him continually groping after some 
 visionary ellipsis. It is on this account timt so little will 
 be found in the present work on this subject. In stating 
 the rules indeed, as they have been handed down by suc- 
 cessive grammarians, I have been necessarily led to adopt 
 their language, but in the first Appendix have claimed 
 the privilege of giving a more liberal view of the doc- 
 trine from the best writers. 
 
 In the Rules of Syntax, an asterisk has been affixed 
 to the new rules which are added in this edition, and 
 to those of the old ones which h'lve been altered in 
 their phraseology. This mark was afiixcd in the pre- 
 vious editiijns, to those rules which were supposed to 
 differ from i^atin construction. In many instances, how- 
 ever, it was necessarily α very fallacious cxpotlient, 
 since often when the idioms of the two languages ap- 
 pear at first view widely remote, they may be found, 
 on a closer examination, to have numerous points of 
 rescniblanec. 
 
 r 
 
 Each chapter of the Exercises is divided into three 
 parts. The first contains plain and easy sentences, 
 which should be rendered into correct Greek before the 
 other parts of the chapters are attempted. The second 
 embraces more variety of expression, and exemplifies 
 the rules promiscuously, as well as the particular one 
 prefixed to each chapter : this part extends from the 
 mark IT to the end of the Enirlish sentences. The thiixi 
 
( ix ) 
 
 portion is small, and consists of Latin sentences, which 
 are to be rendered into Greek. Tiicse would have been 
 given in English, and been made more numerous, had 
 we possessed an English-Greek Lexicon for schools. 
 
 In order to occasion as little trouble as possible to the 
 pupil, the Greek forms of the verbs have in general been 
 given according to the Lexicon of ISchrevelius. This 
 will be particularly apparent in the verbs s-s-w, st5;u, and 
 liL•. To the first of these ειτον has been assigned as a 
 
 sond aorist, when it properly should be formed from 
 the Ionic sitcj ; and ειοίω is used with the meaning of "to 
 know," and e(5co \viih that of " to see," wlicn in fact they 
 are one and the same verb, ««^tw contracted siOu, signify- 
 ing " to know," and having in the second aorist the mean- 
 ing " to see." 
 
 But I have trespassed loo long, I fear, upon your at- 
 tention. Permit mc, in conclusion, to entertain the hope 
 that my labours, in the present instance, m.ay not prove 
 wholly useless, and tliat they may serve in some little 
 degree to aid the knowledge of a language " which has 
 the highest claims on the attention of mankind, as be- 
 ing the fountain of all the blessings that enrich and 
 adorn society, and more especially as the sacred deposi- 
 tory of that revelation which is ihc fairest gift of God 
 to man." 
 
 1 have the honour to remain, 
 Very respectfully. 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 
 CHARLES ANTIION. 
 
To Charles Antho.v, F.aq., Adjuncl Vroftsaor of 
 Languages in Columbia College, AVic- Yor/c. 
 
 Columbia College, March 4, 1825. 
 
 Dear Sir, 
 
 When first you intimated to me your intention of 
 editing the Greek Exercises of Dr. Neilson, I had little 
 doubt, from my knowledge of your perfect competency 
 to execute the work, that it would prove worthy of public 
 patronage ; but since I have been favoured witii the 
 perusal of it, in justice to you I must ac-knowledgo that 
 it greatly exceeds all the expectations I had entertained 
 of its utility. In writing Greek or Latin exercises, the 
 student is benefited chictly by the use of his powers of 
 judgment, of discrimination, and of taste ; but when 
 recourse can be had to a translation or a key, these most 
 important ends are entirely defeated. Your book is a 
 complete remedy Ibr this evil, and, with many and great 
 additional advantages, su()plies the place of the former 
 edition of Dr. Neilson's Exercises. 
 
 Permit me. Sir, to congratulate you on the completion 
 of the work, and to express my earnest desire that it may 
 speedily be adopted in all our classical schools. 
 
 That you may experience this satisfaction from your 
 useful labours, and may long be continued to benefit, by 
 your able and faithful instructions, the youth of this city, 
 and particularly the students of Columbia College, ia, 
 dear »Sir, the sincere wish of 
 
 Your obliged and faithful friend, 
 
 WILLIAM HARRIS. 
 
( xi ) 
 
 REMARKS NECESSARY TO BE OBSERVED IN 
 WRITING GREEK. 
 
 1. The final letter is generally cut off (except in verbs) 
 fiom ΛνοΓ(ΐ3 ending in a, ε, ι, ο, αι, or οι, when the following 
 word begins ^\■ith a vowel ; as, Παντ' εΧιγον. 
 
 2. Most words ending in <fi, and aU verbs in ί and i, take 
 V, when the following word begins \vith a νοΛνβΙ ; as, Eixotftv 
 ανδζες. 
 
 3. Ν is changed into 7, in compounds, before κ, y, χ, and 
 iiito μ, before cr, ^, φ, ψ ; as, Εγχξΐω, β'υμ.φλε/ω. 
 
 4. When the following word begins with an aspirated 
 vowel, the tenuis, or intermediate consonant preceding, is 
 changed into an aspirate ; as, Αφ' ού. 
 
 5. Ex is used before a consonant, εξ before a voAvel. Ου is 
 lised before a consonant, oux before a soft voAvel, ουχ before an 
 aspiraied one. 
 
 6. The Attics use all contractions. 
 
 The order of the sentences, in each voice, in the first chapter 
 of the Exercises, is as follows : Present, Imperfect, 1st Future, 
 2d Future, 1st Aoiist, 2d Aorist, Perfect, Pluperfect, and in 
 the passive, Paulo post future. 
 
 The manner of expression, in which each tense is trans- 
 lated in the first chapter, is retained, in general, throughout 
 the work : but as this could not be always done, and as there 
 are many varieties of expression, which the most literal trans- 
 lation could not ascertain, small EngUsh letters and figures are 
 affixed to such Greek words as might probably be rendered 
 UTiproperlr. 
 After a Λ'erb — 
 
 * denotes Active. 
 
 »» . - Middle. 
 
 i^ • • Passive. 
 
( ^ ) 
 
 * denote 
 
 3 Present. 
 
 
 Imj>erfect. 
 
 
 
 Ist Future. 
 
 
 
 2d Future. 
 
 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Aftei a Substantive, AJjcctlve. Pronoun, or Participle 
 "» denotes Ma-sculinc. 
 
 f 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 ne 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 t 
 
 Singular. 
 
 «lu 
 
 Dual. 
 
 pi 
 
 Plural.* 
 
 η 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 g 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 Λ 
 
 Dative. 
 
 • 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 * In the «ally part of the volume, pi w ueeJ (ϋ dcuot• the plural, aAe^ 
 wards the letter e ak>uc is retained. 
 
RULES 
 
 OP 
 
 GREEK SYNTAX. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. Thc article is used to mark a distinction or emphasis. 
 "With the infinitive it supplies the place of nouns, gerunds, 
 and supines. With a participle, it is translated by the relative 
 and indicative. With μεν and oi it signifies partly ; and it is 
 often used for ornament ; as, 
 
 Kaxwv των τ^ιν μνειαν εχίιν. 
 
 Τα εξω. 
 
 Εν TU1 φξονον. 
 
 Ό εξ^ομενος. 
 
 Τ' ανό^ωιτειον γϊνος τγι μεν αγα- 
 
 όον, 771 6s φαυλον. 
 ΊΙ vjxi] ή νικηίΤαίία τον χοίμον ή 
 
 ui^schylus the tragedian. 
 
 To remember former evils. 
 
 The things without. 
 
 In wisdom. 
 
 He that cometh. 
 
 Mankind are partly good, and 
 
 partly bad. 
 Faith, the victory which ovei^ 
 
 comes the world•. 
 
 CONCORD. 
 
 AjDJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 *2. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, agree 
 with their respective substantives in gender, number, and 
 case ; as. 
 
 Ανδξξς αγα6οΐ. 
 Πα^ον μενο^. 
 
 Good men. 
 This city. 
 Present courage» 
 
2 coKcoti0t 
 
 *3. An adjective is often put ab.solvUfly In the neuter gen- 
 tler, "X^^il^oi, cominonly, χτήμα, treaytia, and e^/6v, iumetiu;iea 
 being understood ; as, 
 
 O»5ov ή α>.ηί:"•α αί». Truth is always a right thing. 
 
 *II ι^ατξΐς φιλτατον /Djoroii. To men their country is rnosf 
 
 dear. 
 
 *4. The adjective i.s often found without any substantivo 
 with which it agrees, the latter having been omitted, or being 
 easy to be supphed by the nund ; as, 
 
 Ό βΌφοίτ. The wise man. 
 
 'il iPir>. The straight road. 
 
 Τα εμα. My property. 
 
 5. An adjective i.s sometimes put in a different gender froiA 
 tVie sub.'tantive with which il .-itand.•?, as agreeing with some 
 other substantive undcrstootl ; a?, 
 
 Airv») Διοί τεχος ατ^-τωνη. .Minurva, invincible daughter 
 
 of Jove. 
 Ω ψυχή ό; fi»jo' );rf()>;;. Ο ! soul who hast not been 
 
 gratified. 
 
 6. I^articiples ami adjectives are often put, by ;ittraciion, 
 in the same case with the noun or pronoim to which they 
 refer ; as, 
 
 Οιομ-ενων είναι oOipi;Tar:,;v f.vjpu- Thinking thein.selvca to be the 
 ruvi wisest of men. 
 
 VERB AND NOMINATIVE. 
 
 7. A verb agrees with its noiniiuitive, in nuuibor and per• 
 9on ; as, 
 
 Zs.^tC ίγζη-Ι;. Zeuicis painted. 
 
 0;??αλμυ λημίΓίνον, His eyes shine. 
 
 Ka.rc'.iovin 6ξ\ιΙ\ίς. Birds sing. 
 
 8. Neuters in the plural have cominonly verbs singlihir ; 
 as, 
 
 Tit /36λη εκα-χΊα. The darL- fall out. 
 
 T',.• α^νξΐ-^ CTOTatftfsVai r^aMra. All things are suhjecL to mo- 
 ney. 
 *9. Nouns of multitude take either a singular or plurni 
 ▼rrt or participle, and eomciiiuea both in the same sentence : 
 
CONCORD. 8 
 
 ΣιιΌυδϊ] ί' l^iro Xaof, ε^ητνίίν And the people sat down in 
 (for f^nTuirjCav) 5s χα&Βδξας. haste and kept their scat?, 
 
 10. Substantive verbs, verbs passive of naming, and verbs 
 of gesture, have a nominative both before and after them, be- 
 longing to the same thing ; as, 
 
 Ύμεις iclc το φως του κοβΊ^ον. Ye arc the light of the world. 
 Καχων ειτίχαλυμμα ζΰΐα ό "π-λου- Wealth is the cloak of evils. 
 7off. I 
 
 11. The infinitives of substantive verbs, such as civci, 
 yaetfiai, &c. have the same case after them that goes before 
 ihem ; as, 
 
 Toji μίν ειίοτα^ ταύτα ηχίιτο He thought that those who 
 χαλου5 και α^α^ουί: εινα», tous knew these things were 
 Jf ayvooi/VTaj avi^affo^wiiij good and honourable ; but 
 
 αν διχαίω^ χεκλη^όαί. that those who were igno- 
 
 rant of them should be 
 justly called slavish. 
 
 12. The infinitive mood has an accusative before it, when 
 its agent or subject is different from that of the preceding 
 verb ; but a nominative, \vhen thej are the same ; as, 
 
 Tj βζοτονζ φξο\ί>ν Xs^ouii ; "Why do they say that mortal 
 
 men are wise ? 
 ί,ζείξε ifoX^iiios είναι βα'ίι'Κα. He showed that he himself 
 
 was an enemy to the king. 
 
 *13. When the preceding verb and the infinitive relate to 
 the same per.-;on, the pronoun, unless cinphatical, is omitted 
 before the latter ; but when they relate to different persons, 
 the pronoun must be expressed ; as, 
 
 Έφ-ή ζ-η-ειν. He said he was seeking* 
 
 Αεγω Cj ειόεναι ταιιτα, I say that thou knowest these 
 
 ihino-s. 
 
 RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT. 
 
 14. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and 
 number. If there come no nominative between the relative 
 and the verb, the relative is the nominative to the verb ; but 
 if there do, the relative is governed by some word expressed 
 or understood ; as, 
 
 Ανδξίς οί ίΐίΌνται, Men who will know. 
 
 Ό λr,Ύΰf Iv ftcre, Tiie wcid which he ep(^. 
 
4 CONCORD. 
 
 15. The Attica and Ionics often put the relative, by attrac- 
 tion, in the same case with the antecedent ; and sometiuies 
 the antecedent in the same case with the relative ; as, 
 
 11^05 τουτοΐί οΊς Χεγβι Ξενοφών. In addition to the tilings wliich 
 
 Xenojilion says. 
 
 OJrof stfriv όν Χεγείζ ανό^ω«ον. This is the man of whoni tliou 
 
 speakest, 
 
 *16. The relative with its clause often stands, as in Latin, 
 before its antecedent, when the leading idea of the whole 
 period is contained in it ; as, 
 
 'Λ croiiiv αιί-χζαν, ταύτα νομι^£ Think that it is not even be- 
 μγ,δ: Χεγειν Sivai χαλον. coming to mention what it 
 
 is disgraceful to perform. 
 
 *17. When the relative, by means of a verb like "/ooe," 
 " to tiatne" " (0 believe" is joined with a noun in the same case, 
 It conforms itself, in gender and number, to this noun, and not 
 10 that which is its jiroper antecedent ; as, 
 
 Τϊαξϋίην αυτ -fj φόβο?, ήν αι5ω He has a fear which we call 
 ;i(aXoufisv, $hamo. 
 
 GENER.VL RULES. 
 
 18. A noun of the dual number may have a verb, adjective, 
 or relative plural ; but a plural noun can only have a verb, 
 adjective, or relative dual, when it signifies t\vo ; as, 
 
 Αμφω βλβ/βν. They both said. 
 
 Ώί ανίμοι δυο o^iverov. As two winds excite. 
 
 Φιλα^ ίτ:?ι χΰΐ^ί /3αλωμΕν. Let us put our hantls around. 
 
 19. Two or more substantives .singular have a verb, adjec- 
 tive, or relative plural. If they ho. of different persons ox gen- 
 ders, the verb or adjective will agree with the most worthy ; 
 if they signify things without life, the adjective is commonly 
 in the neuter ; as, 
 
 Eav α5έλ(ρβ5 ij αί'λφη ^νμ«» If a brother or sister be 
 
 wrafXwtf». nakeil. 
 
 Λ> 6\ivaolstai xai ιτΧοντος 6ia Power and riches are de.«irT 
 
 Tjjv τ»μην Ε(ί7»ν α'ΐξίΐ-α. able for the sake of honour, 
 
 Eyw xai tfu τα ίιχαια "τΌΐτ,οΌ- Thou and I will do the things 
 
 μ^ν. which are just. 
 
 *20. Two singular nouns connected by a conjunction, 
 when expressing, not two distinct tlungSj but ditierent shaded 
 
CONCORD. I 
 
 of tlic same idea, require the verb to be in the singular num- J^ Vt^ 
 ber ; as, 
 
 Πτξυνε μίνοί χαι Oj,ao; σ.γψωξ, His spirit and manly soul in- 
 cited him. 
 
 *21. Two or more nouns singular have also the con'espond- 
 ing Λ -erb oflen in the singidar agreeing Avith that which is 
 nearest ; as, 
 
 'Ewi αν ■rOfj5>Ji] ό ojt'avoi xai η Until ihe'hcavcn and the earth 
 ^-η. shall pass away. 
 
 22. When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the no- 
 minative to a verb, or substantive to an adjective, the verb is in 
 the tliird person singular, and the adjective in the neuter gen- 
 der ; as, 
 
 To raiiy «Pcifai ύ-^ύαξϊσ'ΐατον It is very hard to please aU, 
 
 SUBST.VXTIVF, .i.ND SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 2.3. One .substantive agrees with anGther, .signifying the 
 same thing, in case ; as, 
 
 Κ•οαζαξγ,ς ύ -καις toj Atfruayoy. Cyaxares thesofiof Astyages, 
 
 Aurokvxoj &ογσ.-τ,!> μεγαΧν,τοξ',ς^ Anliclca, the daughter of the 
 
 Αν-ίκλίια. magnanimous Autolycus, . 
 
 *24. Noun^ connected with other nouns to limit their sig^ 
 nification, are couAerted into adjectives ; as, 
 
 rXwfl'a'av Έ/Οναία εύιοαξί. He taught the Greek lari» 
 
 guage. 
 Ολυμιποίίί ΜουοΌι. Olympian Muses. 
 
 GOYERNxMENT. 
 
 S-UBSTANTIVES. 
 
 25. One substantive governs another, signif^-ing a different 
 thing, in the genitive ; as, 
 
 Toy Θ? oy μακ^δδυ,αιο?. The long suffering of Go4 
 
 A2 
 
β COVEHMMENT. 
 
 26. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substan• 
 tive, governs the genitive ; as, 
 
 To λοιιτον ς"ής 7ΐμ.εξας. The rest of the da3'. 
 
 To xfaTi(f7ov τ-ης φιΧοίίοφιας. The best pr.rt of philosophy. 
 
 27. The primitive pronoun is used in the genitive, instead 
 of the possessive pronoun ; as, 
 
 IIuT -ήξ μου, for «αττηξ ίμ-ος. "My father, 
 
 '*28. But when an emphasis is required, the posse-sive 
 alone can be used ; and to this sometimes, by a species of ap- 
 position, is added a genitive case ; as, 
 
 ^ιαξ-^ΤΛξουιίι τα ί,αα, coy χακ:- Thoj' plunder the property of 
 JaifAovof. uie, the miserable. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 *29. Adjectives signifying ;?/<;«^),/, wuri/i, condemnation, power, 
 differmcp, desire, memory, knowledge, and their oppositcs. require 
 the genitive ; as, 
 
 Έ.ξγα. •b-XsiCtou άξια. AVorks wortliy of the highest 
 
 value. 
 ΓιιμναΛα ιιεύτα ανδρών. Places of exercise full of 
 
 rnon. 
 Ών ^ledj^ftj η(Τί' net. Of \vhicli you wore ;Uv.;;ys 
 
 de.-iirous, 
 
 .*30. Verbals cornpoiuided wi;h the privative n, ν.ι.ά thotc 
 ending in ixop, govern the genitive ; a«, 
 
 Amino? α^ροσ'υνη.ί. Not blamcablo for i;>:pru- 
 
 dence. 
 Πί^ι^ΤίΚΡ? w^Γη^iι^Jv, Capable of providing neccsr 
 
 saries. 
 
 *31, Parti;ivps, and words used p&rtitively, comparativr•», 
 fupcrla'ivce, indelini'rs. interrogativ»s, and some nuiucrals, 
 take after them the genitive plural: as, 
 
 'Oi nakiy.101 των •Kai-qruv, The auf irnt poets. 
 
 Movoff βξοτων. The only one of mortals. 
 
 'Oi vfwrf^oi avt'^iuir^v, The younger of the men. 
 
 Καλλίίτίο^ «ΌΓαμμν. The most beautiful of rivers. 
 
 ΐ>κα<ίτ(ιξ των rra^ovTwv fX£jf. ' Each of those NvliO v/ere pre- 
 sent said, 
 
GOVERNMENT. 7 
 
 32. The comparative degree governs the genitive, when it 
 
 is translated b}' than ; as, 
 
 Βουλϊ;^ cuicv εσ"7ιν εχ^ιον χαχη^. Nothing is more odious than 
 
 bad counsel. 
 
 *33. The adjective pronouns αλλοί and ϊτίξοζ are some- 
 times used as comparatives, iiud construed \vith the genitive \ 
 
 as, 
 
 Αλλα των ojxaiwv. Thingsother than those which 
 
 are just. 
 'Erf^ov ?-2υτου. Different from this. 
 
 *34. The comparati^-e is sometimes followed by the geni- 
 tive of the reciprocal jironouns, anil the same subject is com- 
 pared to itself Λνιΐΐι regard to its dilTerent circumstances at 
 different times ; a.~, 
 
 ΠλουσΊ^τί^οι 1«ΐ)των. Richer than they Avere before. 
 
 ΔίΓληαΊο^ iu-^ro-j. As great again as it was. 
 
 35. Adjectives signilying profit^ Uhrncss, obedience, fitness, 
 ί,Ίίί'ΐ, dcararss, dcccnoj, facility, ami their contraries, and those 
 (■■fjrvpowidcd with tfuv and όμου, govern the dative ; as, 
 
 'ίίμιν ετ7αι ;^?τ;οΊ,αον. It Λνϋΐ be useful to us. 
 
 Συντ^οφοί: -fj άτλοττ-η. Accustomed to simplicity. 
 
 T.Kt-^&i'^ji ανΰρι ejxTsv. To be \vi.-ihed for by a liberal 
 
 man. 
 Tot; } tvvaioij το αιίχρον 5χ(5^"€ν. To the generous, a base tiling 
 
 is detestable. 
 
 -'36. Comparatives and superlatives govern the mea-ure 
 cf excess mast commonly in the d<-''>ti'^ «Ί sometimes also in ύιβ 
 accusative ; as, 
 
 Av^Pijrrwv p.av.j^j «pii-roj. By fir the best of men. 
 
 Τίο.τ/ίζ ΐολλον ap.nvuv, Aiiicli braver than his fati:ier^ 
 
 VF.KBS. 
 
 87. When ίιμι and ym^ai signify possess-ion, pyopertij, or 
 duty, they govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 Ό ίΓΊττ^αίχομίνο^ ίτε|ου yivirai. lie Vvho is sold becomes the 
 
 property of another. 
 
 *3S. Verbs of beginning, admiring, zcaniingj mnemheringy 
 
8 GOVERNMENT- 
 
 ofcusing^ valuins;, sharing^ and the like, w'wh. their coiUrariea 
 govern the genitive , a*, 
 
 Παγίων rwv xa/.tjv r;^a. He loved all that were virtu- 
 
 0115. 
 
 Oude rouTou 6ιημα^7$. Neither did he fail of haWiig 
 
 thi.-i. 
 AuiXfi.c CUV φίλων. Υυΐι nofflect your fVionds. 
 
 A-roXajii twv ταί>οντ^ν. He enjoys things present, 
 
 *39. Λ'erbs expressive of any of the senses, exccpL thai of 
 sight, govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 ΑιΟΊίανομαι ψο^ου. I hrar a noi-e. 
 
 ΔϋΐίχΓ ■>>? ψαυίιν voijuvroff uvo>ii;. It is duntioroua to lonch a dle- 
 
 oascd person. 
 
 *40. Vorh.s derived fiorn comparafires, or in v. hii h the idea 
 of comparison i.-i involved, together with many verbe coniing 
 from noif'ti!, and eipiivalenl in meaning to ihc piiuiiiivc with 
 the substantive verb, retpiire the genitive ; as, 
 
 'Jlrracitti rivij. To be inf.^rior to any ono. 
 
 *ϊ(Ττ£?*ιί•έ τγ.ς μΜ-χτ,ς. He arrived aficv the battle. 
 
 1Τί^ΐ:(Τ-ι ηλ) ων ^υναίχων. She excels other women. 
 
 ETj^avvci'j KoPivioj. He was kmg of (.'orinih. 
 
 *41. The genitive is put wi'h verbs of all kinds, even "ttith 
 those which govern iho acc\i.«;iiive, when the action do« not 
 refer to the w/njle object, but only tu n part ; as, 
 
 Εθωχ« 3Ό» rwv ^pjj-xarujv, I gave thee of my wealth. 
 
 Ιντέμον rr,f ^r,j. They laid waste a pari of the 
 
 country•. 
 '*^\α\'τιχτ,ς ίχ^ν •7:";^ντ)ί. Pos.^e.-ising ο portion of the alt 
 
 of divination. 
 
 42. T-tfri, f;ik<'n for ε^ω, (ο fiavc, governs the dative : a?, 
 V-iri μοι ■χργ,ιχίτα. 1 have riches. 
 
 43. All verlM put acriuisliivtly, i. e. verbs of ■■'^n-i,ig, giring, 
 using, n'joiii/ig, obfiji/i^', ini.'tiiiig, di^cotirsiiig, fighting, and the 
 hke. v.-illi their coutrarie?, govern the dative ; as, 
 
 Βοτ,ίί'ιν ς•/) ;rarfi'5i. Τΰ help his country. 
 
 F.ixsiv xoxoif. To yield to n^isfortune*'. 
 
 Μαχ5ίι'αι ηις νοΚΒμκις, To encounter with the eneftiy. 
 
 Ilaf «v/j^ a-jT(fi covn. Every n^an labours for hjin• 
 
 pelf, 
 
OOVKRIXaiENT. 9 
 
 *44. The verbs siyai and yiyvs(f^at are often accompanied 
 by a participle of the verb " ίο ioish" " ίο hope" arc. in the 
 dative ; in which case the participle onlv, as the leading idea, 
 is translated bj the finite verb ; as, 
 
 E*ei ijio^evoftfiv ijjxiv o! XojOi Since \\o were pleased "witi^ 
 
 γίγυναϋΐΜ. thy discourse. 
 
 Njxia -τβοίίεχομενΜ r;v ταύτα, Nicias exi^ected these things. 
 
 45. A verb signifying actively governs the accusative ; as. 
 
 To'jTov (fu cl)i ayaiJov αν<5?α τι- Thou honourest him as a gootl 
 ^9?. nuuv 
 
 *46. The Attics frequently make verbs of hearing, and 
 sometimes those which denote the operations of the other 
 senses, govern the accusative ; as, 
 
 Αχουω raura, I hear these things. 
 
 47. Every verb may take an accusative of a ΰΟΓΓοβροηδ•- 
 ing noun ; as, 
 
 Δουλίυόΐν ^ουλίιαν ακίγ^ξαν. ^ To serve a base slavery. 
 Πολεμον ιτολεμι^ίιν. To wage war. 
 
 *48. Λ''erbs of accusing, condemning, and acquitting, with 
 their contraries, take after them the accusative of the person 
 Aviih the genitive of the thing ; as, 
 
 TouTGu Σωκ|ατηυ ό καΓηχο^ο^ The accuser blames Socratea 
 
 αιτιάται. for this. 
 
 Γ^αφομκι (Js re-jTou. 1 accuse thee of this. 
 
 *49. Some verbs of accusing and condcnming have, on 
 account of the nature of their composition, the person in the 
 genitive, and the crime or the punishment in the accusative , as, 
 
 Jo-./ μω^ιαν χατϊ3χο^ω. I accuse thee of follj* — ^ 
 
 (Charge folly against thee.) 
 
 *δΟ. Verbs of comparing, giving, promising, declaritig^ ana 
 taking aioay, govern the dative with the accusative ; as, 
 
 Δ05 μοι ταύτα. Give me these things. 
 
 Ίνιο'χνίομαι tfoi δέκα τάλαντα. I promise thee ten talents. 
 
 51. Verba of asking, teaching, doing well or iU, speaking 
 well or ill, taking away, putting on or οβ, cmicealing, and the 
 
10 COVEn.NMEN'T. 
 
 like, are ioiivxl wlih two .xccngatives, the one of the person, 
 the other of the thing ; or with one accusative and an adverb ; 
 
 OS. 
 
 Χρη aiTitv ouf dio'jf α^αία. "We should ask good thinge 
 
 from the gotls. 
 Αιταντα Ci όιόαξοααι. I will leach ihee all thinga. 
 
 Arotfrsfii μ,ί χξτ,^ατα. He df^trives me of iny pro- 
 
 Dcrtv. 
 
 f ASSIVE V£RBa, 
 
 52. Passive verbs take a genitive, of the agent, after them, 
 vhich is governed by a preposition understood or expressed ; 
 ae, 
 
 Jvai *ρος ίμων XEiydrrfo.aoi ; Shall I be left by you also V 
 Φίλων vixyvra) φίλοι. Friends are prevailed ujx)n by 
 
 friends. 
 Τίξος diujv ύ^μτ;μίν'.5. Impelled by the gods. 
 
 53. Someiiuies passive verbs have a dative of the agent 
 after them ; &», 
 
 To μίγεβας sxiivuj των νενζαγ- The greatness of bis actions. 
 
 ^iVWV, 
 
 iMPr.RSdNAi. VF.nns. 
 
 54. An inipcr.^onal verb govern.s the dative ; ni", 
 
 Msyitfrov a-jT'fi soo^fv £iv«i. It serm'-d greatest to hirn. 
 
 *55. Χ?η and oji, si;::nifving it behoveth^ are followed by the 
 accusative wiih tlio intiniiivc ; as, 
 
 'S.^r, i( ταύτα τοί-ην. It behoveth theo to ilo ihoFG 
 
 things, 
 
 *ή6. Afi, sifrnifvincr ητ<\<.<?/7»/ or iravf^ μίλϊΐ, μίτίθ'ΐΓΐ, frpo(ir,xii^ 
 ίία;;=ρ{ΐ, (Kksix-t, μίταμιλί•, Γιιιρκ-ηιΐν govern the datjvo of the 
 pordon with iho genitive of the thing ; as, 
 Δ(ι οοΓω χρημάτων. He has need of money. 
 
 Ewivwv Toti φαολοιρ μϊ.-ίΐ'η. The wicked have α share of 
 
 iho.-e thuiire. 
 
GoSrEunMtUT. It 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 *57. The infinitive mood is governed by verbs, pardcipki, 
 (ind adjectives ; as, 
 
 *0(i7tg ξψ ε«ΊΟυμε» irsifasL• vi- \\'hoe;'er desires to live, let 
 
 χαν. him try to conquer. 
 
 Σιτευδων ιτΧουτεη. Desiring to be rich. 
 
 Aims όξαν. Frightful to behold, 
 
 *58. The infinitive, with the accusative fi-equently before 
 it, is often put absokitcly, being preceded by the particles ώ^, 
 ώίί-ί, *piv, αχ^ι, μίχξΐ, and some others, either expressed or 
 Understood ; as, 
 
 'Clg e*os si'TTStv. So to speak. 
 
 ΪΙξιν ϋηλον fivcti. Before it is evident. 
 
 *-59. The infinitive is often used ellipticallv, όξο., βλ$ιίε, 
 tf^coiTs•!, δοζ, dsXw, κέλίυω, of εύχομαι, being understood to govern 
 it ; as, 
 
 Αυτοί 5VI ίΤ^ωτοιΟΊ iiayjiiai. Do thou thj-self fight among 
 
 the first. 
 
 60. The Greeks use μέλλω, Avith an infinitive, to express 
 the future, both active and passive, which in Latin would bo 
 rendered by a participle of the future and the verb sum ; as, 
 
 Πε^ι wv ίμεΐί μελλετΐ κ^ινειν. Of which things ye are about 
 
 to judge — {Judkaturi esiis.) 
 
 P.iRTIClPLES. 
 
 61. Participles govern the case of their ΟΛνη verbs ; ae, 
 
 Touj vicoTi^ouff Toiaura τβη *αι- Instructin-g the younger men 
 δεοοντί?. ift such manners. 
 
 *62. The verbs ειμί, ταγχαν^^ ΰιτα^χω, ^ινομκι, χυ*ω, εχω, 
 φίανω, λανθάνω, and some others, are u.sed Y\'ith participles 
 after them, which require to be renrlered, in Latin, by the 
 raood and tei^e of the verb annexed, wliile the verbs them- 
 selves are most generally rendered by adverbs ; as, 
 
 ΣίΜίξαη^ς τύγχανε» ?τε^»*«των. Socrates happens to be walk- 
 ing— (Ft/r/e amhulat So- 
 crates.) 
 
a cov.:r?iment. 
 
 63. Participles are often used, instead of the infinitive, after 
 verbs signifying an emotion of the mind ; as, 
 
 AyoTtJv μί (5ιαΓί>^κ I ίο coniimies to love me. 
 
 Μί,ανημαι τοίηίΤαί. I remember that I did it. 
 
 *64. The participle is used after the adjectives ςαν.-^ο?, 
 5ηλο5, and their compounds, after αφαν»;^, ετι^ϊονη?, &c. ; and 
 the adjective is conunonl}' rendered in English by its adverb ; 
 αβ, 
 
 Δηλοί ην ειηίνμων μίν rr'k'.j'roj He \vas evidently very de 
 »ίχυξως. siro us of riches. 
 
 THE SUrri.VING OF GERUNDS AND SUtlNES. 
 
 65. The infinitive mood, or a participle, is used to supply 
 •he place of geriuuls and supines ; a.--, 
 
 K.-g ro ff'^actwras Φ^\αγαγε>ν. To gather the soldiers toge- 
 ther. 
 
 }'..ip-/eT-^.'j a.T-.yj ίκτη^Ταμην. I acquired them by doing 
 
 kindly. 
 
 ricic'iv ακίχρον. Shameful to be done. 
 
 *6G. \'cilial adjectives in t^o.c, are frequonily used by the 
 ' rrtcks w hen any nccessitif i.s implied, in the same way as 
 the future participles passive^ and gerunds^ in Latin, and 
 govrrn the dative of the agei;•, with the cases of their own 
 vcrbi? ; a.'S, 
 
 TfaTTtiv μοι ί^ιίτολην. I nuiFt write a letter. 
 
 »»μίλΓ,Γ£ον (Tw ccvTcn. TliOM mast tako euro of this. 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION ΟΓ ClRCUMSTA.tCF.S. 
 
 67. 'VY.fi caup»\ manuJT, or ;r.3trun?.cnt, ir put in the <ΐΗΐϊλ•ί> .; 
 n?, 
 
 KjOTti ikr;^^a\cuc. \\r conqufT.- by Ftratagerr.P 
 
 A^7.»faic >Λ•γ•^α.ίΰΐ μοχοι•, και Fight with .«iilver wrapon?, 
 
 •ovra KfacrCii» ί' -i-d ihou wdt comiucr all 
 
 things 
 
 BS. The q\iO£tion xchither ? is commonly answered by fi; 
 or r^tfv.-.-.h the Kccusntivc ; where f by ev with the dtitivt 
 
GOVERNMENT. 13 
 
 Vfhenee ? hy tx or a*e with the genitive ; eind hy or ikrougk 
 
 tchai place I by ίια wnth the genitive ; as, 
 
 .Ev 'Ρωμ;?. In Rome. 
 
 Eti i-r)v ΑνηοχΕ/αν. To Antioch. 
 
 Ex, or αιτΌ T*)5 "jroXswf. From the city. 
 
 Δία /η?. By land. 
 
 69. Adverbs in ii and ίΊ are used to signify at a plate ; in 
 
 if, (Τε, or ^ε, /ο « />/«c« ; and in ^zv and ίε, from a place ; δβ ie 
 also added to accusatives, to signify ίο a place ; ae, 
 
 ΚοξίνΜι οικία vaiwv. Inhabiting housas at Corinth. 
 
 KXi<iirjucv κνειλεΊο χάλκοον fy. He took the brazen spear from 
 
 χοε. the tent. 
 
 E/ju.1 Φ^ιηνίί. I will go to Phthia. 
 
 70. The distance of one place firom another, is put in the 
 accusative ; as, 
 
 ΕφίβΌί «τεχει, τ^ιων νι/χείων όίο». Ephesus is distant three days 
 
 journey. 
 
 71. The time when is commonly put in the genitive, sorne- 
 timos in the dative ; how long, in the accusative ; as, 
 
 Ήμε^α^ χαι vjxrog. By day and night. 
 
 ΊΙμε^α μια. On one day. 
 
 Οξγη φιλουντων ολίγον Kf^jct The anger of those who love 
 χ^ονον. prevails but a short time. 
 
 *72. The raaiicr of which any thing is made is put in the 
 genitive ; as, 
 
 Τον διφξο/ STfoiritiiv κίγνξ^ν ξυ- He made the chariot of strong 
 Xwv. wood. 
 
 *73. The price or measure of any thing is put in the ge- 
 nitive ; as, 
 
 Δος ουτον 'ημιν δξα.χμ.•ης. Give him to us for a drachma. 
 
 λ>»δζΐΛζ δ^δε-λκ «••/)χεων. A statue of tw«lve cubits. 
 
 Β 
 
14 OOVERMMENT. 
 
 ' ABSOLUTE CASES. 
 
 *74. The genitive c?se of a substantive is often put abso- 
 lutely, the former substantive being understood ; as, 
 
 Tnt Πλα -uvo.c. Tlie v.jrks of Plato. 
 
 Ολ^μ.ζιας r, AXi^avJ^oj. Olyrnpias the mother of Alex- 
 
 ander. 
 
 *7 3. The Greek writers frequently use the article with a 
 noun in the genitive, governed by a snbstajiiive understood, 
 by way of periphrasis for the noun itself; as, 
 
 Τα rr^ ofyr^g. Anger. 
 
 Τα ττ,ς Eii'jtifiug. Experience. 
 
 *76. The genitive case is often put absolutely, evixa, χα^ιν, 
 or some case of τις or hg being understood ; as, 
 
 Eirff/vcj τη? φιλομοΰβΊα?. I commend thee for thy lovo 
 
 of music. 
 Λέιλβίί του νου. ΛVretched on accovmt of thy 
 
 temper. 
 Τούτων γηαυ μοι. Become one of these for me. 
 
 ίΐίαν Ttjv (Tray^ujv. There were some of the 
 
 stakes. 
 
 *77. Exclamations of grief or surprise aie commonly pui 
 in the genitive sometimes in the accusative; as, 
 
 'ν•ης μω^ια?. AVhat fully ' 
 
 Ai τον Λόωνιν. Alas ! Adonis ! 
 
 79. The dative is often put absolutely, especially after 
 «LToi, tfuv being understood ; as, 
 
 Των uvruv εξγων sxsmig. Of the same works with them. 
 
 1 * 79 The accusative is often put absolutely, χατα being 
 .mderstood ; as, 
 
 ΤΙατζίδα 'Γωμουο?. By country a Roman. 
 
 ΜαΧα βυμον «χβλωίη. lie was much enraged in hi? 
 
 mind. 
 
 *.S0. The neuter ό often stands absolutely at tlie begin- 
 ning of a clause, with the sense of ^tiod aiiinct ad id, quod^ a3 
 the Laiin qi^od ; as, 
 
GOVERNMENT. 18 
 
 Ό 5' ί,^ηλωοΌί τιμάς. With regard to that, on ac- 
 
 count of which thou enviest 
 us. 
 
 Ο δε (fv igwraf. With respect to the subject 
 
 of your inquiry. 
 
 *81. A participle is used absolutely with a noun or pronoun, 
 most commonly in the genitive, sometimes in the dative, and 
 often in the accusative, especially if it be an impersonal ; in 
 the nominative rarely ; as, 
 
 Εμού Ίταξοντος. While I was present. 
 
 Πα^ιοντί 5*ιαυτω. At the close of the year. 
 
 Λμφω δ' εξομ.$νω. Both sitting. 
 
 Aeov Ιτε^α. When other things agreed. 
 
 *82. Adverbs are joined to substantives, adjectives, verbs, 
 participles, and other adverbs ; as, 
 
 Πολυ^ε ijTTov, Far less indeed. 
 
 Βοτ^υδον Ίτετονται. They fly in swarms. 
 
 *83. Adverbs govern the same case as the adjectives, 
 verbs, &c. whence they are derived ; as, 
 
 A|icjs Xoyou. Worthy of mention. 
 
 Έιταξχουντωζ μοι. Sufficiently for me, 
 
 84. Adverbs of time, place, gi(a)Uity, order, exception, and the 
 like, govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 Έ,γγυς υΧος, Near the sea. 
 
 Π.-ί;α διχΎΐς. Contrary to justice. 
 
 85. Ntj, and αα, govern the accusative ; άμα, and δμου, the 
 dative ; as, 
 
 Μα Λια, By Jupiter. 
 
 Άμα. τω ΰδατι. Together with the water. 
 
 86. Two or more negatives strengthen the negation ; as, 
 
 Ου δυνατόν οΐ/δε-τω'πΌτΗ ουδέν του- It is impossible ever to do any 
 των *^αττειν. of these things. 
 
 *87. But if the two negatives belong to two different 
 verbs, they form an affirmative ; as. 
 
IC OOVERMMEMT. 
 
 Owisv li'riv In nx \trsg-^iro. He promised every thing. 
 
 Ov JuvafAat μη /ϋ^ίμνηααι avrov. 1 cannoi but remember kini. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 83. l^e prejxjsit 10113 αντί, ατβ, ex or :ξ, and cio, govorm 
 the g-eniiive ; εν, and ίυν, the dative ; eij of «f, fuid ανα, the 
 accusative : ai, 
 
 r| ΑτΤίΧί;^. From Attirn. 
 
 K» «K'^. In a ho'ise. 
 
 E;^ ίμί. To inc. 
 
 *9<). Ill i}ie L.nie and Doric poiM.-, ανα .-«ometimes govern• 
 a dative cuoc, denotini; rkvation or upon ; as, 
 
 Xjjiiryj ανα ίκτ,ί-τϊ^;. Upon a golden sceptre. 
 
 X^.'ifaij c'.v' Ίίττη;. Upon golden horses. 
 
 *90. The par'iiclc i; is often put ^viιh the accusative, 
 generally with living objocls, very seldom with iiiaiiimat• 
 things, the prcpo-siiion iij being understood ; as, 
 
 Ώί τον ,βαβΊλβα. To the king. 
 
 9i. Δία and ίτ5; govern the genitive or accusative ; £ψ«?<, 
 ετι, Tc?!, and oirii, the genitive, dative, or accusative ; au, 
 
 Δια ίΤτοματο?, or οια ΰΐιμσ.. In the mouth. 
 
 Eir» ίρονου. Upon a throne. 
 
 Eiri i^ovQ'ji. Uj)on thrones. 
 
 ϋφ' icfTOj. Upon horseback. 
 
 92. Kara, from or against, commonly governs the genitive ; 
 ai or according (o, the accu.sutive. M^ra, trith, the genitive, or 
 dative ; to or i^/if/•, the accu.sative. Πα^α and «r^op, /row, the 
 genitive ; a( or w/M, the dative ; /o, UsiJe, or againit, ih« 
 accusative : as, 
 
 Kara Tir^ijv. From the rocks. 
 
 Κότα (5•.ναμ»ν. According to my power. 
 
 Mora φίλων. With friends. 
 
 ΙΙα^α xw^iov. From the Lord. 
 
 Π^ί ^"υμναοΊίν. To school. 
 
 *93. Prepositions are often used as adv<-ihs, without a ca*« ; 
 oepecially sv in the Ionic, and v^q( i^ iU>; Attic dialect • ai, 
 
GOVERNMENT. \f 
 
 Εν <5s Aetf/Sious iiXf. Among others, he made pii- 
 
 soners of the Lesbians. 
 Ιϊξος Ss xat ou ϋιχα(ον. Besides, it is also unjust. 
 
 *94. In Ionic writers, prepositions are often put twice ;■ 
 once without a case adverbially, and again with a case or in, 
 tomposition with a verb ; as, 
 
 Ev Ss xat fv Msfj^t. At the same time in Memphie 
 
 also. 
 Av' i' 05υ(ίενς avufraro. Up arose Ulysses. 
 
 *95. Prepositions are often put after the case they goVim, 
 particularly in Ionic and Doric writers, and in the Atti« 
 poets ; but in the Attic prose Λvriters, only ιτεξί with the 
 g-enitive ; as, 
 
 JI aXis η ε-ϊτι ^η?. Either upon sea or upon lan4^ 
 
 96. A preposition often governs the same case, in conapor 
 Rlion, that it does Λvi^hout it ; as, 
 
 Ατψης ξχχυλινίέται. He is tossed from his chariot. 
 
 *97. Prepositions, in composition, have in general thek 
 original signification. The compounds of αντί, however, hare 
 
 mostly the signification of against ; those of ανα, ίο ascend, atwi 
 those of χατα, (ο descend : us, ' 
 
 Αντιταττειν. To array against. 
 
 AvTiXfyeiv. To contradict. 
 
 Ανάβαιναν. To ascend. 
 
 Ιίαταβαΐν -iv. To descend, 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 98. The conjunctiong χαι, τε, δε, άλλα, (;«*ν, ourg, and the 
 like, will have the same ca-se ; and, commonly, the same 
 mood and tenee after them, that goes before them ; as, 
 
 Παμιτολλου όχλου ovros, χαι {Αη The multitude being very 
 f^cvTwv CI φαχωΛ. great, and they having 
 
 nothing to eat. 
 'Ew^xa χαι μίμ.αξτν^)\α. I have seen and borne wit- 
 
 nesi. 
 
 99. Av, 2av, ίΐτειίαν, jvo, οφζα, Ό<τίως, όταν, Jiforav, \a.v, xiv, and 
 •jf , are, for the most part, joined with the subjuagiivfe mood ; 
 
 ftS, 
 
 B2 
 
li COVERNMKNT. 
 
 Ίνα yvu«. That yc may know. 
 
 Kciv «jxeivov α^ωνιίωμαι. Though I should fight better. 
 
 100. Av, χάν, ami xc"v, are often used to glre a 
 
 Bubjunctive or optative meaning to the other mood.s ; ns, 
 
 Av xo» 9υγχανιι βα^ιλενς ων. Although he Avere a kijig. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Λ verb ag-rees tcith its nominative in number and person. 
 
 1. I AM ΛνϊΠϊηρ-, thoii writest, he 
 honours, ye two j;end. they two 
 say, we strike, yecive, they briiig•, 
 he wonders, we hear, ihou sufler- 
 est, ye two hinder, they two phni- 
 der, they rejoice. 
 
 2. I M-as digging•, thou Avast 
 laughing, he was hoping, Ave were 
 (ringing, they were huilding, ye 
 Avere seeing, they two were weep- 
 ing, I Avas conjecturing, ye two 
 were finding, .he Avas corning, they 
 v/ere taking awaj', thou wast car- 
 lying out, I was celebrating a fes- 
 tival, they were pushing. 
 
 3. Ye two shall sow. I shall 
 uuurish, they shall nm, he shall 
 breathe, thou shalt break; we shall 
 cut, I shall kindle, they two shall 
 praise, ye shall suffice, they shall 
 neglect, he shall cause to wander, 
 they shall sail, I shall accomplish, 
 ihou shall live, we shall swirn, ye 
 fchall tremble, they two shall cry 
 aloud, it shall*^'t, ye shall bum, 
 thou sha^t spin, we shall bind. 
 
 Εόελω, 7fαφω^ «"'Wj 
 
 ίωμ-ί, φ3Ρ£ο, όαυμαι^ω, ακούω, 
 ι:αΰ•χ^, κωλύω, ά^•τα(^ω, 
 χαι^ω. 
 
 Ο^υο'β'ω, ^ίλαω, ελιτι- 
 ξω, αοω, οικοοομίω, ό?αω, 
 δο.χξυι>), ειχβ^ω, εύρκίχω, 
 ίκο.νω, αφαίξίω, εκφέρω, ίο^ 
 Ttt^oj, ωέεω. 
 
 Στείλω, τ^εφω," τ^εχω, 
 *νεω, o.yu, τέμνω, cvcw, 
 β(νεω, ο,ξχεω, vuCt(x^w, 
 ΊτΧαξ^^, *λεω, avj-w, ^c/w, 
 νεω, τ-ρω, κ^αξω, ά^μο^ω, 
 καίω, νεω, δεω. 
 
20 
 
 GRELE EXERCISEJS. 
 
 4. Thou wilt honour, they will 
 phow, it will burn, we will hide, 
 t.hey will dig•, ye two will leave, he 
 will run, they two will fold, they 
 Λπΐΐ eat, I Λ\'ϋ1 cause to cease, thou 
 wilt owe, Λνβ will seize, they will 
 do, ye will say. 
 
 5. I feared, they taught, he pro• 
 phesied, ye two turned, he show- 
 ed, they gave, I brought, ye pol- 
 luted, they two sent, we remained, 
 he judged, I conjectured, ye built, 
 they placed, he assigned, we sig- 
 nified, it broke, ye two permitted, 
 I entertained, ho consumed, I 
 troubleil, we encamped, they were 
 unfortunate, we were well pleased, 
 thou wast offended, he condemned. 
 
 6. I did run, they two did strike, 
 he did come, ye did receive, they 
 did learn, ho did cause to cease, 
 we did injure, they died, ye two 
 ilid give, he did see, I did cast, 
 they two did bury, thou didst say, 
 we did flee, he did eat, ye two did 
 fold, they did show. 
 
 7. Ye have laboured, they have 
 ktkon, I have guarded, thou hast 
 ^ignifitxl, he has sworn fal.-^ely, ye 
 two have seen, thou hast got, ye 
 two have honoured, Λνο have 
 ?poken, thou hast shown, I have 
 feart»!. 
 
 8. He had struck, ye two h;^^ 
 composeti, we had known, ihey 
 hud overcome, they two had wril- 
 ien, I had taken. 
 
 
 rvjui, ς-ΡΕίτω, φαιν6^', 6>ύ'^μι, 
 φ£^ω, μια»νω, τιμβ-ω, μίν^•, 
 χρινω, αχαζω, οιχούοα•*•, 
 ΐίΤτημι, vίμw,C'r,μαιvl>;,α7i.', 
 £αω, ftfTiaw, avaXtffxw, ί.«- 
 
 T\j-/Bu, i-jaPiO'TiUJ, u„Ca»ii- 
 T»w, χαΓαϋΐαίτα^'. 
 
 Τ«χ'*•, Γν«τ:,;, ί^χρμ«;, 
 λααρανω, ^.oviavj,', la.i•, 
 SXa-KTU, aToJvTiffxi.', otOu- 
 
 φξαξω, φε-^γω, r^w^w, τλί- 
 
 JTovi'jj, αΙ»ίω, ς5^λα<Γ<'α*5 
 ίτίμαιν*), irioPXfi»••, ifOi«», 
 
 \ω, QelUUi. 
 
 
 '>". 
 
 MIDDLE, 
 
 1. 'riiou nppcarest, he turns 
 himself, we cease, ye contend lo- 
 jretber, they fear, ί go, they two 
 bihie, )■* two taatc, wc an<wcr. 
 
 Φαίνω, r^irw, «aiu, 
 ανιθ•ί•ΐ)μι, f^u, a-Tw^vw. 
 
GREEK EXEUCISES. 
 
 21 
 
 2. I Λνα3 enduring•, ye two were 
 hurtina; yourselves, he was accus- 
 ing•, thou Λ\\ΐ3ΐ obeying, ye were 
 *;tanding, they were on their guard, 
 wc were departing, ye vrere deli- 
 berating. 
 
 3. He shall receive, thou shall 
 mourn, ye sluiU reverence, they 
 i?hall touch, I .«hall lie down, we 
 shall prepare ourselves, thou shall 
 endure. 
 
 4. Ye two ^\■ill turn yourielvep, 
 I will drink, they will strike theni- 
 selve.s, he will hurl himself. 
 
 5. They desired, he hung him- 
 self, ye mourned, Λνβ bathed, I 
 used, they consulted together, I 
 began, they inspected the entrails, 
 he borrowed, ye two remembered, 
 they two clothed themselves. 
 
 6. We tv.'O did place ourselves, 
 ye two did fight together, I did 
 give, ye were. 
 
 7. I have confided, we have 
 escaped, ye have appeared, they 
 have sown, thou hast lain con- 
 cealed, he has suff"ered, the}' have 
 Btruck themselves, I have hurt ni}•- 
 self 
 
 8. Fie had heard, I had come, 
 they had left, we had said, ye had 
 cried aloud. 
 
 φω, Tetdcj, ί(ίϊ•η_αι, φυ>Λ(ί- 
 Cu, wsaWu.ffCu, φ?αι?ω. 
 
 Λίχβμαι, χοττω, εντζί- 
 τίω, άττω, xsijxat, ι:αρα^- 
 
 βΧο•.-τ<ΐω, 
 
 Οξίγω, wea.'yyru, χοττω, 
 
 μι, ^Ίνο,ααι. 
 
 ΙΙε(/)ω, φε•ογω, φαίνω, 
 fftrsi^oi, λανθάνω, •ταίΤ'χω, 
 τυ•π••τω, /3Xa5i7w. 
 
 Ακούω, £^ομα(, Xsierw, 
 Χεγω, χξαζω. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 1. They are named, he is main- 
 tained, we are pleased, they two 
 are hindered, thoiFfPrl admired, I 
 am called. 
 
 2. Tliey were assembled, I was 
 compelled, ke was struck, wj were 
 driven, ye two were opposed, they 
 were drawn up. 
 
 Ονομάζω, c^fqjw, £υφ^€ϋ• 
 νω, xuX'uw, όα-^μκι^ω, χα- 
 λίω. 
 
 Συνα^είΡω, αναγχαζα, 
 
 tfuvTaTTW. 
 
i2 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3. I .^hall bo reveroncetl, it shall 
 loosed, they shall be praised, 
 
 .ju shall be loved, he shall be 
 •nt, .we shall• be honoured, it shall 
 ; completed, they shall be found, 
 e shall be punished. 
 
 4. Ye will be hurt, he will be 
 •eaten, we will be delivered, thou 
 "ill be turned. 
 
 5. I was blinded, he was lulled 
 to sleep, they were found, we were 
 persuaded, ye two were sent, it 
 was said, they were strengthened, 
 tiicy two were loved, thou wast 
 deliditod. 
 
 6. 1 was glad, ho was corrupt- 
 ed, they were struck with fear, we 
 were sent, ye wvre dismissed, they 
 two were buried. 
 
 7. I have been persuaded, it has 
 been written, thou hast been main- 
 tained, 3-e two have been struck, 
 I possess, it has been decreed, we 
 have been cast out, it has been 
 consulted, he has been bruised. 
 
 8. He had been prepareil, it had 
 been done, they had been judg■^d, 
 he had been honoiued, 1 was dis- 
 turbed, he was buried. 
 
 9. He shall roumin enrolled, it 
 will be mixed, thou shall possess, 
 it shall instiintly be done, they shall 
 instantly be biuietl. 
 
 AtiiofMu, λυω, αινίω, φι- 
 λεω, (Ττίλλω, τιω, τελβω, 
 ίίξΐίχω, χολαζω. 
 
 Β>.αττω, «■ληβ'ο'ω, οταλ- 
 Xatfrfcj, τξί'ζω. 
 
 Τυφλοω, κοιμαω, εύ^ιβ*. 
 χω, ΐΓϊ'ιίω, (Ττίλλω, Χεγω, 
 ^uvvyixi, φιλϊω, >;ύω. 
 
 ΧαίΡω, ίιαφίίΐ^ω, εχ- 
 ifXritfiTc,;, ίτελλω, αίΓολ-" 
 Xaffdu, ίατς-ω. 
 
 ITsiicj, γξαζ:ω, τξεφω, 
 τυΐΓτω, χταο,ααι, χυ^οω, 
 avo^hiTTU, /3ουλ?υω, τζι- 
 
 Τίαξα'ίχίυαξω, τ^αο'ο'ω, 4 
 χ^ινω, τιμάω, ταζαϋ^^ 
 
 Υ.γγζσζι>3., μι^'νυμι, xra.• 
 
 PKOMISCLOrS K.\A3IPLE9. 
 
 1. We convict, let him remain, I 
 was sufFerinir, about to put to death, 
 he should have been found, tht>y 
 made an incur.-ion, having left, to be 
 about to announce, thou hasl pro- 
 tected and dost still protect, let 
 mc see, thou mi^^'est become, they 
 might wage war, I will get myself 
 instructed, having ])ersuade(l, to 
 call out, ye had sold, wc may guard. 
 
 Ελε^'χω, μένω, «σ,α-χω, 
 ΟίτοχΓϊινω, εύίΐίχω,* ti<f- 
 ΐδαλλω," Χίιπω," αγγεΧΚυ, 
 αμφ"ί€οΛω, ειίω,*"" ^ινο,ααι, 
 τολΕμεω, όιοαίχω,™ ιτίΐίω, 
 αναχροξω, ιτιτ^αίχω, <pj- 
 λοο'σ'ω. 
 
ϋκεεκ exerciser. 
 
 23 
 
 2. Thou hast heard, having said, 
 about to say, they had learned, he 
 was teaching•, he may be saved, I 
 wrote, I have Avritten, the plaintiff, 
 the defendant, they two may wish, 
 we liave admired and do still ad- 
 mire, to be about to announce, he 
 may send, having been accustom- 
 ed, we left, I would be ashamed, 
 begone ye, let us fight, may they 
 perish. 
 
 3. Thou shouldest have distin- 
 guished, the}' may have been slan- 
 dered, let us save ourselves, to have 
 announced, they should choose, 
 being about to find, I might have 
 been remembered, he shall in- 
 standy be punished, let them be 
 cast away, to have sinned, they 
 h'ul been maintained, they were 
 contented, he Λνϋΐ be taken, about 
 to descend, they were broken, to 
 have been hiu't, they should choose, 
 having perceived, he Avent up. they 
 were advancing. 
 
 4. To conquer, they were rush- 
 ing, loving, do thou speak out, I 
 sliould hunt, they were seen, we 
 may acquire, being about to ac- 
 cuse, they were praising, thou 
 mayest croAvn, the}' grve, think 
 yourself deserving, having been 
 consecrated, thou mayest be op- 
 posed, they would fill, let him re- 
 store, they have suffered a loss. 
 
 5. He fives, they were rich, ye 
 .«ail awa}', they dismissed, he might 
 say. they knovv', ye two blame, do 
 ihou let me go, it was broken open, 
 let us attack, he would be able, 
 fhey may know, do thou buy, to 
 be filled, to gird themselves, we 
 would yield, he points out thou 
 hast placed, we have stood. 
 
 Αχουω, Xsyij, Xsj^u, 
 μαν6α.νω, otdarfxcj, ίω^ω, 
 γξαφω, γξαφω, Ό όιωχω,Β ό 
 φ€υγω,^ /:?ουλομαι, όαυμα- 
 
 ξω, λειτω, αίίίχυνομαι, 
 αταλλαιίίω,'" μαχομα»,* 
 
 <ίωζω, αγγεΧΚω,^ αιξΒω, 
 εύ^κΐκω, μνσΜ, ιτληοΌ'ω, 
 wffoi^iiTTU, αμα^τανω,, τξί• 
 φι;, apxsij, αΧκίχω, χατα- 
 /Ηκινω, ^ησ'ο'ω, β'Κα.ΐίτω, 
 uifisu, αΐ(!βανομαι,° αναβαι- 
 vu,^ εξελαυνω. 
 
 ISixau, ό^,ααω, αγα<χαω, 
 χαταυδαω, 6'ηξαω, ό^αω, 
 κταομαί, εγχαΧε•^, αινεαϊ, 
 
 ξο^}, εναν-ιοω, τληροω, 
 αιτοδιδωμι, ^ημιοω. 
 
 ZaWjffXovTSijj αιτοτλεω, 
 ας/ΐνιμι, φημι, ιίημι, αιηα- 
 ομαι, μείιημι,® αναξ^τ,γνι- 
 μι, ετιτιίημι,'" ίυναμσι, 
 ειτκίταμ,αι,.ιτξιαμαι, εμτι*- 
 λ»;μ», ^ωννυω,•" υ^ιημι," 
 ενιδειχνυμ,ι, τιόημ», Ία-ημι. 
 
34 
 
 CREEK EXLRCISCe. 
 
 β. Xerxes was fleparlinrr, Xe- Βερξγ,ς arf^yj^^t'^, £i- 
 
 nias and Pasioh have left us, Ilium νιας xut IlaCiwv avoXn- 
 
 was taken, Joseph was greatly -τω,"' IXiwv aXjcxw,* Ιωδ'ηο 
 
 moved and wept, let the men go^ •rafa.dS'J' xai ν^^ι•^,^ ανη^ 
 
 Philip had COriquered, Mucius co^euuj,'" «tiXjTc&i νιχαω, 
 
 confessed who he was. Darius was Mojxioj ομολοχε^ ίς κις 
 
 besieging, the king was sick, hear ίίμι, Aapfiog co>jo^xcw, βα^ 
 
 mc my friends. 
 
 7. And God said, Let there be 
 light ; Take, cat, this is my body ; 
 and Virtue having interrupted her, 
 said ; be thou Avell assured that 
 ι hey have escaped ; I .should be 
 reluctant and afraid ; Cyrus was 
 in grout perplexity. 
 
 Και fci; '' Θεο5 ^ινομα»' 
 φωί, λα.α/3ανω' φαχυ οί- 
 τος Είμι δ fixeg (ί•^μα, χαι ό 
 Α^ίτη υτολαμ,βανοά'^ stu;, 
 Γ»; κΓημί ότι a-sO^iivyw, ex- 
 νΣω αν χαι φοβίω,"* « οί 
 Κυ^ο5 αιτο^εω. ^ 
 
 8. Scribebam, noverunt, pugnabo, timorc,•" sede, amavoram, 
 percutietur, cicidere, currebam, venisti, accipiat, puguiurem^, 
 niagnificetur, absurnptus erat, iiritur, exisliuiabat, cecinere, 
 revocabo, lecti sunt, convocantur, potcrii, veniamus, \Tvere, 
 parantur, fugiebant, ceperunt. 
 
 9. (irieci pervenenuit, inilites profecti stmt, castra locan- 
 tur, lex erit, nonnulli aiunt, Ari.stides interrogabat, Medea 
 abut, currus ferebantur, hostes aderant, avis avolat. majorbs 
 videntur, filius etabat, corona abjicitur, voo nilimiiii, abcal 
 pater. • 
 
 CHAP. 11. 
 
 .Λ /fjeciives, adjective pronouns and pariicijiks, agree u-ith ihcir 
 respective substantives^ in gentler ^ number, and case. 
 
 1 NARROW roads, cities ΟΤ'Τ- 
 tiinied, very high mountains, these 
 uationR. a handsome youth, pood 
 »nen, of flyiag Foldiers, Ο unfor- 
 lunatc AdoiiLs ! of ewift steed-^^, to 
 inj»ole.nt men, yc injured children, 
 i\\\ those tilings, whatever bcne- 
 
 IrrJog Όδος, coXij ovaC- 
 
 cog ΐ6νος, νεανιας xoXcj,* 
 α'.ηξ a^aucc," φίυ^ων (ίτζα- . 
 TiijD;?:, AOijvig iuiflOracc, 
 uxvro-jg ΙττοίΓ, avc'^c'-Tci 
 ίιβ^ιαττ,;, αϋίχον'μίνοί: «-fx- 
 vcv, sxsivcc ras, 1^τ>ς ivfj- 
 
GRKEK ExrncisEs. 
 
 25 
 
 2. Martial songs, tlie dark night, 
 nappier men, sweet solitude, two 
 morose men, the twelfth woman, 
 the tenth hour, to a greater man, 
 of a laughing woman, to a right 
 hand, swift ships, to us two still 
 αΐΐλ'β, of the bra\'est soldiers, two 
 most graceful virgins. 
 
 3. Common temples, ΐΛνον/οπΙιν 
 men, of a holy dav, an useful man, 
 to two black eyes, of anjionourable 
 fortune, every way, true horns, to 
 a tender heart, more persuasive 
 r.rgumcnts, they two being young, 
 to you being wise, unfading• thanks, 
 a more ample way. ■*• 
 
 4. Of a golden sΛvord, a double 
 cottage, to another ship, of a great- 
 er father, to illiberal men, two 
 beautiful women, Ο immortal vir- 
 tue ! the easiest way, of senseless 
 animals, with \vingect words, ruin- 
 ous schemes, mglorious securitj'. 
 
 5. IF Thou wilt be a very happy- 
 man ; good men profit, but bad 
 men hurt ; the Thebans being per- 
 suaded, put them, to flight; the 
 soldiers raising a shout, cheerfully 
 ftjilowed ; all having laughed, took 
 courage ; in a short time all were 
 gone. 
 
 6. The boat was already crowd- 
 ctl ; they will be laughed at ; the 
 ranks lately raised were moving 
 on ; an uncTisciphned tongue is a 
 most bi-.neuil pest ; men, when 
 treated unjustly, are more angry 
 liian when compelled by force. 
 
 7. Capita multa, rectre rationi, humanam speciem, maximas 
 parti, cranium virile, rex potentissimus, pars decima, milites 
 redeuntes, acies insfructa, urbs opulenta et magna, insidiai 
 laanifestie, hortus amcenus et maximus, mancipia dirept», 
 amieos fidelee, venientes discipuli, cogitantes poetae. 
 
 ΑξΎΪίος «^μα, νυζ μίλα^ ,' 
 ίοδαιμ-ων ανηρ, rjS-jg ε^η,αια, 
 iuCxoXog ανΰζωτος, δωδίχα.- 
 7ος γυνγ], δίχατας ύξα, μέ- 
 γας ανηρ, yeXawv ^υνη, δί- 
 ξιος χει^, οξύς νανς, εγω ετ» 
 ζαων, αγαύος οΊ-^ατιωτ/^, 
 "χ^ΆΡΐίΐς -ζαξύίνος. 
 
 Ίεξον 'Μΐνοζ,•χξτ,<ϊτος ανη^, 
 7jix£pa άγιος, χ^ησ'το^ ανη^,» 
 όμμα μεΧας, τύχη τιμΎίεις, 
 'ίτας 'οδ«ς,'^ χεξας αληίηδ•, 
 χεαξ τζξψ, iritfTixos Xoyoj, 
 νέος ων αυτό?, tfu ων σΌφοί, 
 χα^!5 αγ•ήξως, αιτλους Ιδοζ. 
 
 X^uCeoc: μάχαιρα, (5ι*λους 
 χκλυ?η, \αυς aXXoc:, ητατ-ηζ 
 μέγας, ανεΧευ6εξος ανί^ω- 
 •sOff, καλοί γυντη, αθάνατος 
 ϋίξΐτ-η, ^aoios Όδος, αφξων 
 ζωον, νττεξοεις ε'κ'ος, οΧοος 
 /?ουλη, αίφαλεια «(Jo^oj. 
 
 Ευδαίμων ανόξω'Ζΰς ειμί 
 ο αγαθός ωφελεω ό δε χα.χος 
 /3λο"7Ττω, Θ-η-αιος •!;ει-ΐ6εις 
 τξειτω,^ ο ^τξατιωτης αλα- 
 λαι^ων είΓομ.αι νξοθνμος,ιίας 
 γε\α<ίας ευθυμεω, βξο.-χ^ς 
 χ^ονο£^ crag αίταλλαο'Ο'ω."' 
 
 Ήδΐ] ίτληρηί ειμι το ιτο^ί- 
 μειον, χαταγεΧαύτος ειμι, 
 νέον (ίυνοξίνομενος κινυμι™ 
 ταζις, α'λο\αΰτος γ\ω<{<ία. 
 ειμι aid -χ^ξης voCog, αδικούμε. 
 νος α-νύξωνος μάλλον opy»- 
 ^ομα» η βιαζομ.ενος. 
 
 C 
 
Μ 
 
 cnr.EK KXERCISE!». 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Λ verb signifying actively governs the accnsalive 
 1. Some mdeed buyin preference, 
 
 tfwse corselets trhich are variegated, 
 and those which are overlaid with 
 gold. 
 
 2. Fear the Deity, honour your 
 parents^ reverence your friends. 
 
 3. Two certain causes Bccm to 
 <arc given birth to poetry. 
 
 4. Ο wretched creature, vj/iat 
 good thing have you in you^ jios- 
 Kcssion, or what pleasure do you 
 know ? 
 
 5. Ifate^hose that fatter as tho.^e 
 that deceive ; for both, when trust- 
 ed, injure those who trust them. 
 
 6. Do you not know, that the 
 unjust sL•U not infierit the hing- 
 dom ? 
 
 7. For cither time consumes or 
 di.sease impairs beatify. 
 
 8. The poets know that this is 
 eo, and the difference. 
 
 9. For ye have the poor alway.s, 
 but ye have not me always. 
 
 10. I did one work, and ye all 
 ■WOuder. 
 
 11. Ti For it has not s.'tcrs by 
 (lie smith, nor arms by the shoe- 
 maker. 
 
 12. They all had brazen helmets 
 and purple tunics, and greaves, and 
 their s/iields ic ell polished. 
 
 13. And thinkest thou this, Ο 
 man, ύ\Ά\. judgest them who do sucli 
 things, and dost the samo, that 
 tiiou shall escape the judgmeiU of 
 tiod? 
 
 Evioi μίντο) τοιχιλο^ xoi 
 
 ωνίομαι. 
 
 Ό μίν ίίο? 9oSiij,"> i (5-: 
 ^ov;us ί-ίμαω, » Of φι>.»$ 
 αιίχννβμ«ι. 
 
 fi τλν,μ^ν Tij: (fj α^αίοί 
 ίχω η Tig jjiuc"' siJtu ;"»'' 
 
 crfp ό ί^ατα.τσω, αμ.^οτΒΡης 
 γα.ζ i:i3'TfjojP^ ό ntfriuojff 
 auixsij. 
 
 II ουχ EiOfoi,'""' in aJixoff 
 ,βαίιλίια ου xλη|ovcμ5iJ ; 
 
 Κάλλος Μ-ίν j«» r; XJovci 
 ava>.i3'xw^ τ, νοίοίτμαξ'αινω.'' 
 
 'Ort oUT»f oCtwj fX". '<ot* 
 ό Jiciipofrt ι-ί^ίμι ό τοιητηί:. 
 
 Ό ίΓ7ωχοί ^rt^ cavTcri 
 εχο), εχο) us i• cavrcTS εχυ. 
 
 Έι; f ΡΛ ον β•6ΐεά),' kai ιτα^ 
 6α.νμαζω. 
 
 Οιδί γαζ 0'Τ&5τ;μα εχ'^ 
 ϋια ό χαλχευ/,' ouos «■'■λα 
 ίια ό (fx\jrivs.' 
 
 Κχω ό= ίτας y.ξcι.\•oc χαλ- 
 χεοί, χαι χκων φοινίχο.?, χαι 
 χντ,μι;, χαι Ι affrif εχχεχα- 
 όα^μενοίΤ. 
 
 Λοχι^ομαι 6> ο^τοζ, u α»- 
 ίξ^τος, ό χπνωΒ ό J Toieuroi; 
 r.»u.S€!ji,Z χαι «oifuP awrcr, 
 in (Ty ii^sy^ u™ 4 χριμα i 
 βίοί ; 
 
CREBK EXERCISES. 
 
 at 
 
 14. ITippocrati^ having• cured 
 many discuses, fell sick ami died ; 
 the Chaldeans foretold the deaths 
 of man}', thaii fate took them off 
 also ; Alexander, and Pompey, and 
 Caius Ciesar, having entirely de^ 
 strayed lohole cities so often, and 
 having cut off many myriads of horse 
 and foot in battle, at last departed 
 from life themselves. 
 
 ιαομαι,* νοοΉω,-^ο αϊο5νη(Γ- 
 χω,*' ό Χαλδαιο^ *ολυ5 6α- 
 νατος νξοα,γοξενω,^ είτα χ«ι 
 αυτός ο «Triir^wfASvev χατα- 
 λαμβανω." ΑΧΒζανδξαζ^χαι 
 Τίομ.'ΚΥίίος, καί Ταίος Κ«ί- 
 ααξ, ίΧος «Όλΐ5 α^ην το- 
 ΰα\ινα\ΐζ αναίξίω,^ χα» ίν 
 ιταξαταζίς ιτοΧνς μυξίας Jcr- 
 <!(ίυξ και <:ίΐζος καταχίΜΤτω," 
 χαι αυτοί crori ίξε^χομ»»' 
 
 ό /3l0ff. S 
 
 15. Jusserunt eos, habebunt ciu-rus, mitlebant nuncios, 
 dicens hffic, adduxisse obsides, socios metuere, reliquerat nul- 
 lum, vera locutus, eosdem honoravisti, quos tu vides, bene- 
 volentiam habe, ndens nlium, dimiltes nuncios, mutaviese 
 habitus. 
 
 
 The prepositions αντί, α^το, εκ or εξ, and ιτξος, govern the genitive ; 
 εν, and rfuv, the dative ; εις or ες, and ανα, the accusative. --^Jn 
 the- Ionic ayid Doric poets, ανα is joined with a dative. , • * 
 
 1. He shall reign instead of him. 
 
 2. We ought to choose glory 
 before ricjies, 
 
 3. The, king alone is worth ten 
 thousand inen. 
 
 4. It is a fine thing to receive 
 immortal glory, in exchange /or a 
 ■mortal' body. 
 
 5. I say that they are equally 
 du=ilant/7-om the centre. 
 
 6. To appoint magistrates by 
 ihe bean. 
 
 7. I did proceed, and I am come 
 from God; for I have not come 
 from myself but he sent me. 
 
 ΒαβΊλευω ανη ixfivof. 
 ^ AvTi χ^ημα αί^ίω""^ ,5. 
 (5οξα χ^η. 
 
 Αντί μύριοι ϋ<Γξατ»>^•ηζ 
 5ΐμί βαϋχΚίνς. ^ • 
 
 Καλο^, αντί όνητοί ίΤώμβ, 
 αόανα,τος ^οξα αντιχαταλ- 
 λασ'ίϊ'ω.'»^'' 
 
 β χεντ^ον. ^ 
 
 Α^χω* awo ό χναμο^ χα- 
 ίισ'τημιίψ 
 
 Ε/ω εχ ί Θγο5 εξε^ομαι 
 χαι f/xcj• ου ya^ α-πΌ εμαντον 
 εύχομαι, άλλα εκείνος εχ« 
 ccjrotfTEXXw, 
 
2S 
 
 cnKKK KXKRcisKS. 
 
 8. Nij^ht uUervemd, and on the 
 next day we came to the assembly. 
 
 9. I (lid cntch in the cave, ha\ intj 
 returned from the feeding of my 
 cattlo, rnany fellow.-t. 
 
 10. For the isaiie of thU was in 
 the Dciltj, not in me. 
 
 11. Pleasure is rather in rest, 
 than in motion. 
 
 12. lie was a manolaycx /rovt 
 tht beginning, and lie ha.s not stood 
 in the truth; becaude the truih i.s 
 Jiot in him. 
 
 13. ^\'hon he went to the Ver- 
 sions. 
 
 14. The just n;an tshall li\'« by 
 faifh. 
 
 15. And some were Grecian.^, 
 of those who went up, that they 
 n.igiil wur-iliij) in tkcfcstiuul. 
 
 16. 1Γ It contribufea^mufR 
 
 1 . . ' 
 
 \.i'7i-^fH)^ ίΐ; ίχχκγ,'-ίια. 
 
 KaTaXe:p.?avij 5v ό αν- 
 ^Γξo'J, airo ό vo/ivj αναίτξί- 
 φ:,},^ -rroKug ης. 
 
 1> ya^ ^io^ ό οίτο; 
 τίλος £ιμι, cjjc εν ίγω, 
 
 'lli'jovr, μάλλον ίν γ,';μ.ιι 
 Γίμι, τ, cv χ(ντ,(ΐΊί. ^ . 
 
 Exsivos αν^ρ^τοχ-ονί); ίίμι 
 
 α-το αξ-χΎ\, χαι ev ό αλν;^;ΐα 
 
 ο^-χ^ Ιστημι• όί-ί αλr,c3£ια o'jx 
 
 Erti εν a-jrc?. 
 
 Ore ί\ζ ΓΙ;|(3Ίτ;ί αΓϊΐμ.•.'"" 
 
 *0 Jixaicg ίκ ciiric ^aw."* 
 
 Κιμι (5ί 7ΐί 'Κλλην, εχ ό 
 ctvalftivijj's Ίνα Cr'jO'Atjviij' 
 εν ό ΐο^Γί). 
 
 Μ:/α 5s (Τυμβαλλίο" 
 
 /ο 
 
 /^«> learning to be tempeeifo,#lj.it ό'"^ μανίανού•" ffoj^fovjuj αν- 
 
 they sec the older men al.-o living «rof, ότι χαι ό τρεσ^υντ ό;αο), 
 
 temperately, through every day. avrx. -πας ήμε^α Cij-^ovvj^ 
 
 Jiaycj. 
 
 17. I think it the duty of a rrood Λιχαιοί: τολι-η;? x;ivi.', 
 
 citizen, to choo.-c the safety of af- ό ό τ^α^μα ί^τη^ια, ανη 
 
 fairs, ie/bri" ^race in speaking. 
 
 ό y-.iyiJ χα^'ί» Κ'- 
 
 ^"=''• 
 
 • 18. They foun<l flic loud ihim- 
 dering• son of Saturn iittiny upon 
 the summit oi Garirarus. 
 
 1 9. Having in hi<i hands the fillet 
 of the far-daning Apollo, upon a 
 golden scptre.* 
 
 20. Alii vero, constructo rogo ante tumulos, el eflOs.'=a fovea 
 quadam, adolentquc sumjituosas illas caMia>!, el infiindunt 
 vinuiit^nulsnmqiic in foceas. 
 
 21. Ego'^ineilfcpusieris generis princeps cro, rneumque a me 
 genus incipiet, iQum vero in le dosinet. 
 
 Γ,ό^ΐΛ'χω" (V ευ^υοψ Kco- 
 \ii''>r,S ανα Ι'αξγαξος α.Λ'οζ 
 ήμενο^. • 
 
 Στέμμα τε ν/ω εν ^ε;» 
 
 ανα tfxrjTT^ov. 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 di 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 A»a and ί*5ξ govern ike genitive, or accusative ; αμφι, etf, ififi, 
 cmd ino, ike ge7iilive, dative, or accusative. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 1. To deliberate by night and Σχοίίω Sia νυζ x«i ■%«. 
 
 day. 
 
 2. For us the Deity assumed 
 human nature. 
 
 3. On the third day sitting• upon 
 his chariot, he was prosecutin<j his 
 march. 
 
 4. Begin therefore from small 
 things ; never say of any thing, 
 that I lost it, but that I restored it. 
 
 5. For a good work we stone 
 thee not. 
 
 6. Your for^retfulnogs, about all 
 things, is near ; and the forgetful 
 ncis of all, aboiU you, is near also. 
 
 7. He was always discoursing 
 uhout the affairs of men ; consider- 
 mg what was pious, what impious ; 
 Avhat honourable, what shameful ; 
 what just, what unjust. 
 
 8. Concerning the power of let- 
 lers and syllables, and harmony and 
 rhythm. 
 
 9. Not to be corrupted by riches, 
 by fka&ures. or by fear. 
 
 Δια iyu ανί^ω!Τ0Γ•»}5 • 
 ©ios ίφκίτημι,* 
 
 Ό is r^iTog^ iiri τε • 
 ά^(χα χαότ,μα» ο νοζαα. «"»(- 
 
 Αζ•/ΐ3μ.(^^ τοιχα^ουν α•?» 
 ό μιχ^ο;* μη(5ί•7Γοτε ετι (*η- 
 Jitj ειτω,^ or» ατβλλυμι αν- 
 TOS, αλλΛ OTJ ατίίίίωμι. 
 
 ITs^i χαλο5 ΐζγ<ιν ον >J- 
 
 E/ywff μεν J οΌς, «Ί^ 
 
 AuToj: (5ε ίτε^ι ο «v5p«- 
 iTcioj a5J (ίιαλε^ομαι• Cxo- 
 ιεω, T(g°« «νίΤεβη?, rij αίε. 
 β磕 <Γ)£ χαλοίτ, rtf airf^gog• 
 TiS itxaocr, τ(5 άδικος. 
 
 Πε^» τε ^^'αμμα ίυναμις 
 χαι (ίνλλαβη, χαι αρμονία, 
 xoj ^υήμο?. 
 
 Αναλωτο? iifo χ^ίΐμ«, 
 χαι ί'Το ijJovTj, χαι iir« φο. 
 
 So;, 
 
 DATIVE, 
 
 1 . Until they reduced Thessaly 
 under Philip. 
 
 2^ Dancing to flutes and pipes, 
 and to the so?wi? of ' aH kinds of 
 instruments, 
 
 C2 
 
 λίΤΤνοί ίΤΟΙίί». 
 
 Xofiuw uiro τε αυλβί, χαι 
 
30 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3. Strip ihie man also ; for thou 
 sbult see many, and ridiculous 
 things, Ijing hid under his garment. 
 
 4. In epic poetry then, I, for my 
 part, admire Homer most ; in di- 
 thyramhic verse, Melanippides ; in 
 tragedy^ Sophocles ; in statuary, 
 i^olyclitus ; in painting, Zeuxis. 
 
 5. And the general of the Lord 
 Fay.s to Joshua, loose the shoe olf 
 thy feet, for the place upo7i which 
 thou hast now stood, on it, is holy. 
 
 6. And they were astonished at 
 his doctrine, for he was teaching 
 ihein, as one having power, not as 
 ihc scribes. 
 
 7. They have the horses tied by 
 the feet to the stalls ; and if any 
 one would go against them, it is a 
 labour to loose tiie hor.'ses at night, 
 Λ labour to put on the bit, a labour 
 k) put on the saddle, a labour to 
 put on the coat of mail ; and it is 
 «ntirely impossible, that they hav- 
 ing moiiited on the horses, could 
 Jrivc through (he camp 
 
 AfoSvu^ xou oirof off- 
 τομαί γαξ ToXyj, xai ye• 
 Xoic?, ύτο ό ϊ,αατιον x^jir- 
 
 E-ri μεν τοινυ» ETOfP'-ff 
 ιτοιηίΐί ΌμηΡο$ syuyt μα- 
 λιοΓτα ίαυμα(?α.',^ ίτι 0ί 
 Λιύυοαμζος Μελανιττιόηί 
 ΣΤ» ΰ; 'IVayctOia Σοί;οχ>.ηί, 
 ετι δί Ανΰκιαντοτοι.α ΙΙο- 
 Χοχλει-ος, ετί όε Σο^^αφιο 
 
 Και y.syu ό αξ'χ^ίύτζα. 
 ττ,γος Κχιξιας ιτξος ir,!rcvc,» 
 A'jtj ό ύίΓοϋημα ό roygS a\i,S 
 ό γα-» Toircg tiri Ός νυν ΐα^η. 
 μι, εη αυτορ,ί ίγιοζ ειμί. 
 
 Και εχτληίο'ω^ iri β 
 ΰι5αχη auTocr, ειμί γαξ οι- 
 
 ε^^ω, ονχ wj ό ^^αμμα- 
 νίυς. 
 
 Πούΐι^ωΡ''ε }^•αρ εχω » 
 ΙτίΓοί εαι ό φάτνη• χαι έι 
 τις fffi aorog' ειμί,* ε^ον 
 μεν νΐ'^? λυοϋ'*^ Icrffoc, cA. 
 ^,ν (5s -ζαλινοω, ε^ον os 
 
 fTlCarliJ, e^OV t>: fTliw- 
 
 paxi^ij'" avttoaivcj'P ίί ίτ» 
 iffTog? ίλαυνω^' οια C (τΊ^σ- 
 Toir£(5ov,C Tavra^raffi» αο.»- 
 vaTCC. 
 
 ACCUS.tTIVE, 
 
 1 . For thoy now sui!;i)ccled that 
 lliey were going ai^uinst the king. 
 
 j'tottcwW' yctf r,ur, (^i 
 ,CM(fiXfui ειμί. 
 
 And imuMvliaitily hn was un- Και cui'-jc ov^t αννχ^..'^^ 
 
 ^ble to contain him^-elf, but having κλλ' ureu, Όξω I α\τ>)ξ, io- 
 
 Kiid, I sec the man, he i ashed upon 
 htri. 
 
 'Λ. Cyrus sometimes invited a 
 w Luli; conipj.ny to supper, wiili the 
 w»ptnin. 
 
 μι"'• ίτι at«-05. 
 
 Καλεω δΐ sti ositvov « 
 β ταζία^χοί. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 SI 
 
 4. For he knew that the chief 
 priests had dehvered him through 
 envy. 
 
 δ. They came, not on account of 
 Jesus alone, but that they might 
 also see Lazarus. 
 
 6. But, as I think, you did not 
 come the most bcauliful person, 
 under the earth. 
 
 7. Priam and Panthous and Thy- 
 moctes. 
 
 8. Many of the Jews had come 
 to ΛIartha and Maria. 
 
 9. He al?o goes out to assist, 
 with those thai are about him. 
 
 10. The hunters, those who stu- 
 dy philosophu, the things which 
 belong to war, the occurrences 'at 
 Lampsacus. 
 
 11. The greater number at \ά?•\. 
 '-vere spent by weakness ; for the 
 disorrler first seated in the head, 
 
 Γινω^χω* γαζ ότι δία 
 φθονοί ό Αζχιίζόυς ανηζ 
 
 Ερχομαι,' ου Sict ό Ιη- 
 οΌυί fAovo.c, άλλα ίνα χα» β 
 
 Αλλα ουχί και Wo ysa, 
 ως οιμαι, χαλο5 $ξ-χ_ομσΑ. 
 
 Όρ', δί αμφ» Π^ιαμ,οί χλι 
 
 Πανίοο^ Υΐδΐ Θυμοί rr/C. 
 
 Πολυ^ SX ο Ιουδαης α^/}- 
 \ι.αλ ττζο; όΡ"'» τεξί Μαξία^ 
 και Μαξία. 
 
 Εκ§ο•/)(3?ω χα» avTcf, ί'Λ 
 ό ΤίΡΐ auro^. 
 
 'Ο νίξΐ ο όΥΙξΛ, ό <ί*ί 
 φιλο3Ό>ρ<α, ό αμφι ό ίΓ9>^- 
 [χος, ύ 'Τί'ίί'ΐ Λαμψαχο^. 
 
 Ό ιτο\υς ύίίΐείον ώ;α β 
 αίόενίΐα διaφόί^»'Ji''^ (3if|- 
 ειμι'"*^ ^ α» ΰια νας ό (ίωμα,δ 
 
 iaavine begun from above, went avojJev ««'χομαι,* ό"^ ίν 
 Lhroughout the whole body. 
 
 12. *! Tirnon shp.ll do no such 
 ihui'^^aboHt you any more, for the 
 f^pade has compleiely taught him, 
 t.^at he ought to choose you to 
 };itnself, before poverty. 
 
 13. But toll thou me, how the 
 tilings upon earth are, and what 
 tii'^v do in the city. 
 
 14. And the others who fought 
 '«viih Darius against the Scythians ; 
 because the whole Persian army 
 was in their poxoer, to destroy, or to 
 tave it. 
 
 χίφαλη -Γ^ωτον ιϋίυωΡ'? x*- 
 χοί. 
 
 0\ίδΐΐζ STt τοιούτος i Τι- 
 μών ε^^α^ομαι τίξι <Τυ,• 
 ■τανυ γαξ υντος a όιχίλ/.α 
 irai'>a^W/Sw, ug χ^η^ σ», 
 αντί ό 'Τ'ίνια, ■η'^οαι^εω. 
 
 Ατα.ρ ίτω iyu, νως ό 
 its? ysuS εγω, χαι rtg 
 TTOI.-W iv ό "Τολι^. 
 
 Και ό • <ίύ(ίτί>ατενω"^^ 
 ΛαξΒίος^ άλλο? ετι lruir,<; =» 
 ί<ΓΊ οϋτοζ^ ό πας Πε^- 
 
 ΟΊκο? ΰτΡατια. γίνομαι,'' όιαφ- 
 Λίιρω,•' και τε^ιιτοιεΜ,* 
 
 Ιδ. Si vero nonnunquarn invitatus ad cwnam vellet Acce- 
 dere, quod operosissimum est plurimis, cavere scilicet, ne 8Θ 
 repleant ultra satietatem, hoc perquam facile cavebat. ^ 
 
32 
 
 GREEK KXERCIS£>. 
 
 16. Sic enim vivis, quo pacto quivis sernis sui dentin* 
 \ictitans, non manerei. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Κατά, from or against, commonly governs the genitive; at, or 
 according to, the accusative. Μετά, with, the genitive ur 
 dative; to, or nfler, the accusative. Yloea and ιτξΐ•ς^ fiora, ikt 
 genitive; ttt, or with, the dative ; to, be.-5ide, or against, iiit 
 accusative. 
 
 1. AsT) in no long time the 
 malady »lo.scended to the breast, 
 inV/i a severe cough. 
 
 2. For I was reluming homo 
 possessing great praise /rum you^ 
 ftiid possessing, through you also, 
 glory from the other Greeks. 
 
 3. His venerable mother heard 
 liun as she was silling with her 
 A^iiA father. 
 
 4. He went to Egypt to Amasis, 
 and also to Sardis to Cra:sus. 
 
 5. As two are to four^ 50 arc 
 four to eight. 
 
 6. Of not fewer than five hun- 
 dred, who sailed in the ship, three 
 Kith (and) thirty only were saved. 
 
 7. It was terrible, nof according 
 iu wie only of the circMiiiilance.-'. 
 
 8. The article stands with a 
 noun^ and the pronoun, for a noun. 
 
 9. The way to be filled is much 
 roore simple and straight wiih w»', 
 than with you. 
 
 10. H ^'l/ta• the review^ desert- 
 em havin;^ come frum the gpreai 
 
 χατα?αινω' ις ό tfri^si « 
 Tovoc, μετά βηξ iCp^u-'is. 
 
 K5 u ixjv yap e^u f<rai. 
 voff roX-uf ir^og ffu acc»»- 
 «Lij'" (cixoJi,) e^oj Jj ίια 
 ffu, xai JTo ό άλλο; Έλ>.ν 
 ί^χ>.ίια. 
 
 '0(3; χλιο) "Torvioj μ^τι:^ 
 /■^αα»? τα;α ταττ;? ^fjcj». 
 
 Es AiyvTTOs a-rixvic.uua 
 τα'α ΛμαυΊ;, χαι 5i; )«( ίς 
 
 Cwsg, oi-TU χαι ό τίίΓία»?ί 
 νξος OXTCJ. 
 
 Ό νλίω'ε ίν β »α•.;, 
 OUX £).a}(ui; η Tcvraxotfiu, 
 Tfiij Tfoj ό Tfiaxovra ιλ%. 
 νον (;ιαο'!/;,^ω.^ 
 
 Λ5ΐνοί ίίμι, ct λΛΓα .'ν 
 μονοί ό τ^α^μα.» 
 
 Ό αρί^ον μί^α ςνομα, 
 χαι ύ αντωνιμια, ανη eic 
 μα. 
 
 Πολύ άτλοοί χαι c.ii; 
 nrafa tju ό oJo; ίίμι ίτ» 
 ίί ίμτληίυ,^'^ τ; να^α (fu. 
 
 Μίτα <Je ό t^srotfij:, ay- 
 τομβλ»ί ήχΜ ιτα'ο μί^"* 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 fiiii^, gave» iiifonnatioa respecting 
 tht' kin<i-'s army. 
 
 11. He thoiiiiht that tho.se wlv) 
 inquired sucli tiling•? from the gods, 
 did iuipiuus thiuiT-. 
 
 12. And flfttr ihcm, all the other 
 arts arc the third rank, ihu.-i ar- 
 ranged, according In (heir parts, hul 
 they all look to thr, God, obeying 
 the couiiuou cjiiiuiundy/'W/i hua. 
 
 Ό ό ToiouTos '!<α.ζ(χ. 9 
 
 Και με-α α-^τος^ 6c, ο 
 TPjroj -ragij ό λοι,το^ τεχν/] 
 •rc.t:, xrxru μ.-^ο^ μεν, ojroi 
 ζοίΤμε^,ι^'^• τα.ς'-ε ίε wpos 
 ό Θεοί a-Tto^Xsvu, κοινό? ό 
 ■rrija euro J ■r-OO'Ta^ μα τϋ- 
 
 Karc. 6 «jfciPa αυτός ίύος, 
 ί/υνψοφεω ό οιτλον• και ύν• 
 ναλαλα.ί^ω,"' ό^μα:<; εττι ό 
 'π-ολεμιο^.'' 
 
 13. AccorrJing to the customs icilh 
 thfrnsrlres, they made a noi.sc all 
 together, %vith their arms ; and, 
 having shouted together, they 
 rushed against the enemies. 
 
 14. And perhaps Cyrus was too 
 talkative, because he was obliged 
 by his master to give an account 
 of the things which he did, and to 
 receive it from others, when he 
 judged. 
 
 15. Cum his et Cyrurn contempiabere, et Priamum et 
 Dionysium. ; 
 
 16. Ex his igitur cupiebat alirpiid jam neg'otiorum adversus 
 hostes gerere. 
 
 17. Ego vero fretus venio, prirnnm equidem deis, deinde 
 legibus ac vobis, existmians nullum apparatum valere apud 
 vos, plus quam leges atque jura. 
 
 Και ειμί μεν ι(>ως Ό Κυ- 
 ξος coXuXo^cc,<= ότι αΊΐαγ. 
 >.u?u uffo ό διδάσκαλος και 
 ίι<5ωμι λο^Ό? όί» ντοιεω,^ και 
 λαμβάνω ττα^α άλλο? hifors 
 διχαΡωΑ -i 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 One substantive agrees with another, signifying the same thin^ 
 in case. 
 
 1. We the unworthy servants. E/w ό ίουλο? ανα|ιοί. 
 
 2. Ο friends, Grecian heroes, ser- ■ Ω φιλοίτ, τ,ξ'^ις Aavaoc:, 
 Vants of Ma-rs. ίε^αττων Α.-'η?. 
 
 3. Hath one Calchas a mophet «^αλχα^ rii ειχομαι" 
 come ? μαντίί ; 
 
S4 
 
 GREEK EXERCieP-3. 
 
 4. I am a relation to 3-011, being 
 alio myself a cur. 
 
 5. Of God the Father and the 
 Lord Jesus Chrint. 
 
 6. IT And a certain Phari?!fc of 
 the council rising up, named Ga- 
 fHaliel, a doctor of law, ordered them 
 to put out the men a little •A'hilc. 
 
 7. And all tho other men pro- 
 cUiming him their benefactor, a man 
 of worth. 
 
 8. You may teach the son of 
 Croesus ; for I wish to be a talker, 
 and not α statue. 
 
 9. For Uumer, relating the 
 wounds, dissension.", revenge?, 
 
 χαι αυτό; ειμί. 
 
 θ:05 τατηβ χαι Xj'ISC 
 1η'ΙΌι•5 XPiff-ic:. 
 
 Ανι-^τϊ-,/Λΐ' ΰβ <ης ίχ β 
 rfuvi'Jpriu Φ«<ΊθΌ(ΐθί:, ονο,αα 
 1 '«(χαλιηΧ, vo;xjo/ oaffxc. - 
 Xcc, x£>j:-'jcj εξω βζu'/^J β 
 
 Και ό aXkoi irag ονί^'^•. 
 ffoff avaxa>.fw ό fus^ sr/Tf, 
 c avv;p ό αγαόος. 
 
 Ώ>α ο'υ,'' ό Ivfciii^ ^αις 
 taiis'ju•^ ίγω γαξ ΧαΧΐί, 
 ουχ αΜδξιας ι•.μ.ι βουλομαι. 
 Όαη^ος γίχξ, εγι^ ίοχεί.;, 
 ίτα^αϋίίωμι τ^αυ,αα 6;of, 
 tears, chains, and sufferings of (frutft;, τι,αο>.'?ιον, Jaxfj, 
 every kind, of the gods, seems to ί^ίμο?, caiog cαμφ•Jf^•of, 
 me, as much as in his po\A-er, to ό μεν firi ό IXjcxogi''» αν. 
 have made the men who fo\ight at ί?ωτο<Γ, otfog"" ετ» ό ίυνα. 
 
 Troy, ^'J(ls, and the ^oi/s, men. 
 
 10. Thi-s was the end, Ο Eche- 
 crates, of our friend, a man, the 
 beat and wisest and most just. 
 
 μίΓ,Ί diog irsiEio, ό 6ΐος 5f, 
 avijiJTor. 
 
 'OJs ό TeXfjrr), ω Εχί- 
 χξα,ιΤΎ,ς, i e.ra'|oj ε^ω'* γί- 
 νομαι,* αν»;» aya6ci, χα» 
 φρονιμΟϊ, χα* iixaiof. 
 11. Venia, Ο Ajax, ei debetur, si, cum cssct homo, rp- 
 petivii gloriam, rem (lulcissimam, proj)ter quam ct nostrum 
 unn.squisquo poriclilaii sustiuct ; quandoquidem wtiaui vicU 
 te, el hiu'C apud judices Trojanos. 
 
 CHAP ΛΊΙΙ 
 
 The conjunctions, και, rs, H?, άλλα, με\, ou<ri, and the Hie, iriB 
 have the siune case ; and, co^nmonly, the same mood and taiM 
 after them, thai ffoes before them. 
 
 1. Vk have loved mo, and have Εχω ς;ίλεω, χαι ηί^ί^:.; 
 heliwed that I camoi forth from iri tju «•α^α ό θί•»• '^"• 
 God, χο."^^αί 
 
CnEKK BXERCISES* 
 
 35 
 
 2. Having heard these things, 
 and havirig given and received fledg- 
 es, they departed. 
 
 3. I both see and know that 
 thou raakest, boik racers, and wrest- 
 le-rs, and boxers, and pancratiasts. 
 
 4. Deliberate slowly, but execute 
 promptly, the things which have 
 appeared unto thee proper to be 
 done. 
 
 5. Love, not thf immoderate acqui- 
 sUion. hut the moderate cnjoynient^ of 
 present good. 
 
 6. Ti Cyrus then first reviewed 
 the Barbarians, (but they marched 
 I'Y, marshalled by troops and by 
 €0!ripanies,) and next the Greeks. 
 
 7. For I am persuaded, that 
 iifiihcr death nor life, nor angels nor 
 l>rincipalities, nor things present nor 
 (/n»gs to come, nor pujcers, nor he'ghth, 
 nvr depth, nor S^ny thing created, can 
 separate us from the love of God, 
 which Li in Chri.-it Jesus. 
 
 Axouij'' tlTu;^ και ίίζία 
 6ώ^μ.ι^ Mjii λαμβάνω,' ol^\ ^ 
 λαυνω. ' ^^.,.^ 
 
 Ότι μεν τοιίω (ϊ^ομίυρ ίε 
 και ιταλαιίτη?, χαι ιτυχτηρ, 
 χαι Ίταγχξατια,ίίτγις, ό^ω τί 
 και siiiw.™'^ 
 
 BouXedw™ μεν βξα.δ>ι^ς, 
 ετίτίλεω δί ταχέως β Οο- 
 
 Α^^αίΤαω, ο ί'π'αξγ^ν 
 ayaoOsjP' μη ό ύίτε^βκλλων 
 χτΎ}ΐίις, άλλα β μετριβ^ 
 ατολαυδΊ^. 
 
 ΘεωΡίω^ OUV ό Κνξας 
 T^wrov μ£ν Ι ΒαξζαΡος, (ί 
 δε '!rap2\uyvi,r τετσ.γμίνας 
 xar' ιλγ]" και χατα ra^ig^) 
 είτα δϊ ό Έλλην. 
 
 ΐΐΐίόω γαρ, ότι ούτε /^κ- 
 νατο5, otTS ι^ωη, ουτί α^- 
 γεΧος, ours «^χ*1> «"J'^ 
 ενείίτς-ί^, ούτε μέλλων, cure 
 δυνο.μις, ούτε ύψωμα, cuTs 
 βα,&ας, ο«τί Tig xriJig έτε- 
 ^0?, ίυναμαι εχω χυ?'^ω 
 α-^Ό ό a.ya.c.r, ό Θεοί, ό ε» 
 X^iifrog I'lJo-jj. 
 
 Oixia yaP, χαι ovfoc:, 
 χαι avo^'arooov, και /iJoff- 
 κημα, χα» CxiJCj, χταομαί^ 
 τε ειτιμελο^ς ό|αω φημι, χα* 
 ό ων (ju^u τεΐί'κω.°'ε 
 
 12. For he .^aid that he saw 
 them both carefully acquiring houses 
 Λ /id lands, and slaves and herds, end 
 eriicies of farniture, and striving 
 to preserve their present posse.5- 
 sioiis. 
 
 13. But now, the finest trage- 
 dies are composed respecting a few 
 ikn'.ilies, as, for example, respecting 
 Ahmieon, and Ocdipts, and Orestes, 
 ■and ^lelcager, and Thyestes, and 
 Telephus. 
 
 14. In t^iis enim solis silcntio melior est oratio ; in aiiis voro 
 taecrs >«,uu.s est quwn bqui. 
 
 X-wV it "TTc^l oXiyOJ OiXKX 
 
 b καλο^ τ^α^ωΰια (ΐΊιντιθτ;- 
 μι, οίον ιτε^ι Αλκμαιων," 
 κκι 0^δi■!tQ\)ς, χαι Οζί(ίΤ7\ς^ 
 χαι Με\:αγξοζ, χαι Θνε<ί- 
 τηί, χαι Τηλεφοί. 
 
36 
 
 CRi:i;K F.XtRCISE?. 
 
 15 Q,ui proximi sunt Deo, ct circa eum online inelrucn, 
 getmcira:, arUkmUici^ philosophic mcdici^ asiruuomi, e{ gramniaiici. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Av, εαν, ε-τειϋαν, ίνα, ο?^α, όιτω?, όταν, ororav, χοίν, χεν, uf, are, 
 
 /or the ηίοϋΐ part, joined tcitk the- subjunctive mood. 
 — Av, xoiv, ujid χεν, are often used to give a subjunctive or optative 
 
 mcuninsr to the other moods. 
 
 1. IVhom Wii announce, tcacR- 
 insc ΟΛχτν man in all wi.sdoni, that 
 toe may render cverj• man perfect ia 
 Christ Jcous. 
 
 2. I ufUite thco to V.iiv of me 
 pold.triffl bv fire, in order that thou 
 ma\jest be rich, and Avhite srarmcntF, 
 in order that thou maijcsi clothe th'j- 
 self. and that the shame of thy 
 nakedness may not he made apparent. 
 
 3. For if oiilK-r we live, v.-c live 
 \)nto the Lord, or if we die, we die 
 υηΐο the Loiil. 
 
 4. When then, Ο Atlv nirin.=, 
 when will ye do the thin^^i which 
 it behoves you to do ? irhcncvtr 
 any thin_^ nun/ have happfmd ? tcht/i- 
 evcr any ncccisity may exist ? 
 
 5. Hear, ye Trojant?, Dardans, 
 and alliet, that 1 may utter what 
 (hing-s my eoul in my bosoni 
 jtrompts me (to eay.) 
 
 6. Whenever. Ο Critobuhis, thou 
 tnayest irish lo become u friend to 
 nny one. ν ilt thou permit mc to 
 •peak aL'aiii.-.l thee unto him ? 
 
 7. Do ilsou tell me, in ordu 
 that /, haviiic^ roturn».d home, may 
 ^Idddin the old blmd monarcli. 
 
 8. Rut if uicy ihould not give 
 
 Ός εγω χαί-α^γε/.λω, 
 OtSuffxu "ΤΌ,ς avd^ijyof fv 
 νας ΰΌφι.7, ίνα 'ταξκίττ,μΛ" 
 ΓΤας avi^ijio; ΐΐΧ;ιζς εν 
 
 Συα'?οιλΓ•ν'ω (f\,^ α^•ο- 
 ra^y* ittt?' εγω p^ufftov 
 ίΓε'Γυ^αιμενο? εχ ιτυξ, ίνα 
 Ατλοϋτεω,* χαι ίμαη'.ν λ5ν- 
 xor, ίνα τε^^ι?«λλο),'°^ χω 
 μη φανε-•';:^* ό iu(iy{jvr, 6 
 γνΐίνύττ,ς tfj. 
 
 F.av r; -,-κί» ζ«<>), £ Kt- 
 ρ/οί"' ^«iJ, εαν τί ατοίνν,ί. 
 XV, ο Kujfts** α-τοίνηίχω. 
 
 Ilcr' ui)v, ω avr,^ A6r,- 
 vojoj, τότε OS χξη ιτξα<ί- 
 (Γω ; ετεΐίίαν η; γίνομαι ;• 
 exciJav ανα^ λ/; 7ΐζ ειμί ; 
 
 Κλι,μι, T^iJ?, XKi Acfoa- 
 νοί, >]<5' iTixov^o.f, ος)^' είτω, 
 β εχω" ιΚ'μοί ε-.( σ-Γ,06;Ρ' 
 χελει,ω. 
 
 Όταν ω K^iTOcouXof φι- 
 ?,cs cig ^ίνομοί* ,βουλομαι, 
 ίκω f^u ΧΛΤίιτΜ C;-P νξος 
 α\ιτας ; 
 
 Λε^ W,* ^εξί^ν τυφλό? Lg 
 χατα (iTej~r)i>^ ε^ομβι' τίξ- 
 
 Li <5f χί μ-η ϋιόνμι,*• 
 
>1 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3T 
 
 ese, I in person will take one away 
 fyt myself. 
 
 . 9. ?r Why then do I say these 
 ihings ? In order that you may 
 perceive, Ο Athenians, that nothing 
 »e to be dreaded b}' you, if you re- 
 main upon your guard, nor, if you 
 ie 7iegligent, proves such as 3'ou 
 may xcish it to be. 
 
 10. These are the things which 
 wc, Ο Athenians, hare been able 
 io devise. When then you may 
 have decided upon the opinions 
 wliich have been oflforcd, decree 
 whatsoever things may please you, 
 in order thai you may wage war 
 Vriih Philip, not only in your de- 
 crees and your letters, but also in 
 your actions. 
 
 1 1 . For if we had then promptly 
 eent our assistance thither, as we 
 decreed, Philip xcould not now le 
 disturbing us. 
 
 12. If Phcebus Apollo had not 
 .«ent forth the noble Agenor, the 
 Bons of the Greeks would then have 
 taken lofty-walied Troy, 
 
 13. As the statuaries now-a- 
 days gay that Deedalus would be 
 iaughed at. 
 
 14. But, said he, if thou per- 
 2civest any mode of obtaining sup- 
 plies that could even originate with 
 
 15. Lord, hadst thou been here. 
 
 ζγω δε 
 
 x£v «woj αι^ο 
 
 Tiff° ουν Ινεχα ούτος \εγω ; 
 Ίνα fiicj Ο) ανηρ ASr^vaiog, 
 ότιουδεις, ούτε φυΧαττοΐί-ενος 
 tfii<i sCri φοζε^ος, ούτε αν ολί- 
 γωξεω, τοιουτοζ ίι,α» oiof αν 
 ffu /δουλομοίί. 
 
 Ό? μ;ν εγω ω αντ,ξ Α4η- 
 ναιος δυναμαι είξΐίϊχω,^ οΰτος 
 ειμ»• ειτειδαν δε ετιχείροτβ- 
 ν*ω ό γνωμ-Ί],^ Ός αν <f\fi 
 α^εβ'κο χει^οτονεω/ Ινα μ^ 
 μόνον εν ό ψήφισμα χα» h 
 εΐΓκΤτολη τΓολεμεω ΦιλίίΤ. 
 ητος, άλλα χαι ό εξγον. 
 
 ■ Ει γα ξ τότε εκεκίε βοψ 
 ίεω/ ώσιτε^ •ψηφιξω,'^^τ^ο- 
 6υμως, ουκ αν ενοχλ,εω-'» νυν 
 Syu^ Ό ΦιλίΤβΌί. 
 
 Ενθα χεν ΰψΐ'π'υλο^ T^ojij 
 αΐ^εω^^ υίευ? Λχαιο^, ει μη 
 ΑίΓολλων Φοιββ^ Αγψωζ 
 iios ανιτ)μι.* 
 
 Ώ,ΰιτεξ και ό Δαιίαλο^ 
 φημι ό αν5?ιαντο•πΌΐθ5 vu« 
 χαταγε^Μΐίτος αν ειμι.'^ 
 
 Αταξ, φημι, tfu ει ενο^αω 
 ης "ϊτο^οί και αιτ' εγω αν 
 τΐοίί^ινομαι/κ 
 
 Kuficg ει ειμ»^ ΰδε, ονκ 
 αν όνηο'κω''^ ό αδελφός. 
 
 my brother would not have died. 
 
 16. Idcirco et legislator primum hoc posuit in judicum 
 iurejurando, " Sententiam feram secundum leges ;" illud nimi- 
 Tum bene sciens, quod, cum conservarentur civitati legeg, 
 •ervatur etiani democraiia. 
 
 D 
 
38 
 
 GREEK BXERCISBS. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Subslantive verbs, verbs passive of naming, and verbs of gesture, 
 have a nomiimtivc both before and after them, belonging to tht 
 tame thins;. 
 
 \ . Wealth is the minister of \-ice 
 rather than of virtue. 
 
 2. Leave thou public employ- 
 ments, not richer, but more honoured. 
 
 3. Small changes have been of- 
 leniimes the causes of great evil. 
 
 4. The form nf government i.s 
 the yiurse of men; a gooA form, 
 »f virtuon.s men ; but the contrary 
 forni, of wicked men. 
 
 ■5. What then can one say, Avhcn 
 such old persons are lovers of life ? 
 
 6. Be such to thy parents, as 
 tliou wouldst wisli thine own chil- 
 dren to be to thee. 
 
 7. I wish it would come to pass, 
 said Araspas, that I could be useful. 
 
 8. Gordian was proclaimed em- 
 peror, being about thkteea years 
 old. 
 
 9. 1Γ Virtue as it seems, must be 
 both a certain sanitji, and beauty, 
 and good habit of the soul ; but 
 vice, both a disease, and turpitude, 
 and infinnity. 
 
 10. And then to leave al! tho.^e 
 tliingr», lliat thou maj'cst not be 
 east in bound, like sheep. 
 
 1 1 . Jim I not free ? am I not 
 an apostle ? have I not seen Jesu.s 
 •ur Lord? If / am not an apostle 
 to others, yet doubtless I nui to 
 you ; for yo are the seal of mino 
 
 Πλουτοί χαχια μάλλον ij 
 
 χαλοκαχαί»α ίΐτ/ΐΡΐττις ειμί. 
 Ex xoivoj sirttj-Ojia αιταλ- 
 λΛττω,™ μη τλοοΟΊο?, αλλ' 
 ε^ΰοξος, 
 
 ΤίοΧΧαχις μίν^ορ μΐταί- 
 ταοΊ? με^α^ χο,χος Oi-ja 
 γίνομαι. ^ 
 
 Πολΐ75ια «Γ^οφη ovi^wcro; 
 Είμι• χαλοί μ£ν, αγα6ας' ό 
 6' fyavrio.c, xaxog. * 
 
 Ύις ουν αν ης "kij u,^ Oft- 
 ν ε ο ~r,yjxi-j7og φιλόζωο; 
 £ΐμι ; 
 
 Ύοιουτος γίνομαι <ί'ι « 
 γονίυς,^ oioj αν εύχομαι* 
 ν^ξι δεαυτου γίνομαι 'α ύία^- 
 TOU iraij. 
 
 Ει γαρ γίνομαι,* φημι ό 
 AjaffTaf, όη eyu αν γίνο- 
 μαι" χζ'τι'ϊιμ.ος. 
 
 Τοξδιανος irffi ε^-οί" "Το* 
 J ινομαΓ^ TfitfxaiJfxa αχιτο• 
 xparwf αναίίίχνυμι.* 
 
 ΑΡίτη μεν u; ειχω."' 
 ΰ^εια «τε τις αν ειμι,^^αι 
 χαλλο?, χαι ευίξια •^'''Χ'ϊ' 
 χαχιο ίε, votfci: τε, χαι aitf- 
 χο(Γ, χαι αίίενεια. 
 
 Και «"{We Tofc: εχ-ινο; αφιγ,- 
 μι, ίνα μη 5iij"8 εμβάλλω,* 
 ΰς 4 ίΓ^ο§α•τον. 
 
 Οοχ ειμί ελενΰερβρ; οι* 
 ειμί αΊτοίτολο? ; ονχι Irjcfoii 
 ο Κυ^ιοί ε} 0J ό«αω ; Ει αλ- 
 λθ5 οΐίΧ ειμί ατο^Γολο^, αλ- 
 λά γ» tfu ειμΓ ο γα» 9φζα•^%ς 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 39 
 
 apostlcabip ; are not ye my loork in ο εμ,ος α-πΌ^τολη Cw ίίμι- w 
 the Lord '? . t εξγον syuS <!\i si/jh ev K»^• 
 
 12. Ylic familiaris mens crat ab juventute. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 The infinitives of suhsiantive verbs, such as είναι, γηείόαι, ^e. 
 hare the same case after ihe?n that goes before them-. 
 
 1. Dost thou think that Phi- 
 dias is a bad artist % 
 
 2. Do not sucli persons as these, 
 seem to thee to be troublesome 
 friends ? 
 
 3. You see how nothing hinders 
 the Scythian Atiacharsis to be ad- 
 mired, and called a wise man. 
 
 4. The name " boaster" appears 
 ^tome, to He upon those luho pre- 
 * tend to be richer tlian they are, and 
 ^^nm-e valiant, and who promise to do 
 
 those things which they are not fit 
 to do. 
 
 5. IT They entreated Cyrus to 
 be as eager as possible for the war. 
 
 6. The shortest, and safest, and 
 most honourable wa}', is, in what- 
 ever thing thoii wishest to seem to 
 be good, to endeavour lo be good 
 
 φ£ΐ5ια? οιομαι χιχ^κος ίι<Αΐ 
 
 Oj δοχεω <Su τοιβι» Toj "/sir• 
 "Κείίας ψ\ος ειμ» ; 
 
 Σκυόηί Α\α.•χαξ€ις χαι dau- 
 μαι^ω,τε xat rfoipog ονομαι^ω. 
 Ό μεν άλαλων zyu"-^ yt 
 δοκεω όνομα, κειμαι*^ ΐ'ϋ Ι'^ 
 tf^otftfoiEw^^S και ■rXouo'tof 
 ειμί η £/μι, και avigeio^, και 
 "ίοιίω' Ις μη ικανοί ίίμιι 
 ΐι•η'ί(3'χνεομαι.& 
 
 Ku^cj? οεομαι," ώ? ir^cdy• 
 μο^ ciPoj ό 'ίολεμο? γίνομαι.* 
 Σύντομος τε, και αίφαλη?• , 
 και καλοί όδο^ ό, τι (tfv) αν 
 /3ουλομαι ίοκεω aya^o^ ίιμί, 
 COUTO και (ίε) ^Ίνομαι^α^Λ- 
 00J *εΐ|αω."' 
 
 ιη It. 
 
 7. Mihi videtur injusius esse, a quocunque quispiam bene» 
 ficiis affectus, sive amico sive hoste, referre gratiam non eni- 
 titur. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Λ preposition often governs the same case in composition, that 
 it does loithotit it. 
 
 I. I W'lW substitute hl&ck instead Πετλο? λευκός μελαί 
 f>f white robes. ανταλλαττω.•" 
 
40 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 2. Or I will dismiss you both 
 /rom the feast. 
 
 3. Now I, the same pcrioi), am 
 driven from mxj cow}t)~y, iik;lioiioured, 
 and miserable. 
 
 4. Tlien thinking hers•' If wor- 
 thy to command the rest, (etiuid 
 
 btfu>€.) 
 
 5. But I associate loith goda^ I 
 eesociatc ifith men thai are good. 
 
 6. I lavin;^ /•!-?« through pUasur'ia 
 in their youth, and having hi);ird- 
 cd up iiiiacrica for their old age. 
 
 7. Ilcniernber, that if you abide 
 in the same things, those who laugh 
 against you at first, shall adnjire 
 3 ou at last ; but if you be over- 
 come by them, you shall receive 
 double ridicule. 
 
 8. There is also another virtue 
 nearly related to the former ones, 
 which they call Amplification. 
 
 9. His venerable nioiher stood by* 
 him as ho groaned heavily. 
 
 10. Ti He himself, among the 
 rest, put on his shining armour, 
 ••xulting that he excelled among all 
 the heroes. 
 
 11. The island extending itsdf 
 just over against the harbour, and 
 lying near it makes it safe. 
 
 12. Those who are ignorant of 
 wir^dom and virtue, but ,y>end their 
 wholi; time in revels and the like, 
 «ink downwards, and err through 
 life. 
 
 13. If two consonants chaiico to 
 le added to a short votuel, they will 
 »i2ake the syllable long. 
 
 14. Folly, and with it inconti- 
 nence, are joined to ric/us and j.>ow- 
 trs, ViXia follow toith them. 
 
 PI ομφοί-ί^βί α-»•«£μ- 
 iru"' ό ί^μίΓοΤι,ν. 
 
 Nov άτιμος α\,ΐ'^ς, αχτξ^ 
 ίξίλαυνω "χβων. 
 
 Τότε οε a^icw"' r^'-itfr»!- 
 μ*" ό αΚ}.ος. 
 
 o'ijvs:jju δε uv ^ujcsi ό α-, α- 
 6'.ς. 
 
 Ό μεν r^oj; ίν ό ν£οτ>;ς 
 
 ύ 5ι^ζ'α; ατοπίτ,μι."''' 
 
 Μνκομσι,Ρ' όη £αν μϊν 
 εμμένω' ο αυτοί, ό yrtrw) ;- 
 λα^ι-'δ ύυ n'^oTfiov, οίτος <jj 
 Ιιίτίζ'Λ ίαυμ«^ω" sum 6ί ίίτ• 
 7aui' ο.υΐος, ίιΐ'Χι.οζ vr'.-l• 
 λαμοανα)"• χατα^ίλ^ί, 
 
 2;.v£'J|og ίιμ» i rr^oixxSi- 
 μαιΒ α^3τη, χαι ί; xa?,£w| 
 
 Ό hi βαξν<ίτ:•»&•χ^ι,)•ψ^α 
 ΡίΟΊ'τ,μι"'- coTMi'jg μητΥιΡ. 
 
 Εν ό' auTo? owiu'"•"' νωίοψ 
 χα>θ(ο?, xyiiocj όη τα; μ:- 
 
 Ό •νησΌ5 ί λιμην -τηξα» 
 
 acsijoj, tiw^ia OS χαι ο 
 τοιουτοί: α:Ί Cu'.fi,ui,i? χατν 
 ς.;»!*',"' χαι c/x-vaij'" ύ.α 
 
 Ε( (ίνμ^Ρ'.ιν:.;'^'' βζ^Χ-'ί 
 φωνγ,ίις ίυο 3υμγ*νο$:"* £τι- 
 φ£?ω,* μαχ|ΐ5 τοι£ω ό Ο'νλ.- 
 λα^η. 
 
 Συντηβ'ίω,'' χαι (5'ι;ναχο- 
 )<juJe(j ό μ£ν ΐΓλοοτο;: χαι i 
 όυναίτΣία ηνοια, χαι yira 
 οίτοίτ, αχ(/>.αθΊα. 
 
 •^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 41 
 
 15. First then, I am right to 
 answer to the first falsehoods, which 
 have been spoken against me, and to 
 the first accusers ; and then, to 
 liie latter falsehoods, and the latter 
 accusers. 
 
 16. When thou art about to con- 
 sult toith amj one about thine own 
 affairs, consider first, how he ma- 
 itaged for his own. For he who 
 plans his own business ill, will ne- 
 ver advi-e well about another's. 
 
 17. You need not Avondcr, my 
 friend, for having been lately icith 
 Humer and Euripides, I know not 
 how I was filled with their words, 
 and the λ -erses come of their own 
 accord into my mouth. 
 
 18. Socrates taught his associ- 
 ates to refrain from thi>igs impious, 
 unjust, and shamrful, not only when 
 they might be seen by men, but 
 also when they might be in soli- 
 tude. 
 
 19. Ajax, if you, being mad, 
 killed yourself, \w\\y do you blame 
 Ulysses ? And lately you did not 
 even look towards him, when he 
 came to consult the prophet, nor 
 did you deign to speak to a man 
 that was your fellow-soldier and 
 
 ΙΤρωτον μεν ουν, Jixatsf 
 ειμί α'ίολο^ίομαι* «ζος & 
 fffcdTog ίγω ψευίο? χατηχο- 
 ξΐω,ζ χα» 'Κζος ό ιτξοτος 
 χατήγοξος• ειτειτα δε, ι^ξος 
 ό ijcTts^ov, χαι ό ΰ'ί'ηξος. 
 
 Όταν ίιαξ Is (ίεαυτονβ 
 μίλλω*^ τΐζ Συμβουλεύω," 
 tfxoir;w ιτξωτον ιτως υιίεξ ό 
 εαυτού διοιχεω.^ Ό yar 
 xaxug 5ιανοεομαιΡ^ε ΰιτεξ « 
 ΐΟΐοίΤ,Ρ ου(5ε-7Τοτε χα,Χως /So»'- 
 λευω"'^ ιτε^ι ό αλλοτ^ιο^,Ρ 
 
 Μη όαυμα(^ω,^<= ω έται- 
 ξος, νεωσ'τί γαξ Ευ^ίίτιίηε 
 χαι ΌμηξΌί ο'υ^^ινομαι,*' 
 ουκ ειίεϋο"^"* όίΤωί avairX^ilw* 
 ό ε•πΌ^,ε κ«ι αυτόματος ε/ω^ 
 ο μ;τ|ον eiti Ό ίτομα ε^^α. 
 μαι. 
 
 AiSacfKU ό ΣωχξατΎίζ ό 
 rfuvijv, ου μόνον οιτοτε ύ'ττ'ο ο 
 ανδξωνος ό|αω, α^ττίχω'" « 
 ανο'ίιος, τε και ιχδιχος, χαι 
 αΐ'ίχ^οί, άλλα και ό-πΌτε εν 
 s^Yifxict ειμί. ' 
 
 Ει tfu μαινω,Ρ^ ω Αιαί, 
 ίεαυτου φονεύω, τΐζ αιηαω 6 
 ΟίυΟ'Α'ευ? ; Και τ^ωην οντί 
 'ΤΤ^οίβλΞ'ττω* αυτό.', ότΌτι 
 ηκω^ μκντευομαι,•''ϊ curs 
 ^^ο^ειτω" αξιοω^ ανηξ tfutf• 
 τ^ατιωττ,ς και έται^ο^. 
 
 20. Sibimet ipsi multa deesse ; proipositum vero civitati, si 
 Bon omnia perficiat, qu£e civitatis veht, ob id^pccnie subjcctum 
 e.see, nonne hoc ingens est amentia 1 * 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 fieuters in the plural^ have commonly verbsjingtilar, 
 
 silent. The "0 μελ•7.ί^ον σΊχαω, Ό 
 αίτιον κινεομ.ία. 
 
 Di2 
 
 1. TfiC courts 
 Siars arc moved. 
 
43 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 2. The chariots were borne along, 
 •oiae through the midst of the 
 enemy themeelves. 
 
 3. After he had bathed, his child• 
 rtti were brought unlo him. 
 
 4. In the level and low places 
 there are groves^ and streams fiow in. 
 
 5. Bodies appear largtir in a mist. 
 
 6. The good things which you 
 promise» I to do to us, when ^-ou 
 received the money, have been ac- 
 complished by 3OU already. 
 
 7. The she^p follow liim, because 
 they know his voice. 
 
 8. How are the things not good, 
 which men receive from fortune ? 
 or again, how are the contrary things 
 not bad ? 
 
 9. IT Objects themselves do not 
 distract men, but opinions about 
 lliem. 
 
 1 0. And these present things show 
 that the multitude are able to in- 
 flict not the least of evils, but al- 
 most tJie greatest, should one have 
 been accused among them. 
 
 11. Riches, honours, titles, 
 crowns, und whatever other things 
 have much extenial splendour, 
 ciinnot to a wise miin seem ex- 
 ceeding good things, the very de- 
 epising of which i.s no moiRMatc 
 e.xci-lloiici- 
 
 12. Let silence gi'iioraliy pre- 
 vail, or let necessary t'^ings be spoken, 
 and iu few words. 
 
 13. Ye reckon us your cover- 
 ing.^, not all I ho wool that sheep 
 produce, but all the bu.'hes that 
 the nounlaxns and the plains send 
 
 ίΓ αυτός ό «Όλίμίο^.ί 
 
 ΕίΓ£ΐ5η 6i λούω,"»* φΐ^Μ 
 ca|' a„ros ό ffouoiov. 
 
 Εν <5; ό λίιοί χαι χα^η. 
 μενοί, οϊΚύος ει,αι, χαι ίιτιί- 
 ^iui νάμα. 
 
 ΛΓ όμιχληΚ ό (ίνμα μί- 
 γας oaivu. 
 
 Ός ύΐΓίδ'χνεομίυ^ «το»ί^)* 
 αγα3:ς εγω, ire λαμ?ον*•* 
 ό χ^ημΛ,Ρ οτοτίλεω ffv ηύτ;. 
 
 Ό <r|o?arov αυτός ακο- 
 
 Πω5 OJX --ιμι ayaioj:, όιί(>ς 
 λαμοανω ό ανβξΐ,ττοζ τα>α 
 ό tj^>; ; η ταλίν, ο ΐνανηοί 
 c^'i OJX ίιμι xaxcg ; 
 
 Ύαξαδΰΐβ} Ό ovi^^jircf c» 
 ό 'χΐ'αγμα άλλα i «ί-ι ί 
 «■Ραχμα ΰο^μα. 
 
 Aj'o? ίί όηλοω ό cojij» 
 vjvi, on clsg ri £i;jn ό τολ;^ 
 ου υ (ίμίχζος ό χαχο; •b^i7'** 
 ^ομαι, άλλα ίχίύον ό μ»- 
 ^αί, ίαν cif εν aurof Οί». 
 ^αλλω.Ρ-' 
 
 Ιΐλοντο^, Τίμ*;, ίοξα, «•.. 
 ξα\\ΐζ,\αι Ό'οςδ^αΧΚας r/jjt 
 
 Οεω,ΡΡ ΟϋΧ αν όνί 9ί<'•'.*οί 
 όοχ8ω^ «} α()οί ''«•ejoa/.. 
 
 φ^ονί jj' tty ados"• oj μίτξι.^. 
 
 Zit^tr, ό τολυ ίίμ», r, λα. 
 λίν ό ava^xatc;, χαι όια 
 ολι^οίτ.ϊ 
 
 irfuju-a Js νομίζω osy 
 ό~οίος τίοοαΓον φ;/ω ε/ιο», 
 σλλα ότοΐΌ; φ^^χανον c^of 
 f ί χαι τίόιον ανιτ^. 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 49 
 
 14. My children falling about Τεκνον, 6' οίμφι χον„«* 
 my knee•;, lament their rnoiher. irierw, χλαιω μηττ,^. 
 
 15. And it shall be, when ye Και ίιμ-ι, wg αν σαλτίξ** 
 shall have sounded with the trum- ό ίαλτινξ, αναχραξω*ταε4 
 pet, let all the people shout toge- Xaog άμα, χα* tittc^•™ αυ. 
 tlier, and the walls of the city shall τοματο^ ό rsr/os l ιτοϊ^ς. 
 fall of tl^f ir own accord. 
 
 16. Domus quidem tibi bene habet, et mancipia omnia, et 
 equi sane, et canes, el pr<edia, el queecunque posaides pulchr• 
 disposita sunt. 
 
 17. Ο Stulti, nescientes quantis terminis negoiia mortuorum 
 el virorum discreta sunt, et ^ualia sunt apud nos. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 One substantive governs another, signifying a different thing, 
 in the genitive. 
 
 1. Take ye the helmet of salva- 
 ύοη and the sword of the Spirit. 
 
 2. His countenance presents it- 
 eelf unto me, and the sound of his 
 wice remain.^ in rny ears. 
 
 3. The convnencement of his re- 
 marks was praise of Greece, and of 
 ihc ineti at Athens. 
 
 4. ()f how many «^2/5 is igno- 
 rance the cause unto men. 
 
 δ. But indeed the rnoon makes 
 rnamfesl unto us, not only the di- 
 visions of the moTith, but also those 
 of the day. 
 
 6. There is, as it seems, no re- 
 "i-edy for anger but the serious con- 
 fcrsation of α man our friend. 
 
 7. A little time breaks the con- 
 nexions of the ivicked ; but no length 
 of time can destroy ihe friendships 
 of the good. 
 
 8. Nightly visions are not only 
 ihe echoes ef daily accidents and 
 cotiversations, but also the produc- 
 tiotis of a remiss habit. 
 
 Ό τί^ιχίφαλαια ό CwTij- 
 ficiv δέχομαι,' χαι ό μαχα<. 
 ^α ό Πνίυμα. 
 
 Ό "T^oiowov aiiTog φαί- 
 νω,•" χαι ό φωνή ο ψχ}ζ sv β 
 αχοη ίταίαμενω. 
 
 Ό μεν α,ξγτ, Ι Χογ'^ς 
 ΐτία\\ος ειμί Έλλαβ, χαι β 
 Ai'';vrjiiv οΛΰξνιτος. 
 
 Οΰος κακοί, αίτια c αχ- 
 νοια ό ανί^ωτοί. 
 
 Αλλα μην, ό γε β'εληνη 
 CJ μόνον ό νι^ξ, άλλα χαι ό 
 μην ό με^ο^ φανε?ο? s^w 
 ίτοιεω. 
 
 O'jx ειμί ίξγ-τι ΰς ειχω™' 
 φαρμακον αλλ' η λο^οί 
 θΊΓθί.οαιο5 avOPUflTog φιλο^. 
 
 Ό μεν ό φα^λο^ duvri&sia 
 ολι^55 χίΌνοί (5ιαλυω•* ό 6S 
 ό tfiro-joc/io? φίλια ουβε αν β 
 <πας οίων εξαλείφω.^ 
 
 Ό νυχτερινοί φανταίίια ou 
 μόνον ο μείημεζίνοί ειμί Λν. 
 TJj(ia χαι όμΐ/ ja αιττ,-χ^τ,μα, 
 άλλα και ό ^αόομο? ίυνη. 
 itia 2 εννημα. 
 
44 
 
 GREF.K EXERCISES. 
 
 9. I nm a deliverer oi m^n, and ΕΧΐυίίξωτν,; Βιμ.ιίανίζ-^. 
 an healer of passivnit, but, upon the «oc, χαι larpoj ό iraicc, ό Ci 
 whole, I (lo.'ire lo h*i ihe prophci oC oXog"<'aXr,i;ia xaicw^^/.ir.n 
 
 *ruM ΐ\Γ.(\ freedom 
 
 10. He \\ί11 easily find his lea- 
 thern coiit a<jain, and his spade, in 
 ihe lees of his cask. 
 
 11. For as when a light is pre- 
 sent at niirht, it draws the eyes of 
 all to itself, so the beauty of Au- 
 tolycus attracts U\a regards of all to 
 itself 
 
 12. The flowin!; of rivers, the 
 gtcellins^ tidrs of the sea, the bud- 
 ding of /rciT.?, the ripene^/s of fruits. 
 
 13. 1Γ And sailing by, they bc- 
 lielil the moul/is of the risers, first 
 uf the Thtnn.jduti, next of the 
 Habjs, and af:er this of tlie Par- 
 ihenius ; liaviiig sailed by, they 
 came to I ί.ται lea, a 'Jrecian city, 
 a eolomj of ^legairaiis, being in 
 the country of llie JMariafulijni. 
 
 14. Tne (H'l of tragedy and of 
 hist'jry is not the same, hut oppo 
 fite ; in the former yon must strike 
 and captivate the liearers, at pre- 
 sent, by the most ))ersna'^ivo words ; 
 in the lai«T, by real facts anil nar- 
 rations, you must, ahveys, instruct 
 and persuade thu.ie wlio wish to 
 ifcarn. 
 
 15. Λ resemblance difTcrs from 
 a symbol ; inasnnich as the resem- 
 Hancc aim.c, as much as possible, 
 lo represent the very nature of the 
 thing, and it is not in our power to 
 vury ii ; but the syndiol is wholly 
 in our power, as existmg by our 
 iuiaginution alooe. 
 
 ■^o;»i"»;5 iVJ••» /οουλομαι. 
 
 ou^is, xai ό (5»Χί>.λα, «ν i 
 <ΓΡ•Λ ό -rridog. . 
 
 Πίΐίίξ γαξ όταν ^yj sg t^ 
 νοξ τα^ειμι, iraj c^odayij 4 
 οαμα, (;;Irw χαι ό AuToXvxej 
 xaXXcj τα? i^iXxw t.^*^ 
 
 ΙΛταμορ Εχ^οη, ία>Λ<ίίΓα 
 ανοιόη,ίΊ;, Οίνίρον ex^uCtf,' 
 xa^irnj cfrravtfij.P 
 
 Και ΐΓ«ία?Γλ:^^, d(ufS(^ 
 ο ίτΌταμο; ό ίτομα• irfwret 
 μ5ν ό Θί^μωίυν, ;•τίΐτα 6ί i 
 Ά\υς, μετά δί ojroc,"* • 
 Ila^divioj• Ta^acXsi.•,-^ ayi- 
 κν5ομαι'' ει? Ί1^αχλ£ΐ«, τ»- 
 λ(^ Έλλην)?, Ms^a^itff 
 α•7Γοιχο?, ειμί ίν ο Μα»ιαν• 
 ί^νο? χ^,.Ρα. 
 
 Ό 7£λο5 T^aycjJia χαι Itf- 
 το^ια ου ό αυτό?, άλλα • 
 Λαντιο?" εχ:ΐ μεν jao 6fi 'Jia 
 ό ΐτΐίΐανο? λο^ο?,ε ίχιτλ^ί". 
 (Γω,^ χαι ψυχα^ ω^εω,* χατα 
 ό cαi'^ιμι,P ό oxoyuj'o ivdaJ» 
 ir, (5ια ό αληίινοί: ε ^jov χηι 
 Xo/OC, ιις •τας ο Xfcvt;, 
 όίδα.Ιχ-Α' χαι TEiiu)"* ύ pi).i. 
 μαί'ίω.Β 
 
 Διαφ:^:^ Je ά ίμοι^^^μα ί 
 (Γι/μ^αλιν ί χαι'οΟΊν i μίν 
 ομοια'μα i φυΟΊ? αυτ&ί ό 
 νξαγμα, χατα ό •5ι•ν«τ5ί,"• 
 ατειχονι^ω™ /^ουλομαι, χαι 
 ουχ ειμί ετι ε^ i;•* αυτό? μίτα- 
 rrXaddui'^ ό οε νε Λμ^ολο» 
 4 ολοέ"* είτι ε^ 6J ίχ<^, «-τι 
 χαι tx μονό? ύ^ιίτημαι"!? t 
 ί;μετί^ο5 ειτινοια. 
 16. 8.>v.ratca, H'j:n<jru9, Hippocnvtcs, Pluto, (orumqut admi 
 
OREBK EXBRCISKS. 
 
 ift 
 
 ratore^y quoa etiam «que ac deoa colimu3, tanquam pr&fccii 
 quidam, atque Dei ministri. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 The primiiive. pronoun is used^ in ike gctiiiive, instead of the pos- 
 
 scssii^. pronoun. 
 Bui whenever any emphasis ia required^ tJie possessive alone can he 
 
 used- 
 
 1. I ascend unto '/«y Father and 
 your Father, and my God and your 
 God. 
 
 2. Send forth my people, that 
 they may serve rnc ; if thou be not 
 inclined to send them forth, see 
 then, I will slay thy son, which is 
 the lirst born. 
 
 3. This is my God, and I will 
 glorify him ; my father's God, and 
 1 will exalt him. 
 
 4. In thee our fathers trusted, 
 tliey trusted and thou didst always 
 deliver them. Thou art my God 
 from my mother's womb. 
 
 5. And upon their heads were 
 golden crowns, and their counte- 
 nances were as countenances of 
 men, and their teeth as teeth of 
 hons. 
 
 6. Never as yet hast thou be- 
 held a virtuous action of thine οιυη. 
 
 7. It is enough if every one 
 perform his own duty. 
 
 8. But now Philip has triumphed 
 over your indolence • and careless- 
 ness. 
 
 9. And not to think that thy 
 sight can extend over many stadia, 
 but that it is impossible for the e3'e 
 of the Deity, to see all things at the 
 same moment. 
 
 10. Does it appear that ozir na- 
 val armament Λvdl be inferior to 
 that of these rnen 1 
 
 fy ω και ©sog βυ. 
 
 Ε^α'Π'οο'Τίλλω'' ό λαοί ε/ω 
 ίνα syw Χητξίοω''^ Ει μ-ίν μ,ΐ} 
 /3ουλομ-α» ϊ^α'ΤΓοίτϊΧλω'' au- 
 τβ.<, Όξαω OUV, ιγω aiiQxrsntd 
 δ υίοίΤ <ίυ Ό t^oj-otoxo?. • 
 
 OuTog fijijLi syu Θίοζ, χαι 
 δΰζΆξω αυτοζ• Θεός Ό νατ-^ζ 
 syu, χαι όψοω αυτός. 
 
 Ετί ffu ίΧίτιζω^ ό vaTrj^ 
 εγω, ελ•ηξ^°' και ^υω"*•^ αυ- 
 ΐος. Εκ κοιλία μητ-ηξ εγ» 
 Θίο<; syu εψ-ι tfu. 
 
 Kr/.j £1» ό χ£φα•λη α,υτος 
 rfrSvpavof χξυίίξος, και ό '!γ|ο- 
 ίωΓον αυτός ΰς ίτροίωτον 
 ανίξωιτος, και, ό ο.όουί Μί 
 οδ^,υς Xsuiv ίιμι. _ • 
 
 Ouisig -τωτοτε (ίεα\)Ταν 
 ίξγοΊ καλο^• όεαομαι.Ρ'' 
 
 ΊκαΜος (5; sav εκαο'τοί 
 ίχττλη^οοο'"' δ ίαυτου Βξγον.• 
 
 Νυν (is, ό μίν ^αόυμια^ 9 
 υμετεξοζ και αμέλεια κρατεί* 
 
 Φίλΐ'Λ-'Τοί. 
 
 Και μη οιομαι ό (fog με» 
 όμμα οίναμαι ε•η ιτολυς 
 CraJiov ε|ικνεομα<, ό Ji δ 
 <3.-ο5 οφθαλμοί aiuvocTog ίιμι 
 άμα "Tag οραω. '^ 
 
 Φαίνω™ ό ναυηκοί (β"?"^»- 
 τευμα) δ >;μετε^02 λϊΐΤΜ"» 
 ςβ ίχεινο^ ; 
 
46 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 11. IT And thou shall rejoice 
 before the Lord thy (Jod, ihou and 
 thy pon, and tliy daughter, thy man- 
 servant and thy niaid-servanl. 
 
 12. In order thai his heart maj' 
 not be elevated from his brethren, 
 in order that he may not turn away 
 from these c^inmandnients, so that 
 he may continue long^ over his 
 kingdom, he himself and his sons, 
 ftinong the softs of Israel. 
 
 13. Ν um major es patre Λοδ/Γο? 
 
 14. Fihus luua vivit. 
 
 Kv^ioje ό θίος ffj, ffv χαι • 
 υ\ος <J\j, χαι ό ίογαττ,» tfw, 
 ό iraif ff\) χαι ό irai5i(fx>) <fu. 
 Ίνα μη u4-oij-' ό χαξόια 
 αυτο'ί ατο ό αδζΧφ^ς a-jrog, 
 ίνα μη ι:αξα~αι•^ω^ ατο ό 
 εντο>.η, ir-^g αν μίίΧ|οχ^ο- 
 
 αατος χαι δ uiog a.rof £v ό 
 ΐιΊος 1(Τξα•ηΚ. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 .3rt adjective in the neuter gender, with 
 the genitive. 
 
 1. He came to that degree of 
 insolence. 
 
 2. For I will never proceed to 
 such a mif<fortune. 
 
 3. The Athenians were in this 
 degree of preparation. 
 
 4. Ύ\\α grcatrM part οι \\\G Gre- 
 cian ar?«'/ was thus persuaded. 
 
 5. And it was now the middle of 
 tlie daij, aiul the enemy were not 
 yel vi.-ilije. 
 
 6. Dost tliou see the affi\irs of 
 the I'lT.-ian.^, to what a pitch of 
 power tln\v have advanced ? 
 
 7. !T Of the things that are good 
 and honourable, the gods give none 
 wiihout labour and care. 
 
 8. Tliou dcsire.-it nothing of a 
 di^cult tnritfn•, vi.shing to know 
 what the law might be. 
 
 9. I laving come to thi.-? country, 
 I became hen^uuvn to a stranger, 
 and I have pre.-^cived this family 
 lo this day. 
 
 10. And they themselves even 
 
 out a substantive, governs . 
 
 Έ'ς TotfoiiTog ερχομω• 
 ΰτερηφανεια. 
 
 Eycj γαζ ουνοτ' tig oJs 
 ειμί' (f-s.ij.^'iPa. 
 
 Ό μεν Λίηναΐίίτ ςν το- 
 (foiTog iragaixejr) ειμί. 
 
 Ό μεν ΐΓολυί ό Έλ/.ηνιχί.^ 
 (ί-^ατευμα) oi~!^g τειίω. 
 
 Και ειμί ηίτ) μεσορ ημε^α 
 ΧΓίΐ "ΐτω xacacrtvris ειμί a 
 ίΤολεμίΟίΤ. 
 
 Ό^ηω ό Πε^'Ο'τ,ί ΊΓ^η^μα 
 £ig Of ϋυναμι^ τ^οχω^ε y ; 
 
 Ό μεν Είμι^Γ α^-αίο? χαι 
 χπλοίΓ ou'5iic: ftvsu covcji χαι 
 εcιμελεια όιΟνμι ό όεο^. 
 
 Oi-(5ri5 Τ15 ^c'.XsTog c^ay- 
 μα fcιt^υμεo], ^ίουλομαι yi- 
 νω(Τχω CIS ειμί'' ό νομο^. 
 
 Γ-ζ'^ι^ομαι" ό' siff ^οια 
 όίί, βovφoξζe:J' ζ^^οζ, χ«• 
 όίε (Γω^ω'•' 01X05 εις Ό6ί 
 ημί^α. 
 
 Και αυτό; ες ό (ircira 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 47 
 
 ^^,. 
 
 •χξονοξ' εΧ'π^ις τις ίχω' χου. 
 
 
 had something of a ddusive hope, 
 that for the time to come they 
 would not be afflicted by any other 
 disorder. 
 
 11. The unseasonable advice. 
 The unseasonahlcness of the ad- 
 vice. EQs celebrated wife. The 
 celehrihj of his loife. The fluctu- 
 ating sea. Thafluctuaiion of the 
 $ea. His most honoured freemen. 
 The most honoured part of his 
 freemen. A chosen army. The 
 choice part of his army. 
 
 12. Ova parit in terra excluditque: et plerumque 
 sicco affit. 
 
 αλλο^ 
 
 φ Off μηο αν 
 
 Ό αχαίξΰς /3ουλη. ~'tT 
 
 αχαιξος ό βουΧί). Ό ^ε^»- 
 
 Toff 6 yiivv). Ό Χϋματωίτ]^ 
 oaXatfCa. Ό χυματωίηδ β 
 6aka(f(fu. Ό έντιμος ελευ- 
 όε^ο^. Ό έντιμος ό ελευίε. 
 foff. Ετιλεκτο? ατξαηα, 
 Ό ετίλεκτοί ο (ίτξατια. 
 
 in 
 
 <5»αφόε»ττΟ»^ 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 1%? relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and number. If 
 there come no nominative between the relative and the verb, the 
 relative is the nominative to the verb ; but if there do, the relative 
 is governed by some word expressed or understood. 
 
 1. There was one Xenophon, 
 who followed. 
 
 2. liZOer/'i/, iu^i'cA above all things 
 leads to happiness. 
 
 3. They cause (he stars to ap- 
 pear above our heads in The night, 
 which indicate unto us the hours of 
 the night. 
 
 4. The great Jiipit,:r is in heaven, 
 who inspects all things. 
 
 5. Do those things tvhich will 
 not hurt thee, and reflect before 
 action. 
 
 6. Thence he advances to the 
 river Sarus, lohose breadth was 
 three pleihra. 
 
 7. Having seen the chariots which 
 .Toseph sent, the spirit of our father 
 Jacob relived. 
 
 Ei/j-i τις Ξενοφών Ις (ΐΌν- 
 
 τα 'Κζος ευδαιμονία aycj. 
 
 Ό atfr^ov εν ό vu| ανα- 
 φ«ινω,^ ος εγω Ό ώ»« ό vu^ 
 εμφαν/ξω. 
 
 Ειμί μΐγας εν ον|ανο5 
 'Ζΐυς, Ός εφοξαω ιτας. 
 
 Πί'κο'ο'ω δε οίτο? ό^ tf•» 
 μη βΧχ'!(τω, "Κογιζω^ δι 
 •τξο ?ξγον. 
 
 Εντευύεν εξελαυνω ε-χι b 
 Σαρος ιταταμος ος ειμί • 
 ευξος τξϊις τλεί^ον. 
 
 Έιδω ό άμα^α ίς αττοσ'- 
 τελλω ΙωίΤ'ηφ, ανα^ωττυ^εω* 
 » οτνευμα Ιακω§ ο τατη^. 
 
4β 
 
 CRELK ExmClSES. 
 
 8. IT TTiis is bettrr, to respect 
 9^ualily, w/iirh alwu^'s binds fri'-nds 
 with fncmlfi, and ci'ios v:i:h cities, 
 and allies with allies. 
 
 9. 8uch also are hvperboles and 
 plurals ; but we shall sliow in the 
 eequel, the danger which ihcy sccrw 
 10 have. 
 
 Exfivci: xaXof, ιΰοτκζ ri• 
 μαω, ίς (ρι>Λζ αίι (ptXftjr, 
 
 ΐ'Τ5;§ολη, χα» ό cXr.iivri- 
 xr,-"f ί^ικνυμι 5e εν cP sirii- 
 cn ό xiv(5uJ0f, ίς βχο,• «- 
 xw.'"'' 
 
 flTePi έαυί-ουΡ φίαξω ό Xj- 
 
 CfP» i 
 
 10. The first person, is that m 
 %ckich the speaker speaks of hiin- 
 pelf; the second, in tv/iich of him 
 
 lo u-Ai^m he speaks ; the third, in πξος ίς Ό λο/'ο^• νξΐη:, ίς 
 %ohich of another. c.-fi ϊτΐζΐίξ. 
 
 11. Why then, said Critobiilus, Tig ουν, φημι ό Kjir»- 
 dost thou say this to me, as if it fsuXcc, tyw oCto^ Xsvw, 
 did not depend upon thee to say of ΰα-ζίζ oix eiri tfy• ολ,«»* »«•- 
 me whatever thou mayest wish ? Ti? ov ,βουλο/χαι, <rf j. ϊ-, μ 
 
 λί/ω ; 
 
 12. Socrates acts unjustly, whom A^txtu Icox^arr^j, Ις ^tn 
 the elate considers gods, not con- ο ro>jg νομι,^ω flio?, tv w- 
 sidering;. M-'^'^• 
 
 13. Circumque ipeum omnes ordine instructi sunt, kewn 
 unusquisque, quern ille deilit, non relinquentes. 
 
 14. Dirain quandam narras hominum stuUilian». ^ui (uuM 
 anK>re aniant rem pallidaiu graveujque. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 Tht Attic and Ionic writers often put the relative, by attraction, w 
 tht same case tcith the antecedent, and sometimes the antecedfU 
 in the same case icith the relative. 
 Participles and adjectives are often put, by attraction, in thi *e»X 
 ^ taf0 jj,,//, ifit nfftifi Qf pronoun to which they refer. 
 
 JI£X.47JrC ATTUAkTUU ϋϊ TBB ANrkViUtHX. 
 
 1. Dlinu reproved by huu fi^ 
 ali tht till di«*is icMch he coiuuuI- 
 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 49 
 
 2. But examine separately each 
 of the things which the Deity men- 
 tioned. 
 
 3. With the treasures which my 
 father left. 
 
 4. This then he sent imto thee, 
 and requests of thee to drink it 
 up this day ivith those whom thou 
 hvest best. *" 
 
 5. The first of men whom we 
 know. 
 
 6. That he might not then be 
 compelled to break any of the laws 
 which he established. 
 
 Αλλα κ«ό' Iv lxft(j'ros 
 
 2υν ο β-ηίίαυξος Ός ο τα- 
 ψν]ξ καταλειττω.^ 
 
 OUTog"^ ουν tfu irs^'Tru,^ 
 χαι δεο'χαι tfu^ εκπινω® τη- 
 μ^εξον rfuv ος μαΧα φ ίλεω. 
 
 n^cjTog^ ανόξω-τίος ο Syu 
 ισ'ημι. 
 
 Ίνα 5η μη τι^ δ vo/xog 
 ανα^και^ω"= λυω® ό τιόη- 
 
 ANTECEDENT ATTRACTED BY THE RELATIVE. 
 
 7. There is no public office lohich 
 he did not sustain. 
 
 8. And some of the disciples 
 from Cffisarea came with us, bring- 
 ing one JMnaso^ a Cyprian, an old 
 disciple, with lohom we should be 
 lodged. 
 
 Ουκ ειμί otfriff ίΤωίτοτβ 
 
 Συνε^ομαι•^ ίε και (τις) 
 ό μαόητη^ atfo Κακία^εια 
 rfuv εχω, α^ω, ιτα^α og ξε- 
 νι<^6ϋ,^•= Μναίων τις, Κυ- 
 
 PARTICIPLE AND ADJECTIVE ATTRACTED BY THE SUBSTANTIVE OR PiiO• 
 Λ'υ Ι'Λ' TO WHICH THEY REFER. 
 
 9. In this, I will shoΛv, in the 
 first place, that I have been tcise, in 
 the next place, prudent, and then 
 your best friend. 
 
 10. The gift of thee alone. 
 
 1 1 . The fortune of vjreiched me. 
 
 12. It has been ordained by fate 
 for most men, xohen successful, never 
 to be wise. 
 
 Ev οδε δεικνυμι <τ^ωτα 
 μεν tfoipos γεγωζ, είτειτα 
 (ίωφξων, ίιτα. ΰυ'^ με/αί 
 φιλοί. 
 
 Ό dog μονο£^ δώρημα. 
 
 Τύχη εμοί τλημων. 
 
 Ό ιΤοΚυς μεΐ|ω μηδε-Το- 
 TS, ευ it^adifUjS φ^ονεω.* 
 
 PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 13. ΤΓ This is the man whom you Outoj ίιμι og ίΐίω ανη|. 
 saw. 
 
 14. ile sent for another army in Μετα^εμιτω™ αλλο^οΊ•^- 
 addition to the one xohich he had τευμα «r^og Ις ^^βί^εν s^u. 
 before. 
 
 Ε 
 
όϋ 
 
 CHEHK L.\F.R(IseS. 
 
 
 Ό μΓ» r^ioj -χος χα» ό it- 
 fa-ru» αΐί^οξ» tf\,<liu έηχι; 
 
 <-iXi;,ca-A)-'i 
 
 ^i-M 
 
 15. He wa» a brothcr-in-laic of 
 wr, α thamdcss iroman ; would that 
 h'' still were so ! — once indeed he 
 
 16. His euiiviclis and servants 
 'i'lz n, grave fur hi in, when he 
 ώοΊ ; anil his wife siie on the 
 ^Youml, ha\ing adorned her hus- 
 band U'itfi whatercr things she ha^l, 
 and havuig his head upon her 
 knees. 
 
 17. lie desired him to come to 
 tiio arm}', that they miyht consult 
 aboTit Me castUs which ύ\>•γ had 
 mk'.'n. 
 
 IS. At every disagreeable ap- 
 pearance accustom yourself to 
 :«ay, that it is an appearance, and 
 1301 at all what it seems ; then 
 exauiine it, by these rules, it'hich you 
 ha\e. 
 
 19. That yon should be mur- 
 derers, and pollute your liamls 
 \%iih royal blood — 3ee that it be 
 η•ΐ viUanous at present, and dan- 
 gerous to you aflerwards ; for I 
 ain not conscious ίο myself, that 
 1 have given you any cai^se of 
 ufieasiness. 
 
 20. What then does tlie God 
 e^y Ί For nideed I am not con- 
 .^ious to myself thai J am wise, 
 much or little. 
 
 21. Philosophis ediccre, non fingt:re nova vocabula, net]ue 
 ii'iirari de ^uibiis non nontnt. 
 
 22. Persarum quidem lonc^e pulcherrimus est pater meu5, 
 Medorum vero quotquot ego vxdi, longe liic meus avus pulchef- 
 riiTius est. 
 
 xair,uat ^«μαι, xoJfAeu' ti 
 tyj^ ό α»η^, i -.«γαλή o„ro; 
 
 EriiriXXw* i;XiJ a;,-ro> 
 
 ΙΙαί φανΓΜίίία"* -unyyi 
 μί>^ταω enXi^cj, ότι ^α•.- 
 raJia tVfU, χαι ου Tavrioi 
 ό"* φαίνω•™? είΤ.ΊΓα ίςίτα- 
 ^w, ό xavujv ο;^Γο;, ί» ij(w. 
 
 A'jfoi ^ινο,αα/ φονί;^, 
 χ"ίΐ βαύι'Κϋοζ μπαίνω"* ό 
 Οΐςια αίμα, ό^αω μη τ^ος 
 ό"* VJV avoifOf, xoj ύσ'ί'ο* 
 tfu Sirixivujvof ϊΐμΓ ou ^α^ 
 ς -ij Εμαντου CiMiOiJ^' λ\,- 
 CcW^ tfu. 
 
 Τι? «rori Xfyu ά θ5ο<: ; 
 
 S-jU jaf 6r„ ύυτί μί^α 
 cjtS ίμιχ^ον, tfuvci^iu"*' 
 ίμαυτου (}Ός;ο» ειμί.? 
 
greek; exercises. 
 
 51 
 
 CiUr. XIX. 
 
 «d noun nf the dual vuinber may have a verb, adjeclipe, or reL•^^ 
 plural ; hnt a plural noun can unly have a verb, adjective^ er r$• 
 laiivc dual, when it signifies tico. 
 
 But then two quickly drew near, 
 urging on ihoir swift steeds. 
 
 2. If the two hands should turn 
 themselves, or the two feet impede 
 each othei". 
 
 3. We two sat thus, answering• 
 each other. 
 
 4. We two examining together, 
 thall perhaps discover it. 
 
 5. Why then are you offended 
 against them ? for they both suffer 
 just punishment. 
 
 6. And ye rivers, and earth, and 
 ye who punish the dead men, b^ 
 low. 
 
 7. But one thing vexed me not 
 a Uttle ; ThesmopoHs disturbing 
 me, and teaching me, that two ne- 
 gatives make one affirmative. 
 
 8. If As when two torrents rush- 
 ing from the mountains, discharge 
 their impetuous streams together 
 into one gulf 
 
 9. Can you tell unto us two 
 where Pluto lives here ? For ive 
 are both strangers lately arrived. 
 
 10. And let these two themselves 
 be witnesses to this, before the eter- 
 nal gods, and mortal men. 
 
 11. They tico went reluctant 
 along the shore of the barren sea, 
 and canie to the tents and .«hips 
 of the Myrmidons : and Uicy found 
 
 Ό Ss ταχ' ΐγγ\ι6ίν ί|. 
 χομαι,* ίλαυνυ wxi/j ΐττ- 
 ■κος. 
 
 Ει ό χ?ι? TPS-ru;"•'^^ ν-, ύ 
 •χοΌζ ΐμ,ιτοδιζω βλ/./,λ:,;». 
 
 Συν rs δυο (fxfrro'j.(M 
 σ'χίίον Eu^itfxw. 
 
 Tig ouv ayavaxrsu xara 
 αυτός • StSc^'u γαξ ααφ,« 
 XctXog ό οικη. 
 
 Και ιΤοΓαμο?, xfl» γαία, 
 και ΌςΡ ϋιτίνεξδε χαίλνω•* 
 ανί^ωίΓο^ «τιννυμαι. 
 
 Πλην άλλα ε'ίς tyu λν- 
 *εω* ου μετξίως• ο Θ^βΊ^β. 
 *ολι? ενοχλεω, χαι 6i5aff- 
 χω, ώί ό δυο αΐτοφαοΊ?, ilg 
 χαταφαίίις avoTiXsu. 
 
 Ώ? ί' ore χειμα^ξος ^β- 
 τα,μ,ος,Ρ χατ^ οΡίΐίφι |fw, 
 ες μιιίγαγκεια (ίυμβαλλΜ 
 οζξιμος υδωξ.^ 
 
 Εχω** αν φ^α^ω' iyw 
 Πλούτων ότου ενόαδε »ι- 
 χεω ; ξξνος γαξ ειμ», αξ. 
 Tiwc: αφικνεομα•.'' 
 
 Το δε αυτός μοξτυξοςΡ 
 ειμί, νξος τε 6eogS μαχα^, 
 «ξος τε θνητός ανί^ωιτοίΓ. 
 
 Ό 5ε αεχων βαίνω ε^ι 
 6ις αλς (κτξυγετος, Muf- 
 μιδ'^ν δε ετι ce χλιίία 
 χαι \ιψ$ ίχνεομαι.® Ό 5e 
 
62 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 him at his tent and his black είξκίχω ηταξα re χλιίια χω 
 ship. vr,\is μίΧας. 
 
 12. Quare vero et nos duo extruimus rnontes alios super 
 alios, ut habeamus accuratiorem prospectum. 
 
 13. Equi niuufatigati svnt excilanti populura. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 Λη adjective is often put in the neuter gender, χξτ,μα, commonly, 
 χττ,μα, τ^α^/μα, and εξ'/ον, somdi/nea, being understood. 
 
 When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the nominative to a 
 verb, or substantive to an adjective, the verb is in the third person 
 singular^ and (he adjective in the neuter gender. 
 
 1. The g-ovcrnmcnt of the many 
 is not a good thing. 
 
 2. ]Vh\n is something so hard to 
 bt. pleased, and querulous, and mo- 
 ruse. 
 
 3. "Wealth is a coicardhj and 
 pitiful thing, fond of life. 
 
 4. Wisdom alone of possessions 
 is immortal. 
 
 5. First then, do thou answer 
 this unto us, if we assert true things, 
 or things that arc not true ? 
 
 6. Yes ; for ihc light was a 
 pleasant things and to die, dreadful, 
 and to be avoided. 
 
 7. It is iiot good that man be 
 alone. 
 
 8. To karn, is venj pleasing, not 
 only to the lovers of wisdom, but 
 also to the rest of men. 
 
 9. IT Or art thou so wise a man 
 that it has escaped thy observation, 
 that one's country is a thing more 
 deserving of honour, and more to 
 be revered, anrl holier in its nature, 
 than both mother and father, and 
 ciic rest of one's progenitors ? 
 
 Oox αγαίο; <7cXi/Xoii'a- 
 
 Vl*i. 
 
 Οότω δυίίαξίίτος τ;ς ειμί 
 
 χαι ό-ιΙχοΧοζ. 
 
 Δί(λο5 ό ίτλοι-τοί:, χα» 
 φιλοψυρ^οό xaxoj. 
 
 Σο^ια μονοί ό χτήμα 
 αίανατο^. 
 
 ΪΙξωτον 0-JV ί^ω οί^ος 
 aroxenw,"'^ fi αληίη; λ£- 
 J ui, η ουχ αληρη^. 
 
 Λ'αι• τ,δ\;ς γαξ 5ΐμι ο 
 φως, χαι ό"«' ς•ί.•'νημι, JiiV'.j 
 χαι φίυ'κτΒος. 
 
 Ου χαλο?, ειμι•^ ό πν- 
 i^wffo? μονο^. 
 
 Alavdavu;, ου μηνον ό φι- 
 λοοΌφο? τ,δνζ, άλλα χαι ό 
 άλλο?. 
 
 II ούτω; ειμί οΌφο<; ύο*• 
 τε λαν^ανω"'^ ίυ," ότι μη. 
 Tr;jC τε χαι ηταττ,ξ χαι ό 
 αλλο5 τ-^ο^ονο; άσαίΤ, τι. 
 μιοί ίιμι flraf^if, χαι ίεμ- 
 \ύς, χαι n^iog ; 
 
GREEK EXERCISKS. 
 
 53 
 
 10. All the poets with one voice 
 sing, that both temperance i.s a 
 good (kins', n.nd justice, but a ihiag 
 difficulty and requiring labour. 
 
 11. To imilaie, is naiural unto 
 men from boyhood ; and in this 
 respect they differ from the rest 
 of animals, in that man is a most 
 
 . i'/iitative (animal), and acquires the 
 first rudimpnt^ of his knowledge 
 through imitation. 
 
 12. We received Oedipus, and 
 those with him, when unfortunate, 
 and Λνβ have done mani/ other 
 
 friendly r.nd honourable things to the 
 Thebans. 
 
 13. I speak those things which 
 I have seen Avith my father, and 
 ye do the things ichich yc have seen 
 with your father. 
 
 14. That thing which a pilot is 
 in a ship, a charioteer in a chariot, 
 a leader in a chorus, law in a city, 
 a general in an army, the same 
 thing is God in tlie world. 
 
 15. To dιψarί from men is no- 
 thing dreadful, if there are gods ; 
 for they Avou'd not encompass you 
 with evil; but if either there are 
 none, or they do not care for hu- 
 man affairs, ichat is it to me to live 
 
 ΤΙας ΐΓοιητη? εξ ί'^ς 
 (ίτομα ίμ,νίυ, ως χαΧος μίν 
 ό (ίωφξοίίυνί) τε χαι ο m- 
 χακ)>ϊυνν„ χαλίτο5 μεντ»;, 
 χαι i-mvovog, 
 
 '0"« μιμεω,"* (Τυμ^υτο^ 
 ο αν&ξω'!Τος SX Ta»gP ειμί• 
 χαι ούτος διαφίξω ό σ.ΚΚοζ 
 ζωον,ε ότι μιμη -ixog ε^τ», 
 χαι Ό μ.α6ή(ίις coijoo"* 6ιλ θ 
 μιμηίΊί ο 'ΐτξ-^ιτος. 
 
 'Ο Οι^ιτοι/ίΓ, και ό μετΛ 
 εχίΐ'-ος,ε εχτιιτίω^κ ννοδί- 
 χομαι,* Jtai 'ετίξος «οΧυς 
 
 χαι ενϋοξοί TPcs Θ-ηζαιος, 
 
 Ε^'ω 05 Όξαν r'u^a. ο 
 τατηρ ε^'ω, οϋτος XaXfw, 
 χαι ΰυ ουν ός ό^αω ναξιχ » 
 τατηρ (f-j, οίτος -ττοιεω. 
 
 'Οίτε» εν ντ,υζ κι/βερν»;. 
 ττ,ς, εν α^μα ο= ηνίοχος, εν 
 χοξος δε χο^υφαιο^, εν iro- 
 >.ΐ5 οε νομο.ί, εν (ίτξατο<τ(. 
 δον δε τ,γεμων, ο\ιτος Θϊος 
 εν χούμ,ος. 
 
 Ό Je εξ avS^u-jfog a«f- 
 ^ομαι,® ειμίν ofog ειμί, 
 ojJiis icivoj- xaxoj j -α^ Cu 
 oyx av τ'ερι§αλλω•^ η 5; ει 
 
 ftynj•' ό a,y&^unrSiog,-S «rig 
 
 in a world void of gods, or void of f^'W ζαω εν χοίμο? xsvof 
 prondence 1 ύεος,ε η *^ονοια- χενο^ ; 
 
 "Ω5 -χαΧειτος μεν χα/ εί^ 
 ανό^ωττος αξγος τ^εφω,"» 
 •τΓολυ 5' ετι -χαΚενος οιχος 
 οΧος- ηταςΡ δε •)(αΚειίύζ 
 (ίτρατια ^ξγος τρεφω. 
 
 16. Since it is a difficult thing 
 to rnaintaia even one man in idle- 
 ness, and still far more difficult, a 
 Avhole family ; but most difficult 
 of all, to maintain an {irmy in idle- 
 ness. 
 
 17. Hi WMfta quidem dicunt atque /?r(?cfora, sed nihil vaX^V 
 
 Kgunt. 
 
 EiJ 
 
54 
 
 CREEK EXERCISE?. 
 
 18. Perniciocissimum est, non modo domum suam destruere. 
 Bed etiam corpus et animam. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 An adjective or participle is sometimes put in a different gendeir 
 from the substantive with which it stands, as agreeing with 
 some other gubstantive understood. 
 
 1. The remaining- tribes con- 
 tinue practising these exercises 
 among• one another. 
 
 2. Their seven brave children 
 liaving died, whom Adrastus, king 
 of the Argives, led. 
 
 3. I opened, and I behold a 
 child bearing a bow, also wings 
 and a quiver. 
 
 4. Ο children, ovcrshaJuwed wiih 
 .^upplianl boughs. 
 
 5. Receive the two children of 
 my brother, the jnost beautiful of 
 ilie gods. 
 
 6. Ο my child, unhappy above all 
 men. 
 
 7. flow deep you slept, son, 
 who (hd not leap up ? But how 
 then did I'lysscs escape ? 
 
 S. I say that expression is the 
 iIιI^>Γprctation (of thought) by a 
 ill a]ij)ellation, irhich has the same 
 ]ΐον,(Γ in poetry as in prose. 
 
 ?) Teach ye all nations, bap- 
 ti/iniT than in the name of the 
 Kaiher, and of the Son, and of the 
 Holy Gliosi. 
 
 10. IT Kemembpr the.<e things, 
 ijiy d'or son, and having gone wiih- 
 in the \y\x\U, repel the fierce hero, 
 
 Ό μίνω φυΚτ,, Siujui. 
 νι^οααι? ούτοί"* τ^οί αλ. 
 
 Θνγ,ιίχω^ έττα ^fwaioi 
 τεχνον,& ό? Αξγΐιος ανοζ 
 Αδξαίτος αγω.^ 
 
 Avotyu," χαι βξίφος μΐν 
 ειίοξω, φέξω τοξον, cr-irv^ 
 τε χαι φα^ΞτΡη. 
 
 Ω τεκνον Ίχτ-ηριος χ}χί6',ς 
 εχ(ίτε:^ω.' 
 
 'Ττοΰίχομαι'"^ ό αδεΧ. 
 φος ο Τϊλνον 6jo, ό χαΧος ό 
 β'.ος. 
 
 Ω Tfxvov, cs.^i 'ζας χαμ.. 
 μο^ο? φως. 
 
 Ώς 'Saduc* xr.rxaij,l•^•' ω 
 τεχνον, Ις ουχ ε•ι.όο^-ω : 
 Ό δε ονν Οδ^ΰδε^ς -ζω; 
 διuφε■J•\ ω ; 
 
 Αεγω Χεξις ειμί ί δία 
 ό όνομα»?!»? ίί'μηνίΐα, i.c'•" 
 χαι fri ό εμμεΓ^οΓ,!'!? χαι 
 ετί ό λο^ο^Ρϊ εχω ό a-jrug 
 ύ^ναμίί:, 
 
 ΙΜαόί-.τΕ^ω^ cnj ο εί'νο?, 
 ,οαττίςω αυτοί ει; ό όνομα 
 ίι ταττ,ξ, χαι ό ΐιίοί, χαι ^> 
 ayio.c τνευμα. 
 
 Ό^' μναω,™* φιΧο? τίπ- 
 νον, αμονω δε δτ,ιος a\r,f, 
 τειχοί^' εντός ειμί,'' μηύί 
 
GR 
 
 Ακ 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 55 
 
 nor stand as an antagonist to this 
 man ; for if he shall have slain 
 thee, my beloved offspring, ivhom 
 I myself broiight forth, swift dogs 
 ■will devour thee, far a\vay from 
 both of us, at the ships of the 
 Greeks. 
 
 1 1 . WHien he saw the Λvoman 
 pitting on the ground, and the 
 dead man lying, he wept for the 
 misfortune, and said, Alas ! Ο 
 good and faithful soul, thou art 
 gone then, having left us ! 
 
 12. Steites have made death the 
 punishment for the greatest crimes, 
 as not being eible to restredn injustice 
 by ihe fear of a greater evil. 
 
 13. The barbarians are, by na- 
 ture, fond of money, and despising 
 dangers, they either provide Avhat 
 is necessary for their sustenance, 
 by incursion and invasion, or pur- 
 chase peace for great rewards. 
 
 14. Gentes ambulant in vanitate 
 Dei. 
 
 •πεξ γαξ tfu καί•αχ-7ίινω,^* 
 φιλο^ <)αλο{Γ, ίς τΐ'λτω^ αυ- 
 τό?, avej(?; Cu μ.εγα εγω,^ 
 Α^^ειοί Ίταξα νηυί, χυων 
 ταχί.'^ χατεδω."*'^ 
 
 E'ffsi δ; ειδω' Ό γυνή 
 χαμαι καίημαι, και δ νε- 
 χξος κίΐμαι, δαχξυω τε ε<χι 
 h 'κα^ος,'^ xci scw,^ φευ, 
 ω αγαύης και "Κΐΰίος ψυχτ;, 
 οιχομ.αί δη «■ττολίίτω^ εγω. 
 
 Ό croXis £*( ό μ-ΐγαζ 
 οίδικημα'• (^ημια ύανα-ος 
 τοιεω, ύς ουκ αν, μεγο^ 
 κακο5 φόβο?, ό α(5ΐλΐα 
 '•καυω.^α 
 
 Φυ(ίίς, το βαξζαξον φι. 
 λοχ^ηματον, και κίνδυνος? 
 καταφρονΐω," η Jia εττι- 
 δ^ομηίί και έφοδος ο "χξει- 
 ωδ-ής""^ <Χξοζ ό /3ioc; "ττοΡί^ω,™ 
 η μ^εγας μκίύοςε ό ειρήνη 
 αντικαταλλαττω.™ 
 sensus sui, alienati a \ita 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Tjyo u;• 7nore substantives lingular have a verb, adjective, or rela- 
 tive plural ; if they be of different persons or genders, the verb 
 or adjective will agree with the most icorthj ; if they signify 
 things tvithout life, the adjective is commonly in the neuter. 
 
 1. A fox and a goat, being thirsty, 
 descended into a well. 
 
 2. A bat, a bramble, and a cor- 
 morant, having formed ΐ\ partnership, 
 resolved to lead a trading life. 
 
 Αλωττηξ και τξαγος, δι• 
 ψαω, είζ φξεαξ καταβαίνω.® 
 
 Νυκτε^ι^, και βάτος, κα< 
 ο.ώυ\α, εταιξεια. -ϊτοίεω,•"^ 
 
56 
 
 <;rf.ek kxkrcibes. 
 
 3. Auhis ΛΙαηΙίαε iind Curnelius 
 Sylla were sent, unto whom I3t)c- 
 chus sail!, that he made war upon 
 ihe Romans on account of Marius. 
 
 4. I go away to Crasus ami 
 SarJanapalus, being about to dwell 
 near t/i^m. 
 
 5. i^iinon Peter, and Tht/tnas, 
 and JS'alhanacl, were together. 
 
 6. Peter and John answering 
 to them, said, It" it be just before 
 (rod, to hear you rather thaii God, 
 jii.lgc ye. 
 
 7. And aU the me.i and w^men 
 wcrtfair. 
 
 8. Dost thou nor see tliat shame 
 ζχΛ fear are innate in men ? 
 
 9. A-s stones, and bricks, anrl 
 y'iece.^ of timber, and tile, when 
 scattered about in confueion, are 
 ufif/ul in no respect. 
 
 10. H We are present for the 
 •purpose of -delibtTatinir respect- 
 ing war and peace, xchich posse.^s 
 the greatccl influence in the life of 
 iiion. 
 
 11. For indeed tliis very earth, 
 and the stont^, and the wholo./'/acc 
 hcri', an injured and waited. 
 
 !2 And hi« mother said to him, 
 I^)n, wliy didst thou tlins to \is ? 
 behold tliy y'uther and 1 grieving 
 and Surrificing w^iif^^ce/cTiig thee. 
 
 13 <AaiJ-ihe Lord paid to Jo- 
 shua, Lo I uive into thy hand Jc- 
 ncho, and her Xi;;"•, being powerful 
 in strenirth. Now do thou set thy 
 soKlitrri in α circle round her. 
 
 ric-arij^ Au>.cj MaX>Jo; 
 Jcai Kofj^Xing Συλλα?, ίς 
 
 Ετι ό Kf'it'Jcg χαι Σα^- 
 JavaraXf.j aciiy-i, ΐ7Χη<Γ»ον 
 oixjw ajToiT. 
 
 Ειμ» όμου Σιαοο* Πί- 
 τί&ί, χαι Θωαα;, και ,Να- 
 ίαναηλ. 
 
 Ό δε Τί;τξ-^ xat lujavvr^ 
 «•jTsx^iVo^ttil'^ «r^oj ajTo; 
 fiTij'' El J.Kaio; eiai ϊνω- 
 ΠΛ ό Θεΐί:, *j axoju) ααλ. 
 λοι/ t; ό Θζος, xiivw.' 
 
 ό ^υν») f/u,i. 
 
 Αΐ(5ω5 ic χαι ^ο?οί cv}^ 
 
 "Ωίίτί^ λκ^οί: τί, χαι 
 cXjviof, χαι ^jXov, χαι χ£- 
 ραμορ, CTOXTuj μ£ν Jittw," 
 cj5iv γΐΎιίιμο; ίιαι. 
 
 ΊΙνω i^txXrjiia^ij^ cifi 
 co /^μοί: και 5ΐ*>;ν>;, Ις μ;, 
 γας δυΐιαμις 5χω, ίν ό βκς 
 
 Όοε μ£ν ^αβ ο ^r, και 
 ό λϋ5ο>, χαι άίταρ ό totoj 
 ό ενίαίί, oiai(>:iP'.ji ειμί 
 ΧΜ1 xara^^uix-jj. 
 
 Και ECij' crPo.c ajrof 5 
 yLr)~r,ξ ouros" Τίχνον, τι 
 Toifuj f^'ij oiItw.c ; 1 5ου ό 
 Tn-r,^ ffj xfti i^'tJ ϋίϋναομπι 
 χαι >.uc£w"' i^r.Tfij tfy. 
 
 Και ίτω' K-iiof «"foj 
 Ιη^ου?, liou Syu τα^αίι- 
 5^^μι CiTG^^rifiov rfu ό Iivi- 
 χω, και ό βαδιλΣ'^ς αυτός, 
 ίυνατορ Γιμι ίν ΐ(ί)(υς. Ej 
 έ« ΐΓ£;Ίβ'τημ4* a\)TQ(^ ί μά- 
 χιμος χυχλοί. 
 
GR££K EXERCISES. 
 
 57 
 
 14. No, but vain glory, and/^nVf, Ou, άλλα χίνοίο^ια, χαι 
 and much madness ; these .things τύφος, xai -κοΧυς κο^υ,ξα• 
 bilfned γόη to a coal. ' ^ ούτο? Cu αιτανδξαχοω. 
 
 15. JVep/Mm<s, et jMno, et JMinerva-machinabmitur vincere 
 eum.» Ν ' ^ 
 
 16. -Cyrus et Cyaxares cum instriixissent (suos) exsjrectabanl, 
 tanquaia, si accederent hostes, pugnaturi. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 The genitive case of a substantive is often put absolutely, the for• 
 mer substantive being understood. 
 
 The genitive case'is of ten put absolutely, tvsxct, χα.ξΐν, or some case 
 of Tij or ε'ις, being understood. 
 
 1. Lampon the so7i of Thrasy- 
 cles, and Athcnagoras the son of 
 Archestratides, and HegesistraLus 
 the son of Aristagoras. 
 
 2. Ο unhappy woman, and 
 daughter of an unhappy father. 
 
 3. It was Mary Magdalen, and 
 Joanna, and Mary the mother of 
 James, and the other Avomen wiih 
 them, who told these things unto 
 the apostles. 
 
 4. He thereupon took up his 
 abode in the palace of Croesus. 
 
 5.. Let him bid his mother re- 
 turn to her father'' s house. 
 
 6. For since those who li\-ed 
 before us had descended to the 
 abade of Hades. 
 
 7. When Agesilaus crossed over 
 into Asia, and was laying waste tl-?e 
 country of the king, Tissaphernes 
 made a truce with him. 
 
 8. I commend you for your 
 prudence, but hate you for your 
 timi4ii%' 
 
 9: T-hej- call you happy because 
 of the power of your Avords. 
 
 Ααμ,ττων ί Θ^α^υκλη?, 
 και Αύψίχγοξας ο Αξγ^ίΰ- 
 ΐξατιδ-ης, χαι ΊΊ-.ησιίτ^α- 
 rog ο Α^ί(ίταγοξθίς. 
 
 Ω ίυίίτηνοί, και ίϋίτη- 
 \οζ ^ατνιξ. 
 
 Ειμ-ί δ: ό Μα^^αληνη 
 ΜαΡία, και Ιωάννα, χα» 
 Μα^ια laxuQoc, και ό λβι- 
 «rof tfuv auToff, ό Χίγω^ 
 cr^c; ό ατοίτολοί ou-roj. 
 
 "Ο μεν ξγ] δίαιτα εχω^ 
 εν K^oitfoj. 
 
 Μητ-ήξ ες 'π'ατηξ avwyw 
 α-ττονίομαι.^ 
 
 Ετει γαξ ούτοί w^o εγω 
 ^αω= ες Άίηί χατεξ-χρμαι. 
 
 Αγ-ηιϊι\αος εις ΑοΊα ότ3 
 διαβαίνω,^ και ό'^-ΒαιτΊλευ^ 
 λυμαινω,™ Τισ'ο'αφε^νη^ α- 
 νοχή συντιόημι."'^ 
 
 Ζηλω rfu ό vouf, ό 5s 
 δειΧια (ίτΜγω. 
 
 Ευίαιαονι^ω Λ ό λοτοΕ 
 ο ouvay-fj• 
 
58 
 
 CRSKK EXERCISES. 
 
 10. C^Tiis liaviiViT lioanl llii.-, 
 j>iiii"'l him on a<:count of the niis- 
 
 fortvne. ' 
 
 11. It \?• not rigiiL to Manie this 
 man fuT the thins^s that have been 
 omitUd^ so in\ich as to commend 
 him for his ingenuity and diligence 
 i/sc/f 
 
 12. I know snrnr of those of the 
 snin»•! aije ae, or a little oUlt-r tlian 
 nn.-ilf. 
 
 13. Anii that he havini? taken 
 •svn^ of tkft fUelSt l^ound Socrates 
 ••ith them. 
 
 14. I.oailin.e him out of the 
 vay, nmlcr some palm trees, he 
 ordororl them to spread 8i>me of the 
 ^Median caiyds iiiidor him. 
 
 15. He married o«« o/'/^i </ciU^A- 
 tf'rs of Ailrustus. 
 
 IG. The fieh called Cephalus is 
 onr of those that live in the fen». 
 
 17. The king of the Romans, 
 being now old, goes io the house of 
 a teacher. 
 
 18. !Γ And often indeed before 
 thi.", through thy whole life, I 
 have been wont to esteem lliec 
 happy on account of this disposition. 
 
 19. And learn i\Uo from me, my 
 son, said he, these most important 
 tiling.-! ; you .=hould never run iiuo 
 dangi-r, eiUier in your own pi-rson 
 or with your army, contrary to the 
 pacrifin•.-* and augurit-s. 
 
 20. And these elder men serve 
 ill war .no more out of thnr own 
 country^ but ri'mainiiig at home, 
 ihey judge all j)ulilic and private 
 things. 
 
 21. In the ti-nt then• was one of 
 liie capiaih.•', railed Aglaitiiias; a 
 pi'rson who, as to his manner, xras 
 one of the harsher class of men. 
 
 6ος oncretfu} αυτός. 
 
 OUtoj ό αντ,ξ οοχ oC-tJi w 
 αιτιηομαι* ό exkeirru,'^ («Sw 
 
 αξιοί'* tcaivEw. 
 
 Έγω EnJeu™* » ίμος r>.i- 
 
 Και auTof λοτμ?αν^/' β 
 «•αινια avaJcij ό Σ'^χξαττ,ς. 
 
 Araycj αυΓος ό ίοος εξα, 
 iro φοίνιξ» τις^ ό ^Ιτ,διχος • 
 νίΚος itroQaWu χίΧϊυυ 
 
 Αδ^γ,/ίΐος δ; "^αμ^Βω^-ίυ- 
 γατ^)ξ. 
 
 Ό ιχ^ος Ό Κέφαλος J t* 
 6 ίλοί /?tcije ειμί. 
 
 Ό 'Γωμοιορ /3αβΊλΗυ5, 
 γ•ι\ξκίχω r,6r„ iff δίδαΰχα- 
 λ.ο; φοιταω. 
 
 Κα' vjWaxif μεν δτ, (fu 
 χαι cpcrifov εν ίπ? ό β>ος 
 Ιυίαιμονις^;^ ό r^OToj. 
 
 Mffviav'jj* όε ε^ω, ω 
 Toi.c, χαι Όδΐ, φημ», ό με• 
 jat:' ταξα γα.ξ Ίίξον χαι 
 oiwvii: μ>;Γε ίν CSuuroi μr,- 
 6.•τοτε, μϊ;ίε εν ό σ7^«ιια, 
 
 Xr.JjVs'j'J. '■ 
 
 Ο1ι7ος δι γΐζαιης σΤξα' 
 v^s\j(J" ufv ουχετι εξω ό' 
 iajroy, 01X01 is μένω, ίι. 
 xa^ij ι 73 xoivof cnj χηι β 
 
 I'^IC.C. 
 
 F.v ι ίχηνη ς-υ^5(ανα.'' T»f 
 ειμ!^ ό Tfl^iapj^oc^ Α^λαϊ- 
 νιδας ο-'ομα," a»7;f,. τρο- 
 irof," ό (Τ^^υφ'οί avJj^oj-aOj, 
 
GREEK KXEIiCISES* 
 
 99 
 
 Μη γαξ ίίμί εχ Δαξίης 
 
 ο 'Τ(?ταβ'')ΓηίΓ, Ό Α^ίαμ^ίΤ, 
 ο Αξμ.νης, Ό TsTfTTncr, Ό Κν- 
 
 *■/]<:, ό Αγ^α.ψ.ενϊ]ς ^ινβμαι,"•ί 
 
 . 2δ, r^or Ι should not be descend- 
 ed froin Darius, the sun of Hys- 
 (aspes, the son of Arsa>nes, the son 
 of Armnee, the eon of Te'ispes, the 
 
 ^ sou of -Cyrus, the so» o/" Camby- 
 
 * ses, the so« of Teispes, the 5i^« o/* 
 Achtsmenes, if I did not take in- 
 •stant vengeance upon the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 23. Si \-elIes hospitem impellere, te, cum in urlcm ipskts 
 venisses, accipere, quid faceres 1 
 
 24. Et illic germana; nostra;, • leges qua; apud irferos sunt, 
 *haudquaquam benigne te excipieut. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 Adjectives signifying plenty, Λvorth, condemnation, power, 
 difference, desire, memory, knowledge, and their opposites, 
 . f'' quire the genitive. 
 
 Verbals compounded with the privative a, and those ending in ixofj 
 govern tL• sreiiitive. 
 
 1. Life is fidl of many cares. 
 
 2. The, Λvhole world is full of 
 traitors. 
 
 3. Our houses are destitute of 
 friends, hut ftdl of assassins. 
 
 4. To me then, Socrates, being 
 yuch a man, seemed to be deserv- 
 ing of honour rather than of death. 
 
 5. Think that they who conceal 
 fire worthy of the same punishment 
 Avith those who openly couimit 
 offenou. 
 
 C. To be master over sleep, so 
 as to'be able both to lie doAvn late 
 and to rise up early, and to take 
 no.repose, if there should be any 
 n»ed. ||^ 
 
 Πολύ? μ^<ίτος ίίμι ϋ"« 
 ΙΙας ό οικουμ.Ηνο^'' μεί- 
 
 Στε^η φίλος εξ-ημος, οΐ 
 (5' ατολλ-οντί^ νΧεος. 
 
 Ε^ω μ,ίν 5η, ΣωχξαΐΎ^, 
 TciouTog ε»μι, Οοχεω" τιμή 
 αξιο^ ίίμι μάλλον, τ^ 6α- 
 να,τος. 
 
 Νομίι^ο ό αντοί ειμί ζγ,- 
 μια άξιος ό ffuyx^uvrt^ « 
 εξαμα^τανω. β^ . 
 
 Ό"* OS• ύ*νο5 ίγκξαττι^ 
 Είμ»/ ωίτε ίυναμοΜ xcu 
 οψ» χοιμαω,?•* χαΤ ίτ^ωι 
 «νκίτημι,• χα» o^^urvsw,* 
 ει η J?i. 
 
60 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 7. Yon are guUiy of the same 
 ignorance with others. 
 
 8. Doing nothing at variance 
 either it'iVA nis country or his own 
 disposition. 
 
 9. And thoTi shall not be wiih- 
 oiii tasting of all dtlightful things, 
 anfl sluilt hve laithout experiencing 
 troublesome things. 
 
 10. Melanipus, the son of Amy- 
 theoft, appears to roe not to have 
 been ignorant of, but icdl acquaint- 
 ed with, this sacred rite. 
 
 11. 1ΓΙ say that those chiefly 
 are worthy of praise, who being 
 nothuig at first, nevertheless have 
 advanced themselves to a high 
 station, having appeared worthy of χη. 
 command. 
 
 12. It is incumbent on a gene- 
 ral to be capable of providing those 
 tilings which appertain unto war, 
 and capable of j/rocurrng necessaries 
 for his .ί^οΚϋίτε. 
 
 13. It is peculiar to man to love 
 even those that oifend ; and this 
 comes to pa.ss, if yon consider 
 that they are 3'our relations, and 
 err through ignorance, and un- 
 willingly ; and that after a little 
 you shall both die; and, above 
 
 ει,αι ό aXXoc. ^ 
 
 OUTS ίαυτοϋ *a-*ijj ours •' 
 
 TPOflTOJ. 
 
 Και ό μεν Tfcrvoj ουίε,'ί; 
 αγζ•^(ί~οζ ε/μι, ό Jg χαλε^τοδ 
 
 Δοχευ εγω Μελααιτου^ ί 
 Α,αυίεων, ό dj/Jia. oiroff ο«χ 
 ει,αι αοαηί, αλλ' εμιτειρο^. 
 
 Φημ,ι ούτοί μαλιίτα ειται- 
 νος άξιος ειμί, Idog ί μη(5εΐ5°^ 
 εξ οίξχτ) ειμι, όμω^ ε-τι με^α 
 ττξο-χ^ξΒω,^ a^ioff«ooxiw* α^- 
 
 Πα^αιίχΓνίαο'τιχοί ό tij ό 
 ΑΤολεμοί, ό ίτρατηχος* ειμι 
 χίη, και «όρι(Ττιχο$ ό ειτιτη- 
 όειο5 ό ίτ^ατιως-ηί. * 
 
 all, that it did not hurt you ; for 
 it did not make your mmd worse 
 than it was before. 
 
 14. Et quum intueretur omncm Hellespontum. navibije 
 roopcrtiun, omnia vero littora atcjue Abydenorum catnpo* 
 huTninibus rcfcrtos, ibi so beatum proidicavil. 
 
 I Jio; av^putc; φιΧΐ:^ xm 
 ό vlaiu'S οότος δί δίνομαι, 
 εαν (ΤυμίΤΡοίΤτιτΤη ffoi, οτι 
 χαι (ί•ογγ£νΊ]ς, χα ι δια αγ- 
 νοια,• χαι asxuv ύμαξτανω' 
 και ύς μετά ολι^ο^ αμφο- 
 Ti^og ίνηίχω, χαι, τ^ο ι:ας', 
 ότί ου βΧαΊτΙω" (fu• oj γαξ ο 
 ίί^εμονιχον tfu xoxof iroisu η 
 ΊΤξοίάεν ειμι. 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 «1 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 The comparative degree requires the genitive, when it is translated 
 by than. 
 
 1. The possession of virtue is 
 jnorc excellent than wealth, and more 
 v,seful than noble birth. 
 
 2. An honourable death is more 
 tligible than a base life. 
 
 3. We suffer throughout life, 
 other things more lamentable than 
 this. 
 
 4. There is a time \vhen silence 
 will be better than speech^ and there 
 is a time when speech is better than 
 silence. 
 
 5. If these things be just, they 
 are better than wise things. 
 
 6. But I think no acquisition 
 more noble or more splendid for a 
 rnan, especially a ruler, than virtue, 
 and Justice, and generosity. 
 
 7. The servant is not greater 
 than his master, nor the apostle 
 greater than he who sent him. 
 
 8. In order to have men obedi- 
 ent, notliing is more useful than to 
 seem to be wiser than those who are 
 governed. 
 
 9. \\Ti6ther are these mathe- 
 maticians superior as to bocorning 
 better than other men 1 
 
 10. IT Do you ν,Λύν, tell me, 
 having gone about to inquire of 
 one another, Is there any nevrs 1 
 ΥοίΛίά\ΐ\.\ can be more novel than 
 >h^^an a Mg-^donian namely re- 
 •I'umg Greece ireneath his sway? 
 
 11. But if the enterprise appear 
 greater than the former one, and 
 iRore iabaricus and more danger- 
 
 O α^ετη χτηΰΊί "ίτλουτί^ 
 ■Λ2ζ\ττ{^ΐί, Χξ'^'ί'Ιί'Οζ ίε εύγε• 
 ν£<α ειμί. 
 
 Αιρετοί; xaXog όανατο^ ο 
 
 Έτε^οί αΙτος, ι(αξβ. β 
 ^ωη,* ίταΰ'χω'"'' οιχτξος. 
 
 Ειμί 5' oil Λ}/η Xoyo? 
 χρειττων ^ινομαι^ αν £<μι 
 
 δ' ού tft^rj "Κογος, 
 
 Ει SixoLwg, ι (ίοφος Χζειτ, 
 
 των ό5ε. 
 
 Έγω δί, ουδείς νομίζω ji 
 αντ^ξ, αΧΚως τε χα» α^ων, 
 καΚος ειμί χτήμα, ουδέ λαμ- 
 προί:, αξετΎ], χαι iixaiotfuvij, 
 χα» ^ενναιοτϊ]^. 
 
 Ουκ ίιμι δο\ι\ος μέγας h 
 χυξιος αυτο£, ούτε ατοίτολος 
 μέγας ό πεμνω^^ αυτός. 
 
 ίχο, ου(5εΐί; ειμί ανυύιμος, νι 
 φξονιμος^ δαχεω^ είμι δ αξ. 
 χω.ε 
 
 Τίοτερην *^οεχω oCrog ό 
 μηθτ,μαηχος,'η ξος ο /οελτιων 
 γίνομαι" « αΧΚος ανβξωιτος ; 
 Η βουΧομαι, εΐίτε εχω, *ε- 
 ^ιειμι* αλλήλων νυνόανομαι, 
 λε^ωΡ τις xaivog ; Τι? ya* 
 «ν ^ινομαι^'* ούτο£Γ χαινο?, η 
 Μαχεδων avr,^ ΛβίταίΓολί» 
 μεω ό Έλλα? ; 
 
 Εαν δί μέγας ό ^^αξι^ ο 
 ιι'^οσ'όεν φαίνω,™ χαι ειηττϋ- 
 νος, χα» ί'ϊιχινδυνςί, αξιοω ΐ| 
 
6! 
 
 CAEEC EXERCISES. 
 
 e\u~, to request either that he h?.v- 
 m/T persuaded lead us, or having 
 l»con persuaded, send us away to α 
 iiriiilly country. 
 
 12. Besides thi.s i.i much more 
 nhsi/rd (han those things. For, ob- 
 serving closely, I foiind those same 
 persona i)racli.sintr the lhin?s most 
 contrary to their own words. 
 
 13:^ .short syllable is that v/hich 
 liAs a wiovt or shortened vowel, not 
 at the end of a word ; so that be- 
 tween it and the vowel in the next 
 syllable, there be not more conso- 
 itants than one simple one, but either 
 »ne, or none. 
 
 11. If thou fmdest anv thing 
 tciier, in Inunan life, than justice^ 
 irtifh, tempcranni•, ixud /ortiluric, be- 
 it><? turned wiih thy whole mind 
 to It, enjoy that which is found the 
 l»cbt, 
 
 15. My Father, who has given 
 Uicm to in:', is greater than all; 
 an«l no one can wrest them out of 
 the hand of my Father. 
 
 IG. Vidcs homines dis.«idente3 
 *actantes hominibus nihih disrnis. 
 
 9ξος φιλιοί (χω^α) άφι^ι. 
 
 En δί TiXuf »ir»g ίχβιν»^ 
 
 είξκίλ.ω,'^ εΐΓίΓίΐί=ω, ενάντιο; 
 ό αυτό; λβ^οό** £Τ(»•τ)όίι*ω. 
 
 BPajfus ίιμί ίυλλα^τ, • 
 ίχ:>^ βξαχ-^-; .pyvriSv r, βξα• 
 χυνω,Ρ3 μη 5-τι i-iXcjS Xsjt;" 
 fjT'jjs Cjf, μ»ταξυ αυτοί χαι 
 β SV ό (ξr,ς ίυλλαεν) ^ων/;βν, 
 
 sig ά«λοο; άλλα ήτοι sl^ vj 
 μ>;δ• «ΐίΤ. 
 
 Ει μΓ; ζΡίΐΓτων ίϋ»ιο'χω, 
 £ν ί ανί?ω«•ινορ ,orf, Jixcuc- 
 (Τυντ), «λ-/)(?«ΐ'ϊ, ΰι^φ;ύί;^\ν,, 
 χαι ανό^ϋα, sci εχΕινο?," $ζ 
 όλο? β ψ"ι^χ»ΐ r^ercjj'"* • 
 χξατκίτος sifi(fx.-j.s ατο- 
 λαοω. 
 
 Ό 's'tt-rr? £-, ω, ό iii5cjvHf 
 Syw, ti-syos cai £(αι• χαι ςι.- 
 
 χ£ΐ^ ό 'Χατν,ζ tytti. 
 inter ee, et gravius 8»j« 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 Partitives, and word.'i used jmrtitivehj, comparatives, Sujerlalives, 
 indefinites, intrrrogativcs, ami some numerals, take ofiu then 
 the genitive plural. 
 
 1. JVowje of mortatS is a happy Θντ,το^^'^ίις siiu iKcu- 
 mnn. μων αν>;?. 
 
 2. And Sffwc o/" them also fell. Ό (5s xai αντος αβΌίνηί•- 
 
 8. The younger of the men.. Ό vfof η\ίξωτος. 
 
GREEK EXOeCISBZ. 
 
 06 
 
 9 4. Wilt thou avoid, then, both S ΤΙατίξον ouv spevyz."» L rs 
 the cities, Λvhich are governed by euvo^swe ceXig•^ xaj ό «νηί έ 
 good laws, an(i the most orderly of χοίμω? ; 
 mm ? 
 
 δ. For ichn of the Greeks, and 
 W/ho of the barbarians, does not 
 know ? 
 
 6. The\' killed near thirty of the 
 kght-armed men. 
 
 7. Not many of the Inhahitnyits 
 of the countrA' know, what thing• 
 this fable might import. 
 
 8. And, what is the greatest and 
 most glorious of all, thou seest 
 thine own tenitory increased, and 
 that of the enemy lessened. 
 
 9. But that I may know ererj 
 thinir, in what meata does he de- 
 light^? 
 
 10. But some of the enemy hav- 
 ing perceived this, again ran to 
 the river, and discharging their 
 arrows, wounded a few of the 
 iireeks. 
 
 1 1 . But Alcibiades pursued, 
 having both the cavalry and. one 
 hundred and twenty of the heavy-arm- 
 ed soldiers. 
 
 12. The rest of his ships, being 
 forty, he drew up, beneath the 
 wail. 
 
 13. Μ It is the easiest thing of 
 all to deceive one's self, for what 
 he wishes, that each one also be- 
 lieves. 
 
 14. Upon this, it appeared to 
 Xenophon that they ought to pur- 
 sue, and those of the heavy-armed 
 soldiers and targeteers who hap- 
 pened to be with him guarding 
 the rear, pursued. : but pursuing, 
 ihey took no one of the enemy. 
 
 15. In this pursuit there fell 
 wumy of the foot soldiers, and about 
 
 Έλλην, 7\ζ oi a /3K^§t>.e»c ; 
 
 A'rimrHM'jr' εγγύς ί"|ί«- 
 κοντα ό ψιλό?. 
 
 Ου ό e-ffi^w|»i ίΤο>.ι•ί 
 itfyjat, tic; ίτοτϊ οέτοί t y/t. 
 βολο^ια δϋνοίΐλα,ι. 
 
 Ό δί -τ ας [ΐίγας »«ι πα- 
 
 Ό ieiviv hi h':(t^ iiSsu,^ 
 
 Ό δ$ νο^-.ΐί.'Λος β ,«.ϊν τ^ς 
 αΐίΤίανομα),' ίταλιν •τξίγ^^'' 
 sirt ό νϋ~αιιοζ, χα» τοξί;.-*! 
 oXiycj ri-s-^uixui^ e Έλλην. 
 
 Α>Λίζιαδ•ης δ$ (Jiwxw,^ sp^w 
 
 Ejxotf» χαι έχατον. 
 
 Ό (5s λοι*05 ό νανί, TS^r- 
 τα ξαχο'η α $ιμι, ίίΤο ό TSij^tj 
 ανΐλκυω.* 
 
 'Γαίιοί άίτα^ ειμί α.έτ•••» 
 εξαναταω,^ ός γαξ /3βυλβ- 
 μαι, οΰτος ίχαιίτος χαι οομκι. 
 
 Εχ ούτο^, Ξενοφών Soxtw* 
 διωκτϊο^ ειμί/ και ίιωχω' 4 
 oirXiTyji και ό ιτελταίτη^ β 
 τυγ-χ^ίίνω^ (fuv αυτό? οτΤίίιίβ. 
 φυλακεω•? ίιωχω ίε ϋνύας 
 χα<Γαλαμ§ανω- ό τολεμιοί. 
 
 Εν ojrog ό διω^ίς δ ^ϊ^»ί 
 α'ττοόνησ'χω* croXwf, xosi 9 iff. 
 
64 
 
 OREE^ EXEKCISES. 
 
 eighteen of the cavalry ^erc taken 
 alive in the valley. 
 
 16. As are the eyes of bats to 
 the light which is by day, so is tlie 
 intelligence of our soul to thorfe 
 things wliich are by nature ihe 
 most manifest of all things. 
 
 17. In Lybia, the Carthaginians 
 govern and the Lybians are go- 
 verned ; which then of these dost 
 tliou think to live most plea.santly ? 
 Or, ff the Grecians, in whom thou 
 art th^'-self, which seem to thee to 
 ride mo.st pleasantly, those who 
 rule, or these who are ruled ? 
 
 18. lie believed, that thvse of 
 the persons who associated with hiin 
 thai embraced the things which he 
 approved, wfcdd be good friends 
 Luth 10 liimsclf and to others. 
 
 19. Cum et bruta aninuilia doceant, et faniulum ignnvum 
 ac incrtein nulla re dignum esse ducant, solos vero se ipso• 
 iicgligiuit, planum est ahjcctis eos scrvurum esse siHiilos. 
 
 20. Crilias quidem omnium in oligarchia avarissimus et 
 violentissimus fuit : Alcibiades autem omniurii in statu populari 
 ifUcmperantissimus el peiulantissimus et viulentissimus. 
 
 λα7.μ?ανω ΰι; Q>i7j.xai6ix.a. 
 
 'V-i-ni' ό ό '.unrecf:: ομ/ια 
 ir<"jg ό (fsyyos ?χω, ό με-α 
 
 ψυχή ό »οϋί ir^os ό, ό i'ji»;, 
 φανεροί •τας. 
 
 Εν ό Λι^Ι,η Ko(f)(r,iovi5i 
 
 ouTOg ojv irori'iiS ^,Ο'^ς οιμα» 
 ^αω J η ό Έλλην £ν Ις χαι 
 
 ό ατοίί^ομαι ό(Γ«•ε? auroj 
 ίοκιμα^ω,* ίακτου τ£ χβι 
 αλλοζ yi^.og αγο,ίος ίιμ*. 
 
 Oil ΑΓ. XXVII. 
 
 FTAfrt Είμι and γηαμαι signifij pos.^estion, property, i>r duty, 
 thcij govern the genitive. 
 
 Verbs of beginning, admiring, wanting, remembering, blam- 
 ing, valuing, sparing, and the like, with their contraries, govern 
 the genitive. 
 
 Verbs derived from comparatives, or in which the idea of com- 
 parison is involved, together with many verbs coining from 
 nouns, and equivalent in meaning to the primitive with the •«*- 
 Stantive verb, reijuirc the genitive. 
 
 1. It belongs to those %cho con- Ό «-«χτ, vixaw»^ χαι ••• 
 fucr in the battle, to conunand «j^^oj ίιμι. 
 also. 
 
GKEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 •s 
 
 2. To use Λ -iolence then is not 
 /λ; part of those who practise wis- 
 dom, but to do such things as these 
 is the part of those who possess 
 strength without reason. 
 
 3. It is the part of a villain, that 
 he die, having been condemned ; 
 but of a general, while fighting 
 νάύι the enemy. 
 
 4. It i.s the pari of those who 
 are involved in the greatest difficul- 
 ties, and destitute of resources, and 
 held hy neccs.?ity, and worthless too. 
 
 5. But when the victory belong- 
 (J to .dgesilnus. 
 
 6. I will go to that quarter, 
 tvhcnce it appears to me there is 
 an opportunity to begin the fight. 
 
 7. Unsocial, lawless, homeless 
 is he who delights in civil, cniel 
 icar. 
 
 8. He taught that the tempers 
 which scen^to be best, stand most 
 in need of iMtruction. 
 
 9. And they remember Aviih 
 pleasure their former actions. 
 
 1 0. For no one of the fugitives 
 m the dangers of hRlt^^lamcs 
 himself but hig- genera^^nd his 
 tomrades, and all rathe^ J 
 
 11. And all ihe citizens ^nd 
 neighbours, both men and women, 
 ihar&d in the feast. 
 
 12. And entertaining great hopes 
 that he will surpass all in the ροΛί^Γ 
 both of speaking and acting. 
 
 13. I saw even the best over- 
 CMne by the afections which tne^ .^ 
 cherished towards iheir children 
 and their wives. 
 
 •l-i'^In oifeiing up small sacri- 
 ficeefrom small means, he thought* 
 
 • Ojx ouv I φ^ονηοΊί a.(i\iuS 
 0"^ βιάζομαι, άλλα ό ΐ(ίχνζ 
 
 άνευ y\up.rj εχω^ ό roioyT•? 
 
 Καχου^χοί μεν ειμί, xetvu* 
 Κίτοίνη'ίχω•'' (ίτξίχττ,γοζ Of, 
 μσ.-χριχαι ο «τολεμίο^. 
 
 ΑτοΡο? ειμ» χαι α,αηχβνβ^ 
 χαι avuyxri εχω, χαι oCt»5 
 
 Ετει 5ί ό v(xr) Aj'T;5'i>^»g 
 ^'ίνομαι.Ρ" 
 
 Ej W δι ατειαι' εχειίε, 
 ό/?:ν ε^ω ioxsw χαι^ο^ ίιμι 
 «ρχω•" δ μάχη. 
 
 Αφξγιτ^)ξ, αίεμιο'τοί, ανίβ*- 
 Tfof ειμί εκείνος, Ις ιτο>^μος 
 ε^αμαι ε•τι5•/]μιο?, οχ^οει^. 
 
 Διόαίχ^ ότι ό ,β^λτιΤτο^ 
 ioxiw? ειμί φυ^τΊ^ μαλκΓτα 
 crai^sia ίεομαι. 
 
 Καί ϊ;0;ωί με^^αλαιβς 
 ίτ^'ηξίί μναω."* 
 
 OuJc γαρ εν ο ό *ολεμο5 
 xiviuvif ό φενγω^ οηδιις έαυ- 
 τ(3υ•^|(ί•ηχορεω, άλλα χαι ό 
 <!τξαττ]γος χαι ό (cov) νλη- 
 tfiov, χαι 'χας μάλλον. 
 
 Και #αί τολιτηδ, χαι ό 
 •κζοϋ-χωζος ανη^ χαι νυνη 
 μετέχω^ ό εο|•τη. 
 
 Και με^α^ ελ«Ίί εχω iraj 
 ίιαφε^ω ό"^ ίυναμαι*^ Xsyw 
 τε χαΓ 'ίΤξατ'Γω. 
 
 Ό^αω^ ό ετιόυμια ό τε^ι 
 ο •ταΐ5 χαι ό ^ννη q ^6λτιcft 
 ros νταομαι.κ 
 
 ©jfl'/a 5ε fjw? μιχ^ off α•?Γβ 
 μικ^ο?, ουίεν ή^'εομαι μείον i 
 
 F$J 
 
GRE£K EXERCISES. 
 
 ββ 
 
 thai he was in no respect inferior 
 Ιυ ih'jse who sacrificed much and 
 kirgely from many an<l extensive 
 rucuns. 
 
 15. Who will find a flame more 
 powerful than lighining, and a 
 lui^hty crash exceeding the thunder. 
 
 1 6. And he so increased the city 
 that it has become inferior to none 
 of the Grecian cities. 
 
 17. Thc3', by themselves, con- 
 lending• against those who were 
 riding over both all Jisia and Eu- 
 rope as ΪΛΪ as Macedonia. 
 
 IS. Having been unsuccessful, 
 he is not t^ountable to the state ; 
 tjut having been saved, will rule 
 Lhis land as usual. 
 
 19. Some time after, Inaro.=, 
 Λη African, the son of Psammiti- 
 *hu.-:, sfev,• Acha-mencs while ad- 
 liiinislaing the government of Egypt. 
 
 20. They look still many more 
 afcvo, iiJW| others, and the son of 
 '^rii\ii.^, who was Icada of the 
 
 l^niyii.^, \ 
 Aiassa <:> t.T. 
 
 
 Ός ίη χεξαυ^ος χξίιύίίΐΜ 
 
 TOj. 
 
 Krti οίτως αΐ/ξανω' i »β• 
 Χι?, ΰ<ίτε μ.ψ^ι: ό 'Ελ.λι,ν»^ 
 ΊίαΧις α-τολείτω.Ρ'' 
 
 Αυτός, χαιί'έαυτου, ayu^ 
 νιξομαι TPog ό xu^iivije Π 
 ΛΛα crag χα» ό Ku'wrri μί. 
 γ^ξΐ M-xxiiJivia. 
 
 όμοιω; Όδε xojgavoj χόο^ν. 
 
 Αχοι<Λ=ν>;5 £Tir^'.ci„ii,t 
 Ai^'jcTor, j(Povoi: μ£ί-£ΐΓ»•(-«ι 
 φονίυω^ Ιναξ(ύ( ό Υαμ,υιη- 
 χο?, ανηρ Αΐτ^. 
 
 Πόλο; εη ΛΚ^»? ^cjj #it>,* 
 χαι aXXcf, xato £ «jaCiXiia 
 
 cS} εται. 
 
 ΊΊί ^ αί ονχ||^α}'α^ομο:»* 
 avi,^ ixiivoi δΐ^ίτη, og >wm 
 
 21. IT For Λνΐιο v'Oi'l•! not at^^ 
 mire the can rage oJK iho.^e mc^ei 
 
 who i'liduTod to loiiTC ih<ir coun- fo ^wfcf χαι ό croXig ίχ>.ί»τ^Λ 
 Iry and city, having einbarkixl on ΊΝβομίν^,'' £ι.ς ό τξίτ,ξτ,ς t'x. 
 L»oajd their ships, for the sake» of βαινω,"^ ύίτε^ ό'»^ μη ό xeXow 
 not doinir what was ordered? 
 
 22. For when any one niay have 
 confi's.sud that it belongs to a com- 
 rnnnder to prescribe what mugt be 
 done, he ha.s ihown that it is the 
 '♦'"'V 'f (i subject to obey. 
 
 23. Who not only thernscfte^ 
 neglect neatness of person, but 
 eyen ridicule those who are car>ful 
 a^out it. 
 
 21 Wjiinever the Dvi^ may 
 
 ΌιτοΓί γαζ ης ίμολο> lu;^ 
 ο μίν αξ'χ^^ιν ειμί ι"* Τζοί- 
 
 af^wPif ό•»-• cciiij'» έτιϋίΐχ. 
 ννω. 
 
 Όί 0U μόνον αυτό; ftfjia 
 αμελεν, αΧΧα χαι ό ί'Τίμε' 
 Χίομαιε χαΓα>ελαω. 
 
 Orov ης αγαόος i ©εος 
 
greek: exercises 
 
 hare bestowed upon me any bless- 
 ing, never tcill I forget him. 
 
 25. I have indeed been often 
 accustomed to luonder at the boldness 
 of those who s}X)ke for them. 
 
 26. He shrunk not from labours, 
 he withdrew not from dangers, he 
 spared not riches. 
 
 27. There is a city v:hich a man 
 of roj'al race, called Sora?, go- 
 verned, at the time that Eucratides 
 governed the Badrians, and the 
 name of the city is Perimuda. 
 
 28. He thought that he ought 
 to abstain from drtinke)incss in tb.e 
 fame manner us from madness, and 
 from excess in eating in the same 
 
 ■β' 
 
 δίδί,ιμί, 
 ύανο;'" αΐΐτο.'Γ 
 
 ΤΙο\Χαχις μεν ίαυμ,Λ^ω' 
 C τολμν, ό λί^ W? ί-^ίξ αντος. 
 
 Ου τον&ί ίφιτιμι,'"" tu My. 
 (5uvoi; αφιο'τημ),'^ ου χ^τ;μ<ι 
 
 ΙΤολι^ ειμί ος αξχι,Ρ Σί•)ξ(»ς 
 όνομα, ο.ΊΐΥιξ γενζς βαίίΧιχύς^ 
 ίτε ΧΟΛ βο.χτζιος «I'XW' Εν- 
 χξατίδη', όνομα ι!; • cc>.»j 
 ΙΙϊίΐμΛίιΰα, 
 
 M;drj μΞν α•7τεχο;"'^ βμ;ι«»ί 
 αομο.Γ χξ'η χαι μανία, «"ir 
 
 ΰς χαι c/fyia. 
 
 manner asfrotn sluih. 
 
 29. Ergone putas, inquit, ύ q.uis diligentcr riiri? etlaia» 
 equcstres capias qute hie sunt, illas longe prccstuturas ali-k 
 armorum equorumque apparatu, ac ordinc, el prompte peri- 
 cula advcrsus hostes subeuudo, si existimarent, hcec faciente*, 
 se luudem ac gloiiam conseeuturos 1 
 
 30. Hoccine dicis mi Socrates, inquit, ejusdcm esse hoinirtis 
 fclioro et exercitui prieesse ? 
 
 31. Ne tu, mi iN'ichomachid<?.=:, inquit, homifies adniinistxainisi 
 iamiliuris rei penios contcmpscris. 
 
 CHAP. XXVin. 
 
 Verts expressive of any of the senses, except thai of sighi, govern 
 the genitive. — Verbs of sight govern the accusative. 
 
 Th4 Attics and other writers freguenthj ?nake verbs of hearing, 
 end nometimes those which dtnoie the i'peraiioi%s of the t/ifur 
 smses, govern (he accusative, 
 
 1. Wonder not, Ο Cyrus, if 
 some appear dejected after having 
 htard ths things which are announced. 
 
 2. Since 1 indeed hearing some 
 j^irsons praised because they iire 
 
 Μη έα\)μαζω, ω Ki^foir, 
 El 7•,ς (fxyd^wxHi^u* ακούω* 
 ό ayyiXy.u.'^ 
 
 *Πζ εγωγε axouw ης ειται- 
 viw.« ΐτι νόμιμο; ανη^ ειρ.(, 
 
53 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 men observant of laws, think that 
 ht; who knows not Aviiat law ii, 
 voukl not justly obtain this praise. 
 
 3. Whilst I was a boy, hearing 
 Homer and Hesiod relating the 
 wars and dissensions, not only of 
 the demigods, but even of the gods 
 themsclvc«. 
 
 4. For if the stag smell the grotnid 
 lately disturbed^ he hesitates to pro- 
 ceed. 
 
 5. They will be quick-scented if 
 iho}' scent th-' hare in places bare of 
 vegetation, dry, sunny, as the sun 
 is approaching the meridian. 
 
 6. Bnt when ihe evil .«pint smelt 
 the smell, he flod into the most dis- 
 tant pari.s of Egypt, anil the angel 
 bound him. 
 
 7. Rcflocling upon these tilings 
 and being di-jected, few of them 
 towards evening lasted foud. 
 
 8. Cyrus was delighted with 
 these things ; he wi.shc• therefore 
 that thou also taste them. 
 
 9. Accursed be the man, who 
 cateth bread until evening. And 
 all the pcoiilc iasttd not brt.aJ. 
 
 10. AVhereas the honourable and 
 the good, though the}• desire both 
 gold and fuie horses, nevcrihelese 
 are easily able to absfcin from 
 these, 80 as not to touch ihcm, in 
 tippodition to Avhat is juit. 
 
 11. liut in the woody placoa 
 there is a stronger scent than in 
 those bare of vegetation ; for the 
 hare running through, and fre- 
 quently couching, {ouc/ns nitmy 
 things. 
 
 12. If therefore any one of you 
 is cither incUaed to touch my nght 
 
 οιμκι μη αν Jixaru^ ^i7oζ 
 
 i\oiu'i rig νομ.05 ειμί. 
 
 Αχ£ΐι μίν εν ■ταΐίΡ ΐιμι,ί 
 axojco Όμ>;Ροί κ«ι 'JldoJcj 
 τολίμοί χα) ύΐο.'ίις uir,ji(,- 
 μαι ου μόνον ό ήμιό;οί, άλλα 
 χοι ctjToi ό 6ζος. 
 
 Εαν ^α* ό e'ka:pr,g ίίίφξαι• 
 νομαι (yr)) vJujiTri χινίω,' 
 ίνίωτεώ.'" 
 
 Ε.^ιν δί ίψ.ι εαν ό λη^ν^ 
 οίφ^αινομαι εν τοτο^ 4-•λοί, 
 
 ετέιμι.*? 
 
 Ό•Γ5 IJC ο(ί-'''7!νομαι• • 
 (ίκιμονιον ό οίΓμη φευ^ uj' fi; 
 ό a^uTOiTcg (χω|ΐον) Αιγίΐτ. 
 της, χαι δ$ω^ auTOj ό £»77** 
 λο?. 
 
 Οίτοζ εννοεοο,™ χαι α^^ιχ^ς 
 εχυ, ολι^ο, μεν αυτός Hi ι 
 
 Our OS r.Jij i Κυ|05• /3β¥. 
 λομαι oyv χαι ffv οί/η; 
 
 ΕτιχαταΡατοε (ΐ'μι) ό α»- 
 6^^)'Τος ός ς;αχομοι αξτος :νζ 
 iff-Kifa' Και oux j-fwu"• 
 vrag ό λαοί olpto:. 
 
 Ό (Ji χαλο; xdynioc, trt- 
 όυμί^ιΙΓ Jcai xjvCiov χαι 1•τ•το$ 
 αγαύο;, Ιμ.-^ς o«to.C ^aStug 
 (5ϋνημαι ατίχω,™ (ΙοίΤτε μη 
 άίττω™ aufof, ταΡα ο ίι. 
 χαιο;. 
 
 Εν δ( i ύλωίηί μάλλον 
 η tv ό φίλο; ο^ω, ίιατ^εχΜ 
 ^α^ ό Χηγί,ις, χαι οναχαίι. 
 ^υ, aTTu;'" τολνί. 
 
 Βι τ»ς 01/» iu η isj^ioj (χί»^) 
 /ύβυλομαι • SjMf airrw,™* ») 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 β9 
 
 iane/, or wishes to gaze upon my 
 fjc, while I am yet alive, let him 
 approach. 
 
 13. We therefore standing near, 
 both saiu (he thins;-s which v!erc do- 
 ing, and heard than drf ending Owm- 
 selves. 
 
 14. And indeed I saw also those 
 much-(alked-of sights, Ixion, and 
 Sisyphus, and iht Phrygian Tan• 
 ialus suffering. 
 
 15. I see muck land, and a cer- 
 tain large lake floxoing around it, 
 and mountains, and rivers larger 
 than Cocytus and Pyriphlegethon, 
 and very small men. 
 
 16. I hear of these things also ; 
 but ΛvhctheΓ they be true, thou, 
 Ο Mercury, and the poets may 
 know. 
 
 17. Point out to me now the fa- 
 mous cities, of which we hear be- 
 low ; Ninus the city of Sardana- 
 palu3, and Babylon, and Mycenae, 
 and Cleona:;, and Ilium itself. 
 
 18. A horse fears a camel, and 
 endures not either to sec its form or 
 smell its scent. 
 
 19. And having caused him to 
 approach, he kissed him ; and he 
 tmelt the smell of his garments, and 
 blessed him. 
 
 20. INIy father has neglected the 
 land. See, how m^' eyes are open- 
 ed because I tasted a small portion 
 of this honey. 
 
 ' 21. IT I know both the number 
 of the sand and the extent of the 
 pea ; I imderstand moreover a 
 dumb person, and I hear hiin who 
 speaketh not. 
 
 22. Having sallied forth, and 
 
 όμμα ούμρ^, ^aoj» sri, rfo- 
 
 Έ,φιίνν,μ.Ρ ουν £νω, opcf.u' 
 τβ ο ^ι^νομαι,? και ακούω' » 
 
 Κ«ι μην χαχ3ΐνος ίίδω' * 
 ^-jouOvts,"" ό Ιξιων, χαι ό Σι- 
 δυφοί:, και ό Φξυξ Τανταλοί 
 
 Ό^ω y η ίτολυ?, και λ/μν-/} 
 TIC με J ο ζ ΊΐΒξί^^ίω, και ο^λ(:^ 
 χαι τοταμος ό ΚωκυΓΟ? χολ 
 Πυ?ιφ>.ετίίων μ-εγας, και 
 Άνβξίύΐτος -jravy (Τμικ^ο?. 
 
 Ακούω και oirog•" ει Ss 
 α^Ύ^ίτις ίίμι, tfu αν, ω Έ^» 
 μη^» 'ία' ό ιτοι/,τηί ίι5ω.* 
 
 *0 ίτΌ>.ΐί ο ε^^ιιί-ήμ.αζ ν,διι 
 ίεικνιιμΓ s^w, Ός'^ ανουω κά- 
 τω• ο Nivcf * 2af'0avaira- 
 λοί, και Βαβυλων, και 
 Μυκ/]ναι, και Κλϊωναι, και 
 ό^ Ιλιον auro?. 
 
 Κάμηλο? Ί-ϊΤίτο? φο§ίω,'• 
 και ουκ κνεχω™ ούτε ό ι5εα 
 αυτο5 Ιξαω, ουτί ο ο5μη* eC- 
 φ^αινομαι. 
 
 Και εγγίζω^ φίλεω' αυτοί* 
 και οίφ^αινομαΓ' δ οί'μη'» 4 
 ίματίον atrrei, και ευλο^ίω'' 
 αυτό?. 
 
 AitaWcfidu' ό *ατηρ ε j /ω 
 ό ^τ) ιί:, ίιοτι ει5ω® ο οφόαλ- 
 μοί ε^ω ότι ^-ευω""^ βξ^'Χ^ί* 
 tic: (μεροί) ό μέλι ούτος. 
 
 Εκίεω"'" 5' ε^ω ψαμμο^ 
 τ' α^ιί^μορ, και μετ^ονΡ ^α- 
 \a.<S<Sa, και κωφοί? ίυνιημι, 
 και ου φωνευω? ακονω. 
 
 Ειτεξε^ομαι' χαι J ου^ 
 
70 
 
 CREEK EXBRCI9B8. 
 
 Imving boMly aitarktd the rear, 
 thiey slew many, iiml cuuipcllfil 
 Λ parr of them even lo fly ; un;U 
 Cn.-<;us having recalled those in the 
 van, cxhoried ihuii lo hall and 
 engr\gc the enemy. 
 
 23. Thon seest Arrives, Ο Cha- 
 ron, and Lacedaemonians, and that 
 hd'f-dcnd commander Oihryadfs, who 
 is inscriliin^ the trophy \vuh his 
 own blood. 
 
 24. AVhenever thou maycel be 
 nbont to apply thtjselj to any busi- 
 ness, secreflj remind thyself vrhat 
 itort of business it is. 
 
 25. He enacted that we neither 
 taste Jlcsh nor cut beuns, turning 
 ftom the table my pleasantest 
 food ; and moreover persuading 
 men not to converse for fire yeaii;. 
 
 26. This is in tnith the very 
 evil which I meniioncdj for thou 
 heareit a proof of his madness. 
 
 μ5ν \νΛζας tciSuj,* μέ^οδ <5» 
 Γ»; χαι φ£ΰ^ ω' αυτό? avay- 
 χα^ω•^ ί'^ς ό Fvaiog ανα- 
 xaXsw"^ ό ex ό τιωτοτο^ίΐα 
 <sai>o»^.au' ίίί-ημ•" y.ai ίυμ- 
 ^αλλ.ο^" ί ΐΓο>.?α»οί:. 
 
 Αξγειος ό«αω,•ω ΧαΡων, 
 χαι Λαχίϋαιμονίο?, χαι ό ήμι- 
 ovr,f exeivof (ί7Ρα-τ,γος C(?^i>- 
 aitjc;, β ETijPtt^ujf ό ί"^». 
 ταιον β αυ'ο<Γ αίμα. 
 
 Όταν aiTTij™ i^ev μίλ- 
 λ.ω, i'xciJvacj^O'Eai/Tou" ότΜ- 
 es ειμί ό (ξγαν. 
 
 fso^ciiTcu,'' μητό xfetti:* 
 ^cuej,"" μι^Γο Χ'^αμοί: ECdiu)• 
 
 «■*^»5 α«•β~αινω sri is xoi 
 Tciiw ό avtVuiog ίί CEVTi 
 i7og μη όιαλί^ βμαι. 
 
 OCrog ίιμι ίητα ό xaxoff 
 avTc; us syw λί^ω, ό γαζ 
 τα^αόίι^μα' 5 μανία» αχ- 
 
 Αχονω oucoc;,^ χαι ΰ^ 
 οοχίω*^"" ανα§ιοω^ αιτοίνηί. 
 χω,• χαι 6J5 ^fjOOuf δ μ»). 
 foi ετι^ΐΐΑ-νυμι" TOTe" ου. 
 το;• fxeivog όί fju f«w,• 
 Ti.c <f\t ίϊβ^χομαι*' νομ(^ 
 
 27. I heard of these things, and 
 how thou didst appear to have re- 
 turned to life afler havmjr died, 
 ΐ.ηΛ hov.• ihuu once I'idsit .show unto 
 ihom ihy ihijrh of fTold ; but tell 
 me ihi.*; why did it occur to ihce 
 to pa.•?? an ordinance, that men cai 
 neither ^'«Λ nor brans ? 
 
 28. An alio quodaui sensu illa'attigisii ? 
 
 29. Neiumquum ; sed audies cants yxm jam ini?erubilitfr 
 rJtdantes mei cautfi, corcosque flebilem in modum alis cnncre- 
 JMntrs, rpianilu frequcntcs .•-■epelient me. 
 
 30. Alxdlitudinnn aiitem, Charon, islam vidcs, navigan!^, 
 icUanlcg, in jtidiciii vcrsautcs, agros colentes, /centis txtrcentes^ 
 Mttpem pclcnics ? 
 
 χ^αμο5 ίυίιω ; 
 
βΕΒΒΚ B^Luncisae. 
 
 η 
 
 CHAP. XXIX 
 
 Τ%β prite or measure of any thing is put in the genitive. 
 The matter of which any thing is made is put in the gtnitht. 
 
 1. The Thracians purchase 
 their -ft-ivoa from their parenlieyir a 
 ffreat deal of money. 
 
 2. Nor, if Λ peraon younger than 
 thirty years sell, am I to ask for 
 L•ιv much he sells ? 
 
 3. For how much dost thou offe? 
 tliis one ? Merc. For ten mince. 
 
 4. Thou mightest in time be- 
 come a sailor perhaps, or a gar- 
 dener ; and that too, if this person 
 nere were willing to part "«"ilh thee 
 for two oboH. 
 
 5. Of which things some per- 
 sons having received small portions 
 from hiiH. gratis, sold them to the 
 re6t_/or a large sum. 
 
 6. Far iphat price is this man ? 
 Merc. For twenty miiKe. 
 
 7. The gods sell all good things 
 imto us fj/• our labours. 
 
 8. Consider, that calmness is 
 sold for so much, firmness for so 
 mtKh, but nothing is got gratis. 
 
 9. The Epidaurians, tnerefore, 
 inquired Avhether they are to make 
 the statues of brass or of stone ; 
 the Pythoness, however, permits 
 neither of these, but of the wood 
 of the domestic ohve. 
 
 10. From this city, the barbari- 
 iins brought over, on floats 77iade 
 tf skiiiSf loaves of bread, cheese, 
 wine. 
 
 11. 1Γ Having seen Philip, the 
 Masedonian. I was not able to con- 
 %ΰ,ΐίΐ my Keif : he wais pointed out to 
 
 "0 θξαξ ojvfe^ai I Vi/r^ 
 ναξο. i γονίας χ^ημα f>i- 
 
 Mr,os ψ TojXf i; ftrc: r^i&- 
 
 τωλεω ; 
 
 ΠοοΌί ύίτοζ ftvax^fvTT'*! ] 
 ΈΡΜ. ΔΒχα μνα. 
 
 Ναντη^ αν ι'ο:ς ») χτ;αω- 
 ξος ίν xat^Os yivo^or^ xat 
 ούτορ, ην fosXu (fv aircJi- 
 (5ωμι°'*^ ούτοσΊ Λυο «foXif, 
 
 *0ζ ^ις μιχζος μίξος <ga• 
 ξα fy.siv&f ϊΓίΌίχα λαμβάνω,* 
 ντΰΧ-υς L αλλοί σωλεω.* 
 
 Ήαΐίος oi<rc; SIIJ.I ; "ΈΡΜ. 
 EixoCi μ,να. 
 
 Ό ffovoj τωλίω syu c«j 
 c αγαύος βίος. 
 
 ΕΐΓίλί^ω, Φτ» roflOvcoff 
 
 αταξαξια, ^τξοιχα S( avditg 
 ΤΕ^ι^ινομαι. 
 
 ETf^wTctoj^ ίκν e E<i- 
 δυ.χιξιος crori^ogP "χαΧχϋζ 
 τοιω"^ ό αγα'Κμ.α, -η Xi^og* 
 ό δε Πϋόια osJcTi^of οίτοζ 
 εαω, αλλΛ |υλον ί;με|Όί: 
 έλαια. 
 
 Εχ eiroff ίΤβλι^ β /3α^. 
 ζαξος όια^ω* icr* ίχεοια•* 
 διφύΐ^α, αξτίζ, ΐ-νζβς,Ρ «ι- 
 vof. 
 
 ΦιλιτΊΓΌ^ β M«xi3av e^h) 
 ίίαβμαι* βυίε χξαην ίμ.«ν. 
 του ίνν«τβί ίίμι• βειχνι,μ/ 
 
Μ 
 
 CREEK ΕΧεΚΟΒΕβ. 
 
 mc in a certain comer, 
 rotten shoes/or hire. 
 
 mending 
 
 12. At the entrance there is a 
 paved Λvay of stone for almost 
 three stadia. 
 
 13. But tell mo, said he, why, 
 nhhough making thy corselets nei- 
 ther stronger nor of more expcn- 
 eive materials than the rest, dost 
 thou sell thcmy<yr a higher price 1 
 
 14. And the rnoon beneath her 
 feet, and upon her head a crown 
 tif twelve stars. 
 
 Kara μίν fcTooc.r, (ίΐζυτ^ 
 νυμι'ϊ ειμί 16ος Χίόοί »c« 
 ffTaiiog TPcij μαλι'ί•α ct,. 
 
 Ατο,ξ, ς;ηαι, Ksyu* ty^ti 
 (5ta T15• ovri iff^uPof cwrf 
 <Γολυτ£λτ,<: ό αλλοί ycjui ί 
 ^~i«»j 'ϊΓο>ν;'5 TijXrw ; 
 
 Και 5 σ'£>.ηνη irtzarfc) } 
 <rov5 auro?, Jcai £r» ό χί> 
 
 9a>.r, «wTos ίτίφανίί adrrjf 
 δωδεχα. 
 
 βωμι'** αν ήίεω^ :ίις i β 
 Ci>vjvcv ffrfyavci Ιιμι t:vio£. 
 
 Ιδ. I \voiild willingly sell thee 
 the Isthmian contests, /ur as much 
 as the crcrtc?i of parskxj is to bo 
 ■bought. 
 
 16. Coronam e rosis et croco coneertam in unguen'.Uia 
 iiitingens ei iiiisif. 
 
 17. Nicias, Nicerati filius, dicitur prrofectum foiiiniB argen- 
 teis eiiii.«;sc talenlo. 
 
 13. Enii qtianti dicis ; pecuniani vero deinde solvam. 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 Passive verbs have a genitive of the agent after tkem^ iohich ia 
 governed by a preposition expressed or understood. 
 
 1. No action worthy of men- 
 tion wag performed by them. 
 
 2. ΛVhalovcr is fit to be done hj 
 Oud, it is impossible for man to 
 averi. 
 
 3. For no one ever complained 
 ihat he u-as deprived of any thing 
 by ^igc^ilitus. 
 
 4. It ip evident that if he fhall 
 icp;vrJ fartlA-Pj wc $hail b(fr^':ii,i by 
 
 if»<r ε^ον 0515X0^0?. 
 
 Ού'ίΐζ δα ^ινομα»* t\ i 
 Θΐύζ, αμήχανος airoT^frw* 
 avi^cjirof. 
 
 ' Ytc γαξ Α^ηΛλαβ^ ίτί- 
 ^ομβιι μεν oj(5ei? ο.ιίεΐ5°• 
 
 Λτ,λςί Ιιμι on fi Ti'effu 
 ατίιμ,ι,' Βτςτη^-νιμι* int i 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 73 
 
 5. -That the citizens might not 
 be infected with vice by strangers. 
 
 6. Say that thou wilt he injured 
 by us in notliing, my child. 
 
 7. For it is intolerable, my 
 friends, to be laughed at by enemies. 
 
 8. I seek truth, by tchich no per- 
 son teas ever as 3'ct injured; he, 
 however, is injured, who remains 
 in his error and ignorance. 
 
 9. Such things as these are done 
 by bad poets of themselves, and by 
 §ood ones for the actors. 
 
 10. How is Medea willing to be 
 left alone by thee 1 
 
 11. Thou liost, Ο Agamem- 
 non, murdered by thy wife and by 
 JEgysthus. 
 
 12. For Λvhen Agamemnon 
 breathed forth his life, having 
 been loounded on the head by my 
 daughter. 
 
 13. 1Γ But there were some, that 
 were even secretly taken away by the 
 Athenians \vho brought succour 
 fi'om the borders, and saved. 
 
 14. It is impossible, then, Ο 
 fen"yman, that thou see all things 
 accurately one by one ; for it would 
 be the delay of many years ; be- 
 «ides, I should be proclaimed as a 
 runaway by Jupiter. •. 
 
 15. Thou also having thrown off 
 Ibe Macedonian cloak, chdst put 
 on, as they say, a Persian garment, 
 and thoughtest thyself Λvorthy to 
 be adored by J\iIacedonians, by free- 
 men. 
 
 16. For do not all thus appear 
 to ihce to be composed of two 
 
 ιτολιτη^ ο.το ο ξίνος εμ«;<- 
 ίτλημι. 
 
 Asyu, ug •παξα. εγω ου- 
 (Jsig"^ αίικεω'" τίκνον. 
 
 Ου γα.ξ yikau rX'^rog ε| 
 
 ZrjTcoj ό αληίίΐα, υφ' ης 
 ovSiig ifuivors /3λα*τω•' 
 βΧαντω ί=" ό ein[i.z\uS είΤ» δ 
 εαυτού α.'κα.ττ^ και α'/νοια. 
 
 Τοιούτο? -ίτοιεω, ύ'Το με» 
 ό φαύλο? ιτοιητη? δια αύ- 
 το?." ύ*ο όε ό α^αόο? δια ύ 
 CiroxfiTT]?. 
 
 Πω? ιΤυ μονό? Μήδεια "^i• 
 ίΤω ίελω ; 
 
 Κειμαι, Co.c αλοχο? tfipa- 
 (^ω" Aiyiffdofa τε, Α^'αμεμ- 
 
 VOJV. 
 
 Ετει ya.^ ΐχ'κνίοϊ' Aycn• 
 μεμνων /tjio?, ίτληο'Ο'ω® όυ- 
 γίχττ,ζ (1 εμο? ίι^εξ χαξα. 
 
 Ειμί δε τι?, ό? και ucro 
 ό Αί)ηνα;ο? ό wro Ό hpiov 
 ε•«•ι§οηίΐ£^Γ& χΧε^ -ru^ xca 
 
 Πα? μεν ουυ tfu ειδω^ 
 χαό' έκαίΤτο? ακ^ι^ω? αμή- 
 χανο? ειμί, ω ■πο^^μευ?, ΊΤΟ• 
 λιι? yai^ αν ετο? ό διατ^ι§η 
 γίνομαι•" είτα ε^^ο^ μεν χη- 
 fuTTOj'^ (5εΓ xaowTTSR α^ο- 
 δξαω/? ϋ'πο Ό Ζευ?. 
 
 Συ δε και ό Μακεόονιχος 
 χλαμυ? χαταβαλλω,* χ«ν- 
 δυς, ώ? φημι, μετενδυω,• 
 χαι ■κτ^οο'χυνεω ίσο Μακί- 
 δον, Ινο ελευδεζος ανηξ αξ- 
 
 Ου γαξ χαι "ίαζ ouru tf^ 
 δοχίΜ tfuyxEifuu εχ δν^^ 
 
 α 
 
74 
 
 βκεεκ EXERCISES. 
 
 ptrls, Eoul and body ? So that, 
 u'hat 13 it Avhich prevente that the 
 φΊΐιΙ which Λν<ΐ5 from Jupiter, bo- 
 iii heaven, but that I, the inorial 
 part, be with the dead. 
 
 17. The people u-cro destroyer', 
 Hot only being beaten do ten. by the 
 s-il^li^rs, or trampkd vpan b]/ ih 
 knrses, but also being oppessed by 
 Utc crowd. 
 
 IS. Q,uintianni ha\'ing• cecret'/ 
 taken his stand in the entmnc? of 
 the ampliitheatre, hanng drawn 
 his small sword, rushed suddenly 
 on Commodus, and called out with 
 a loud voice, that he vas sent to 
 him by the senate. 
 
 19. .Pertinax having said such 
 thinfrs, encouraged the senate verv 
 much ; and being applauded by all, 
 and having received all honour and 
 reverence from them, he returned 
 into the royal court. 
 
 ό xcjXu:j? εψ4, Ό μεν ψϋ^4 
 fv ονξανος ίι/Αΐ, «ici^ fi.tu 
 ex Ζίν?, ό δι 6νητζς {μίξος} 
 εγω •:αξα ο ι?χξος ; 
 
 Φί:.•»ι/ ό 5τ,μο<, ον f*»- 
 
 rrf, ονίί τατίω ντο ο W. 
 cc;, ρ.λλα XCU ici g «'λη- 
 6ος w<):<j. 
 
 fAoocgjd και μί;'αί; φωνι^ 
 
 TPOiffiJ,'' ieo ό e\Jγ>XrJtς 
 
 (,οβυλη) aurog*^ ΣΤιτίμΐτ^. 
 
 Toiouroff Q Πί^Γίνα^ i-zu* 
 
 (-5ουλη), χαι c^os 'τας ίν- 
 φημ-ίξω, ταί τ? τιμηΒ χα» 
 αι5ω5 ίτα^α ajTo^ ryyya- 
 tw," εΐ5 ό /SarfiXiios ίτα•.ί<'- 
 Ρζο,αα»'' ανλτ). 
 
 20. SupcraiHS α mortc. 
 
 21. ("iportebat quidcrn me forsan prolixa diccre, quoad tam 
 mulla a ίβ accusatum. 
 
 22. Isiacnodoru3 ergo (nam tnicidatus erai a latronibus, juxta 
 Oiihacronem,) gcmebat, λ ulnusque in nianibus habebat. 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Adverbs of time, place, quantity, order, exception, and the Hkt^ 
 
 govern the genitive. 
 Ν η and Μα are joined with the accusative ; αμα and ίμβυ ivith tfk 
 
 dative. 
 
 1. JS'car the wall. JVear the wa- ^TX} ° '"■'Χ''^• ^71^ 
 tcr. i iitjf. 
 
 2. I heard behind me a groat Λχουω' owkTw ί^ω φων-/) 
 voice ae of a trumpet. μί/αε ώς οΌλτ^ J. 
 
GHEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 7Γ, 
 
 3. Of these things perhaps there 
 16 now enough. 
 
 4. Without thee we are afraid to 
 go home. 
 
 5. He humbled himself, having 
 become obedient unto death, even 
 the death of the cross. 
 
 6. A tragedy could not exist 
 without action, but it might exist 
 xoithout manners. 
 
 7. He sends away to the king 
 those whom he took, ivithovt the 
 knowledge of the rest of the allies. 
 
 S. And'the Assyrian having fol- 
 lowed as far as he thought it to be 
 safe, returned. 
 
 9. There was along the bank of 
 the Euphrates, a narrow passage, 
 between the river and the ditch. 
 
 10. To perform his daily func- 
 tions in that part of the heavens, by 
 being hi wMch, he may benefit us 
 most. 
 
 11. As they rested not during 
 the night, they slept until late in the 
 day. 
 
 12. The Athenians knowing 
 that they were not concealed, laid 
 down their arms again, except about 
 three hundred men. 
 
 13. By Juno ! the invention is a 
 fuie one indeed, Ο Pistias. 
 
 14. No, I sioear by those of your 
 ancestors who exposed themselves 
 to danger at Marathon. 
 
 15. He led them forth at day- 
 break, and ha\ing engaged with 
 the enemy, sleΛV many of them. 
 
 16. Early in the morning they 
 come to the sea, and having gone 
 into the way called Elorina, they 
 proceeded. 
 
 AvSu tfu, οιχςιδδ ατ»^)*! 
 Τατεινοω' §αυτο«, ^ΊΛ- 
 
 TOC, όανατοί 5s ΰτα\)ζΰζ. 
 
 Ανευ μευ cr^alig ουχ ,αν 
 ^ινομ.αι'"'^ τξαγωΰια, «via δ$ 
 'f\uog τινομαι'' αν. 
 
 Οΰτοί Ις λαμβάνω* Λϋο- 
 
 αλ}.ος (ίυμ-μ.α-'/ος. 
 
 Και ι μΐϊ ΑιίΛίΐ&δ Oiw- 
 χω* αγξΐζ Ις κίφκλϊ-,^Λΐ*. 
 μαι^ £(μΐ, αίΤΟΓ^ίΤ^.""" 
 
 Ειμί 5b 'Καζα avr»g ί 
 Ευφ^ατ'/)? ιταξοδος tf-rivoi, 
 μετα|υ ο ιτοταμο^ Αοη ί 
 ταφξοζ. 
 
 Ενταυόα ό ou^avoj avoetf. 
 τ^εφω,™ ενία ειμί? μ-αλΐίΤτ« 
 ε^ω ωφ«λεω.<ι 
 
 Ώ^ ίε ό νυ|* ay^uflrvsw,' 
 
 ήμε^α. 
 
 Γιβωβ'χω' ο Α^ψαιος ίτι 
 ου λαν^ανω,'^ χατατιίτιμι"^ 
 τταλ.ιν ό-τλον "τλην τξίοίκβ' 
 rfioj μαλκίτα ανη^. 
 
 Νη 5 Ή»α, χ«λο5 yi, w 
 nitfriaj, ο εύ|ημα. 
 
 Ου, μα og ίν Ματαίων 
 *|οκινδυνίυω^ ό νξογον^ς. 
 
 Άμα ό φως ο εζοδ^ς 
 croistj,'"^ Συμβάλλω' δί β 
 ύ*εναντιο? "τολϋ^ μεν auTog 
 α*οχτεινω.* 
 
 Άμα δε ό Ιω<:, αφι«νεί- 
 μαι "TPos ό θαλαοΊΤα, χβΜ 
 είίβαινω^ ε^ ό όδο^ ό EXw. 
 ^ινη χαλεω? «Ό^ευω.""* 
 
76 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 17. With his right hand let him 
 seize the reins near the withers, 
 togcthn with the mane. 
 
 18. IT But when they were near 
 ihe fortress, the enemj havijig sul- 
 Hed forth, put them to flight, and 
 slew a large number of the barha- 
 riajis, and .some of the Greeks who 
 had gone up with them, and they 
 kept pursuing them UNtil they saw 
 the Greeks bringing aid. 
 
 19. Dost thou see then, said he, 
 h'/ure that grove, a place which 
 seems to be beautiful, and like a 
 meadow, and illuminated v.ilh 
 much light ? 
 
 20. At first he called himself 
 Nobody ; but when he ran off, and 
 
 Ό όφα ό ηνία τα?α 5 
 axf><^ina >va,a§avu όμου ό 
 χαίτη. 
 
 Ecii us ΐγγυς ^-ινομαι' 
 
 ιτω"' ΟΜτας, χα» aTcxrfi- 
 νω" ίυχνοί ό βαξζαξος, χαι 
 Ό (Τυναναβαινω*^? Έλλην τιρ, 
 χαι iicjxu)- Ι^^χξις Ιζ £ι^ω* 
 ό Ελ>.τ,ν βοτ,όεω. 
 
 Όραω o'jv, φημι, εμτροί- 
 6$ ό αλοΌ? ϊχίΐνο?, Toccf 
 τΐί, ίς ί&χ5ω xaXcg τί etu< 
 xai Xci/Acjvociivj.c, και φού^ 
 ίτ&λυ? χαταλαμίω J 
 
 Ό μεν flTj'OjTos"* 0j7I.: 
 lavrou ατοχ&,λεω,' ε^ει is 
 
 Λν as out of reach of my dart, he ssiid διαφίνγω,^ χαι εξω ειμί 
 
 iliut he was named Ulysses. 
 
 21. No one having sense, fights 
 with his neighbours merely for 
 the sake of conguering his oppo- 
 nents ; nor sails upon the seas, only 
 to pass over them ; nor takes up 
 the sciences or arts merely for the 
 sake of the knoitledge itscf; but 
 
 βζΧος, OJoCtfiLj ονομάζω 
 φημι. 
 
 O-ji-e ίτολίμεο) ό ττελκί 
 ou5:i?, vooj εχω, ivixjv αυ- 
 rcg ci"*" χατα^ννι^ομαΓ^ i 
 ανηταιίί'ω•™? ούτε τλε-^ ό 
 flTcXo^ocr, ναΡιν ό"•-' •κΐΡαι• 
 οω"> f μόνον χαι μί]ν ouJs 
 ό εμίτείΡια χαι «"ίχν»; aiiroj 
 
 all men do all things, on account of hsxa J ϊνιη^τ,μτ, αναλαμ 
 
 the pleasures, hunours, or profits which 
 arise from their works. 
 
 22. I think, hj the gods, that he 
 ie intoxirated with the greatne.ss of 
 the things which have been done ; 
 but not indeed that he choo-ses to 
 act in such a manner, that the 
 most foolish of those with u.^i may 
 know what he is about to do. 
 
 23. Definite mihi, ad quut usque annos existimare oportof, 
 homines ct^se juvene.s. 
 
 24. Vestes quidcm qui commutanf./iij,'•'""'* cas astusgue 
 causa, comniutant. 
 
 §ανω• caj (5ε β-ίαί',Τω cuf, 
 χα»ιν ό ε^ι^ινομ^Γε ό ic 
 yov '/jiuj:, η xa).oc, η ί-,μ- 
 
 Ε^ ω οιμαι μεν, vr, ό Jfo.c, 
 εχεινοί μεί^'..;" ό μΐγί^^ς ό 
 TP'ttfCwe ου μενς-οι^ί, μα 
 Zijf, ούτωτ^οηΐΡϊ'ω'" rjatf 
 Ou), udTS ό «vor,T«:, ό νηξα 
 εγω, stoiu ης μέλλω toi-w 
 εχεινοί. 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 77 
 
 25. Quis enim, absque hac^ bonum aliqiiod discat? 
 
 26. Et, per canem, Ο viri Athenienses, certe ego patiebar 
 aliquid tale. 
 
 CHAP. XXXII. 
 
 Adjectives signifying profit, likeness, obedience, fitness, trust, 
 clearness, decency, facilit_y, and their contraries^ and those 
 compounded with tfuv and όμου, govern the dative. 
 
 ErfTi taken for εχω to have, governs the dative. 
 
 All verbs put acquisitively^ i. e. verbs o/" serving, i;sing, rejoicing, 
 obeying, trusting, discoursing, fighting, and the like, loitk 
 their controj-ies, govern the dative. 
 
 1. There is nothing either so 
 serviceable or becoming to men, as 
 order. 
 
 2. To thee it ΛνίΠ be honorable, anci 
 io the state advantageous. 
 
 3. One while Me to a poor man, 
 and another while to a young man. 
 
 4. Having said these things, and 
 others like io these, I descended. 
 
 5. Thou λΛ faithful to my wife. 
 and io my family. 
 
 6. Every t3'rant is iniyni^al to 
 hhsriy, and hostiL• to laws. 
 
 7. It is disgraceful Io ihoss nobly 
 born 10 live viciously. 
 
 8. Behold, I am really naked as 
 thou seest, and of equal locight with 
 ihe other dead persons. 
 
 9. Thou then, son, if thou art 
 w-Ise, As-ilt entreat the gods to be 
 
 fi^giving unto thee, if in any ihing 
 ;hou hast negleeted thy mother. 
 
 10. Ο Hystaspes, and ye others 
 ^'ho are present, if you mention it 
 to me, whenever any one of you 
 day have undertalvon to rnanry. 
 
 Ειμί o'j^si? ούτως ουδί 
 ενχξ-η(ίτος ούτε καλο$ αν. 
 όξω'ΐτος, ύζ ι τα|ι?. 
 
 Συ xoiKos ειμί χαι ό tfo- 
 "ktg αγαθός. 
 
 Αλλοτε μεν ιττωχος ενα- 
 λι^χιο?, αλλοτδ δ' αυτί 
 ανϊ)ξ νίος. 
 
 Οίΐτοί και 5 ίΤα^αιτλη- 
 tfioj ούτος ε*ω,* xaraCau 
 
 Τίκίτος αλοχοί, Ι τε ίμ-ος 
 δοΐίοςΡ ειμί. 
 
 Τυξαννος α.'Κας ίχ6ξος 
 ε\ευύίξΐα, xou ο νομο^ svcuH' 
 τιος. 
 
 Zaw ακίχξος ακίχξ^ς δ 
 χαλωί φυω.'^ε 
 
 ίδου, γυμνός, ΰς o^aw, 
 αΚ'ήόως ειμί, χα» κίαίτΜίκις 
 k άλλο? νεχζος. 
 
 Σ\) ουν, U ffaii, αν β*». 
 φ^ονίΜ, δ μεν 6εος ιτα^αι- 
 τεω"" «"υ^^νωμων <fu ειμί, 
 51 τις ιτάξαμελε» ο μητη^.ί 
 
 Ω 'Ύαταίί'ΚΎ,ς, χαι σ αλ- 
 λο5 δε ο ιτα^ειμι,ε ψ εγια 
 λέγω, Όταν tij tfu ya^fa 
 
78 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 you will know what kiiid of as• 
 su!ant I will even be to you. 
 
 11. He who makes most 0/ the 
 sanic opinion trilh us, would just- 
 ly be esteemed very able both in 
 EpcakiniT and in acting. 
 
 12. J it' fiave no other good but 
 our anas and our valour. 
 
 13. T/ieij to whom it has thus ap- 
 peared proper, and they to whom 
 it has not, have not the same com- 
 mon sentiment. 
 
 14. His children were brought 
 onto liiiii, for he had ttco small sons 
 anfl one of large size. 
 
 15. Aboli.-ihing all those things 
 in which slaves are subservieni (0 
 their masters, he enjoined only those 
 tilings in which freemen obey their 
 magistrates. 
 
 16. He did not use sleep as a thing 
 that had dominion over liim, but as 
 a thing governed by his business. 
 
 17. He thought that the gotls 
 great h' delighted in the honours they 
 received from the most pious. 
 
 18. But I perceive some rather 
 trusting him than any of them. 
 
 19. IT And they entreat you to 
 be upon your guard lest the bar- 
 barians attack you in the night. 
 
 20. For neither was Lycurgiis 
 long lived, who contended with the 
 immortal gods. 
 
 21. Consider, said he, that no- 
 thing is nearer (in ri'seinblance) to 
 the death of man than sleep. 
 
 22. And they treated Mram well 
 ou her account ; and he had sheep, 
 and kids, and asses, and male ser- 
 vanti, and female sorvanLs, and 
 mules and camuU, 
 
 Ις τις χαγω ύυνε^ος Λ 
 
 £Ι,υΐ. 
 
 Ό ΐΓολ^5 όαο^-νωμ^.'ν tyu 
 foisuj /ε διχαιωζ αν Xgxrt- 
 χος τε χαι τ^αχτίχο^ κ^ινω 
 αν ειμί. 
 
 Eyu c'jueis αλΧοζ ttyn 
 αγαίος ει μη ότλον xm 
 α^ίΓΤ). 
 
 Ό 5s οίτω όοχε^οτ' χον 
 ό μη, οΰτο^ CUX ειαι xor.og 
 βουΧη. 
 
 Φε^ω' ναξα α•»το; & rai- 
 ίιον, UJO γαξ α.-ο; ν'κ-^ς 
 (Τμιχροδ ειμί, sig 6β μίγας. 
 
 Αφαι^εο/ oaOc: JonXcj ίίί- 
 ΐΓοτη? ό's■1^_»ί^•εiJ,* ir?oirar- 
 rur Ό(ίος ελευίε^ο^ α?χ^'» 
 
 ΤίΙ(?ω.™ 
 
 Ου μην ίΐίνος γϊ Jj^'re- 
 fr,;, άλλα α^χωΡδ έτο • 
 
 ΙΝ'ομι^ω' ό 6εος Ό τα^α » 
 ενΰί'Τ,ς ημη jja>ax χαι^ι•*. 
 
 Αλλα (ojij) fvioi μαλ> »ν 
 txnvoi rKfrSiu r, tic a-^T'jg. 
 
 Kc.i Χ:λΣί;ω c'jXaTft,: μη 
 tfu ετιτιόημι™'' ό νυξ ό βαξ- 
 
 Ονδ; yap coot Aoxouj. 
 γος ί5ην ΐίμι, of fcl ίίος 
 ετον^ανιο; ίξιζι^.^ 
 
 EwoiW^ ΰ£, φ^μι? **■» 
 tyy\/S μεν ό ανί^ω*ι*οί dct- 
 νατοί οιίίΐί ειμί ίτνον. 
 
 Και ό Α|ραμ ίυ χρα^ι"* 
 £ια ouTof, και γίνομαι" αν- 
 τοί fffotoTov χαι μ.οΰ-/^^ς, 
 χαι ovof, χω ιται?, χαι ται- 
 ίιίχη, χαι ημιβνο^, χαι χα. 
 μηλ&ί. 
 
GREEK EXEECISSe. 
 
 7β 
 
 23. For I hear, as perhaps you 
 also do, that those who spoke (in 
 public) in the time of our forefa- 
 thers, whom all of the present day 
 praise indeed, but are far firorn 
 imiiating•, pursued this mode and 
 custom of managing the govern- 
 ment, that illustrious Aristides 
 name]}', Nicias, him that was my 
 name-saki, Pericles. 
 
 24. Wherefore, seeing these, the 
 life of man appeared to me to re- 
 semble a long procession and for- 
 tune to conduct and arrange each 
 part. 
 
 25. For there Ls somehow tills 
 disease in sovereign pa%'er, not to 
 trustfrknds. 
 
 26. As therefore by these he vrae 
 elevated to power, at a time when 
 they each thought that he would 
 do something advardageous for 
 tkem, so ought he by these same 
 also ίο be hurled down again in- 
 stantly, since he has been clearly 
 com-icted of doing all things for 
 his o-A^n aggranaizement. 
 
 27. Quibu-scungue siudionim non est finis utilie ad vitam, bae« 
 non sunt artes. 
 
 23. Nee enim constat ei qui agrum sibi egregie consent, quk 
 
 nam fructum sit percepiurus. nee constai «' qui egregie doiaum 
 i-ili cfcdificat, quis earn sit habitaturus. 
 
 29. Legationes undique venerunt, onmibus graiulaniibue 
 BoiEanoruia eub Periinace impmo. 
 
 Ό ya.p ε-ζι L c^cycvc^ 
 
 \<jU^ και Cv, ίς tr:'jjviu 
 μεν ό ταρειμ»? arof, μ<- 
 μίοααι 6ε oy ravy, ί^τις ό 
 τξοας χα» ό jiig ί το>.ι. 
 
 ότ,ς ezttvc.c, ό ^r /.ια.ς, i oaw. 
 v„^cj £μαyί■CfJ, ό Π:>ι•/././,ί. 
 
 ϋιατατΓω έκαίίΌ? ό T^yro 
 Evciai γσ.ζ ζν,ς oCt'^ • 
 
 ^'J" \ΐ'-γας, 'r,.:/jj. εκαίτος 
 <!„μ.ζεξΐΜ? α•^<:ζ 'εατ^ηυ ο», 
 μαι^ 7ΐς «■fatfCcij, oCrug 
 
 και κα^αΐΡϋ;' ca/JV', eci». 
 έη τοντα έν^κα ia„"Ci t'c»- 
 
80 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 The cause, manner, or ins'rument, is put in the dative. 
 Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the agent after them.. 
 Comparatives and superlatives have the measure of excess Siost 
 commonly in the dative, sometimes also in the accusative. 
 
 1. Both by her hands, and iy 
 flthij living; and bij all evils. 
 
 2. He struck li panic bij his con- 
 ''i:ance and art. 
 
 3. Sacriiice to God, being splen- 
 did not so much in thy garments as 
 ΙΛ thy heart. 
 
 4. Men live arnon;:^ the rest of 
 animals like gods, excellin;^ them 
 by nature, both in body and in mind. 
 
 5. For it had been cut off icith 
 a scymitnr by the Egyptians. 
 
 6. But icith brazen and adaman- 
 tine walls, as he says, he fortified 
 our country. 
 
 7. lias any thinir new been de- 
 creed by those below concerning 
 those here 1 
 
 8. For base actions are taught 
 by base j/crso)is. 
 
 9. ^Vere these things also agreed 
 upon both by us and by thee ? 
 
 10. Whatsoever e\il and ba?e 
 tfiings have been done both by this 
 rnan, and by the brothers of ihii 
 ujaii. 
 
 U. A double wall, of seven or 
 €<ighi stadia, had already been fi- 
 nuhed by the .ithtnians. 
 
 12. The royal cubit is greater 
 ihun the common cubit by three 
 Jingtra. 
 
 13. The practice ef justice is 
 
 Και χίι», xai λνμα,Ρ άμ 
 ca? taxoj. 
 
 xni τΐχνη. 
 
 £ιμι ό χλαμυ^, ΰς ό ΧΛξόια. 
 
 Ώαξα •' αλλβ<: ^ωον,» Cjct- 
 •jfs^ 6ΐ')ς ό ανί^ωτοί ,βιβ- 
 rv^u, ψυδίζ χα» ό 0^μ.α xat 
 
 Ατοχοττω γα^ xoffij im 
 ο Ai^jTTiog. 
 
 Αλ>.α χαλχίο? χαι οία- 
 μαντ/νο» τειχο?, ως αυτός 
 φτ,μ.!, ό χω^α syu τίΐχ». 
 
 ξ-' 
 
 Δοχΐ-Α η; νε-ΑΤίζος ο χα- 
 
 'πξαγμ.α εχδιδα(Τχω. 
 
 II χαι oicos όμολβ^-ίω' 
 ίγω KS xat ίν 
 
 'Οίος χαχοί χαι oiifypof, 
 χαι οίτοί, χαι ο οίτος οόίλ- 
 
 Διτλβο^ πιχος ίττα μί» 
 Ύ\ exTw tfTOiJio» Ύ)δη firiTE. 
 X;w ό Α^ηναιο^. 
 
 Ό /οαοΊληιοί "Τίχι-'ί J 
 μ5ί•^ι&ς ίΓμι ΐίτ,χυς μ-ίγας 
 τξίΐζ δαχτν\οί. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 liistor}', exhibiting• the wonderful 
 achievements of the Greeks and 
 barbarians, is to that detailing• the 
 lamentable and' grievous misfor- 
 T.uncs of the Greeks, by so much is 
 Herodotus more judicious than 
 Thucjdides in the choice of his 
 subject. 
 
 24. Ο amice Crito, studium hoc tuum mogni tcsthnandum 
 est, si modo cum recta ratione conjunctum sit : sin minus, 
 quanta vehementius, tanlo molestius. 
 
 25. Una vero causa judicata fuit a J\linoe etiam in gratiam. 
 
 26. Non enim cici/ibus digniiatibus, neque geneiis precdka•• 
 tia, neque dividis Deus opiimos judicare «olet. 
 
 "Ελλην TS χαι βαρξοίξος 
 γξαφτ), Ό ο οατξος και ώ;;- 
 νος 'Λα&ος ο Έλλην htay. 
 ysWw ToffOuTos φ^ονιμο^ 
 'H^oJoToc; Θου)αθ((5τ^ί χατα 
 
 CHAP. XXXIV. 
 
 Λη impersonal verb governs ike dative. 
 
 Κξη and Sst, signifying it behoveth, are followed ly the accusative 
 
 with the infinitive. 
 Δει signifying necessity or want, μελ5', μετέβη, ίτ^οο'ηχει, οια» 
 
 φε^^ι, £λλΗΐτει, μετκμελει, frequently govern the dative of the 
 
 person luith the genitive of the thing. 
 
 1 . I think that it is not allowed 
 me when praising, to say any thing 
 of thee Avhich I cannot truly assert. 
 
 2. It is alloioed private persons to 
 curtail their expences, but it is not 
 permitted unto tyrants. 
 
 3. But let it si'Jicefor thee, see- 
 ing their works, to reverence and 
 honour the gods. 
 
 4. Ooes it then appear to thee to 
 be possible for a man to know every 
 thing which exists 1 
 
 δ. AVhy does it become you to fear 
 'Jiese men ? 
 
 6. It becomes him not only as an 
 enemy, but also as a traitor. 
 
 7. Whom it behoves to seek death 
 
 'ΡΙ/ουμαι oux s^;<StS ιγω 
 ιτεξί tf'j Χεγω eiraivftj ουδείς 
 ός ης αν μη cXyj^iuiJ. 
 
 Ό μεν ιδίωτηίΓ εξείτ» ο 
 oarruvY] ffvvTSiJ.'vu, I as tu• 
 ξο.\ινος o'jx ενίί^ετα;. 
 
 Αλλα ε^α^κει<= ffu ό ε^» 
 γον αυτοζ Όξαω, ίε^ομαι χα-; 
 <ηΐ).οίω δ όθος. 
 
 Αξα οίΐν ίοκει (ϊυ ανό^αι- 
 'τίοζ ouvarcg ειμί ό ειμι^ -πας 
 ετίΟ'ταμαι ; 
 
 Τις du ΊΤξοίίψ.ει ourog 
 
 Οϋ μόνον ως ^-χβξος α\). 
 τος τΐοο'ηχει άλλα και ωζ 
 νξοδοττις. 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 81 
 
 by so much better than riches, by 
 kow much these last benefit us 
 only while living, whereas the for- 
 mer procures an lionoiuable name 
 for us, when we have ceased to 
 eccist. 
 
 14. Bat the other by far the 
 ^rit of his equals in age, in all 
 things. 
 
 15. A wall, not weaker than the 
 other wall ly mvch. 
 
 16. He thought that those mer- 
 cenaries were not so much supe- 
 rior to his subjects as inferior in 
 number. 
 
 17. Speak out ; thou '.vilt be 
 much more hateful, being silent. 
 
 IS. ίί It behove.? us to think 
 theHC things concerning God, who 
 is in poioer most strong, in bczufy 
 most admirable, in life immortal, in 
 virtue most excellent. 
 
 19. By how much more men 
 there are in the citj', by Su much 
 sooner I think that they will be 
 reduced ly famine. 
 
 20. Come then, let us consider 
 all the things, that have been done 
 by mc, one by one ; for thus then 
 it will ajipi'ar most plainly, Avhich 
 of them is bad, and which good. 
 
 21. Whatever virtues are sai<l 
 to be among men, thou wilt find, 
 ujion consideration, that they all 
 are improved by (lisciplinc and slu- 
 
 22. Thouirh, if I must conjec- 
 ture hy the silence bcitio- yet grial^ 
 and hy the cold not yet jduchin^ me, 
 a< is usual in the monung, il is not 
 yet midnight. 
 
 23. liy ho\c mttch superior the 
 
 μεν ζαω μόνον wosXeij, ό is 
 χαι ί-ελευταω'ίΤ ΰοξα ira- 
 ξαίίχίοαζω. 
 
 Ό υε ίτίξος, Ό 'η>.ιξ μα- 
 χξζς, ό irag* αζΐιίί ϋς. 
 
 Ύίιχος ου *ο}.ις αΰίίντ,ς 
 ι ίτί^ος τείχος. 
 
 Ίΐ-ίομαι,^ ό μεν μκτίο- 
 φοροί o'Itos ou 7ο(ίι>\)'θζ^ 
 βεΧΐί'^ν ο ΰτηχοοί ϊιμ» otfoj* 
 
 Ka-auSau• croXug* εχ. 
 έξος ειμ» διγαω. 
 
 ΟΙτος χ*η ίτε?! 059$ 
 ^ιανοεομΛΐ, δυΜαμ-ις μεν ειμιΚ 
 ΐ'ίγιξος, xaWtg δε ευτ^ε. 
 τη?, ζωτ, 6ϊ odavarof, α^ίτη 
 οΐ αξκίτος. 
 
 Εν ι IToXis ειμί, Tciiovros αν 
 ταχυί λιμο^ αυτο^ τ,γίομα» 
 άλϋίίχω.Ρ* 
 
 Αγ'~) Toivuv, ίχοτεω 5 
 eyu vfoLddu 'κας, xad' εί^ 
 έχα^ΓοίΤ, Οϊ^τω γαξ (5η μα- 
 λιίτα cr,Xcs ειμί, Ις cif ri 
 cjroi αγαόος.ειίίΐ και ό; nj 
 xavo;. 
 
 'OCoj ev avifwirof «f-'l 
 λε^ω^ ίχοτειο"'? <:«<: μα^η- 
 (ri.c 7» χαι μελέτη α^ξανα;^ 
 
 Koi 701 ει^ϊ χ»η rfx- 
 μαίνομαι ό τε ήίι,χια iro- 
 λ.ί εη ειμ4, χαι ό xpuoj 
 μηόίτω εχω, γο ofi^ivo» 
 ΰ(ί'π:ξ ei)u,'"' acoxvaiij, οι/, 
 ίετω μείΤο? ν,/ξΡ ίιμι. 
 
 'Oiof 5ί x|iirTw» ό i 
 
GREEK EJCERCISES, 
 
 8S 
 
 at 
 
 aire. 
 
 the remedy of the troubles of νος, ύ? • ίν δ yrifr/g χα»^ ,. 
 
 8. Reflecting upon which things, 
 it behoves thee not to despise those 
 >vhich are invisible. 
 
 9. The dcfinit'on is entl'*ely wor- 
 thy of prais?, as having all things 
 which ii behaves a good definitiun to 
 have. 
 
 10. Mj' friend?, an excellent man 
 has come to us, for it behoves all 
 men now to know this man'c deeds. 
 
 11. Tell mo plainly thus, what 
 is this dress, or lokat need hadst thou 
 of the journey c'ov.'n 'i 
 
 12. He sa;d that ke would care 
 nothing aboiii yorr confusion. 
 
 13. / care ncthingyor thee. 
 
 1 4. And in the laties- the had share, 
 but it IS impcesibie for the evil to 
 })articipate in th.e former. 
 
 15. I shall try to :Bake him who 
 gave these tilings to ns, never re- 
 pent of his javmiij to me. 
 
 16. !Γ Moreover in the winter it 
 »i not enough for them to cover only 
 Hie head, and body, and feet ; but 
 on the extremities of their hands 
 they have rough gloves. 
 
 17. It becomes nU persons indi- 
 vidualhj to make libations, axid to 
 sacrifice and offer first-fruits, chaste- 
 ly and not disorderly, nor careleae- 
 ly, nor meanly, nor beyond their 
 Ability. 
 
 18. You may use as wintei quar- 
 ters for the army, Lemnos, and 
 Tbasos. find Sciathos,aiid the other 
 islands in this quarter, in which 
 there are kivbours, and command 
 all things ivkich it behoves armies 
 4o have. 
 
 19. It behaves iliee to hale titoae 
 
 φα^μαχον. 
 
 Ός γ^ξγι xorraveffiijS μ-^ 
 χαταφ^ονίω ό αοξαης. 
 
 Πάνυ ίιταηοζ r^ios i 
 oft>?j ω? *α? εχ^ ίαοζ h 
 υγίτ£ Όξος εγω. 
 
 αντιξ α.γα6ος, νυν γα.ξ r}8r, 
 νας ανθξω'π'οζ δει uSiuP ό 
 ouTog εξγον. 
 
 Αΐγω οιιτωζ αχ'Κί.ις, Ttg « 
 ο'-Γολη ; η τις"^ tfu β κατΜ 
 
 ΊΤΟξΙΙΆ δΐΙ f 
 
 Ετω,^ ότι ουδέν αυτός (*>e- 
 "ksfi ό όμετίξος ύοξυζος. 
 
 Ουδέν εγω μέλει <fy. 
 
 KaxsivogP μεν ό (pauXog 
 μ^τεστι, ούτος^δϊ Ό μοχθη^Ό^ 
 αδονατοζ μεταλαμβάνω." 
 
 "Ο μ;ν οϊιτος διδωμίε syti 
 ίΓεΐ|Λο"' ίΤοΐεω μη*οτε με- 
 ταμελει^ 5 -^ξος εγω όδοί. 
 
 Αλλα μην κα; εν ό χίιμων, 
 ο\) μόνον χεφαλη, και (Γωμα, 
 και νους αξχει αυτοί ο'κε*»- 
 ^ωΡ''' άλλα και χεξι αχρ»ς 
 ό χει^ X^'f'S δαίυς εγω. 
 
 "Σνενδω, και 5υω, και α-καρ• 
 χομαι, εκαστο^Ρ ιτ^οίηκί;, 
 χα^Άξως, και μη ενκίεΰυξμε. 
 νως, μηδέ αμ.ε\ως, μηίί 
 γΧι3γ_ξως, μηδέ ΰ'χεξ όννα- 
 
 'Ύναξγει tfu -χειμαδιος μη» 
 γξαω"^ ό δυναμι?, Αημνο^ 
 και ΘαίΌί, και 2κια5οί, και 
 ό άλλο? ό ίν ούτο^ ο τοΊίίς 
 ν-ηίίος' εν ος και λιμη•^ και 
 Οιτος, και og" χ^η ύτξατίν• 
 μα ffcs υιίαξχω. 
 
 Χ^ δ'υ μΐίίίω i ό <α^ανο- 
 
84 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 who write thirfgs contrarj• to law, 
 and to think no ono of such thiiiir-! 
 as these to be sinall, but every one 
 exceeding-ly great. 
 
 20. Sending out the sheep one 
 by one into the pasture, having 
 confimandod the ram, what things 
 it bchured him to do for rne. 
 
 21. 'J'hf^ raultitude answered un- 
 to him, We have heard from the 
 law, that the Christ remains for 
 fver ; and liow dost thou say that 
 it behoves the Son of man to be lifted 
 up? 
 
 22. But by your country's gods, 
 my sons, honour each other, if you 
 have any wish to gratify me. 
 
 Mcvcc: ταξιτ,μι' ό ττξΐίζα. 
 τον ίς ό νομή, ίντίλλω™* 4 
 
 Ατοκ^ινωΡ'' αυτο^ ί οχλβζ; 
 S-/0} αχοΐιυ" εχ ό νομοί, >τι ό 
 Χξκίτος μEv:J ες Ό αιών χαι 
 <Γω.< (fo Xfyuj, ότι δίι ΰψοω* 
 ό ΐ/ΐοί ό αν^ρωτοί ; 
 
 Αλλα T?cj 6;οςί tra- 
 τοωος, "ΤΌ-ΐς, τιμάω αλλη- 
 λ^)ν, £1 η χαι ό"*^ lyu γα• 
 ρ,'^ομαι^ μΐλίι tfu. 
 
 Ό μ.-ντοι ίιαχονια, Ι εφ' 
 ixaCTefP ό irPaiCcjP' χμ 
 εμαιιτου με-ίΐ-ι φτ,μ.ι. 
 
 23. Of the duty however, ground- 
 ed upon each of the things which 
 have been done, I affirm that / 
 likewise have my share. 
 
 24. Sive ffip, sive aunun dicaveris, aliis quidom aliquando 
 possessionem ct prjedam dicaveris ; dco vero parva est cwa 
 aurificum vcstrorum. 
 
 25. Si bonuin aniicuin paraturi simus, nos ipsos honos opcr^ 
 itt esse, et diccre bona cifacere. 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 Th4 accusative is often put alsoluldy, xara beiftg understood. 
 
 1. Enpcvvour to br, 08 to thy ΠΕί^αω"• ό με» ο'ωμο φι- 
 t)i/y, fi)iid of labour, and gs to thy λοτονο?, ό οε γΐ-χη φιλοίο- 
 
 *»iiui, fond of wisdom. 
 
 2. Armed as to my hu/id with 
 ΐΐιΐ*•• sword. 
 
 3. I am distracted as to my fear- 
 ful mmd. 
 
 4. I venture to be wiee as tu hu- 
 man knowUdge. 
 
 5. VkM thoa wisli lu kill me as 
 
 φος. 
 
 ΌτλιξωΡ" δε χείξ ids 
 φοί^ανον. 
 
 E>iT£ivwP'' φοβεροί φ**"'• 
 
 'Ο avi^ij'rivoj: (fOyta χιν- 
 (5ν'ν;•ω ειαι tfojoj. 
 
 ίΔη avai'Cu* εγ'^ Λ 6c>m 
 
GEEEK EXERCISES, 
 
 85 
 
 thoU killedst the Egyptian yester- 
 day? 
 
 6. A stone of an hundred feet as 
 to lis Icngih. 
 
 7. Or \vho, being• a slave to his 
 pleasures, would not be shamefully 
 affected both as to his. body and his 
 mind ? 
 
 6. IT Tliey all sailed wounded, 
 one as to the kg., another as to ike 
 head., and another injured as to some 
 other part. 
 
 9. Moreover, as to sacrifices, and 
 temples, and festivals^ and sacfed 
 enclosures, he devised in what way 
 threse shall be. 
 
 10. Crito therefore, as often as 
 he collected either corn, or oil, or 
 "Λ -ine, or fleeces, of any thing else 
 of the things useful for Hfe, which 
 grow in the country, having taken 
 a portion, was accustomed to give 
 it to this person ; and as often as 
 he sacrificed, he invited him, and 
 treated him Λvith attention as re- 
 gards such things as these. 
 
 11. The one was robust and 
 masculine, and squalid as to her 
 hair, full of hardness as to both 
 her hands, girt up as to her robe, 
 full of whits dust as my uncle was 
 whenever he polished stones ; the 
 other was very handsome, both 
 graceful a.s to her demeanour, and 
 elegant as to her attire. 
 
 12. Because the barbarians are 
 more slaviish as to their manner than 
 the Grecians, and those in Asia 
 then those in Europe, they remain 
 iiader the despotic government in 
 iwthing murmuring. 
 
 13. The keen and ready-witted 
 are, for the most part, both rea- 
 (Mly excited to passion ; and are 
 
 Η 
 
 Αιγνίίτΐΰς ; 
 
 Αιί)ο^, ο /χεν μηκο^, iroiise 
 ίχατον. 
 
 Η 7ΐς ουχ αν, ό ηδονή 5ου- 
 
 χα» ό (ίουμα χαι ό ψυχή ; 
 
 Τξαυμ^αηας δε -πας ετα- 
 ίτλίω,^ ι μεν 5 ακεΧος, Ό δε Ό 
 κεφαλή, ο δε άλλος τις (με» 
 ξος) (ίυντξΐξ^.Ρ"^ 
 
 ΘυοΊα δε, χαι ]εξον, χαι 
 ΙοξΤ'ή,χαι τεμενο?, εξευξκίχ^'^ 
 1<!τις τξ'-.ητος f ιμ» ούτος. 
 
 Ούτος ουν Ό Κρίτων, o'jrorf 
 ίίυγχομιξω'^ η Λτο?, η ελαι- 
 ον, η οίνος, η ε^ιον, ») αΧλος 
 τις ο εν αγξος γιγο^ίαι γ_!>7\- 
 ϋίμος ΊΤξος ο βίος, αφαίξεω^ 
 ΰιδωμι•' χαι ό•πΌΤ5 ^ιιω,<ΐ χα- 
 λεω,^ χαι ό τοιούτος τα^ είΤί- 
 μελεω.™- 
 
 Ειμι ο μεν εξγατιχος χαι 
 α^δξιχος, χαι αυχμη^ο^ ό κό- 
 μη, ο -χει ρ τυλο^Ρ α.\α.<κλευς, 
 δίαξωνημ-ύ^"^ ό είθη?, τιτανος 
 χα.τεγεμ,ω,ξ οίο^ ειμ; ό ^ειο?, 
 ό*(«•ε ξεω'^ Ό λιύος• Ό Ιτε^ο? 
 δε μαλα ευνξοιίωιτος, χαι δ 
 ϋχήμα ευτξετ-ης,χαι χοσ'μιο^ 
 ό αναβολή. 
 
 Δια ό"^ δουλιχος ε/μι*" ό 
 ■ήθος Ό μεν βαξξαξος ό Έλ- 
 λην, ό δε νεξί Ό ΑοΊα,* ό 
 τε^ι ο Ευ^ω^η,^ ύτομενω S 
 δεσΊτοτικοί αξχη, ονδεν δυ({. 
 χε^αινω. 
 
 Ό τε όζος χαι αγγ^ινοος, 
 ΰς ο τίΰλυς,Ρ και «r^oj ό οξγτ} 
 οξ\>ζ^ο•κος εψΑ' και αβτω φβ- 
 
«6 
 
 CREEK EXEUCISCe. 
 
 borne aloni^ boundinir, as ships 
 ^vithoiil ballast. 
 
 14. And now, Ο Archias, as far 
 as liijo in my power, I do not dis- 
 grace Athens. 
 
 15. It is more afflicting to have 
 become a poor from η rich man, 
 tlian not to have bi.'-eu rich αίβτα/. 
 
 16. Λί last, haA'ing• made the 
 tliinl Ubaiions, and luiving• pniyoU 
 to tlie gotis for good things, tiicy 
 broke up the company in ihc tent, 
 in onlcr to go to reel. 
 
 17. Moreover, as some of the 
 letters are vowels, which perfect 
 
 ,i\ sovmd by themselves ; in the 
 ts\nic way wo may remark of ex- 
 pressions themselves ; some of 
 
 cXoiov. 
 
 Και νυν, A^ictj, ό χατα 
 ί,ΐΛΐΐ'Του, 0U .χατα4ίχ•«νω • 
 Α()/)\ίχι. 
 
 Xa>w-Trof Σκ τλουίΊο^ τι- 
 νί,ς ym\ha\,^ η α^η μ») 
 
 TiXc? Or, ό Tf iroj (Γτονόη 
 Tcisoj,' -juh ενχομεϋ' ό όεο5<* 
 ό ο^α^'^ς, ό ίχηνη ϋζ χβίΓη 
 
 ό |i«.sv ειαι ρώνη:ΐ5, off χα» χα- 
 τα ϊαυ-τοι» φιονη αίΓο-τίλίω' ό 
 aj-roc: cfciros ειμ» ίτινοίω' 
 χαι 6η ι Xj^igS ό μίν au-rof , 
 
 ειαι. 
 
 them affr the ?nan>ier of vowels, 
 are of tliemselvcs expressive. 
 
 18. AUero eorum, de qiiibus raentibnem fecimu.-, plenus est 
 TimcTU.^, vir quoad aiia, porims. 
 
 19. liarum ariium ego jamdudum cupidus sum ; prajsenim 
 si sufHccrit mihi cadem scientia ad homines bonos rjuoad o/w- 
 m()€, ct pi-dclu'Oo quoad corpora. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVI. 
 
 Vtrbs of asking, teaching, doing well or ill, speaking well iv 
 ill, taking away, putting on υτ off, concealing, and the like, 
 are juincd with two accusatives, the one of the person, the other 
 of the thing : or with one accusative and an adverb. 
 
 1. NEVERTUP.r.F.si», answer mc, 
 Ο Mino.5, for I will ask thee a short 
 qwstvm. 
 
 2. In the mean time Chry.^an- 
 tas the IVrsiun came, and .-^oini^ 
 Others of the alike honoured, briiu,'•- 
 in^ desortcr.i. And Cyrus asked 
 the deserters respecting the vttdli^cjice 
 thpy brought Crom liic enemy. 
 
 O,'J.6^ oiroxPivcj""^ iyu u 
 
 RIivcjc:, βξαγνς γαξ Tif $ξη- 
 
 Εν olroi. (Si ί^^ομαΓ' Χ|υ- 
 tfavTct;: ό ΤΙίξΰτ,ς χαι αλλο^ 
 ri5 ό όμοτιμο.ς αΐ/τομολο^ 
 α^ω. Και ό Kv'os: ί^ωταω* 
 ό αυτόμολος &1' Ιχ » «■ολί- 
 
CnCKK EXERCISBS. 
 
 87 
 
 3. Bui when then will death 
 cover my body 1 This long life 
 teaches me many things. 
 
 4. The^' teach thir servants arts^ 
 froquentl}' spending much monej 
 upon thcni, but they neglect tlieia- 
 selves. 
 
 δ. Come then, if I buy thee, 
 rvhrii irUt tknu teach nie ? 
 
 6. The Thcbans did mumj other 
 injwles vnto Jis. 
 
 7. For they never as yet cei\sud 
 (hing many evils unto us^ 
 
 5. TVheit benefits thou didst jjro 
 mise that thou wanidst confer w>- 
 on us when thou didst receive the 
 money, have been already perform- 
 ed by thee. 
 
 9. He conferred many hemfiis on 
 the city. 
 
 10. Ο man, act not injunonsly to 
 the dead. 
 
 11. In order that tliey, ha\ing 
 become powerful both in their bo- 
 dies and their minds, may both re- 
 gulate their families well, and ad 
 kindly to their friends. 
 
 12. Themistocles then uttered 
 many and injurwus things against 
 loth him and the Corinthians. 
 
 13. Say est thou these things of 
 cvr genera! ? 
 
 14. To treat with fair xcords him 
 who uses fair words, and to act kind- 
 ly to him vjho acts kindly. 
 
 15. Be thou valiant, in order 
 that some one of posteiity may also 
 speak vjel! of thee. 
 
 16. The choruses uttered their 
 sarcasms against no male, hu against 
 the females of the comitry. 
 
 17. He deprived ray only and be- 
 loved son of Ife. 
 
 Ό hi εμΛξ irorf Syj davtv 
 τυς (ί!4\Μ καλυττω ; ■jroXi/g 
 ^ώαΊ-χ,ω εγω Ό toXuc: /3»oTof:. 
 
 Χαχις εΐζ αυτός αξγϋζίον ανο^- 
 λαίχω, ε<χΑ!τ<ιΌ 6ε αμελείς. 
 
 Φ-ξω δτι, tyv *^ιαμ.α» ΰν, 
 τις $γίϋ St5acixu ; 
 
 Θηβαίος coXuj μεν καβ 
 αΧΚος εγο} οώιχΜ^.^ 
 On γαρ ου5 jsrowor?• τανυ^''- 
 crcXuj ζοΛος εγω Toriw. 
 
 'Ος ίπίίγνεΰμ/τ.Ρ «rois•; 
 αγαίης syu, Ό<τε λαμβανί»;'" 
 
 Ανίξω'Τος, μη δξαω Ό&νηΰ- 
 Ku's xaxug. 
 
 Ίνα &JW.T05 y»voj*ar χαι 
 
 Ιαυτοΰ ωχοζ καλ6;5 oix£w, 
 καί ο φ\7•Λζ su croijw. 
 
 Tors δη δ GiMifToxkrig 
 εκεινοί rs tku Ό Έ-οξινέιοζ τα- 
 Χνς τε tun xaxog \εγω~ 
 
 Out 05 λί^ω ΰυ ό tfT^rt- 
 'τηγος ; 
 
 Ευ Χεγω ο ευ λεγω,ε χαι 
 ευ τοίίω ό ευ votsu.s 
 
 ΑΧνιμος ειμί, Ίνα τις Cu 
 
 και οψι^ονο? ευ ετω.'' 
 
 Kaxwj α7ο|>ευω" ό χο«οί 
 ανη^ μ;ν ουδείς, ό is stj^sj- 
 
 'Ο μονοδ ε^ω*^ χαι φιλο^ 
 
88 
 
 CREIE EXERCISES. 
 
 18. They arc emleavourLig lo 
 deprive you of ii.is couninj. 
 
 19. Anfl since wc have taken 
 their arms from thc?n^ so it is intum- 
 benl thai wc ourselves be never 
 destitute of arms. 
 
 20. A large boy, who had a 
 small coat, having stripped anoii^.er 
 bgy small in size, who had a large 
 co.xl, pui on him (the small boy) his 
 υυη, while he himself put on his 
 (the small boy's.) 
 
 21. Do not conceal from me ih^sc 
 things wliich I am going to suffer. 
 
 22. But now, since he is no 
 more, I look to (hoe, that joineil 
 with this thy sister, thou hesitate 
 not to slay yEgysthus, the perjie- 
 trator of thy father's miirdor : for 
 it behoves mc not any longer to 
 conceit aay thing from thee. 
 
 23. li Mithridates again appears 
 to them after they had crossed 
 over, ha\Tng one thousand horse- 
 men, and bowmen, and about four 
 thousand slingers ; for he asked so 
 many from Tissophemes. 
 
 24. And Ih^-ippidas, alway? dc- 
 sirincr to perform some brilliant 
 flcliievemcnt, asks from .■Jgrsilaus 
 about two thousand hcuvy nr/r.ed 
 soldiers, and as many targetccrs 
 besides, and horsemen, both those 
 of SpithridatCa, and the Pajddago- 
 7«i«, and of the Grecians as many 
 as hn could persuade. 
 
 25. But tell us, from what did 
 he begin to teach thee the (i^cc of 
 a gLncrdi And he said, from 
 the very same point with which ho 
 even cnilcd ; for he taught mc the 
 precepts rn/uisitefor tnarshalling an 
 army, and nothing besides. 
 
 26. I praise also this law, ihat 
 
 Και ΰ,ΰτΐ» γε sxSivos ό 
 a^rcc; 6u μγ, ό οτλον rorS 
 
 μέγας εχω•' χιτυν, Exiju* 
 auTcj, ό μΐν ίαυΓου εχίινας 
 
 Ε'.ϋιμ,ι.' 
 
 fttfTH^ μελ>.ω ταο'χω.'' 
 
 Njv δι, /jviv-a ουχίΠ ε•Μ, 
 εις tfu οη f3X=*cJ, ότως ό αι;- 
 
 το^^ει^ TaTt;ojci(pfivoj ζ\ι\ι 
 
 ί&< 
 
 αδίΧφ-η μτ, y.c.rrxviu^^ ΧΓίκ 
 δα xPucTW syu ετι. 
 
 Δΐβ4α/νω ? of αιτοζ STl•. 
 (paivw'" ό Μιύ^α,δαττ,ς •ra>jy, 
 syu ΊχΊτευζ χίλιοι, το^οτη^ 
 δε, χαι tf^ivJovrjcir^s £15 τϊ- 
 τ^αχιΰχιλιοι, roCoyrog γαξ 
 αι-£υ' Ύΐ'ίΠης^^τ,ς. 
 
 Κηι ό 'IlPirciJ«<:, ίτιίυ. 
 μ:ω αει λαμτ^ο; τι^ ΐ^'/'^^- 
 ^ο,οΛί, aj-ew ό Λ^ίίιλαοί 
 ocXi-r.c ες ίιΤχιλιοι, χαι 
 «■ελταίττ;? ηλλορ toOO'jtoj:, 
 ΧΛΐ iiTTiiij ό τε ^τΤί&^ίδΆττης, 
 /αι ό Πα.ρλ«7 WV, xcci ό Έλ- 
 λην ccoo'cc Tiidoj.* 
 
 Αται» λενω'' ε^ω, eroicv 
 ορχω"'^ ffj 5io«fl'x&j '< ίΤτΡα• 
 ντ,για; xrti ίς, εχ ό αυ7ο$, 
 φημι, Jig fiCirff x(ij τελει>- 
 ταο)•' Lv" γαζ -αχτιχο? syu•, 
 χαι αΧΚος οοόει^ ίιίαίχω.* 
 
 Αινεω χαι Ιδε Ό νομβ^, J* 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 89 
 
 neiihcr the king himself put nny 
 one to death for a ginglc offence, 
 Dor that any individual of the rest 
 of the Persians inflict^ for a single 
 offence, an incmediahls pinishmaU 
 on any one of his Ολνη domestics. 
 
 27. From these men then pro- 
 ceed both they who do the grcal- 
 ■est evils to states and individuals^ 
 nnd they who do the greatest good. 
 Whereas a mean disposition never 
 'loes any great action towards any 
 (■ne, whether β?* individual or a 
 state. 
 
 28. Why then do they wish that 
 we wage Avar ? Is it in onler that 
 we may injure one another^ and may 
 f ach of us stand in need of the 
 assistance of these 1 
 
 29. He deprived them both of life^ 
 him and his servant Calesius. 
 
 30. In misfortunes no good re- 
 sults from silence ; for the heart 
 desiring to hear all things, is found, 
 even in their misfortunes, desirous 
 (of listening to the woca of others.) 
 Surely it is not just that thou con- 
 ceal from friends at Iciist, nay even 
 more ύ\Άΐ\ friends, thy calamities. 
 
 31. Bonvm ali quid facer e in patriam conalur. 
 
 32. Thebaj te hoc malum docuerunt. 
 
 33. Ephoris licet hoc regifacere. 
 
 34. Prfecepit, si quis rogei me nomen, Menippum ne die©• 
 rem/ sed Herculem, aut Ulyssem, aut Orpheum. 
 
 μη £ig αίτια cvixa μητί αυ- 
 τος ό jSaCiXsuj μηδει? φο- 
 νεύω, μήτε τις ό αλλο5 Ιΐ£_^- 
 (ϊτ,ς μ-ηδίΐζ ο Ιαυτου o:x£ttjc 
 £τ» e'i£ air»a<^ ανηχ^Πτος τα- 
 6ος ΐξ^ω. 
 
 Εκ ούτος δη Ό ανΐ)ξ χαι ό 
 ό μίγας χαχος ΐξγαζομαί^ ό 
 ccXie; ^ι^νομαι και ό ιδιώτης, 
 και ό όΡ" αγαύος• (/μικροί δε 
 φ\)((ις ουδίις μέγας ouosiroTS 
 ωδεις cute ιδιωτ^ί οντε co- 
 >.ig δξαω. 
 
 Τίς δη *ολίμ£ω εγω βον. 
 λομαι ; η ίνα syu μ?ν αλλ»;, 
 λων χακω$ ίΤοιεω ; εχζΐΜοςϋ 
 δε αμφοτΐξος δέομαι ; 
 
 Αμφω ύυμος α*αυ^αω,' 
 αυτοί, και όε^α^ων Καλη^ 
 αιος. 
 
 2iutrjS δε ουδΐΐ? £^ycv εν 
 χακο?, ό γαξ ■τοόεω ιτας χα^- 
 δια χλιιω, καν ο Μ/.χος λ<χνοε 
 £ΐαι2 αλιίχω. Ον μην φιλθ£ 
 γε χαι ng"* μάλλον η φιλοί, 
 XPvSTu διχαιος ΰας δΜΰ'Βξο^ 
 ξια. 
 
 HS 
 
90 
 
 CREEK VXERCISES. 
 
 
 CHAP. XXXVil. 
 
 Verbs / accusincr, condemning, acquitiiiig, freeing•, nad tM 
 tike, take after them the accusative of the person with the geni- 
 tive of the thing. 
 
 Some verbs of accusing and condemning hcve, on account of the 
 nature of their composition., the person in the genitive, ".nd the 
 crime, or the punishment, in the accusative. 
 
 1. I ipill accuse thee of cowar- Λυχα•"" Cj ιίιιλια. 
 
 2. He promised that he wouM 
 g'w'i money, provided ihey accused 
 vii of the deed. 
 
 3. But when he hoard that the 
 f-nemy were thrown into great con- 
 iiision, by reason of their accusing 
 one annihtr if what had happened, 
 ho iirunediaiely led his army to 
 Siirdis. 
 
 ■1. Do not convict the people of 
 the Athenians of folhj, before the 
 Grecians. 
 
 5. If they two. in any respect, 
 cornraiited transgression, the ac- 
 cuser Idames Socrates for this. 
 
 6. How this will also prove of 
 advantage, we will easily teach 
 you ; if, having convicted Cleon- of 
 L•ving received bribes, or of theft, 
 you thereupon enclose lliis fellow's 
 neck in the pillory. 
 
 7. But Socrates, said the ac- 
 cuser, in particuliu taught them 
 to treat their fathers with contume- 
 ly, by asserting that it was allow- 
 <η1 one by law even to bintl liis fa- 
 ther, after L•ving convicted {him) of 
 madtuss. 
 
 8. I therefore acquit both yuu of 
 this blame and ^'igasi^s, provided 
 Agtisias liiiniclf say that I am the 
 auUiOf of any one of these ihinjj;^6. 
 
 ίωμι, ει Ό Τξα^μΜ. «ιηαο- 
 μ.Λ»' ΐ'/ω. 
 
 Ός δε αχονω^ό TcXfunoj 
 ταξοι,ΰίω, Jia ό"* a/-iaoy.aj 
 
 ayu" {ο (ίτζατε^μα) Si£ laf- 
 
 Mr. aiPSu caPnvcint ενΛίμ. 
 71TJ ό 'EXkr; , ό Or/uo^ β 
 Ac.V,vaifif. 
 
 E» μΐν cif ^λ/;μμίλ£ω,* 
 
 αιηαομαι. 
 
 'Clgis χαι (,Ιτος ζυμ-φ^ξί^ι, 
 ^a5ius 6i5u(fxu' τ,ν Κ>^'** 
 οω*ον ai^sw* xni xXotkj, eira 
 φ^μΛU^ c^rcj ό ξυλον ό αυ- 
 
 ΑλλΛ ΣίΜξατης ys φημι 
 h χαττιγο^ος, Ι car»;^ vpy- 
 «■ηλαχι^ω υιοαίχω,' φαίχω, 
 χη,τα νομ-ος ΐξί Τ Tt^ τα^ηνο/α 
 (αυτοί) "ί|:'ω* χαι ό -zarr^ 
 
 Κ^ U CUV ttToXiJw χαι (fv I 
 αίτια, χαι λγαΰιη, αν αυτο^ 
 Αγαίίιας fr;u,i' εγω τΐζ οί-ης 
 αίτια ειμί. 
 
GREEK EX^ERCISES. 
 
 91 
 
 9. No surely, since I acgiiit thee 
 cf this 77iurder. 
 
 10. Only release me from this 
 (are ; for if I have leisure from 
 these things, I think that thou will 
 hi useful, in many respects, both 
 to me ami Cja'us. 
 
 11. I go, about to give to the 
 state no ignoble offering of death, 
 and about to free this land from evil. 
 
 12. Wh}' does it behove me to 
 tharge injustice against Phxhus ? 
 
 13. He charged folly against th-e 
 rest of 7nen, v/hosoever do any 
 thing, contrary to the tilings indi- 
 Ciited by the gods. . 
 
 14. And having come to the 
 temple of Juno, they persuaded 
 about fifty men of the suppliants 
 to submit to a trial, and adjudged 
 death against all — (condemned them 
 all to death.) 
 
 15. I have ample justice from 
 thee, Ο stranger, since thou de- 
 nouncest death against thyself — (con- 
 demnest thyself to death.) 
 
 16. IT Hurl, Ο Jupiter, if it has 
 been decreed against me by the 
 fates that I be struck \viih a thun- 
 derbolt, and I toill in no respect 
 accuse thee of the bloio, but Clotho, 
 who wounds through thee. 
 
 17. If then a peripon having been 
 eornpelled by another, should put 
 to death any one, as for example 
 a public executioner, o; a guard, 
 the former having obeyed a ma- 
 gistrate, and the latter a tyrant, 
 ivhom wilt thou accuse of the mw• 
 
 18. What law is full of so much 
 injustice and inhumanity, as to 
 deprive of grateful acknoivledgmeni 
 
 Ou orjTa, cCEi tfy ids 
 εΧευίΐίξ'^ φόνο?. 
 
 Μονοε εγω απολύω' oiiTOf 
 6 ετιμίλϊΐα" ψ γαξ εγω ίχο- 
 λη αγω αττο^ούτος, εγω <rt 
 (j-j οιομαι iro'Xus* χ«ι Ku^oj 
 χ^ησ'ί,αοε ίι,αι. 
 
 Στεΐ'χ_ω δε, 6α•^ατος δωξον 
 ονχ aiiy -χξος τολι? Λίωμ», 
 votfoj δε Ιδε αίταλλαο'σ'ί/ί 
 χ6ων. 
 
 Φοι§ο?ε δε αδίΜα^ (asv 
 «riff δει κατη^Ό^ίω j 
 
 Ό aXKogS μωξία'* κατι>- 
 γοξεω,' Όύτίζ ιταξο. Ό^ fupa 
 ό Θεοζ^ Σημαίνω τοιΐω τις. 
 
 Ες Ό 'H^ajoff {Ίεξον) εξγ> 
 μα.!/' ό \χετ-ης ως 'κεντ-η^.οντα 
 
 Εχω, ω ^£voff, -rra^a Jk 
 fag ό δ\ΧΎΐ, ειτειδη δεα;ι7ον 
 
 Βάλλω, ω Ζευς, ει «γ κ 
 χεζοω\ος ■ττλησ'σ'ω'' fJ^^'^Wj "cti 
 Cj ουδείς αιτιαομαι ο ■ττλη^η, 
 . άλλα ό Κλω^ω ί δια ύυ τ». 
 τξωύχω.ε 
 
 Ει ουν <Γΐ; αναγχαζω^ itto 
 αΧΚος, φονεύω^ 715, οίον δψ 
 μιοΓ, 7J δοξυφοξος, β μεν δ^- 
 χαδΐ'ής Ίτειβω,Ρ^ Ό is τυ^αν. 
 νος, τις α(τ»αο/χαι ό φονο^ ; 
 
 Τις Είμι vcfAoc; τοΟΌυτοί 
 ctJixia κηι μισανό^ω^ια μίΟ". 
 τος, ΰατε ό ίιοωμι^'& τι$"* ό 
 
93 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 tki person vho has given some of i(5icf,P χω nwtuy'i •ζ^αγιχα 
 his property (to the ei-iir,) and /tas ςιλΛνι'ρ^το^ xai (piXccu'K?, 
 done a humane and generous ac- ό χα^ί^ ucoctspsu ; 
 lion? 
 
 19. For I .see thee, whenever 
 thou mayest ha\c cnidanncd orte 
 rf sr.criie^c or (hr/i^ i,ot inflicting 
 [luniyhnicnt acconlinir to the im- 
 jiorii^ncc of iho ihinc-.^ which they 
 may have Uiken away, but con- 
 
 'Ofw όε (Ju, ίταν Tiff 
 
 ίρΒ αν λαμ,?α".ω'" ό ημ^^ια 
 coifoj,'" άλλα όμοιωρ acacrK 
 iavaros* χατακ^ινω. 
 
 "0"^ μεν γαξ τΟ.ε^τα^ί' 
 cafi ό νί^ατοωΡ'ε (μίιία) 
 χαταχ^ινω,* ό όέ χαλά.? αιτο- 
 flv>;fl'jtffc•,'' iSios"•^ ό CrovJaioj 
 ό (ρυϋίζ αιτονεμω.-' 
 
 dtnmiiig all wi'Jiout disiinciion ίο 
 death. 
 
 20. For fate udjudgis death 
 r.i^ainst ail Λ?/"» — (condemns all 
 liicn to die;) but an hocourabie 
 d.aih, nature assies αβ a peculiar 
 j^rivilegc to the worthy. 
 
 21. Τα quidcm, Ο Terpsion, ηονπ legis es auctcr, ut is, 
 qui ampli•^. diniiia uii nequeat nd voluptatcm, morialur : hoc 
 autcni eccns a Fato ei Naiura constiluium est. T(rjs. Ο,ι.ιη 
 iilam igitur incuso νήςικε constitulionis. 
 
 22. Quid hoc? ferisnc, Ο Timon ? Anteetor, Ο fleicuii.'; ' 
 hH ! hei ! in jus voco te dc vulnerc ad Arcopagum. 
 
 23. Eo (]uippe iniquitalis venerunt, et la/Uanos' ccmdLmiia- 
 riinl iguavia,'^ ul quos sa-jx; bellum pro suis agris gererc po.-iu- 
 laruni, coedcai nunc dc Mcssenfi pugnare vetent. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVllI. 
 
 Verbs of companng, gi\ing, promismg, declaring, and tkt Uh, 
 govern tie dative with ihc accusative. 
 
 1. He did not compare me to a 
 god indeed, but thought that I fiiT 
 excelled men. 
 
 2. 'Demcrslhcncs and Diogenes 
 (have spoken) well ; the oru) call- 
 ing rich and ignorant men golden 
 f heep, the oilier comparing them to 
 figs upon precipices. 
 
 Εχω ie" 6ί(,ς μ(ν cux inu.- 
 ^u,* avdfcJflOS 06 βολι•<: cf»- 
 
 ό όίίογΐττ,ς• Ό μεν χ^ιίΤΊο? 
 e^^arov χαλί (J ό «τλο^βΊορ 
 xoj a<ra»5suroi, ό δε ί ετι 
 ό χ^ημνο^β (S'jKr) ατειχα^ω 
 
GREEK EXEBCISES. 
 
 93 
 
 3. I will do this, but do thou give 
 my seat ίο Sophocles to keep. 
 
 4. Whaisoeve)• things }ou give 
 vriio mc I willingl}' receive ; but he 
 of you who is most in want shall 
 make use of them. 
 
 5. The Macroncs thereupon give 
 ttnio the Greeks a barbarian spear, 
 a!id the Greeks a Grecian one to 
 ihcm. 
 
 6. Give then, said Agi'silaus, 
 provisions unto my army, until I may 
 come to that place. Tithraustes 
 then gives unto him thirty talents. 
 
 7. Unto you he announced ptacc, 
 vnto them assistance. 
 
 8. From all these things they 
 knew that the army of the enemy 
 was somewhere in the neighbour- 
 hood. Immediately thereupon the 
 leader of the scouts sends a person 
 to announce these things unto Cyrifs. 
 
 9. Thou tellcsi me, Ο Croesus, 
 of great poverty in heaven, if it 
 shall behove them to send for theii• 
 gold from Lydia. 
 
 10. ΤΓ Whence, in the Odj'ssey, 
 one might compare Homer to the 
 setting sun, Avhose grandeur re- 
 mains v>'iihout its vehemence. 
 
 1 1 . And our orator, by his both 
 burning as it wexe, and at the same 
 instant rending every thing with 
 \'iolence, and moreover with rapi- 
 ditj', power, vehemence, viight be 
 compared to a tempest or a thunder- 
 bolt. 
 
 12. Upon Artabazus he bestowed 
 a golden cup, upon Hyrcanius a 
 horse, and v\any other and beauti- 
 ful things ; but unto thee, Go• 
 
 Μς ο .ΐμ.ος 'Καξαδώωμι'' Σο. 
 
 δίχοααι, "χξαω"^ δε aurog 
 ΰυ Ό μαΧκίτα ίίομαι.ίΐ 
 
 Έντίυύεν διίωμι ό Μαχ^ων 
 /3α?§α^ικο5 λί^χη ό 'Ελ- 
 Xt;v, ο δί Έλλην tKSivog 
 Ελληνικός. 
 
 'Έωζ αν τοινυν, ^'ΐμι ό 
 Aj'Sf^iXaog, sxcicrs iro^S'jw,™ 
 δι^ωμι 6 (ίτξατια ό STirji. 
 ί;ι εχΐΐνος μίν δ-η Ό Ti- 
 ^|αυΐ'τη5 ίιΊωμι τριαχοντα 
 7αλαντ5ν. 
 
 Συ μεν ειρν^ντ], εκί/νο^ (3s 
 /3οη5εια ειταγγίΚλω."^^ 
 
 Εκ οϋτος α.'κας jnudxu^ 
 ότι ειμι•^ ττΌν crX-.-j'tfts» ό <ίτξα- 
 ς-ευμα ό "ΤίλΓμιο^. Ευίυ$ 
 ουν ϊτερ,'ττω ό ΰ'Λοναζχτις Ttg 
 o.'^'yuC\ijpS oOrog ό Ku^og. 
 
 Πολν? t /ω λε^ω, ω Κ^οι- 
 δοζ, TTSvia εν ό ουξανι,ς, ει εκ 
 ο Λυίια μεταίτελλω™ ό 
 ^f'ucj'iov δε^ αυτό?. 
 
 Όί)εν, εν ό OJuCrfcia Tit» 
 f ειχκ^ω^ Tis αν Όμ-ο^'; j x(x- 
 caJ-jy"' r.Xiog, 05 διχα ό ίφο- 
 (5?οτηί «ιταραμενω ό μερ/ε(3ο<Γ . 
 
 Και ό μεν ήμετε^ο^ δια 
 ό"« μετά. /3ια εκαίτορ,Ρ ετι 
 δα ταχοί, ^ωμ•»!, ίδ/νοτη^, 
 riov καίω•" τε αμα και διαξ. 
 ίτα^ω,*" ίκηττορ Tig «-α^ει. 
 και^ο; η κε^αυνο^. 
 
 Αξτα^αξος δε yjvffsr^ s*. 
 *ωμα, ό δε "Ύξκαν.ος 1τ•5Τ&(:, 
 και aXXoc ιτολυρ και καλο^ 
 δι^ΡΒο^-α,ι•' (Γυ ίε, φημι, « 
 
94 
 
 cnnEH EXEncisEg. 
 
 bn'a.', siiiil he, I trkV gioe a hu^bvid Τ^ι^^υας, ίιίωμι ανήξ ό A». 
 
 ίοΓ thy daug-hter. 
 
 13. To give gTiat and pompous 
 qtithtts to (yijli)isf liltk circumstaii' 
 ces would appear the same thing, 
 as if a pt-TPon should pui a great 
 tragic mask υροη an infant cAUd. 
 
 14. I manifested thy name to the 
 men idiom thou imsi given wiio me 
 om of the world ; thine tbot were, 
 and thou /i-ist girex them unto me, 
 and thpy have koj)t thy word. 
 
 15. And Iiad not a Cretan an- 
 rMunccd urUo ^gcsihus the cpprocck- 
 ing army, he (Ejiaiuinondas) would 
 have taken the ciiy like a nc-sl, al- 
 
 ξΐτί^γ,μι μ.εγαζ χαι (Τίμνο^ 
 0Λ|χα, ό u'oro; αν φκινω,"" 
 tjg fi τις <τξηγι>.ος rrjoffw- 
 
 \ν^ιος. 
 
 Ί'ονΣ^&ω' ό όνομα du i αν- 
 
 χοίμο?• Cop ίιμι, και syu 
 α,ίή-ίζ (3ιόωμι κω ό Κογος 
 Ου TY,PS-j}, 
 
 Koi SJ μη K^iS ΐξαγγίΚ- 
 Xiu'* ί AyidXooi; c^oC:ιμI* 
 ό ίί-^ατίυμα, λαμοανω" αν 
 ΰ coXig Ldrti? viCrT-ria, tciv- 
 cacac'iv ε^μο^ ό αμυνών '"δ 
 
 together dcstiiut.o of defenders 
 
 16. Verum fi konestis et oplimis guihusgue cum cornpnrrm, 
 jnerito aliquis ne laudanti potius, quain convtcianli cornpartirit. 
 
 17. Clavumfrtwu!:\ele:es ckdcre; et basin globosam pciH' 
 bus subjeccnini. 
 
 IS. EnuMia ipsis ca qiue a nobis gerantiir. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIX. 
 
 Every vab rnaij taL• an acmsative of a comsponding noun. 
 
 1. Tiir.Y tre gjirg their fated 
 vay. 
 
 2. Ik thoti cautious therefore 
 •irith that ravJion which I ιηί•η- 
 tion. 
 
 ίί. Having »i/!ni:d a ba-^e s:n, I 
 will endeavour to make amends 
 for it, 
 
 4. AIi.>Joralile, alone, ho svj'irs 
 conlinnally irilh a cnnd ri.mplnini. 
 
 ."i. AVhal an aiieing tliinke.=;t 
 thou, () pon, I then arose from 
 sleep ? 
 
 Ευλα?£ομαι ov» ό rjXa- 
 fiia cj ί/'ω >.5^ ω. 
 
 'ΛμαΡΓία αιί^'^ο;; άμα^- 
 «■av&j," αναλαμβάνω*^ τει. 
 faoj."' 
 
 Auffcavo;, μcv&.ί, αιΐι νο- 
 tfcu voiog ny?"-?- 
 
 Zj ϋη r£XVC«, TCIOf £ytu 
 
 uvcilfradig όοχίω <ζ iirvM; 
 'κίττιμί" τοτδ ; 
 
GREEK EXCECISCg. 
 
 9$ 
 
 6. He leaped a light leap forth 
 from the ship. 
 
 7. They being besieged a siege 
 b}' the sycophants not inferior to 
 that by enemies. 
 
 8. They cxacise all cere. 
 
 9. It is better to ruii this risk m 
 Uie case of foes than friends. 
 
 10. The rich Ze»e a life more 
 mioerable than yon. 
 
 11. Lest some ono shall ^ a 
 hill of impiety against us before 
 Rhadamanthus. 
 
 12. 1Γ Tragedy /laving wider' 
 gmre many changes, rested when 
 it became possessed of its proper 
 nature ; and iEschylus first in- 
 creased the number of actors from 
 one to two, and lessened tlie parts 
 of the chorus. 
 
 Τίηδψα κο^χροζ εχ vayg. 
 αςαλλομαι.'' 
 
 'Ύτύ ο C^jXD.pavc'/ig ifo- 
 
 ελα-ττα,•!» ό i-rro ?ro\iuwos. 
 Ε•ιη,αελ;οααί νας splits. 
 
 δυνβ-Λΐ εν εχί)^";? χρίί-ττων 
 τ; φιλο^. 
 
 &•ύ β'.ος βιοω. 
 
 Μη Tic: ε^ω•"» γ^αφω"» 
 ^ροφτη arfs'cJiii, eirj ο 'Ρα-, 
 
 (puCij• καί ό τε ί ύιτοκξΊ- 
 Τί;5 «rXijiJoj, ε| s's mg δυο 
 
 ywj Ό (fAifOb) ό χο^ ελατ. 
 
 κωμ-'^ίία, Σωκ^ατη^ τΐί εκεί 
 τε^ιρε^ω, φαΰχω τε αερο- 
 CacEiJ, και αλλοί; foXvff 
 
 2'j ετω "τλουτεο), και 
 
 13. Ye have seen in tlie comedy 
 Oi Aristophanes, one Socrates car- 
 ried about there, and saying tliat 
 he walked in the air, and babbling 
 much other folly. 
 
 14. Thou didst awaken me 
 being rich, and enjoying a most 
 pieaaing drearn, and experiencing 
 wonderful happiness. 
 
 15. Istum amorem omnes mortui am^mi. 
 
 16. Populo amicus erat et unafugii hn-ucfagam. 
 
 17. Qui turpe consilium cepit, is, si foruma ei adfuerit, 
 lucrum quidem invenii, nihilo vefo minus m.alum ceperit ccn- 
 siliuna. 
 
 '/■,δυ; 
 
 ςυνει,αί, xai 
 
 uav^JxijTog ευδαιμονία su&xa- 
 μονεω, svsy^tpu.^ 
 
96 
 
 6RErK EXEHCISEa. 
 
 CHAP. XL. 
 
 Particiijks govern the caee of (heir oxen verbs. 
 
 1 . Having done these thin ^s. t ht\y 
 depariL'd, hei'ing provisims from the 
 hostile territory. 
 
 2. After these things, Tisso.- 
 phcrnes came to the Piellesjiom ; 
 and having snizcd Alcibiuiles, who 
 had conic unto hiin with a single 
 trireme, bnnging both gifts of hjs- 
 pitalitij and prcsentg, he confined 
 him in Sardis. 
 
 3. They who arc fond of this 
 pursuit will benefit themselves in 
 many re?pecf8. 
 
 4. Nor did he make those who 
 as.sociatod with him lovers of rich- 
 er; ; for lie caused them to cease 
 from their other desires, and did 
 not exact money from those who 
 desi-cd hiin as a preceptor. 
 
 5. Thoy two seeing these thing?, 
 and being such persons as the}' 
 have been before described to be, 
 can any one say that they two, be- 
 cause they desired to lead the life of 
 Socrates, and to possess the modera- 
 tion wliich he possessed, courted 
 his friendship 1 
 
 6. He also instructed the at- 
 tendants, if any one else of the 
 heavy-armed soldiers might wish 
 ίο stand near, in order to hear his 
 words, not to prevent him. 
 
 7. I know it, and I was afraid 
 whin I heard thee declaiming, and 
 especially when thou didst threat- 
 en that thou wouldst draw up from 
 their foundations the cartii and the 
 sea, witli the gods ihemscLves, hav- 
 ing let down (hat golden chain. 
 
 8. IT And whenever the horse 
 
 μαι," ό εητηύίίος sx β τβ- 
 
 Μίτα οι/Γ»?, ΤιίοΌφδΡ• 
 ττ,ς εξγομ.Μ" sg Έλληστο?. 
 cos* α^ιχν5θ|*αί^= Js caoo 
 avros ε'ις <τξη^^^ς AXxifio- 
 δτ,ς ξενης"^ τ£ χαι δuξvι 
 αγω, ξυλλαμίανω,'' ειζγω* 
 i\i Σαξόίις. 
 
 Ou μ>;ν o-.i(j£ ε^αΛχ^ι^ 
 ματο^ γε ό Cuveiui? το•- 
 ίω'* ό μίν γαξ άΚΧος ΐτι. 
 6υμ.ια. i:a\,u,' Ι'^ δί sumto» 
 εηίιιμεω? ο.χ r^ar-^'^ 
 χρήμα. 
 
 Οίτος δ•. ό^αω,•*" xca 
 ίιμι oioff τΡοΡϊω,'^" 'ΤοτΒ^η 
 τις rcjrcg'^^ φτ,μι Ό jiizg h 
 Σωχξαττ,ς ετι^μ-'^, S χα» 
 ό (ίυφξο(ίύ\ιΐ\ Ις εχεη(ς εχω,* 
 οξεγω^^ ό ίμ4λια «ϋτοί ; 
 
 Π^οετω' δε ό ύτηρ«•η5, 
 χαι άλλο? :ΐ τι^ /ϊουλομαι 
 i ότλοφο^ο^ ίΤ^οδ'(θ'->;μ>™ 
 axoucj™ ό λόχο?, μη χωλυω. 
 
 αχουω" tfu ίημηχο^εω' χω 
 μαλκΤ-α Ιτοτε atstXsu^ 
 αναίταω εχ βαθξον ό ^η 
 χαι ό ίαλαΟ'Ο'π, κιλό? θεορ, 
 ό (Τεκα εχϊΐνα? • γ^^^ιίίος 
 χαίιημι.'^ 
 
 Κα» oiecv Se iirocrf.y' 
 
(iHEEE ESBRCISCS^ 
 
 9T 
 
 kcmng suspected any thing, be not 
 inclined to approach unto this, it 
 behoves (the rider) to teach him 
 that the things are not terrible ; 
 but if this cannot be done, to touch 
 the thing tohich appeals to be alarm- 
 ing, and lead the horse towards it 
 gently. 
 
 9. Or smelling or touching what 
 things thou mightest be delighted. 
 
 10. He himself therefore ahvays 
 continued mindfid of the things con- 
 ducive to vhtue. 
 
 11. For if, excelling in this the 
 rest, thou undertake to transact 
 the affairs of the state, I would 
 not wonder if thou shouldst very 
 easily attain unto what Uiou de- 
 sirest. 
 
 12. For if they determine to fol- 
 low, you will appear to be the cause 
 of it, having begun to cross over. 
 
 13. For, having learned that he 
 neither sacrificed to the gods nor 
 used divination, but even laughed 
 at those who did these things, he 
 said. 
 
 14. He called it a favour, when 
 any one quitted him, that when he 
 made use of his services, he did not 
 ruin him. 
 
 15. But, Ο Socrates, obeying 
 w-5 thy supporters, neither value 
 children, nor life, nor any thing 
 else, more highly than justice. 
 
 ης Wiftg, μη ίίλω ητροζ 
 ourog If ξοΠειμΛ, διίαο'χω όει 
 ότι ου όανος Hfii' si δε (ιλ 
 άττω""? αυτός ό δίΐνοζ δο. 
 xsu ειμί, xcu ο kiros τ^αωδ 
 •ϋξοίίαγωβ 
 
 Η τις οΟ'φ^αινομαι η ά<Τ- 
 ς -u^ Τ/δω.^ 
 
 Α ει μεν ouv δ ιτξος αξΐτη 
 χ^ηοΊμοί αυτός όιατελεω^ 
 μναω.Ρ'ε 
 
 Εαν γαξ, ούτος διαφε. 
 ξω^ Ό αΧΚος, εττιχει^εω δ 
 έ ΐίο'Κις ίτ^αττω, ουκ αν 
 όαυμαζω,^ ει Tiaw ^αδιι^ς 
 ς-υγχανίύ^ οςΡ ετιόυμεω. 
 
 Ην γαξ ψηφιξω™^ Ιιίο. 
 μαι, ΰυ δοχίω αίτιος ειμ<, 
 αρχω^ έ"^ όια^αινω.^ 
 
 Καταμανόανω^ γαξ α>. 
 τος ουτί 6υω^ Ό όεος, ours 
 μαντικοί (τέχνη) Χξαω,'°ε 
 άλλα και ό ■π^οιεω? ούτοί 
 κατα^-ελαω,ε φημι. 
 
 Ευε^εοΊα καταλε^ω,^ 
 ό'ττοτε τις auTog αφκίτημι,™- 
 οτι χ^αω"^ε αυτοί, ουκ αιτολ- 
 λυμι* auTog. 
 
 Αλλ', ω Σωκράτη?, *ει- 
 όω^ε εγω ο ΰος τ^οφευ?, 
 μήτε "τταΐί τίεζΐ •π'ολυί ίΤοι- 
 εω,"> μήτε Ό^•" ζαω,^ μ-τ^τί 
 αΧΚος μηίεΐί, *^o ό δίκαιος» 
 
 16. Λ''idi reges et satrapas nostros, mendicantes apud eos, 
 et primas literas dccentes. 
 
 17. Plures futuri sunt vos redarguentes, quos nunc ego com- 
 pescebam. 
 
 18. Deos et heroas precati, fines ita transierunt. 
 
 19. Nee reliquarum facultatum guicguamnon curatum, vel 
 inexploratum relinquenies ;'^ amicos vero, egenies ipsorum curd, 
 neslisrenies.^ 
 
08 
 
 ΰβΕΕΚ CS£RCI52a. 
 
 CHAP. XU. 
 
 A participle is used absolutch/ with a nmtn or pronoun ; mr>st 
 commonly in the genitivt ; somttiines in the dative ; and cfkn 
 in the accusative^ eepeciallij if it be an mpersuncU ; in the no* 
 minaiive rarely. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 1. f Utile the Lacedemonians and 
 their allies were deliberating toge- 
 ther. 
 
 2. The enemy emcaminng under 
 the very walls. 
 
 3 Λ day having irUervened, a 
 battle again takea place, and the 
 p'»plo conquer. 
 
 4. And yet, Ο Lacelrcmonianp, 
 whci such a state aa this has plaud 
 iiscl/in opposition, yc delay. 
 
 5 The men h/:rinet arrived, and 
 Sddthus, the Athenians iinmedi- 
 iitoly put Salajthu3 to death. 
 
 6. When a god grants a gift, 
 envy provaileth not, and when he 
 d^ics not grani one, labour is of no 
 avail. 
 
 T. Both t.hs Syracusant and their 
 iil'.cs having been vangui&hcd, and 
 having carried off their dead men 
 under a truce. 
 
 8. !\Iy friends having come to 
 me, adnse me to remove myself 
 away, lest I puiTer ?nine punish- 
 mcni from thee, si-nce I luxvc injured 
 inoo irreatly. 
 
 '■ 9. But thcs« thingT?, Ο Socra- 
 tes, tiiou appcarcfit unto me to pay 
 well, bidding rnc endeavour to b»- 
 ;p;i every action witli the pod.';, 
 swiC'' thi go Is arc cnnirnlhra no lt'i>s 
 «Tf peaceful Lhan of warlike opera- 
 uonsb 
 
 χαι ό (f ^μμαχνς. 
 
 Διαλυθώ' τ,ίΐΛζα, [W.'^r, 
 au^ig ^ιχνομα», χαι νιχαω ί 
 
 Ούτο^ ,uivTci rotoyric α*- 
 Tixai\'JTriu' coXij, ω Λα- 
 Χί(5αιμ&»ΐ'..ί, ίιαμίλλχ.•. 
 
 2αλαι5ο5, ό Α&τ^ιακς 'j jtev 
 Σαλαιί^ί e-jd-jg airoxriivu.' 
 ©iof βιόωμί, μηίίιί: »C- 
 Jfiiy ipdovog• Mcu μη (5ιϋϋμί, 
 μηυί!^ tg^iu Tovog. 
 
 Kca νιχαω' ό ΣυξΟΛΟίκις 
 wti ό (ίυμααχοί:, χαι \ΐχ^ 
 ύτο (Γ«•ον5);Ι> avaijec' " 
 
 fcojXsuu fXTTO^ij* Ej^ij 5μΛα- 
 του, μη <Γ^ς tcu 'zaQyjJ- >rx) 
 ίΤυ, ίύζ aJixiw' μί^α^.Ρ 
 
 Αλλα OLiio^ μίτ, ω Σο• 
 χραί-ηί, χαλωί iyu ϋζτ*ω 
 \iyu, χΕΛίνω ίτΕΐ^ίκ..•'" Ci* 
 
 ως i ύίοζ χίΐξίος ίιμ^ ύ^δ:^ς 
 ήττων ό £l^r;wxof, η t ίΤολβ- 
 μ*Χ55 ff/o•• 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 99 
 
 10. Whenever thou seest any 
 ofte weei)ing in grief, either when 
 his son is going abroad, or when he 
 has lost hid property, beware lest 
 the appearance may take thee in. 
 
 11. These things having been 
 said, tiiey arose, and hanng de- 
 parted, burned the waggons and 
 tlie tent.s. Having done these 
 things, they took their dinners, 
 and while they were dining, Mi- 
 thridates comes %vith about thirty 
 horsemen. 
 
 <s'Svuog, η α'ΤοίημΞω τεχνον, 
 η αιτολλυμι ΟΡ saurou, τ^ό- 
 (ίίχω (ό νους) μη Cu 6 φαν- 
 
 Οΰτος "λεγω^ ανίσ'τημι,* 
 χαι ατεξ-χομαί^ χατακαιω" 
 ό άμαξα χαι δ (ίχηνη. OJ- 
 τος Ίτοιίω α^ιο'το'ίτοιόω•'"- 
 
 uf τξίαχοντα. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 12. Which things having been 
 done, how shouklst thou not de- 
 servejily think well of thyself? 
 
 13. While the Corcyrusans were 
 pitching their camp, the twenty ships 
 sailed down. 
 
 14. And also when Phrynichus 
 cmnposed a play, the Capture of 
 Miletus, and represented it, the 
 whole theatre fell into tears. 
 
 15. When the year xoas elapsed, 
 the Ephoii again make a demon- 
 stration against Elis. 
 
 16. c/3s Jesus departed thence, 
 two blind men followed him, cry- 
 ing aloud and sa\ing, Have rnercy 
 upon us, Son of David ; and lohen 
 hi', had entered into the house, the 
 blind men approached hira. 
 
 ειχοτ(».•5 fAt/ag 9|ovstJ \ 
 
 Κζξχυξαης ατξατϋ'Χε. 
 δευω,^^ ο guwri νανς xutu- 
 
 Κα» δη και τοιεω^ Φρ^- 
 νιχο$ (5|αμα, Μίλητος άλω- 
 ΰΐζ, χαι (5ιδα(ίχω,^ εΐζ δαχξ -j 
 Ciirru'^ ι όεατξον. 
 
 ΙΙεξίζίμι^ δε ο Ζνιαυτοξ, 
 φαίνω "jraXiu ό Εφοξαζ φξο -j- 
 ξα ε*! ό IIXij. 
 
 ΤΙαξαγω εχειύεν ό ίηΟΌυε, 
 ακολουθεω^ αυτός δυο τυ- 
 φΧος, Χξα,ζω και "Κεγω, 
 ελέω' εγω υΙος Δα§ιδ• ε^- 
 χομΛί° (5ε εις ό οιχ»α, τ^ο» 
 ΰε^ομΜ^ auTog 6 τυφλοί. , 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 17, FFAe?z Crassvs woe retreating 
 uath great loss, and endeavouring 
 to make his way through the more 
 mountainous part. ■ 
 
 IS. Three spies of the Cartha- ^^.^..„^.^^^^ 
 ginians having been apprehended, r ' νξίίζ (Τυλλαμ-βανοο 
 
 Κξα!Τ(ίος μΐτο ιτολυς ήτ- 
 τα αναχω^ εω, χαι δια ο ορϊι- 
 νος Ιδίυω «τει^αω.'^ 
 
100 
 
 CREEK EXEUCISES. 
 
 19. It being an uncertain thing, 
 when any other person having 
 made an incursion, will take away 
 the fruits of ilicir labours. 
 
 20. The Grecians having three 
 fifcts worthy of mention ; that with 
 you, and ours, and that of the Co- 
 rinthians. 
 
 2\. It having appeared proper lo 
 engage in a sea figlit. 
 
 22. Thus then died Theranie- 
 nes ; but the thirty, as if now it 
 was permitted ihein to tyrannize 
 ibarlessly, pent word to those who 
 were excluded from the list, not lo 
 enter the cit}'. 
 
 23. Ji/thoiigh it teas allo^red liim 
 to make use of many antl advan- 
 tageous things as he wished. 
 
 24. This individual being sum- 
 moned by the Athenians to a trial 
 for his life, ilid not obey, having 
 said that it was foolish for an ac- 
 cused person to seek to clear him- 
 self, when he had it in his power to 
 flee. 
 
 25. Fathers restrain their chil- 
 dren from bad men, since their 
 intercourse is the destruction of vir- 
 tue. 
 
 26. He prayed to the gods aho 
 jympl}' to give him the things that 
 were good, since the gods know best 
 what kind of things arc gootl. 
 
 Αψηλοί ί'μι, ό -cofi rij 
 
 Τ^εΐί μ£ν ειμί λο;, ο? αξ. 
 log ό Έλλην vawcixo? ('"J-i• 
 ί•£ι,.αα)• ό τα ία (Tu, χολ ό 
 ήμίτίί&ί:, χαι ό Ko-'ivrioff. 
 
 Θτ;£πμ£ν7;^ μεν 6r, cu-Tc^^ 
 aTO()vT;ff>iiJ''' ό It "iiiACv. 
 ς-α, ΰς E^rCTi Ύ,^τ^ ajToff 
 
 μεν ό ε5iJ ό JtaraXo^cg μη 
 εκίειμι ες ό αύτυ. 
 
 Πα^ίιμι αντο.ί ccXjf χαι 
 α'/α.'\ζ x^'ttij'" ίς r,g ρου. 
 λομαι.' 
 
 Οίτος STi xjiCic χολευ 
 ΰανατί'Λοζ Li70 ό Λίηναιορ, 
 ουχ Ccaxouoj,* BViJ^ ί'^Χ^Λζ 
 ο εχωε ίικη, ζητίω ατο 
 
 afro ό TovTi^cg avt'jijcoc, ΰ$ 
 ό οότο5 όμιλια ίιαλυΟΊί ίιμι 
 
 Και εύχομαι' ίϊ cfcj ό 
 iios άττλως ό ayaioj ci3u- 
 μι, ώ$ ό ίεοί xaXflj iujiu•,' 
 OTciog α^αίοί ίΐμ». 
 
 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 27. JrAf/i ίΛίί/ //arc opened the Ανοΐ)ω'' ό (ία.'μα co^c?, 
 
 body's pores, fire is kindled anew. caXiv γίνομαι ό νυξ. 
 
 ' 28. For the a)~nvj being nvme- Πολοί -^αξ ό ίτ^ατια 
 
 reus, it will not be in the jwwer of ειμί, ou cagK ειμί coXij ύ-το 
 
 every city to ncconimodate them. ίίχομα/.•' 
 
 29. Wishing L•) semi eoine one ΒοϋλοοΛί «•;? κατα/τχο- 
 
 &s a spy into Lydia, and to asotT- tcs σ«μ«'ω'' eri A.iia.e koi 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 101 
 
 tain what the Assyrian is doing•, 
 Araspcs appeared unto him to be 
 a suitable person to go on this mis- 
 sion. 
 
 30. But he goes forth in haste, 
 and having both seen them hum- 
 bled in spirit, and having heard the 
 large concourse crying aloud Avith 
 a mournful cry, tears are shed co- 
 piously by him also. 
 
 Α<ϊ(ίυξκις, δοχεω^ αυτός S'Tt- 
 T^Jsiog ειμί A^atfiTog ε^χο. 
 μαι" ε-τ» ούτος. 
 
 Ό δε ύιίουδ'ή εξεξ-χ^ομαι, 
 χα ι ει5ω® τε ταΐίεηως δια. 
 χειμαι, και ακουω^ ffuu οι- 
 μωγ•η ο -ττολυ^Ρ /3οαω, χαι 
 avTog^ 'Ζξογεω δαχζυ. 
 
 PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 31 . Tfie storm being indeed such 
 as thou mentionest, food having 
 
 faikd, not as much wine being at 
 hand as to be smelled, numbers being 
 vjor/i out with labours, ihe enemy 
 pressing on in ike rear. 
 
 32. The loall being weak, and 
 in one place even fallen down, it 
 being also built low, and at the 
 same time the gates standing open 
 through security. 
 
 33. Since therefore they were 
 excluded from the sea, and plun- 
 dered by land, some endeavoured 
 til dehver up the ciiy to the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 34. At last, manij corpses lying 
 upon each other in the river, and 
 ike ar)ny being destroyed, partly in 
 the river, and partly, if any por- 
 tion even escaped, by the cavalry, 
 Ni( ias surrenders himself to Gy- 
 lippus. 
 
 3-5. Wonder not my host, if, 
 vjhen my child has appeared unhoped 
 for, I indulge in many words. 
 
 36. And when he had spent 
 three months there, a plot having 
 been formed by the JeAVS against 
 
 12 
 
 Χίιμωυ γζ ειμί οιος^ λί- 
 γο, ΰιτοζ δε scrjX£;7riJ,'""' 
 OIVOJ δε μηδέ ο^φ^αινω τα- 
 ^ειμ», ύ*ο δε «ττονο^ τολυί 
 α^α^ο^ευω,* νολεμιο^ έϋ 
 έίΓομαι. 
 
 Ό τε(χο5 αΰΰεν-ης ειμί, 
 και εο'τιν *] χαι ιτίττω, ous 
 βξα-χε^ς οίχοϋομεω,Ρ' χκι 
 τυλη άμα δια. ό άδεια ανοι- 
 yw. -^ -Μ 
 
 Ei^ycj ουν' auTog^ ό &α.• 
 λαίίΓα, και κατά γ7\ -ποζ. 
 6εω, εγγείξεω^ τις νξος 
 Aiijvaios αγω'^ ό *oXij. 
 
 Τε>.ο5 δε, νεχξος τί ■χολνς 
 S'ti αλλήλων"^ κειμκι εν δ 
 νοταμος, κοι διαφύΐιξώ' ο 
 ΰτζΆτευμα, ο μεν, κατά δ 
 Ίίοταμος,''^ ί δε, και ει ης 
 (μεξος) διαφευγω,^'^ ί*ο ο 
 ΙΐΓτευί, ο Νικιαί Γ-ολι^-το^ 
 έαυτοΐί ιτα^αδιδωμι. 
 
 Ω ξεινος, μη θαυμάζω, 
 τεκνονί^ ει φαινωΡ^ αελτ- 
 τος, μηχϋνω Xoyo?.^ 
 
 Και ?το(ϊ](3'α5'' μψ '''ξ^^^ 
 ^ινομαι^ αυτο5 E'^'i^o-jX•») 
 vto ό Ιονδαιο?, μέλλω ανα- 
 
102 GE££E LXEC.C1S£S. 
 
 LiiTi v.hcn about to set sud for χω"' ας i 1>ιξ'.οί, y<vcua/' 
 
 Syria, a rccolution wao taken by 7νωι*η ό ΰναίτξζ^ δια Μα- 
 
 hiiij of returning privately ttiiuugh χϊώονια. 
 jNiiiceJonia. 
 
 37. The earih being lorn open Ανα^^^ν^μι μίν sx ,οο- 
 fiorn ita depths, Τατ^απίί t/se^ ic/« ο• d^og ^τ-, a^rsf 6s /-.μνοω 
 teVy bare, and Me icAa/s jyt/r/i/ being Ta^a^og, ανατ^οττη Ji •!,λ^J 
 Irokm up and re/ii asunder, all tilings xai ukKyraffii !. χν;μ.ος Xoft- 
 to^jtither, heaven, hell, things mor• βάνω, «ας άμα, ο^ρανο?, 
 ta.!, things immortal, together com• dhtf;, h όντ,το;^ ό αίοαατοε:, 
 l:it and share the danger in thai άμα ό tots (Τ,;μτολ=μί-ω χαι 
 iigiit. - tfjyrivouvtvw (■'^X'^• 
 
 38. Hunc igilur Pertinaccnv, fiock iniemptsta, sopore curr^f^ 
 tii omnibus, Lajtus atque Elcctus adcunt. 
 
 39. Ilk hoBC adhuc dicenie, nou expecta\i ego finem \erbo- 
 rum. 
 
 40. His exjiositis, felicitas in laudabibbus sit, an poiius in 
 bouvrabilibus rebus udeamus. 
 
 CHAP. XLIL 
 
 Th^ infiniiive mood has an accusaiivc before it, when iis agent or 
 suhject is differeiit frum that of lie prcculing verb ; but a no- 
 vwuUive when they arc the same. 
 
 IVficn the preceding verb and the infinitiic relate to the same per- 
 af'H, the prorujun, unless cmphatical, is omitted before the latter ,• 
 hi4 when they relate to different ptrsons, the pronoun must be 
 ^pressed. 
 
 The infinitive viuod is governed by verbs, participles, and adjec- 
 tives. 
 
 The infinitive, "kvith the accusative frgguently before ii, is often put 
 absolntely, being preceded ly Uic particles ύ?, ώίτί, ir^iv, α•χξΐ, 
 μ-ίγξΐ, and S"/nc others, eitlier eiiressed ur understood. 
 
 Thf infinitive is tftcn put ell^ticalli/, ofa, /iXfcf, σχοτίΐ, δις, ίελυ, 
 λίλΒ'οω, or ενχομΛΐ, being undersiood to govern it. 
 
 I, These indctHl think thii ih*. (Xr-p μΕν οημΛΐ, ό ί;ος 
 
 gnils know sonic ihiiiir-•^, hut tlial ό μιν ίώι\μ.ι, I (5» cyx s»i5»j. 
 
 ui^y do n<if know others; Socra- μι• Σ^-κ^^α^τς 6; τας τ;^ί^- 
 
 ι<5, howovor, thought thai the gois ματ ύιοζ stir^u. 
 knew nil things. 
 
GREEK EXERCISEe. 
 
 103 
 
 2. The accuser also srid, thai 
 he (Socrates) observed respecting 
 friends, thai it is of no advantage 
 ihai tkerj be well disposed, unless they 
 shall also be able to benefit. 
 
 o. He thinks tha: he himself 
 l-nows all things. 
 
 4. I pass over in silence thai I 
 myself have been frequently crown- 
 ed. 
 
 5. He showed thai Cyrus was 
 an enemy to the king, but he kim- 
 *-■;/ 1 friend. 
 
 6. We shall not say that wt aur- 
 S'-Jrcs are blamcable. 
 
 7. Each hoping thai ht shall do 
 lu.tthing himself. 
 
 S. And they said that ihey saw 
 tiiR royal standard. 
 
 9. And in doing these thing?, 
 ■'i-iit thou say that thou art acting u 
 yj.5t part 1 
 
 10. For he said on that occa- 
 ."iion, thai he heard this remark 
 from many, that a sincere and 
 good friend would be the most 
 valuable of all possessions, while 
 ^5 said that he savj the generality 
 of men caring about everj' thing 
 ra'her than the acquisition of 
 friends. 
 
 1 1 . Do not thou hasten to Ic. rich, 
 rather tlian to appear to be good. 
 
 12. A man who is about to do 
 a great action is accustomed to de- 
 ley. 
 
 13. Whenever the boys seemed 
 to befit to learn something. 
 
 14. Without virtue it is not easy 
 t'l hear fortunate circumstances pro- 
 perly. 
 
 15. Wh.en he saw AguiXYio. 
 
 16. Great vengeance fell upon 
 
 Φημ< OS χαίη^ο^ο?, sra^ 
 ti φίλοζ aurog λ:^ω, ί)ς ου- 
 ofig οφ$λο5 Euvocs ίιμ4, «ι μ.% 
 Xflu ωοέλέω (ϊυναμΛί. 
 
 μι. 
 
 Cos (ίτ^φανοω. 
 
 Δεικνυμ•^ KyPos ΐίόΚε. 
 
 δΐ φιλο5. 
 
 Ojx (X'jv^ri. γε mrt'.c φ'/;μ»( 
 £ΐμ.ι. 
 
 Aurrn,• μϊν ονο;.•.ς i-xucrag 
 νοίϊω ελτι^ω. 
 
 Και ό βα(ίι\Βΐος drii,:ivJ 
 uPU'.j ιρημι. 
 
 Κα! οηΜ•!, CuTjt; irci^u), 
 
 ^ςατίντο^,τ αν ειμι^^ φιλ^'ί 
 Cap/is κ«ι ayaoog• ε:.ΊΐΛ{ • 
 λεομαιΕ όε <r:cii,f^ μάλλον 
 ό^αν φν-,μι ο tcXAjs η φ!- 
 ACS >;τϊ;ίΓί^. 
 
 λον γξτ,ιττοζ όοχεω ί)μ<. 
 
 Φιλεω οκνεω τρα^-μα αν*(^ 
 ■ffgarfCij με^α$. 
 
 Ετ;((7αν ϋοχεω•' ixav&g 
 ειμί ό irffii μανόανω Tif. 
 
 Ανευ ο!;εΐΤ"/: ου t'at>i'>? (jcs- 
 »w εμμελίί^ς ό 5^Γ•^χ/;μ«.. 
 
104 
 
 GREEK EXEHCISES. 
 
 CrfC3tj3, for this reason, {as wc may 
 conjecture), because he thought 
 himself to be the happiest of all 
 men. 
 
 17. They marie a creat outcry, 
 S'j thai the enemy heard it. 
 
 IS. Thoise from the city mar- 
 shalled theuiselvfcs, so as t'jfiU the 
 road. 
 
 1 9. The Gofl of glory appeared 
 unto our father Abraham, being 
 in .Me.-opotamia, befurc hi dive'l in 
 Charran. 
 
 20. Lord, come down quickly 
 before my child dies. 
 
 21. I often spent my time in 
 hamjuets, vntU I /<ΐΓζ'Λ all thin^.s, 
 if ihere was any thing troublcaoine 
 in human life. 
 
 22. Do thou always excel and 
 he superior to other)?. 
 
 23. Do thou it/ home, and off^x 
 ».icred hecatombs to the inimortal 
 gLxis. 
 
 24. Contradict and cxanine my 
 discourse. 
 
 2.5. Say that thou hcarcst the voice 
 ef Hercules. 
 
 26. If We must pameitly en- 
 dcanour, by whatever niei bod one 
 c<in, both by education hud hy pur- 
 suiL^, and by tlie scieiuiis wLich 
 W.I It'arn, tofec from vice, and at- 
 t'ji.i to its contrary. 
 
 27. Although ho ΠΡΛΌΐ projTiised 
 to he a teacher o( ihi^. νοτ he miide 
 thtiic who associated with hiin to 
 hup'', that ihcy, imilating him, roould 
 bf.oms such (as he \vas). 
 
 28. // is bcttn that one die of 
 hunger, being icithout grirf or fear, 
 
 γας Kfoiifog, {ύς ειχαξω^), 
 ότ» νομίζω' iayrou £ιμι >ιν. 
 ipuizoi ατας ολβιοί. 
 
 wiTs ό τολεμιο^ axojw. 
 Ό ih εχ affru tfuvroi- 
 
 Ό Θεο5 ό ίοξη ocrc- 
 
 ειμί εν ΜίίΤοτοΓαμίίϊ, C'lv 
 η χατοιχίω' aurog εν Xotj- 
 
 Ku^iof, xorafaivcj,'" r^iv 
 αΐΓ0()ν>]ί^' ό raiOiov ε^ω. 
 
 Λια^ω" εν (ί^μιτοίΤιον «rcX- 
 λαχΐ5 μεν, μεχ?» '.ΐί εηλαν- 
 όανω"!'' ■το?,ε ει t;s χηλε- 
 «rcj εν ανόίωτινο; /Sioj ίιμ^. 
 
 Λιεν a^ifftfijcj χαι Οτε. 
 Ροχο5 ειμί άλλο?. 
 
 Οιχαόε ατοΊ'τειχω, ε^ίιο 
 d' lsi>c£ εχατομδη α^ανατο^ 
 ίεο5. 
 
 Αντιλεχω xeu διε„'Λ;νω ο 
 
 Φαίχ-^ 5* α•J(5η ό Ή^α• 
 χλτ);; χλ;;ω. 
 
 Ilξ'Jiι^μ.r]r;o; μεν ότη τΐ5 
 5ϋν«μι((, Xrti ^ια ϊ•^03η Χαι 
 Ji* ετιτη'^ομα. μαίι.μ'ΐ γ£, 
 φΓϋ^ω" μεν κκχια, τούναν. 
 τιον όε α'ιξάω.^ 
 
 Κο'Γοι ο•-•ίε irwrore jTitf- 
 χνίώμαι' oiSciitxaKos ειμί 
 ojTcf, άλλα εΧ'τιζ'Μ τοιε^^ 
 ό C'jvJiaTPjfiuK εαυτού, μι- 
 μεομ:;! sxiivcg, foiCi^Jc ^ινο- 
 μα<.^ 
 
 Kositftfuv λιμοδ οτοόνηΰ'- 
 χω/ ttX-jrcs χαι «φοοο^ 
 
OBEKK EXERCISES. 
 
 105 
 
 than live in plenty, being troubled ; 
 and it is better that thy son be bad^ 
 than thou wretched. 
 
 29. But he has come to this 
 pitch of pride, as to smd now to 
 the Euboeana such letters. 
 
 30. Having left the judgment- 
 &<iiit, we came to the place of pu- 
 nishment; but there, my friend, 
 there were many and miserable 
 things to hear and see. 
 
 31. Be present, then, said he, 
 at the doors, clothed with theso 
 dresses, be/ore the sttn rises, and 
 stand as Pheraulas the Persian 
 shall tell you from me. 
 
 γίνομαι," η ζα.^ εν αφ^ο. 
 
 ό σαΐ5 xaxoj £ίμ,ι, η ffy χα- 
 χοίαιμων. 
 
 Ό δε εις ούτος^ ίξξις 
 ΕΡχο,υ.αι," ώίτί ετισ-τίλλω 
 EuwiSug η(5η ToiouTOf iricT- 
 «"ολη. 
 
 ΛφίΟ'τημι*' ό (5ιχα3'-ΐ9^ίο.ν, 
 9ΤΡθί ϋ χολαιίττ]Ρ;ον cupjx- 
 νεομαί•- ενία is, ω (piXoc, 
 τολυ^ χαι ελίίινο^ ειμι 
 αχουοο^ χαι ειδω.° 
 
 Πκ^ειμι ουν, φψ.ι, ετί 
 ό ίυ^ίχ, χο!ίμεω^« ό (Γτολη 
 ojTos, ίΤΡΊν ί;λίο5 ανα-ελλω, 
 χαι καίίίτημι ώ5 αν Cj φ;- 
 fa-jXag ό Πί^ο'ηί εξα^νελ. 
 λω^ >τα|α ε^Ό). 
 
 Όταν (5si (fuj'Xjviuvsuu^ 
 φιλοί'^ *] 'Τί'ατζίς, μη μαν- 
 τευομα;, ει (ίυ^'λίνύυνευΓεοζ, 
 Ην yap ίΤΡοίτω" cTu ό μαν- 
 τι^, φαύλο? γίνομαι 6 \εξος, 
 δ-ηΧος ότι ό ύανατος ίημαι» 
 νω, η ■ττη^ωα'ι^ με^ος (ίωμα^ 
 
 '^ 32. When iAow mayest have to 
 encounter danger for thy friend or 
 country, do not consult the sooth- 
 sayer, whether thou oughtest to 
 do it. For if the soothsayer de- 
 clare to thee that tL• omens have been 
 bad, it is evident that death is sig- 
 nified, or the maiming of a part of 
 the bod}', or flight. 
 
 33. Miror igitur, quo tandem pacto, persuasi fuerint Athe« 
 nienses, Socratem de Deis non sana mente esse. 
 
 34. Q,uid jucundum nosti, nihil horum causa/ace?'e volens ? 
 qucB jucundorum appetiturn non expectas, sed, priuS'^uam ap-, 
 fctas, omnibus repleris ; priusquam esurias comedens ; prius- 
 quam sitias bibens ? 
 
 35. Rhetor Demias advenit, plebiscitum habens in dextra, 
 et se consanguineum nostrum esse dicens. 
 
106 
 
 GRS.ZK tXERCI3ES. 
 
 CHAP. XLIIL 
 
 ParticipUs are ofien used instead of the infinitive^ after verbt d^ 
 
 voting- an affection 'jr ετΠ'.Ηΐ/η of the mind. 
 Tfi-. participle is used after Lhc adjectives φα-νΐξος, 6χλος, and their 
 
 ojrnpt'unfls, cfla αφανχς, εη;ρα\ιτ,ς, ^c. ; and thd adjeciivt is 
 
 catnrnoniy rendered in English by iis adverb. 
 
 1 . I remember to have received this 
 wftilih. 
 
 2. I know thai I am oame to a 
 poworlul city. 
 
 3. We rnighl continue to be most 
 happy 
 
 i. I wiU not cease to have God 
 for my liefcnder. 
 
 5 He appeared to surpass all his 
 conteiiiporaries. 
 
 6. They wniinui to mainiain the 
 pt«oc. 
 
 7 I, my friends, am delighted to 
 be honoured by you. 
 
 6. I perceived that I was very un- 
 wi.^e, and fooli-ihly exasperated. 
 
 9. He continued to irjure no one 
 ir.'?''cd, but. to humour the good and 
 f^ junish tho=e that ofTende-J. 
 
 H'. And I am not ashamed to say 
 thes•.; thinijrs. 
 
 11. No one wiU appear to have 
 g'und this honour more nobly. 
 
 12 No one, either inoruii, or 
 dt mi-god, or inimoruil, ivill he found 
 k> have received the kingdom more 
 honourably. 
 
 Ι'ό. I never ceased to pity our• 
 sdvtii!, and to thii^k the king and 
 thr*!i with hirn iiappy. 
 
 ! 4. He wjvs vvidtnily cndcavoer- 
 ing to snrpaii.s. 
 
 ]δ Tiioic about Anius, \i-efc 
 
 μαι' ό tXojtc•;. 
 
 Oiivu^ r.xu, 
 
 Μαλιίτα αν ε^όαιμονεω 
 OmtcXsu. 
 
 Osoj ου λ-/)χω «ξοίΤτατχς 
 
 lias ό ήλιξ διαιρεξω φαι. 
 Ό ίίΡηνη αγω iiarsXru. 
 Eyu, u ονη?, f,3u) μτν 
 
 AiC^avoaai' a§cu>j.7 <ro- 
 Xws £χω χ 11 μα -ry ό^με/-.. 
 μαι. 
 
 Διατελειο"* o-josis μίν αο». 
 »•ω, ό ό; χξτ^<ί7ος τιμίϊ^^, 
 ό όί •ί;αμα;•-αν£„•? χιλο^ω. 
 
 Και 0Ϊ7ί5 μίν ο•<.χ αια- 
 
 Οχ/6εις φαιν;.;!'' ;. τιμγ, 
 ύί^'.ζ χαλοί χτα^μαι,'' 
 
 ■ Ο,^δΐις, ti>TS ίκητο;:, ovrt 
 τ,μιίεος, οντ• aiuvarcg ei^ 
 jiO'xw, χαλις λαμ?ανο>.'' ό 
 ραδΊλ:';:!. 
 
 (>j rri/TS cau'*»"- ί^ω μ£ν 
 οιχτϋξ^}, .oaffiXttj ο; χα< ό 
 (Ty» αι/<•:< μαχηίι^^;. 
 
 Φαν;Ρο5 £ιμι vixauj <r;(. 
 fOfcJ "' 
 
 Eu<5»;>.ac (ιμι •.• tin i 
 
GUBEK EXE2CISES. 
 
 Ϊ07 
 
 andenth/ giving leas attention to 
 the Greeks. 
 
 16. He did nol secreily moke usQ 
 of divination. 
 
 17. He evidently did ihosQ things 
 ftlso from choice. 
 
 18. He openly eacrificeil, often- 
 times at home, oftentimes on the 
 public altars of the city. 
 
 19. !T I will obey God rathei 
 than you ; and as long as I breathe 
 and am able, I will not cease to cul- 
 avaie philosophy. 
 
 20. But the Assyrian, when he 
 knew the spies to he advancing, or- 
 ders two or three chariots and a few 
 cavalry to spring forth and flee. 
 
 21. The same day, when he 
 heard thai Cyrus was there, he 
 led away the army quickly unta 
 him. 
 
 22. And thus neither wilt thou 
 be found injunng thy masters, nor 
 \ή\\ it have been consulted badly 
 for ourselves. 
 
 23. An thou not asMmtd lo be 
 so careful of riches, and glory^ 
 and honour, that they may be to 
 thee as abundant as po.«sibIe ; hut 
 dost thou take no ciire. nor think 
 at all of thy understanding, and of 
 truth, and of the soul, tiiai it maj 
 be as good as possible ? 
 
 24. Ο Gadatas, thou hast cfi- 
 deTiily been persuaded by Hy*ta»- 
 pef!. to entertain" those sentiinenis 
 which thou utterest. 
 
 \ 25. Where men think, that he 
 who excels will neither be pro- 
 claimeil by a herald nor receive 
 rewards, there they cvidxnily are 
 without feelings of emulation k> 
 wards one another. 
 
 oux α.φανης ειμί. 
 
 Και axsivcrs sx c^oai^stfie 
 
 Θυω φανεροί siiAi, coXX»• 
 κις μ3ν 01X01, <ολλαχ>ί r!i 
 £ffi £ xoivoj ό ίΤολίζ βωμΛζ. 
 
 xui oiog 7ί 5(^1,•= ου μ.ι\ -rauoi"» 
 
 Ό δε Αίίίυξίαζ, ως yif^ni- 
 
 ζ^ϊνγ'^ χίλίυω ύ^μ^ εξανκί- 
 τημα^ϊ iyo η τ^ας, χσ.'. ί-ττ ■ 
 νος ο'Κιγος. 
 
 Α•^6τ,μίξον^ SiS! ewDvcj' 
 
 ανΐοζ αγωε Ι ΰτξα-ίυμΛ. 
 
 Και ούτω cues rfu u.Xtr'xa 
 
 αύίχζίύ ο οεοΊτοτη?, οντε ϊ^^ 
 χαχω^ /35?ο•.'λευμεν:$Ρ" ;iw. 
 
 Χρήμα |*«* ovt ailyyv^J^^ 
 ετιμϊλομαι, oirug ίυ ίιμτ* 
 ίίζ roXus, και όοξα χαι τιμή ; 
 φ^ονηίΤΊί <5ε, χαι αλιοίεια, y.ru 
 
 ίιμι,' 0-.ΙΧ είΐμελομαι Ojifc 
 
 fl Γαίατας ίν,/χ^ fWh 
 WTO & 'Τ(ίτα(ίίΓ7;ί vivi<t^'•^ 
 {ΛΛύζ '/tvMJxiki ος XsjOi. 
 
 'OsOiJ μϊΐ> οίο,Β<α! J σ«ί?ίίβί- 
 νοζ ό x|flti-»CTt««i» μντ<•£ »■»- 
 Ι'^ίίω, lA-^J cuiXs» >Λμ^*•- 
 νω, Offkas 3*ιιι ίτ'τοίία μ 
 φ<>>ίΐ?ίΐχ'Λ* «•ρο5 α>.Χ•>ϋ^•*' 
 
105 
 
 CaEEK EXCaCISES. 
 
 26. Non ccseaho ecrihae, 
 
 27. Scil quoniodo agit ? Sitire desiniL 
 
 28. Videtvr aniinus immortalis esse. 
 
 29. Alanifcsitim oral euin neminem diligere. 
 
 30. Maniftslam crai eum aniriii soUiciiudine affici. 
 
 CHAP. XLIV. 
 
 Tl>e verbs eiai, rvy^avu, Ijra^xu, γίνομαι, kuPu, ίχω, φδανω, λαν•. 
 ίανω, and some others, arc used with parliciplcs after them, xchick 
 TC'juirc to be rendered, in Latin, by the mood and tense of tht 
 vrrb annexed, while tlie verbs thcmsdves are most gai^aliij ren- 
 dered by adverbs. 
 
 1. "VViLT thou not be silent ? 
 
 2. Into how great a desire hast 
 thou thrown us, if these things are 
 so ! And they are so, suid he. 
 
 3. This plan of operations icas 
 ft ftir nothing else, than for steal- 
 ing away or retreating with rapi- 
 dity. 
 
 4. But .if yon shall do these 
 things which you mention, know 
 t-hat you will γιιΐ t•) death a m:in 
 ^vho has already watched much 
 for you. 
 
 5. The river Selinu.•* hajfened 
 to run through the middle of the 
 country. 
 
 6. One of the attendants called 
 him, in order that he might hispect 
 the entrails which had been taken 
 out ; for he ht^ipencd to be sacrificing 
 for the purpose of ascertaining the 
 future. 
 
 7. But riearchu.s ordered Tol- 
 mides, an Elean, whom he happcry 
 td to have as α hejrald with him, to 
 prodaim. 
 
 8. I kajfcnul to 6a>j that lliere 
 
 Ου 'ftuwatj' ειμί ; 
 
 μια ίμ?αλλω εχω, ει ovroj 
 (ιΰτωζ εχω. Λλ>Λ ειμ*, 
 φημι, οότωί εχω. 
 
 Ourof ϋ ΰ->a7Ίηfut ειμί 
 0"j(5iif aXXcg Oi'vaani, η a-zc• 
 
 ΙΙν Ss "τοιεω, ?? λε^ω, 
 κίημι ότι ανη;» xaraxcuvu* 
 <ιμι, ToXif μεν- (5η νξο C\i 
 
 Τϋ^ανω' δε Sux μείο^ 
 |εω ό χωρίον <δ(ιΤθψ.ος 2)ελι. 
 
 νους. 
 
 Καλεω' <rig αυτός ο Wt^- 
 ^irrjg, Ivus ΐιδω' β Ίίζος 
 εξαι^εω/β «-υ^χανω* ya^ 
 
 ΚΧεαξγρς δε ΤολμιίΐΤί 
 Ηλείο;, ός τυγχάνω' εχοβ 
 ταξ' έαυτοϋ ^ηξυζ, a.vi'suf 
 χελευω.* 
 
CRESK EXERCISES. 
 
 m 
 
 Would be to us, many and favour- 
 able liopos of safety 
 
 9 Tribes have been separatdy 
 formed by the state. 
 
 10. We will endeavour, with 
 the aid of the gods, to inflict ven- 
 geance on any one who injirrca 
 U3 ; but if an}'- one (L• U3 kirid' 
 v-esses, we will, even as far as we 
 are able, not be inferior to this one 
 in doing good. 
 
 1 1 . AVe never as yet did you any 
 injan'. 
 
 12. And when again he may 
 have turned back. 
 
 13. If my mother did not live. 
 
 14. Do thou observe if he be re• 
 diiicd in sleep. 
 
 lo. But do thou, if it appears 
 goo-d to tliee, hold in light estimation 
 the honours of the g(y\s. 
 
 16. Since thou, Ο mother, with 
 tears and lamentation.^ deplore my 
 deceased father and beloved coun- 
 try. 
 
 17. The Sc3'fhi<\n3 came to the 
 bridge long before the Persians. 
 
 15. But the foot immediately 
 proceeded on a run to Epipolfe, 
 and i^ce-ndhy Euryelum, before the 
 Syracusans arrived. 
 
 19. We no sooner came to TrcE- 
 zen, than we were seized with such 
 violent di-seases. 
 
 20. But when day dawned, they 
 proceeded in silence, drawn up in 
 battle an'ay, against the enemy ; 
 aiid (without dilficuity), for there 
 was a mi.=t, so that they a-pjnroach^d 
 near uruiiscavered. 
 
 21. And Cyratadas, while they 
 were Landing at Piraeus, escaped 
 
 Κ 
 
 Xwff xai χαΚος ελίτ»? fyit 
 EifU (fw -τηΐια. 
 
 δίΜξεω'^ φυλή. 
 
 ASmsuS (aevtoi Tft^aw"• 
 tfuv ό δέος αμυνω,"^ εαν μϊ». 
 τοί τις εγω ευ τοιεω ύ•7τα^- 
 χω, χαι ούτος εις γε δυναμό 
 ονχ ητταομαι ευ iroteu. 
 
 Έγω Cv ουδείς itu^oui* 
 ί'ταξγ^ω^ ^αχως ιτοιεω. 
 
 Καί ίταν αυ -ταλιν afSi- 
 μι^ γηομαι.' 
 
 Ει μτι χυξω ζαω δ τιχτω.^β 
 
 Ό^αω χαΑ' ύτνοί μη χα- 
 
 Συ δ' ει δοχεω, ό ό βεαζ 
 ίντιμο»"^ αημα^ω' εχω. 
 
 Ε*ει tfu, μητηρ, ε*/ δαχ. 
 ξ -j'^ xaj γόος ό SvrtCfxu" 1(0.. 
 Trp, iraTjij τ« φιλοίτ, χα- 
 
 ό IIsfG'ijff SiTi ό 7^?^έ" "φ* 
 ιχνίομαί.^ 
 
 'Ο δε 'τεξος χω^εω* ευίυ^ 
 ί^ομοί T^oj ό EirwoXai, χα* 
 φύανω αναβαίνω' χατα έ Eu- 
 ^;;ηλον, «ξίν ό Συ|αχουΛος 
 «■α^α^-ινομαι.® 
 
 Ουχ φ^.ανω" ει^ Τ^οιξην 
 ε^ομαι,^ xoi tcoO-jtcj voOOg 
 λαμβάνω.^ 
 
 Ετει δε ημε^α ί-τοφαινω,' 
 
 ετι ό τολεμίορ, χαι γαξαμ^ 
 χλη ^ινομα»•^ ώιίτε λανία. 
 νω" ί^Τ'^^ *f β^ε^χομβί.' 
 
 Και ό Κ^ξαταδας η i 
 όχλο?, αποβαίνω εν Πει^α« 
 
140 
 
 OftEER (XEBCISE^. 
 
 J 
 
 unobswi'i aumi the crowd, and 
 βαν eJ himself into Decelea. 
 
 22. V A3 often also ri3 he sup- 
 ped and slept in any pkice, he dkl 
 noi kindle a fire by nighi in his 
 Ciimp, but in<vle a light m from 
 of his army, in order ilmt no one 
 ηύζΐίΐ ajij/Tuach unobserved. 
 
 23. When the camp of the As- 
 8\•ηαη3 was taken, her husband 
 hajipcned not to he in the camp, but 
 wjls gone as embassador to the 
 king of the Buctrians. 
 
 24. I would be very grateful to 
 the Deity, if I should not be mis- 
 taken in ihe opinion which I hap- 
 pen t) have of thee. 
 
 ^5. And if you will l>reak these, 
 or succumb to those who are break- 
 in? Ihem, I preilict to you, tluit you 
 will insensibly i^ive up tiie govern- 
 ment of the state. 
 
 26. Do not forget hospitality to 
 strangers ; for hy this, some have 
 eni'irtained angels unawares. 
 
 27. If the murder of husbands 
 sliall be lawful for woiuui, yon 
 cannot any longer acaid dying 
 (death), or you muei become the 
 slaves of women. 
 
 * 
 
 28. Foric in Satumi sacello dcambulahamm. 
 
 29. Imprudais interfectorem filii sui oiiic,'•. 
 
 30. Ut nee Cjtus nee Cilices juga praoccupent. 
 
 ' 31. Una adhuc pars imperii reliqua eel, si quid modo /jrte 
 
 vntclMgo. 
 
 'Oroj 5ε iJi>rvcToieu°^xai 
 
 iov ffuf vuxrcj^ o'jx xaw," 
 rr^a ti ό (ίτξατε.μα ^ci 
 •zotSu),^ ίνα μη'5£•5 λανόανω ' 
 
 'Οτ£ άλκΓχω^ ό ό Atftfu- 
 
 τοί c'j Tvyya^'J^ εν ό arfa- 
 τοβ-ϊίον siju αλ.λα νξος ό 
 Βαχτ|»ανο$ /οαίιλ?.? τ^ίί- 
 
 ITcXjg αν ό Θίος χαξ^ς 
 εχ^/*^ ει μη δίαμαρτανα* "^ 
 ό Oof αΚ CS εχω •κ?ζΐ <J-j r-^y . 
 χάνω. 
 
 Ei 5e και otTogf xara- 
 λυω,' η ό χαταλυω ετκ•^.-. 
 VU, rfoXeytj tfu, w» Xftv. 
 ίανω' ο τολιτίιαβ ταί'αχω- 
 
 Ό φ'ιλοξενια μη ειτιλανία- 
 νομαι* δια oCTogS yaf >.α». 
 ίανω' τις ξϊνιζι^^ α^^ελς^. 
 Ι^ ά|<Τη» (pov'j^ Ειμί )ν»η 
 03'»5?, cy c(?av!j^ £τι αν ivr.i. 
 XW, η ji^ri OouXEww Xfiw- 
 
G&EBH EXERCISES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 CHAP. XLV. '' 
 
 The Greeks use μίλλω v;ith an infinitive, to express thefuture^ 
 both active and passive, lohich, in Latin, would be rendered by a 
 pariicipk of thcfiUwre and the verb sum. , 
 
 1. And here I mean to e-zhih-u 
 it against the third day — (ostensu- 
 rus sum). 
 
 2. They are abov.l to perform the 
 funeral obsequies — (factuii sunt). 
 
 3. CouQermng what things ye 
 are abaui to decide — (judicaturi ee- 
 tis). 
 
 4. First consider in thy mind, 
 every thing which thou mayest 
 be aboni to utter — (verbis prolaturus 
 sis). 
 
 5. Did not I say that you two 
 were going to he trouhlesame to me ? 
 — (molestiam allaiuri essetis). 
 
 6. If thou wouldst even hea^ the 
 words which are going to be men• 
 tiomd — (sunt proferenda). 
 
 7. After this, Seuthes removetl 
 his camp farther ; but the Greeks 
 took up their abodes among the 
 villages, \vhence, after havhig sup- 
 plied themselves with cis much 
 provisions as possible, they intend- 
 ed to proceed to the sea- — (ituri 
 CTani). 
 
 8. He said this, signifying by 
 what death he loas about to die — 
 (moriturus erat). 
 
 9. When the nightingale ivas 
 about to be killed — (occidenda es• 
 set). 
 
 10. tr Thou appearest to me to 
 Bay, Socrates, that if we would ac- 
 quire a good friend, we ourselves 
 must be good both at speaking and 
 acting — (comparaturi eesenms). 
 
 Οίίχνυμι ε»5 T^irog 7;μ?^α. 
 Ταφή μέλλω <soiSu. 
 IIs|i 05 ffu μελλί*; x^ivw- 
 
 ΐΐαζ otT'Tig αν μέλλω λε/ί^ 
 τ^οτερον ε*κίκοτεω δ ^νωμη. 
 
 Oux α^ο^ευω ότι ιτο^ε- 
 χω^ ΐτ^α^μαΡ μέλλω zyu ; 
 
 Καν οχουω ο μέλλω \itj^ 
 
 Χογος. 
 
 Εντεύθεν Σζυβγις μεν ανο- 
 ΰτξατονίδευω^^ ιτ^οίω, ό δε 
 Έλλην (Τχηνεω^ εις >Μμ•τ„ 
 ό4εν μίλλω,' ιτλεΐίίτοδΡ'' ειτι- 
 ΰιτιζω,^^ εΐΓΐ ίαλαττα ήχω. 
 
 OUT05 λίχω,* οΊιμαίνω 
 «Oios oavarog μέλλω ανο- 
 
 Αηδών οναι^εω μελλω.ε^ 
 
 Δοχεω syu, ω Σωχ^ατηδ, 
 εΑ'ω" ώί ε» μελλω*^ ayadog 
 τις χταομα4^ φιΚος, αοτος 
 syu αγα6<ίζ Ssi γίνομαι® 
 λε^&Ζ τ2 χα ι ντξαττν. 
 
112 
 
 βΚΕΕΚ £XKKCja£5. 
 
 11. For who, being about to 
 make any thing, is i-rnorant what 
 he is about to niuke ? — (facuturue 
 eit), (faciurus est). 
 
 12. Those who arc about to be 
 auxiliaries, ought to be friends, not 
 eiicmic.^ ; neither envious in the 
 prosperity of their coniinandiT, nor 
 treacherous in his adversity — (fu- 
 *un sunt). 
 
 13. In the (play) Crc.<phontcs, 
 Merope is about to kill hti son. 
 bLd does not kill him, but on a 
 sudden di.ocovers who he is ; und 
 iri the Helle, the son, bang abovU 
 to ^ive up his mother, finds on a 
 Fudilen who she is — (occisura est), 
 (dedituru.-). 
 
 14. Nonnullus occidit, nonnuUos 
 
 15. In hoc ip.so die, laturus erat 
 ler.tiam, dc sui ctiam ipeius diccndi 
 
 T.» yaξy μ:Χ>^^ το*βω•'' 
 
 ό μίλλωί ίϋμααχ:£ 5ΐμ(,' 
 χα» μηί•ί ετι ό αγα,όζς^ 
 ςίονεω,^ε μτ,ίί :» i xcxcgP 
 
 Εν ό Κξα^:'}Ττ,;, ό Μ?. 
 ξοντ, μ£λλ.ω ό vl:f arcxrt». 
 vu;, asOxrsivij ό£ cj, άλλα 
 ava^vujji^w•* xou ev ό Έλ» 
 λη, ό '.leg, ό μηΓ»;^ rxciJy. 
 |Μ μελλχί, ανα^να'Ρίξω.^ 
 
 (ί/ί"αί?ίΓ.ν,5) erat- 
 unusquisque vesirum sen- 
 libcrtate. 
 
 CHAP. XLVI. 
 
 TAe time when ts commonly pxu in /Λ« genitive, sometimes in the 
 dative ; how long in the accusative. 
 
 1. But the Greeks, having gone Όδε'ΕλλΓ,νί^ειμι- ίχαί. 
 forih ίίΖΐ'Λ ί /ay with their beasts of Tcg >;μ£;α^ ffw ό icc^y^io; 
 burien and slaves, brought away χα» ό ανϋίατοό:ν, ;Ε>>ώ,η^^ 
 without fear, wheat, barley, wine, 
 figs. 
 
 2. For, on the preceding day, 
 Bending, he ordered us to deliver up 
 our arms. 
 
 3. On the following day, sailing 
 thence with a favourable wind, 
 tl.ey roa.«tod along//r lico days. 
 
 4. For we indeed thought that 
 you intended to attack the enemy 
 hy flight. 
 
 5. I'LL? then was the termina- 
 ΐϊοΐϊ of affuiri on this night ' but 
 
 aoto^ e-ujoc,P x*»5t;,P uvif, 
 
 Ό μ£ϊ γαξ rrp^aivj fa?, 
 fa,'^ τίμΛω i ocXov τ^'α- 
 ίιJwμι χελί^ω.* 
 
 KvTi^/oiv ό ί,ίίτεζαι^,ς {rat• 
 ξα"^) ανοχω"" «"νεύμα xcXcf, 
 ΐτλεο^' »;μ?;α 5.ο «"α^α yr,. 
 
 Γ.γω μεν ^α* :.(Ίααι• (ij 
 i ν;ξε ijxy^ £«( ό «-ολεμίΓ^. 
 
 
GREEK EXEB.CISES. 
 
 lis 
 
 on the following day ihcy brought 
 them to the army. 
 
 6. And, havhic: stationed watch- 
 es, they slept during th-c night. 
 
 7. Havmg said these things, he 
 was not guilty of a fidsehood ; for 
 the young man, becoming delight- 
 ed with wine, ceased not drinking 
 cither by night or by day. 
 
 8. I wish to inform some, and 
 to remind others of yon, that of 
 those advancing against us, they 
 who occupy the right wing, are 
 the same whom you, on the fifth 
 day (preceding this), having rout- 
 ed, piu'sued. 
 
 9. Thence they proceeded, diir- 
 uig all the succeeding day, through 
 snow., 
 
 10. Xenophon, having taken 
 with him Polycrates, went by night 
 to the army of Heuthes. 
 
 11. In this imnth ye sent aΛvay 
 Charidemus, having ten empty 
 ships, and hve talents of silver. 
 
 12. But the generals and cap- 
 tains, having come from Aristar- 
 chus, brought back intelligence, 
 that at present indeed he requests 
 them to depart, but to come ai 
 evening. 
 
 13. IT And they come to the sa- 
 cred mountain on the fifth day : 
 the moimtain's name was The- 
 ches. But wh(jn the foremost 
 came upon the mountain and be- 
 held the sea, a great cry arose. 
 
 14. Thus many lay, as if a rout 
 had taken place, arid the despon- 
 dency was great. On tL• follow r 
 ing day, however, tto one died, 
 but almost about the same hour 
 tbey recovered their senses, and 
 
 ΐοζ ίΐζ ό ίτ^ατευμα. 
 
 Και δ μεν νυ|, φνλαχν\ 
 
 άλλα ό νεανκίχο^ fjow «- 
 νος, ουτί νυξ,ε ουη ήμε^αδ 
 crauoj"^ ίτινω. 
 
 Ό μεν iiJatfxw,^ ό ίί 
 αναμναω^ (f\) /3ουλομαι, ότι 
 £ΐμι, ό ?τ^οα'£ΐμι,'^ 6 μεν ό 
 δφος {^εξας) s^uS Ός <τυ 
 τ,μεξα'^ τεμιιτος τ^ετω"*^ 
 
 Εντεύθεν ό ετειμι'"ε *;με?α 
 όλο5 ίτα^ενω'''^ δια. χιών. 
 
 Ό «ενοφων ^α^αλαμ^α- 
 νω^ ΤΙο'Κυχξα.τνις οιχομαρ' ο 
 νυξο εΐΓΐ ό Σίυύ-ης ατξατευμ,α. 
 
 Ούτο^ ό μην? δε-χα χανζ 
 αιτοσ'τίλλω εχω Χαρίδημος 
 χενος, χαι «εντε ταΧαΊΐτον 
 a^yugioj, 
 
 Ό 5ε (ίτξ(χτψ/ίς και ο 
 λοχα^οζ τ,χω ναξα Ό A^iff- 
 τα^χο?, αίΓα^^ελλω" cti 
 νυν μεν α^ειμι αυτοζ κελεύω 
 ό ίειληε δε τ^χω. 
 
 Και αφικνεομαι ετι ό Ίίξοζ 
 ορς ο τεμττο^ >)με^α• όνομα 
 δε ειμί ό οξοζ Θ^γγις. Είτει. 
 5η ^6 ό 'ϊΤξωτος γίνομαι^ ετι 
 ό οξος^ χαι χατειίω'^ ό όαλατ- 
 τα, "Τολυζ χ^αυχη ^ινομ-αι.^ 
 
 ΚειμΛΐ^ ούτω ίτολυς, wC- 
 νεζ T^otfr)? χινομαι,'ε χαι 
 ηίοΚυς ειμί δ αίυμια. Ό Ss 
 χ^τεξαιος α.«ο6νη<ίχω'' μεν οι/» 
 δεις, αμ4>» 5ε ό aurog tro-j 
 
114 
 
 CR££E EXERCISES. 
 
 cn the third ΛΧϊά fourth day arose, as 
 if after a draught of rnetlicine. 
 
 15. The rnan, having taken me 
 with him, washed me/br mnc and 
 twenty daySy having begun with the 
 u.oon. 
 
 16. Hai\, Menippus ! and whence 
 hast ihou come unto us ? for thou 
 hast not appeared this long time in 
 the city. 
 
 17. The narrative of the Odys- 
 sey is long ; a porson being many 
 years abroad, and watched by Nep- 
 tune, and being alone. 
 
 13. I say tliat five hundred of 
 these should be Athenians, of what- 
 c\er age may appear to you to be 
 rght, serving an appointed time, not 
 long, but as much as may seem to 
 be right, in succession to each 
 other. 
 
 19. If a law should be enacted, 
 that persons not eating be not hun- 
 gry, and not drinking be not thirs- 
 ty, nor be cold in icintcr, nor warm 
 ill summer, no law could be able to 
 bring it to pas.s that men obey as to 
 the.sc things. 
 
 20. IVforeover even yet at the 
 
 frr.sent day, every ninth year, the 
 VIphians st-ud boys of noble Inrth, 
 end one from among themselves as 
 an archithcorus. 
 
 21. Poslridie Tigranes ipse aderat. 
 
 22. Cinuni vero advenent finis a fato prastitutus, non obli- 
 ΛΊοη-^ iidionorati jacenf, set! inemoria per omne tempus hymms 
 cclebraii florcnt. 
 
 23. νο-^ίρηι indueris non modo vilem, sed camlem quoque 
 «ifl.'c ci hyeme. 
 
 αΜΥ,ξ ττ,μ:ξα. rvv£a xfu Stno- 
 
 Χαιξ(,), ω MsviirTc.c• χαι 
 c&iev εγω a^ixvrcaai ; coAjg 
 γαξ χξΟ'ίΟζ ου ystvw"' £ν ό 
 
 Ό O'jygfJzia μΛχξ:ς ί λο- 
 γας' fi.uu, ατοΰτμίω Ttg ΐ7ος 
 τολυρ, χαι caia~j>,a<'r:j 
 Cto ό IIoffiiooL'v, Χ2( μ:ν?5 
 
 Οί/τος ΰε Air,vaif5 φτμ.ι usi 
 ειμί crjvraxoiioi, εξ 'ς av ng 
 ffu ήλιχια xaXijj ί^ω ooxs^j, 
 χοονοί ταχτ;5 (ΓτίατΓ.^.",'" 
 μη μΛχξος oCrcg, αΧΧα Icr^ 
 αν ζοχεω χαλνς βχω, £χ ϋια- 
 (Jc.j(r) α>.λ»;Χ:»;ν. 
 
 Ει νομ^ί τιό>;μΓ'<^ μη EffiiiJ 
 μη -ττεΐναω, και μη τινω μη 
 Ji^nw, μη'5ϊ j"i^oc" ό χίιμαν^ 
 μηίί cVXtc.."' ό <?ejOc:, c;/<I--is 
 αν νομός ίι,ναμαι^ cJiawjai- 
 
 Και ετι χαι wv erc.i ίννα- 
 TOf , ό Λ:λ? OS cai5 fu^ '^'^ 
 τεμτω χαι a'-^it!5:j|c5 £15 
 (Γφεΐ5 awTCf. 
 
GHEEE EXERCISES. 
 
 115 
 
 CHAP. XL VI I. 
 
 The quesiion whither 1 is commonly answ'Trcd ly eig cr νξος with 
 the accusative : where ? by tv idth ike dative : whence ? by 
 εχ cr airo with the genitive : and by or through what place ? 
 by δια with the genitive. 
 
 Adverbs in ύι and di are used to sigiufy at a place : in oz, a;, or 
 ζ:, to a place : and in 6εν and us, irom a place : os is also add- 
 ed to accusatives, to signify to a place. 
 
 T'tc distance of one place /rum another, is piU in the accusative. 
 
 1 . Thence he advances three days' 
 march, thirty parasangs, to the plain 
 of Cayster. 
 
 2. Thus Cyrus spoke, an -ϊ hav- 
 ing done these things, went to the 
 Persians. 
 
 3. After these things they pro- 
 ceeded to the Taochijfire days^ march, 
 i/tirty parasangs ; and their provi- 
 sions failed. 
 
 4. Through this region, both 
 through that which was hostile, 
 and that which was friendl}•, the 
 Ό reeks proceedexi eight days' march, 
 and come to the Chalybes. 
 
 δ. An overthrow having hap- 
 pened to them at Leuctra. 
 
 6. Intelligence having come un- 
 to him, that in the battle at Co- 
 rinth, eight of the Lacedcemonians 
 lay dead. 
 
 7. Lysander, having drawn up 
 on shore the siiips at Ephesus, re- 
 mained quiet. 
 
 5. He was enabled to say, that 
 they alone of the Greeks, fought 
 in aid of the king at Platdde. 
 
 9. But when there came to him 
 twenty ships froyn Syracuse, and 
 others came BAsofrom Jcnia. 
 
 10, But when he had come, he 
 
 x&vT« εις Κα.ΰιίτ?ίς tS'Jjov. 
 
 (i-jTog US TOicu),'' cig ΐΐΐξΰνιξ 
 
 Ex οίτος r:ofi-j'a.P^ :ΐς Ταν 
 γ_ος, αΐο.6μ.οζ τίντί, τuξu- 
 (Ταγγτ,ς τξνχχοντα, χα» ό 
 S'THrrfOSirrV^ S-riXsicoj .'-^ 
 
 λην, ύια -ί ϋ ΐ7ολίμιε^, xci ό 
 φίλιο?, το^ευω'*^ cxru drad^ 
 μο?, κκι κΐίχνίί,μαι :ΐζ Χκ. 
 
 λ -.fcj. 
 
 AuTcg εν Ae:>y.TPa ff-j^. 
 φζζσ. γίνομαι. ρ" 
 
 ως ίν ό εν Kofivcot: ^ο.-χ^τ„ οχ- 
 τω Ααχίΰαίμονίο? ίνηίχω.Ρ'''^ 
 
 Ό Αυίίανϋ^ο?, ανελχυω'' 
 ό εν ό ΕφεαΌ^ ναυ?, ήίοχια 
 
 F-XU^ λε^'ω, ότι μονο^ ό 
 Έλλην βαΰιΧί^ς^ ϋ•Μμ.α• 
 ■χο-,Μιΐ' εν Ιϊλαταίαι. 
 
 Ετε/ οβ iJ>y^cj.c.<^ αυτος ό 
 τε εχ Σ\>ξα\ου^αι Μα\^ς ε;χο- 
 tfiv, ί^γοιιαί^ όε χκ( airo 
 luivio.. 
 
 Ετει ίε >)χω," avaCouvw' 
 
116 
 
 G-nEEK EXEECISUe. 
 
 vkcnt up unto him, wiih the em- 
 basi.iduis yVc/m Laccdamion. 
 
 11. TAfAice he ad vancee MrciW^A 
 Syna^ and comes to Ui6 nver Araxts. 
 
 12. Thence the Greeks proceed- 
 ed ihrou^k the JMacrvncs ; but on 
 ijjc tirsl day ihej came i(? ^ic river 
 vliich separated both the territory 
 of the Macrones, and thai of tlie 
 Scytiiini. 
 
 13. But the soldiers, having 
 sold the corn which they had col- 
 lixtcd to^Tthrr, and the other 
 ihijiiTi? which they had taken, i>iu- 
 ceeded thence (hruugh the Bithypi. 
 
 14. They epent the winter be- 
 ing occupied with these tiling? ; 
 hi!t at thii opening of the spring•, 
 Phariiubazus having nianm-d ma- 
 ny oliips, and having hired in addi- 
 tion u ineieenary force, sail'-d, and 
 Corion along with liini, i/irough t/ic 
 ialu/ii/s, to wMtlos. 
 
 1 5. The in.-;olencG of the slaves 
 and stranger.^ (U Aihais is very 
 great ; and it is neither allowed 
 i/icrc to strike a blow, uor will a 
 slave give way for thee. 
 
 16. Pau.sanias, having received 
 thi.•» letter, though being even be- 
 fore helil in great estniiaiion by 
 the CJreeks on arcoinit of the chief 
 command at Pl(Ua£, was then 
 much more elated. 
 
 17. Bui the hives wexe nume- 
 rous L'icrc, and as many of the 
 soldiers as ale of tlic honey-combs, 
 bocame all deprived of iheir sensee. 
 
 IS. Wiiat in rnanij therefore and 
 o:ker itKi:(:ru:es is fully apparent, 
 ihal there is nolo, firmer band, than 
 •^•heji it is composed of friendly 
 iellow-combafanti!, is in this in- 
 stance also made maiuieat. 
 
 νξος aiTcg Ci^v i -x Aaxs- 
 
 ΣνξΜ, χα< α^ιΐινίομαι ΐξος 
 δ Λξαζγ,ς <Γοταμοί. 
 
 Εντίνίίν νοξί-^νΡ^ Ό Έλ. 
 λην 6(α ΛΙαχ|ί«ν• ό T|c«ro5 
 δι γ.μεξσ. a?lx*;C/JWXl* sn ό 
 «Ό-ταμοί, Ις ο^ι^μ" ό τε ό 
 Μαχ^ων χω^α, χω i ό Σχ,. 
 
 Ό οε ίτξατι^ττ,ς, όιατι. 
 ότ;μι"'^' ό (ίιτος, Ις ίιμΓ ΰιγ- 
 χομι^ω,Ρ"ε χαι ό akXcg Ις 
 λαμ"ανω,^ Εχτο^ίι^"'-' ϋισ, 
 ό Bn)cvof. 
 
 "Ο μ^ν χίιμα,ν sv οίης 
 ειμί διάγω'' άμα us ο sae 
 
 χαι ^swxcg" τίοίμίίίΐί.;,'"••-' 
 c>.£oj' ό >Ι>αί>να§α£ο5 τ;, χαι 
 
 • 'ί- 
 
 ο Kwuiv μετ α\ιΐος, ΰια 
 
 ντ,ΰίζ fig iMr,>c5. 
 
 Ό iouXcj xaj ό με-τοιχο5 
 flroXij ειμί Α^ηνι^ίΊν αχολα- 
 da, χαι cu -ε ταταίΤίο»•' εξ- 
 είτιν a;/Tot'i, οντε -τεξιττ»;. 
 μι"' Cu Jo-jXtj:. 
 
 0;Jro5 λαμίαν'Α^*^ ό Ilaj. 
 tfavws ό ^^αμμα,ΐ' ειμί χαι 
 ajCiTejcv £ν με^α^ αξι:*)μα 
 ίιτο ό Έλλτ;ν (5ια ύ Πλο- 
 •rataUiv ίίχεμονια, τολνδ 
 τότε μαλλο» ai^w.' 
 
 Ό ίε ίμηνο; TiXif ειμί 
 
 φαχω' ό tfcf ανίατη?, νας 
 off ων ^ι^νομαι.^ 
 
 ΙΙολλα^οί3ι μεν ιιιι xaj 
 άλλοθι δτ,^.οζ, ότι cux ει/ω 
 iffj^ufof φαλα^Ι, η ίτα» εχ 
 φ^λο^ (?υμμα;^05 «ί^οι^ω,"'* 
 χαι εν οίτοζ oj^ktM,-' 
 
GREEK EXEKCISX^ 
 
 IIT 
 
 19. If thou come to any of the 
 nearest citiee, cither to Tktbss or 
 to wMegara, (for they are each go- 
 verned by good laws,) thou wilt 
 come as an enemy lo the govern- 
 ment of these. 
 
 20. And they decreed that they 
 cause those to cease from their 
 authority, and choose others Λvuh- 
 oui delay ; and they chose ten, one 
 from each tribe, and the tliirty with- 
 drc\v lo Eieusis. 
 
 21. But he went ίο Lycia under 
 tlic safe guidance of tiie gods. 
 
 22. Bring thou forward another ; 
 or rather those two ; that laughing 
 man who is from Abdera, and that 
 weeping one who is/roiii Kphesus ; 
 for they theniselves wish to be sold 
 together. 
 
 23. And he, having t<aken in 
 addition from Athens both other 
 ships and heavy-armed troops, sail- 
 ed av/ay. 
 
 24. They selected Dracontius, 
 a Spartan ; who, when a boy, fled 
 from home^ having unintentionally 
 slain a boy, having struck him 
 with a Spartan sword. 
 
 25. They v/ent each of them 
 home. 
 
 26. The storm earned them to 
 sec. 
 
 27. The Greeks thereupon were 
 in great perplexity, reflecting that 
 they were distatii from Greece more 
 than ten thousand stadia. 
 
 28. But when the Greek?, hav- 
 ing crossed over, were distant from 
 the ravine as much as eight stadia^ 
 Mithridates also crossed over, hav- 
 ing his force. 
 
 29. Some άί^ίωιί a journey of 
 
 Eav £ig • tyY'jrara τ>ζ 
 ToXis έπομαι/' η Θτ,ξαξΒ, 
 ■η Μεγαξαυε, (ίυνομΕω γαρ 
 
 Και ψης^ι^ω™^ fxjivcj 
 μεν χαταιταυω," άλλο? ΰΐ 
 αιξίω''' χαι α'ιξεω'^ ίίχα, εΊς 
 aro φυλτ]• χα» ό r#iaxovra 
 ΕλίϋίΊναΟ; ατβ^χομΛ».'* 
 
 Α\ιταξ ό /3α»νω'' Λνκηινοδ 
 
 Αλλο? ifCL^ayu,^ μάλλον 
 δε ό δυο oCr-;* ό yjXau δ 
 Α^δ-ήξούίν, xaj ό χλαιω ό εξ 
 Εφϊίο?' άμα γαξ αιτοζ irt. 
 tfiaixw" /3ουλομαι. 
 
 ΙΤ^οίίλαμξανω^ is Α6η• 
 vr,Ssv αλλοί τε vaug χαι 
 ότλίττ]^, α'ΤονΧξω.^ 
 
 τκχτϊ]?, 05 φευγω^ faig £(μ*β; 
 οιχοόίν, THIS axcjv χαταχτίί• 
 νω,* ξυηλη iraTaiCaJ.' 
 
 Ό μ^ν /3αινω° οίχονδβ 
 exairos. 
 
 Ό φε^ω" τοντονΟί όϋΐλ- 
 λα. 
 
 Εν «οΧυς όη α-το^ία £/μ» ό 
 Έλλην, ενΰυμεομαι ότι ατε. 
 -/_ω^ ό Έλλα5 ίλεο» η μ■J. 
 ^101 ίταόιον. 
 
 Ετϊΐ ίε ό Έλλην 'Jiatou. 
 νω' αΐΓϊ3;(ω- ο χα^αο^α offog 
 οκτώ (ίταίιοί, Οιαβαινω" xfx< 
 C ?*Ιιί)|ΐί)ατη5, εχω ό 5ϋνο- 
 
 'Ο™ μ5ν α•ϊ5χω*ί τίψ« 
 
lis 
 
 Gft££K LXCSLnscs 
 
 many days, ειηά oihera even of ma- 
 nj months. 
 
 30. Τ Thence they proceeded 
 ϋιτου^Κ Trvos, and having crossed 
 ever Ida, they come first ίσ ^intatt- 
 drof, ihf-n, passing by the sea-coasl 
 of Lj'dia, ίο tke plain of Thebe. 
 Tkcfice, having come ίΑΓσυξλ Adra- 
 myUiun and Ctrtonium by Aiameus 
 ft) the plain of C»iycu3, ihey reach 
 Pergainus cf Mycia. 
 
 31. Aftf-r these tilings, Xeno- 
 phon negociated for vessels, in 
 order thai they might cra*3 over 
 as soon as possible tnto Aaia ; but 
 during this time, Arietarchus the 
 piaiect /rcmj Byzantium having ar- 
 rived, having two irircint's, told the 
 soldiers not lo croso over inlo dsia. 
 
 32. Aristarchus me€t3 <U Cyzi- 
 (ys Aiiaxibius sailing away from 
 Bvzanhum, and Anaxibius enjoins 
 upon Aris'iirchi-.s to sell into slave- 
 ry as many of the soldiers of Cyrus 
 as he should find left ai Byzanlium. 
 
 33 I ad\-;.=ed both thy father 
 and my brother Doriiis, not lo go 
 on an expediuon aaainit the Scy- 
 thians, men inhabiting a city iw 
 
 3i. If moreover it behoves to 
 make mention also of minor mat• 
 u-T?, they nr»f, through their com- 
 i.^ATul of the sea, diioovcro«i new 
 rnutlcs of A'asiing; uhaievpr was 
 agreeable in StcUy, or in Itah/, or 
 in Cyprvs, or jm Egypt, or in Lydia, 
 01 υ* PaofuHfvsus, or any wkcrt 
 else, all tbe:>e thinge were collected 
 
 l^r, :»S Ανί•ανϋ;^5 αφ»χν«;- 
 μΛΐ «^ίωτον, είτα ra»a da. 
 
 θτ;ϊη c=oiiv. Evre;/3ev 6Γ 
 Ατ^αμ-Λ-τιον xcu Κί^τενίο» 
 *α^' Arajvr^s itg Kalxc^ 
 
 χα?•α>Λμία*!.) ό Μ-ί/α. 
 
 ό Α(Τια, ε» έϊ oCrtf αίκ 
 χτεομα»' Aiiirai^rs ίχ Β^ 
 ξαιτιο•» ίξμοίττ,ς, ε•^ o-jc 
 «■^rfi?, 倕ω^ ό CTPaTfij. 
 Tr5 μη τζξΟΜ'^^ ϋζ ό 
 
 AtfMX. 
 
 AccT>4i^ Oi Α'.Λξιξ.:ς ΐχ 
 
 Ava|iltc<: ;^ι?Γίλλω ϊ μΛ 
 Λ/κΤ-αρχοί, cxiJci αν ;.- 
 Piffxij' εν Β-^αντιβν ό Kj- 
 |t;5 ΰτξαη,,-χς ilTc>>£icu-' 
 
 Ε/ u (is xoi rarri*• i :Γχ , 
 αόί>-ί£:5 t« £μ:ρ, ΛαίίΐΕί, 
 
 *ΐμω. 
 
 El Oe oil ΧΛΙ μ(Χ;οί•ί^?$ 
 
 μναι:,Ρ^ όια ό ο^>; ό «)α• 
 λΛΤτα Tj'^rtv μϊν rjtflrog 
 
 t^-^ta ige-wjiawj'" ί^ fig 
 
 εν £ιχ5λια ή^υ^, t) £> Ιτα- 
 >ja, τ, ev Κ,/ΓΡο<:, τ; iv Α»- 
 yj«T&f, ϊ; εν λ^ύια, η εν ό 
 riovroc, *) εν nfX:^cvvr/7ft(, 
 
 η c;>J^JO^ι «•ου, cucog »»$ Sig 
 
0«EEK ESBIItiallB. 
 
 \lO 
 
 into one, by ttoqon of their com- 
 mand of the sea. 
 , 35. Bui the soldiers of tphicra- 
 tes, having made irruptions »«aj 
 m-any parts of Arcadia also, both 
 carried away plunder and attacked 
 the walled cities. 
 
 36. But let us see Gnipho the 
 
 nsurer, if it appear gcKxl to thee ; 
 
 he docs not live far off, and his 
 
 cjoor itself is open to us. 
 
 /• ■ 
 
 37. Do not thou hesitate to go a 
 great distance to those who promise 
 to teach any thing useftal. 
 
 bakarra. 
 
 foXXaxotfi χα» ό AficouSia 
 
 χα< ί^οίβαλ^ώί^ c^og ό ς -su 
 
 Εχω 6t, ei έοχΣΐ, Ttt^ut 
 
 otxiu, ανοιχωΡ* ανΤί5 ε^ω 
 
 Mr, xaroxvsu μΛΧξτ,ς hoos 
 τοΡΐνω,"" i-^j ό o»oatfxw 
 
 3S. Sed mihi neque ciiW2<3 exeunti mane, dei signum adver- 
 saium est, neque quondo hie nscendebam. 
 
 39. Descenditque post iintm annorum ad Achab in Soma- 
 nam* 
 
 40. Iviudaverit jure aliquis ilium Athnis legislatorem, qui 
 vetuit parentem a filio aJi, quom nullam artem edocuissei. 
 
 CHAP. XLVIII. 
 
 Verbal adjectives^ governing a dative of the agent end the case of 
 th/jr (jwn verbs, are us^ to signify necessity . 
 
 1. The sayiag, Know thy?olf, 
 means, if thou kuoweet thine o\»n 
 circumstances and rv^uU thou mnsi 
 do 
 
 2. Both all who speak and ye 
 who hear, must j^cfer things which 
 arc best, and will be saliatary. 
 
 3. If they were to liave done 
 any thing ba?e, thou shouldst have 
 chfj^en death rather than it. 
 
 4. If it be not com4iitcnt with 
 ■what is honourable to be eared, wc 
 must choose dcalL• 
 
 μι, αν ό c^a^/jux εΐ'!(€α'' ό 
 Ca\fTov, aeai τις <S\i tcii*- 
 
 Kcu ό yjiytxR cMTOtf, *xai 
 ό axc»w <i\i, ό ^i>.T»(rTcff xoi 
 
 Κ ι ^i>jlr' ay:^!^ τις 
 eξyaζcμJιι, dctvttrc^ <Αι αντ' 
 a'v^cf cζ<■Ja^ξBτn^ eiyj.' 
 
 Av μ,η sifu* cfog ό χαΧος 
 
ίοο 
 
 CRr.tE EXF.acia&e. 
 
 5. Jf'c must shcrw that we have 
 bei:n ednciitoil betu-r than otliers, 
 an-i instructeil in the way to virtue. 
 
 6. tVe mvil not overcome xcomcn 
 by "tren^th. 
 
 7. The tffisc man ought to avoid 
 h'.in^ for fiune,nn(l regarding• thiii^ 
 pleasing to the innltiiiuie, without 
 
 T.yu entoitxttoi fiui, art 
 ; α>.λοί αμίιν^ν TfffiJ, tsu 
 
 Ou (fdiVOJ Vlxr,TfO? (-/^') 
 
 ?«:../ 
 
 5 roX-jf ίοΚίωβ rsgiixoirscj, 
 
 rr.akinn: right rcftson the ruler of xai μ-η ί ofdoi: Xc^os r,ys 
 
 his life. 
 
 S. But 'his mtiiit first is cr-fist' 
 d^ed l/y us, wheth»i lliere be any 
 art of sublimity or depth ; for some 
 persons think that they are quiic 
 mistaken who refer such things as 
 these to precepts of art. 
 
 9. ΤΓ If thou wishcat that the 
 gala be propitious to thee, thou 
 must worship the eod^ ; or if thou 
 vi.ahost to be beloved by thy friends, 
 thou must do good to thy fnends ; or 
 if thou desirest to be honoured by 
 any state, tbnu viust assist that state, 
 
 10. I think that a person sh/)}d/I 
 eaptivaic those whom he would wish 
 to make willing ast^istants in the 
 work? of war, by all good words 
 and derils. 
 
 11. I nay then that you ου git 
 to give aid to the^e thing.^ in two 
 manner.^ ; first, in saving their ci- 
 ties for the Olynlhians, and send- 
 ing the soldiers who will do this; 
 and secondly, in injuring this coun- 
 try by ships and by other soldiers. 
 
 ?^• 
 
 12. Si qui.', qtinm tibicon bonus non ."it, videri vclit, quid 
 d flicienduin .sit '? An non vniUindi boiii tibicincs in iis quas 
 simt extj-a nrtem ? Ac priraum quidcm, qunin illi instrumcnta 
 pulchra habeant, multoeque pediidequos circuniducant, ctiam 
 ^^ kecc faci^nda. 
 
 μω* «Όΐίω"' ο βκζ, 
 
 f 5'jf ev Ο^η, £l flfJH ύψο5 
 
 τις η βαίος τίγντ^• ετει η; 
 όλω^ βιοααι οιαταταω,* ΐ?* 
 S roiouTcs ayuS ίι; ?•5ρζνιχ:^ 
 
 Ε» ό icoj iX:i>i ciai ΑΊ; 
 /SojXofwti, oe'aTsvTccg (α".) 
 ό 6ίος• ειτ: ύιτο ς;ιΧο<: ίί;. 
 Χω αγαιταω, Ό ς;ιΧο? ((T-j) 
 ε•Λ^ίττ;7£05• ει•Γ£ Ceo τολι^ 
 
 ωφίΧητεο^. 
 
 Ός ό £ΐί ό coXeijms i^/cv 
 ■roisUJ Tij ροοΧομαι (Τ^ν;;^ af 
 
 £χω χ£ ίοχίι, αχαίο5 ii;fa- 
 CeoS ειμι,χαι Xoyog xoj ε^ cv. 
 Λ'τ,μι δη (5ιρζη βογ,ίητί'^ 
 ειμ* ό «"^αχμα (fj, ό°*^ «•£ ό 
 coXif i OX'jviioj •''ω^ω,'^ χαι 
 ό oiiTcj: βΌΐε^ο^ε ΰ•ζατ>'^ττ;ς 
 
 iXZc^CU, Χαΐ C™* ό cXelV?^ 
 
 χω^α xaxi^ «Όΐεω,*^ xtj 
 
β&εεΚ EXERCIS£3. 
 
 131 
 
 CHAP. XLIX. 
 
 The infinitive mood, or a participle, is used to supply the place of 
 gerunds and supints. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. The first of the Athenians, 
 most powerful in speaking and act- 
 ing. 
 
 2. The Cretans are skilful in 
 using the bow. 
 
 3. He will be hard to make war 
 against. 
 
 4. Thou wert going to leave 
 this deserted house lo others, to be 
 plundered. 
 
 5. Do thou refrain entirely from 
 shouting, ixnafrom laughing al any 
 thing. 
 
 6. He spent the greatest part 
 of his time in enquiring, and consi• 
 dering, and consulting. 
 
 7. It is time for thee to depart 
 from fighting. 
 
 8. Such wert thou to be looked at. 
 
 9. What went ye out to behold ? 
 
 10. For he was stern to behold. 
 
 11. It happens that our state is 
 worthy to be admired, both in these 
 respects, and besides in others. 
 
 12. If indeed the valiant spirit 
 of thy father has been instilled in- 
 to thee, such a one as he was to 
 perform both a deed and a word. 
 
 13. And bij injuring his country 
 both with ships and other troops. 
 
 n|cjrc5 Α&Ύ,νΆΐύζ, λεχω 
 
 ΚζΎ^ς ειμί τοξεύω ιχγοώας. 
 
 Χαλε-ττοδ ειμί «ξοζ ό"* 
 ιτολεμεω. . 
 
 Αλλοί ίομο? λειιτω" μέλ- 
 λω ορφανοί δίαζ'Χα^ω,^ 
 
 Βοη, χα» ό"« ειτι^ελαω 
 
 Εν ό"« ^ητεω, χα» φξον. 
 τιζω, χαι /ίουλε^ω," ό cro- 
 "Κυς χξονος διατ^ιβω.- 
 
 Και^οί (ίυ ο"^ αΐΤϊ<μι' 
 ατο ί'^ μάχομαι. 
 
 Ειμί SiS'J" ToieuToj. 
 
 Τις φξχομαι^ θεαομαι ;* 
 
 Στυγνός γαξ ό|αω είμι. 
 
 Και εν τε ouroj β ιτολι? 
 άξιος ειμί όαυμα^ω, χαι ετι 
 εν αλλο$ γίνομαι. 
 
 Ει δτ) 701 tfu ιτατηΓ ev. 
 ύταξω' μένος ηυί, βίο? ε.<εί- 
 VOJ ειμί τελεω^ ε^ον re 
 ε^ο^ τϊ. 
 
 Και ό"* 6 εκεινοί χω^α 
 χαχωί τοιεω, xoi τ^ιη^ηί 
 χα» (Γτ^ατιωτη? έτε^β^. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 14. Ι myself acquired them by 
 conferring favours, 
 
 L 
 
 EvS^'8T£W* aWOf- ΧίΌβ- 
 
 UMt. 
 
133 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 15. Thou dool endeavour lo de- 
 ceive me,' by purposely speaking 
 thinirs contrHiT to those on which 
 ■ue were jusi now ag'ree<l. 
 
 16•. AVe {ja in friend?, not hy rt- 
 ceiviiig, but Oy conferring favour»:. 
 
 17. I ha\e .«pent xny own pro- 
 perty in ώήη^ nothinsr else than 
 honouring and bestowing i^i/ls, 
 ^'lienevL-r I admired any of the 
 Boldier.s. 
 
 IS. He made those, who a.<?oci- 
 ated witii him, entertain the liope, 
 that they by iifiitating hi:n woukl 
 become sucii. 
 
 19. The accuser said, that he, 
 by selecting i\Uo tlie wor.-t pas• 
 sages of the mo.st celebrated poets, 
 nnd using these as proofs, taught 
 those who a.=.-ociated with liini to 
 be evil-doors and tyrannical. 
 
 20. He observed moreover, with 
 an air of plensant ry, that he thoughl 
 that Circe niade (men) swine, by 
 entertaining them with many such 
 things. 
 
 21. I went to thee, in order to 
 tee how thou art. 
 
 22. And thou never gro\vest 
 wear}• in c^/n!riving how these 
 thiiigs may be to tliy friends. 
 
 Oj rraV^u su, αΧλα 
 όξα-^, χταομαι ό φιΚος. 
 
 χω, <ι\)δίις aXXof rot;•^, η -τι- 
 μάω, χω γαζΐζομ.αι, όταν 
 <ης αχαξομΐϋΡ^ ό ffr^ariu:- 
 ττ,ς. 
 
 Ελ«Ί£ω τοιόω^ ο β';,ν- 
 outCPibU? ΐαοταυ, μιμ;θμα< 
 ίχεηοζ, τοιοίϋ: ^Ίνομαι."''* 
 
 Φημι (3' αυτό, ό xaTr.. 
 yoPof χαι ό evJcfo; ιτοιητη^ 
 
 χαι οϋτο? μα|ΓυΡΐον ρ^^αω,™ 
 ίιίαίχω ό (ΓυνΕίμιΡ xaxo.j• 
 yof ειμί χαι τυξα\νιχα;. 
 
 ΟιομΛΐ (5; φημ* f^'C- 
 χωίττωε ό Κι^χν; ίί «Όΐ:"ω, 
 TOIOUTOS croXu; όΐιτνιξω. 
 
 Εχω «riog Cu ειμ*,"^ 
 Γπο'χίίΓΓομαι' tcoj εχω. 
 
 'O'TTug Te ο^τος ^ι^νομαι 
 b φίλο; o'jx α«Όχαμνω μη- 
 χαναομαι. 
 
 Ι 
 
 PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 23. In living indulenthj ami in Ev ό"* ξa^.μ.'.u χαι 5 
 Zoif/i Λ" satiet}•, pains quiclcly cling τληίΤμΛνηΡ απατάω, ε;,ί«( 
 to pleasures. ό Xuirr; ό ή(5οντ) 'Καξα.ΊΤΎίγΜν- 
 
 μ, m7 
 
 24. 'J'hi.s i.-; the way loadinrr lo Οίιαξ »ιμι ό όι5ο?, ό a^u» 
 true learnin•?, and it is very ditiiculi νζ^^ς Ό αληθινό? traiSna, 
 in appearance. xoi μαλα ^; χαλίτο^ irfo- 
 
 tfeiicj.* 
 
 25. Da tliou piously reverence EviiSsw β σ^ ό ίί»ί, 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 lae 
 
 the things which appfrtaiu nnto 
 the god.-, not only ly sacrificing^ 
 but also ill abiding by thy oaths. 
 
 26. Who are given to change, 
 and quick i)i rrfieding and in ac- 
 tually performing whatever they 
 may have devised. 
 
 27. But if battles arc decided 
 even now as formerly, by^ those 
 that fight Λνβΐΐ, thou wouldst not 
 do wrong in taking heart. 
 
 28. For a faithful friend in ad- 
 versity is more pleasant to behold 
 than a calm to mariners. 
 
 29. It is not ea.sy to be told^ how 
 ranch pleasure they feel in hanng 
 put their enemies to flight, how 
 much also in pursuing, and how 
 much in slaying their enemies. 
 
 30. He had soon destroyed the 
 wild beasts in the park, by pursu- 
 ing, and striking and killing them. 
 
 31. And le.'ive no pretence to 
 your general of sailing to another 
 place, or of doing something else. 
 
 32. Having said the.«e things, 
 he showed some valuables both 
 numerous and beautiful, and told 
 them of other.s, so situated that 
 they were not easy to be seen, 
 
 33. 1 wish, Ο king, rather to fail 
 hy acting honourably, than to stic- 
 ceed by deceiving. 
 
 34. And what decrees have been 
 passed against the rich, which, by 
 C<!rberus, they have no mean.s '/ 
 tscaping. 
 
 35. By dying I ehall afford 
 laughter to my enemies. 
 
 3G. A person may know the 
 
 μη μόνον iuoj, κλλα χα» Ιζ, 
 χος £μν£νω. 
 
 Ός μίν γε νεωτίξο'χοιοζ^ 
 χαι ETivofw' οξύς, και ειτι- 
 TjXsij^ ξξγον'^ ός «ν yiuwo"- 
 
 El μίντοι, Jjtf'ffSP 'ΤΓ^οσ'- 
 ίίν, δια ό""^ ευ μαχομκι,Κ 
 ετ( χαι νυν ο μάχη κ^(νω, 
 όα^^ίω o-j()sig"e αν ίφαλ. 
 
 ΐίκίτος γαξ sv xaxogP 
 ανηξ xj'Sitfcfi.jv γαλήνη ναυ- 
 τίλος εΐΟΌ^αω. 
 
 Ου ίαδιος svu,^ o(fcg 
 μίν ί;ί/ονη εγω εν ο'"^ rj-s- 
 iru"^^^ ό ΑΤολίμιο?, όοΌς 5s 
 εν ό"^•^ (5ιωχω, Ισος Si εν Ό^^ 
 αττοχτεινοο ό ίΤολεμιο?. 
 
 Ταχύ ό εν ό ιταξαδίκίος 
 όη^ιον avaXiCx:<j, (5ιωκω, χαι 
 /3αλλω, χαι χαταχαινω. 
 
 Και μη(5Ξΐί τ^οφαίΤι^ ό"^ 
 «rXsw αλ-λοίε, η τ^αττω 
 αλλο5 τι? ό (Γτ^ατη^ο^ χα- 
 ταλεΐ'ϊτω.'' 
 
 OUT05 ετω,^ ό μεν (δει- 
 κνύω" "ffoXug TS χαι χαλο? 
 χτήμα, ό δε χειμαιδ wf μη 
 |αδιο5 Σίμι tiuw.^ 
 
 Βουλομαι δ' ανα|, χαΚως 
 δραω εξαμ-αρτανω'^ μάλλον 
 η νικάω χαχως. 
 
 Και oicg χΐι^τ&νεω ό 
 ψηφιίμα χατα ό «λονίΊ. 
 ο?, cj, μα ό Κεξξεξος, ου- 
 δείς μηχανή r>e διαφεύγω* 
 auTof. 
 
 θνηο'χω'' τιίημ» ό εμο^ 
 5χ5^οί 7ελω5. 
 
 ΛΙελιττα ήλιχια iiayi- 
 
124 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 age of bees in ilus manner : iliose 
 which are but a year old, are glos- 
 sy, and ret^einble oil, in colour ; but 
 the elder ones are rough both lo 
 iouk at and to touch, and appear 
 wrinkled by their age. 
 
 37. For thou shah never hij 
 wc'.ping bring ι•ρ the dead from be- 
 low. 
 
 36. When he was ]irovcnied 
 froin discharging public duties him- 
 Sflf, hy being employed about great- 
 er things, he called to hun for this 
 purpose, Archiadas, α religious 
 man. 
 
 39. De rebus inccrlis vero, oracula consuliiim mittcbat sues, 
 an puscipienila csseni. 
 
 40. At isle eerie pater tuus apiior est ad ^jcendttm raimis 
 quam plus habere. 
 
 vojtfxu*** Tif or;, fj τ;οϊγο;* 
 oorej* ό fi.sv «i^TOerrfC ffnX. 
 cwff <TS ειμί, χαί 6ίχώ"'' 
 ΐλαιον, ϋ χίοια•* ό if ve^.'i- 
 
 ό^αωΡ 5ια ό ^r,»ag. 
 
 Oj γαξ rtvayw Tars 
 ίνίξΰΐν xXaiy ό φίιμενοί: 
 ανω. 
 
 xuXutJ* ό coXiTis&CjP" όια 
 
 Αςχιαδας, ό Sirx'^ piXcc, 
 
 CHAP. L. 
 
 Τίίίο or Wi>rc negatives strengthen the negation. 
 Bia if the two negatives belong to two differtnX verbs, iheyfornt 
 tn cui-mative. 
 
 1. JYor did any other one of the 
 (ireeks suffer any thing iii this bat- 
 tle. 
 
 2. That is, not only not to have 
 prejudged any thing. 
 
 3. A mean nature ncrcr docs 
 a>i>j thinsr groat unto another, either 
 liiiio an individual or a slate. 
 
 4. 'I'hc other things have no 
 where in no way any roiunumion 
 with any one of the things which 
 are not. 
 
 Oji5e αλλοί (5ε ό "ΙΆλην 
 εν οίτος ό μάχη «"aff^cj" 
 
 Οίτος ειμί, ου μόνον ('.««■ 
 μη t^QKCLTaytvuiixu' μτ,• 
 5ει?. 
 
 2μιχ?ο5 ^\)(ίις OD-isij μί- 
 ^α5 o'jJs <Γ0ί"3 odOsij, cuts 
 ιϋιωτηί ο-τε "ffo^Ji; Jfaw. 
 
 Ό αλλοδ ό μ>ι iifuS oi- 
 Jifi; ουϋαμι; c'jjaawt: ouJcig 
 χοιτωνια c^u. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 125 
 
 5. I will not omit to ascertain 
 hy inquiry tlie whole truth respect- 
 ing these. 
 
 6. It is diserraceful to deny that 
 he who both labours, and benefits 
 the state niost, is 7ioi deserving even 
 of the gi'eatest rewards. 
 
 7. We were compelled to change 
 to the opinion, that the ruling of 
 men was ncithei' among impossible 
 nor diticnlt things. 
 
 8. They said that they would 
 not march forth on the ninth day, 
 il the moon were not at the full. 
 
 9. Cities many in number and 
 difficult to take, if (they are) -mt 
 (taken) by a long siege. 
 
 10. I would not pay even an 
 obolus to any person. 
 
 11. Thus there is iwi eren one 
 M'ise person. 
 
 12. ."Miserable art ihou, in re- 
 proaching me with these thing.-', 
 Avliich every one of the^e will re- 
 proach thee with. 
 
 13. If thou wishest thus to in- 
 terrogate any one of those here 
 present, every one will laugh. 
 
 14. Both infantry and ships and 
 every thing perished. 
 
 15. He certainly wiW attack ug. 
 
 16. Thou art certainly a gene- 
 rous man. 
 
 17. ΤΓ For the then Athenians 
 fijd mt seek for an orator or general 
 ilirough whom they might enjoy a 
 happy slavery. 
 
 18. That he thoughtj therefore, 
 that command became no mie who 
 was nat superior to those govein- 
 
 ου ηα.ς τ^έοαομ^.ι'^ ιτε^ί ios 
 αληίίια. 
 
 Αΐ(^-/_ξθζ ίιμι αντιλέγω, 
 μη VJ-/) ό ToX-jg χαι tovsm 
 και ως;ίλε^ ό xoivoj, ourog 
 χυ.\ μ.εγας αξι&ω. 
 
 Αναγχαζώ- μίτανοεω, μη 
 Oj-ri ό αυονατος ούτε ί χα- 
 λ;ΐΓ05 ε^; &ν ειμί &"*" «νό^ω. 
 τοζ ο.ς~χ_ω. 
 
 Ev-ciTog US ot/x ε^ε^χο. 
 μαι φημι, μη cj τλη^η^ 
 ειμίβ ό K'jxXof. 
 
 IloXig rrcy.vg xat χαλέ- 
 Toj λαμ^αν^;,'' μη ου χξΛ- 
 νοζ Jcfti ί7θλοχια (λ^μ^α. 
 vw.P'^g) 
 
 Ον< αν κΓθϋΐϋ^;μι'^ oj- 
 ύζ αν ocoXoi οιϋει.ί. 
 
 OCrws οιχ ειμί σΌφο^ 
 o'^Oc ε i.e. 
 
 Σ^J ίΐ' ad>jc..c ^-ε, circs* 
 ονειϋι£α;, eg" G-j*^ ooosij (ει. 
 μι) of ουχι t&s ονειόΐι^ω τα- 
 
 Ε( TIS είελω oirug εξο- 
 μαι ό ενόαο;, ου^ίι^ (^'μ') 
 
 Και Ts^Gi: χαι νανς, χμ 
 ο\)'5ίις (έιμι) cc τιςουχ ατολ- 
 λυμι.""5 
 
 Οιιχ ειμί icwg cux εοτι- 
 τιήημι"'^ ε;. C. 
 
 Ουχ ειμί ''•7Τ£.'5 ουχ ειμί tfu 
 yivi/aiaj κνηρ. 
 
 Ου J σ.ξ ζγ;τί'^^ ο Tors 
 Αόηναιοό ούτε «ηται^, ο;.,τε 
 <S7^a.Triy(,g owl 'uCrig dcu- 
 >.ευω^ ευτνχ^ί. 
 
 Ότι μεν owv ουχ οιομα»' 
 ΐΓ^οο'ηχω ουόεΐί: α^η,ε ίί- 
 ng μη ,βίλτιμν ειμ;•^ » α|. 
 
 L2 
 
12b 
 
 CKELK KXI:BCI9ES. 
 
 ed, is evident lo all, even in tho 
 lhL-i:;d alreiidy incmioued. 
 
 19. I agiiin a-sked ihee lo g^ive 
 BBC a lliinsr, than which I knew 
 thai thou iiadsl mudng of less 
 yahiQ lo give me ; nor any tiling 
 easier to be commanded. 
 
 20. He docs not therefore hoM 
 in estimation praise from such per- 
 sons as these, who do not even 
 plea.?e themselves. 
 
 21. \Vlion he saw him unable 
 to bear iho, spear, he gave liim 
 the other things, and did not fmr 
 thai he would not be able lo bear 
 them. 
 
 22. They who arc most hostile 
 in the play having become friond.s 
 al last, go out, and no one u killed 
 by an\j person. 
 
 23. Since he aflfarda himself to 
 him of 'ih•.; Gret;k.s who wi.she.-s to 
 hi^k whar.ioever thing any one may 
 »"i-»h, and givoo an an.swer iu evcrij 
 one. 
 
 24. But .^incn thou dost i^all 
 those ihing.•? wliich are many, by 
 one ginvrle name, and dool say thai 
 every oat of them io a form. 
 
 ■y'>;,P xat ό 'Z'-jil'y. T«c ότ). 
 
 Λ ' is οι 
 
 "Κος. 
 
 Πα>αν curi'jj' tfj, ίζ ft. 
 isij* ojTS (To αιχ•'β? £»aiP Oi- 
 
 Oj ϊΌΐννν ουί: «"aja j 
 τοκυτος sroivos iv Xo^c.^ 
 Ti5r,^(j"' itfyi 'yjji α„ΐος 
 
 ναμοι .oaffra^w' i (5of j, 'j 
 aXXfij ίιίωμι," xai o.;X vO• 
 fsoj™- μη ou ουνο,Λ^ίΐ*: ^=^j 
 
 Ό ίχί^05 ειμί? £ϊ ό μ•;• 
 όοί, φίλο; ^'ΐνομαι'"' 5τι c ί- 
 Xfjr^,- ϊίί^χομΛΐ, XWI ατο- 
 
 Άτ£ ayro5" va^r^j.'S 
 oirou cjwraij ό '£XXr,v ο 
 β(,■J\oμ.aιι: ίς τις αν τι; 
 /ίουλομαι, και ouiiig όίη; 
 Οχ'Χ aroxfiv'jj.'"" 
 
 Αλλ' siiiiSr. ό -roXbg ci- 
 Tof ί'ις 7ΐζ ir»o(fayo^£yw 
 ονο,αα, χαι ?»)μ• ouoiic au- 
 ccg (ϊίμι) <'>ί tij cj (Γ^ημα 
 Ειμί. 
 
 O^etg (ίιΐ'ΐ) otfrij: oj χα- 
 ταχλαιω' ό τα^.-ιμι,ε irAr.> 
 ye ojTOi Σωχ^ατη.ί, 
 
 25. Ηθ subdued to tears a-ery 
 •w of 'hose present, except So- 
 oratee himself 
 
 2G. Dixcrim ogo quidcm, ncmbn nullam esse insiitutionem 
 tJo iilo qui non placeat. 
 
 27. .Wm/) nusguam pugnabit tecum. 
 
 2S. .Υαηο ηυη faciei. 
 
 29 .Wfnj'ni non placet. 
 
GREEK Έ,ΧΈΤίΟΙΒΖ». 
 
 127 
 
 CHAP. U. 
 
 The article is used io niark a disiinciion cr emphasis. JVith the 
 infinitive it supplies the place of nouns, gertauls, and supines. 
 JVith the participle it is translated by the relative and indicative. 
 iVith μεν and (5;, i( signifies partly ; atid it is often used fur 
 omametii sake. 
 
 1 . The celebrated Socrates seeing 
 the famous Alcibiades. 
 
 2. The famous Leonidas, he of 
 Laced aemon. 
 
 3. in the beginning, the mighty 
 (iod created the heaven and the 
 earth. 
 
 4. And after the seven days, the 
 water of the deluge came upon the 
 earth. 
 
 δ. They lead away the Euphrae- 
 us (I was mentioning) to prison. 
 
 6. The Ismenias (of whom we 
 are speaking) said to him, conduct 
 me in. 
 
 7. For a person to cotiguer him- 
 ?elf, is the chief and best of all 
 rictories ; but for any one to be 
 overcome hy himself, is the basest 
 and worst of all things. 
 
 8. To injure, is nothing diiRcult, 
 but is in the poAver of every man : 
 but to benefit, is by no means in tlie 
 power of every one. 
 
 9. To know how to govern 
 others, this appears to us to be sur- 
 prising, 
 
 10. It is honourable even for 
 one who is giOwing old to learn. 
 
 11. It is better to be dead than to 
 Jive miserably. 
 
 12. Death is frequently more 
 eligible than life. 
 
 13. Towards the arcomplishing 
 «f ihoce things which he might 
 
 OfCTij i Σωχζατγ,ζ ό Αλ- 
 x^ζ^aϋ■r,ς. 
 
 Εν ο.ζγτι, ffoisco^ ό Θίο; 
 ό ojPavos χαι ό yi\. 
 
 Και μ^ΐτσ. ο ίπτα ν;μϊ?α 
 ό ύίω^ ό xaTaxX'jC^cg ^ινο- 
 
 Avay'^i ό Εΐ)φ|αί05 £($ ί 
 
 Ό ΙίΓμενία^, αγω ε^ω, 
 
 '0"^ νικσω avT(,c°- αύτου, 
 «ας νικ/5 νξ^.τοζ τί χα» 
 αξιΚτοζ' 1°^ δί ήτταομΛΐ 
 ajTos°- ύφ' ίαυτου, τας «jcT- 
 γζος Γί άμα χαι χακο?. 
 
 Ό"*^ μίν /5λαττω, ουϋίΐζ 
 χαλετο?, αλλ' ανό^ωτο^Ε: 
 νας' ό"^ OS είΤωφε)^Μ, oy- 
 ίαμτ, ανας. 
 
 Ό"" βϊΊιίΓαμοϋ ανό^Μ- 
 το? αλλοί cpoffrariyio, βύ- 
 τορ όαυμαίτο^ ί^•ω φα»- 
 
 Καλοί και ^Patfai^f ό" 
 μανίανω. 
 
 Καλορ ό"*" μη ζαω ειμί, 
 7; ^aw αόλΐίι)?. 
 
 Α Ιρετο? ίιμι τολλακίί 
 one airoi3vr//Txcj^ ό"» ^αω. 
 
 Ε*ι ό'** χατβ^^οίζομαί 
 
19β 
 
 CREKR EXERCISBS. 
 
 desire, he ihoughl that the ehort- 
 eet route lay through holh pajwi/, 
 ;xvA falsehood, and deceit. 
 
 14. He contrived the rendaing 
 his soldiers obedient, from his juin- 
 υΐξ ια'Λ ihtm in commiuing injus- 
 tice. 
 
 1 5. Since he wshes to be vic- 
 torious in the pancratium, having 
 tonsidcrtd v.-ith th•;»•, he will as- 
 sociate with this one, wliosoever 
 ir.ay appf^ar to him to be the iiueal 
 
 j'jr his jiravtining these thii:!.?^. 
 
 16. We notwithstanding an- 
 KO '.nee, hij our huvins^ always grant- 
 ed pernii.-iftion to him ot" the Atlie- 
 n:an.s ich•) has ici.'ihed it. 
 
 17. We i-pf-nd the lime of acting 
 vi making ourselves ready. 
 
 19. Upon thi?, Xenophon took 
 counsel with the rest, what it be- 
 liovcs them to do about their go- 
 uig up any farther on the expedi- 
 :ion. 
 
 1^. A sower went out to soir, 
 and in sowing, some ppcd.- fell by 
 t!"jp way piJf, and the birds came 
 and ale them up. 
 
 20. Woe, woe, woe fo those 
 who dwell upon the earth, from 
 the remaining bla.-t.s of the irum- 
 p't of the liiree ;uigels who are 
 about to ijound. 
 
 21. But when they had .«uppi^l, 
 and it was night, they who wire 
 ordiT'd went and seize upon the 
 mouhtain. 
 
 22. ('hiriFophui? having in.spccl- 
 id the i^iitrinl.»-•, Ι*•<1 fhis force) along 
 the ruud, while (iicy who had seized 
 
 aofior stai oic o"* eric*. 
 xfoj T:, xai Ϋέί,ΰω,™ χα» 
 ε^αταταω. 
 
 (Γοίβχ^ί, SX ό"'' (T'^vctJixiy 
 
 μΜ^ ό τα^χ^ατίον γίνομαι,' 
 d-jv <Sj σχείΓΓω,'"^ ίς «ν 
 Ooxi:j avroj ixavoj ειμ/ =ι$ 
 
 CUVclUI. 
 ,^50JΛ»μΛl.ε 
 
 Ό ''"* c^naSu y?cvog 
 
 λκΓχω. 
 
 Ex oCcoj ύ μίν sc-.ejuv 
 
 όε (rc£i|w• χα• ev 0'*' ffTi/- 
 Pij ouTcf, ij"• μ=ν τιττω* 
 «ταΡα ό ί6(ί<:. χοι ί^ομαι' 
 ό rsrSivov, χα» xoTQ^a^y 
 
 Οχιι, ουαι, cuai ό xa- 
 Toixfu ετί ό yy\, εκ ό λοι- 
 
 ayys'krji Ι μίλλο) (Γαλτι^ω. 
 
 Ecei Ss itioEcj' χαι νΐ'ξ 
 ^ ινομαι,'' ό μί» ταίΟ'ω' "Χ•** 
 μαι,' χα» χαταλαμ?ανω ό 
 
 ηγω^ (ό ίτιίαΓεί/μα) χΛτα 
 ό iiof • ό όί, ό 0^ xarof 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 129 
 
 upon the mountain and the height 
 advanced. 
 
 23. But their kinff, who xom in 
 the wooden tower which was built 
 upon the height, would not come 
 out, nor those luho were in the place 
 iohich was first taken. 
 
 24. How then? said Gobryas. 
 Because, replied he, it behoves us 
 10 Jiiplay these things as injuring 
 men, but those as benefitting. 
 
 25. It appears to me, to be a 
 more difficult tiling to find a man 
 supporting prosperity in a becom- 
 ing manner, than adversity ; for 
 tlie former gives rise to insolence in 
 most persons, the latter to modera- 
 tion in all. 
 
 26. Those with the king also 
 died ; owe, while opposing some- 
 thing ; another^ while fleeing ; and 
 a third., while striving to protect 
 himself with whatever he could. 
 
 27. Having adopted this prin- 
 ciple, he has conquered and pos- 
 sesses all things ; partly as one 
 would possess, having taken them 
 in war, and partlij, having made 
 them friends and auxiliaries to him- 
 self. 
 
 28. Come then, what sayest 
 thou is the number of thy force? 
 There are, said he, Median horse- 
 men more than ten thomand. 
 
 29. For one man is better than 
 Zc/?, hy working in season. 
 
 30. IT But after the second ir- 
 ruption of the Peloponnesians, the 
 Athenians, since both their terri- 
 tory was ravaged the second time, 
 and the plague as well as the war 
 afflicted them, altered their senti- 
 ments. 
 
 'ka.μ.ζσ.vιJ' xa.i q a)<|ov, Sfl-ij- 
 
 Ό άί βαύιΧίυς auro^, ό 
 (ίίμι) εν ό μοίΤυν ό £•?γ' ακ^ον 
 οιχοοομίω," ουχ 6cXuP £ζ:>~ 
 χοααι,'' οιιΟΞ ο ;ν ο τ^οτί^ος 
 
 Τίώς (5η ; φημ» ό Γω- 
 €|u«g• ότι, φ^μι, ο μ,ίν 
 
 2ri(StixvLi(jLi,"' ά ύε ευ. 
 
 Δοχίω S'/Cj} ■χαλΒ'Ζοζ ει- 
 μι ίίριίκω" αν-ήξ α αγα.• 
 ύοςΡ" xaXcJS ??^ω, "^ ό χα- 
 xog-P" ι μίν γαξ ί^ξΐζ ό το- 
 Χυς, ι Οβ ΰ'^ίφξοΰ-^ν^ι ό 'καζ 
 εμ.'ϊ'οιεω. 
 
 Και ό (fv'j βα.ϋι\ε% 6ε 
 αιτοίνηο'κω,- ό μ-εν ΤΡοβαλ- 
 λω™ Tier, ,0 δε (ρΐ;;γο, ό Ss 
 γε, xHi ccp/j"«j™ ίΰτις (Juva. 
 μαι.^ 
 
 Ούτος χ^αομαι' ό yvcj- 
 μ// fas χαταίΓ^εφω,^ χα< 
 εχω• όΡ" μεν, ως αν αι- 
 ξίω^ε <Γ{ς εχω ίτολεμοί, ό 
 ίε, (Γυμμαχοί^^ wu φιλο^''^ 
 τοιεω.^ 
 
 Αγω 5η, ό Co? S-j'>aujg 
 τις 'ϋΧ-ήόος ©ημ* είμ; ; ειμί, 
 φημι, Μ/,ίΰ^ ίττε^ι^ μ;» 
 «roXiig ό μι;?(οι. 
 
 EJj yet» ανη? •τκ»α ο 
 οεχα oii/.:p:iij ό εν ώ*« ε*- 
 α^οααι. 
 
 Λίετα ίε ό ίευ-τε^ο^ εο"• 
 §ολ>] ό Πίλο'Τοννχ^αΊοί, ό 
 Λ^ηναιοίΤ, ΰ)ς Ι τΒ γ-η u-jTig 
 τεμνω^ ό δε-οτίΡας, χα» ο 
 νο(ίος ετιχειμαι" άμα χω ό 
 νοΧεμος, αλλοιοω"^ ό ^νω• 
 
 7-ξ 
 
130 
 
 CREt£ EXERCI?E6. 
 
 31. W.it dooi thf. ill oiher re- 
 ep«ct3 divine I'lato ? wishing lo 
 Rpcak of the tableus of laws, " hav- 
 in;j w'ritleii," says he, " th»'y will 
 lay 'ip in tlieir leinpltis Uic cyprcts 
 Di'j'norials." 
 
 32. In this wav also the famous- 
 lawi^ver of the Jews, no conunon 
 man he^ when he had formed a 
 just conception of tiu; power of Μδ 
 Deity, even expressed it. 
 
 33. To succeed wt-ll beyond be- 
 girt, is to the iniprudent the occa- 
 sion of thinking wronfr : wiiercfore 
 to have preserved gooil ihings, often 
 eeems to be more dithcull ihan .'t> 
 Acre acquired them. 
 
 34. Pythagoras .=aid, that these 
 two things were given from the 
 ^(yU to men a•» tlie best, viz. to 
 ipeak truth, and t'j do good. 
 
 35. But if ever tiiere be any 
 suspicion of a scarcity of those 
 things whence these are to anse, 
 there is no fear lest 1 lead liiee to 
 tke attiihtnent of the.so thiiigs, by 
 thy labouring and undergoing priva• 
 Has in body and in mind. 
 
 36. That iu;iii, I think, who, in 
 oppo.-ition to these thingc^, is ttiii- 
 perate in rria'i'm to rovporeul 
 OTtitihcaiions, ii<lhert's alt=o to iiis 
 oath, and happen.-? to be iui easy 
 pefjon to have dtaling.s wiih, and 
 fond of stiivinir with rrirard to the 
 not bf-ing infcriir in benrjitting those 
 who do him a good turn. 
 
 37. Thinking, tlierefore, that 
 the contempt of eni'tnifs gives 
 risp to a certain ront'idmce fur tn• 
 eagm?, ho prrviously instrucietl 
 the cryors to Fell nakfvl those of 
 ihe barbariane xvho irtre taken by 
 the robbers. 
 
 Tis xai ό ς•' άλλο; iiiog 
 n>.a7ijv ; ό OsXtos deXu 
 iirw,* " γξαφω"' φτ,μι, " iv 
 ό ίί?ον ηύις,αι xucra«iTri»cs 
 μνήμα." 
 
 Οΐιτος^ χοι ό ύ Ιο.Οίζιος 
 6ΐδμο6;ττ,ς, ουχ ό τ•-/χα- 
 voj'C αντ]Ρ, ετίιίη ό ό ijiov 
 ί^ναμΐ5 χατα ο agiog*' χω- 
 |ίω,^ και ίχ^αινω.^ 
 
 Ό"* ej 'ζξαττω ca'a δ 
 C!|ia,'^f αφο^μη ό"* χα,χ^ς 
 φί&νίω ό avorrcj γίνομαι• 
 
 tf;j'Kua(iu^ ό ayaooi, ό"* 
 χτο(ομαι χαλετοί ειμί. 
 
 οίτος εξ ό Θέο5 ό α•^6ξ(ύνος 
 δΐ'5(..'μ»" χαλο^, ό""^ c: αλη- 
 όί -oj, χα» ό"* i\ii»yiriu. 
 
 Καν Oe coTc ^ινομα»* tij 
 ύτο^ια ffravif, αφ' of ειμί 
 ιΐτίζ, ου φο€ο?, μη tfv aj'*.* 
 Ετι ό,"* Ίτονεω χαι ταλαιτι. 
 ficj ό (ίομα χα» ό >}'i'X';j 
 
 (ExJivof ) ciUKi μ5ν, '■$ 
 τάνκντια oCrcs,» ε^χίατη^ 
 μ•ν :ΐμι ο όια ό (Γωμαβ 
 ήόοντ;, ε-^οίχοί ίε, xoj ίι- 
 §υμέολοί: ειμί τ^^χανω, χα» 
 φιλονίιχο^ cjof ό"'-' μη ίλ• 
 
 ΊΙ^εομηι 5ί ό°' xara- 
 gjjC'VitJ i τολΐμιοί ίωμη τι^ 
 εμβάλλω cPcf ό'' μάχο- 
 μαι, TfotTui" ό χη^υξ, ό 6το 
 ό \ηβ<Γτ,ζ aXiCxu βαξζαξοζ 
 ^.-μνεβ τωλίω. 
 
GRBfift exi:bcisb5; 
 
 131 
 
 3S. There may be great excess 
 in all the tiungs which we have 
 mentioned ; the one, drawing us to 
 extravagance ; the other, driving U8 
 to baseness. 
 
 39. The expression " rnan," or 
 " white," does not denote the time 
 when ; but this, " he walks," or 
 " he has walked ;" the former de- 
 
 Tivrj^cu'"^ a» εν ra.c, hg'^ 
 etru," αμί•τ|ια <ταλυ?• hg 
 με», ντξος I ^ολυτίλη? sj- 
 a.ywy of ii, νξος ό ^υίτα^ος 
 
 Ό"'« μεν, σν5ίω*ο?, % 
 "kswog,"' ου -τΓ^οΟΊιμαινω ό"* 
 "ττοτε- ό'"• έε, βαοιζω, η ^α- 
 ΰι^ω, 0"•^ μΛ ό "τα^ειμι -χξα' 
 νορ, ύ ίε ό ιταξεξγϋΐχηι.'ί 
 
 • notes the present, /Ae /ari'i/• the past 
 
 40. Horum minime est, qui prudentiam exercent, vim in• 
 ferre; sed illorum est, qui vires habeiU absque consilio, tale 
 facere. 
 
 41, Gtuo aulem modo mihi visus sit familiaribus suis pro 
 de.==e, partim opere semetipsuin demonstrans, qualis esset, pat' 
 t-im colloquiis ususj scribam. 
 
METAPHRASIS. 
 
 ** Vcrbum aliquod poeticnm cum per alteri'.m prosaicum 
 ejtisdein linguce ialerpretelur tyro, cog-nirioncrn νοοαΙυΙ'> 
 rum dupio augeLii atque acleo majores ?olito profectus fa- 
 cicL Eudem quoqueoperfi maturius vidt-bir, quid differant 
 vocabnla antiqui^.-imre Gripciai el roceiniorii, ac quid poe- 
 ticJD nota noinina et prosaica•. \"im porro particularum, 
 quce Graico interprete aliis redduntur, discernere adjuescet." 
 Bl'rgess {Episcopi JMe):evc7isis) InUia Ilomerica, 
 Praif. vi. 
 
 SLMILITUDIXUM. SERIES EX ILIADE 
 COLLECTARUM. 
 
 Z. 146—149. 
 
 0(»i Πξ ς;υ>.Χων ySv-r,, roir,5s xai avi^wv. 
 
 Φολλα τα μεν τ' ανε,αο? χ«μα'3ι<: ^c.-i, aWa if ()' ύλη 
 
 ΤηλίίοωΟ'α 9yi•, ΐ^ιξος 6' sriyty\irai ύξτ)• 
 
 "As is the generation of leave?, .v> is al.-o that of m»»n. 
 Some loaves the wind scatters up»:)!» the <rrovuid, \\')u\e oth^Ts 
 the baddinff \voo<l protUices, And they bloom in the season of 
 Fprin^r. Thus the gcntration of men — oiie spring? up^ aiio- 
 Ihcr ends." 
 
 'Oir»io( I I ^λλο» (5\>tf«f, <"οιοΐΛ"(>ί xat I avr,t. Ό φύλλο» ο μίν 
 i α»«^ο; Χ"'."•"" ^i»TW ϊτϊξος 6ί Ι όλη ό fjia>>ij ,S>.a(J'ravu• ίτ» ϋ » 
 $αξ γινομου χαι^οί* oixrw( ο α»»;^ ό yί»oί,^ «οτί μί» βΚαύΨοη», χατί 
 is ^kifu. ρ 
 
eaSBC SXERCISB3. 199 
 
 I. 323—327. 
 
 Ώί 5' osyig α«ττ,(ίι vsotftfoitfi κξοφεξί^ίί 
 Maifi-ax', ενεί χε λαβηίΊ, xaxug St τι β5 «Άει «vtj3• 
 ^Ωί χαι ενω «τολλ^ί: μεν av'jrvoi;; νύχτας ιαυον> 
 Ίΐ/χατα ο αίμα-ο^ντα aisirfrjtfflOv ΐΤίλέμ,ι^ων, 
 Av'Jpatfi μα^ναμενο?, οα^ων ένεχα ίφεΓε^αων. 
 
 " Α? a bird brings food to her unfledged young, when sh» 
 hath found it, and yei it is badly -with herself; so I al&O have 
 spent many sleepless nights, and gone through bloody days 
 in combat, fighting \v-ith heroes, for the sake of their wives.'' 
 
 'Ρ.ίιτΐξ δε οξνις ό ίιτί-αμαΐ μη δυναμαιΡ νε&ίβΌ^ <τ^ο(Γφε^ω *"f οφ•»".» 
 fiT.-ioay λαμοανω/»^ χαχω? ίε χαι αύτου (ι^αζχω' olru χαγω τ»λυί 
 (ΐίϊ αϊ*νο$ vug ίιαχω,^ »;με|α δε αΙματοωΡ» διανύω'' «"βλίμίωΡ av»j 
 (Μ.χομ.αι yuvr( ίνεχα auTog. 
 
 0> 360—364. 
 
 Τη ^' οί^ε ιτ^οχεηντο φαλα^^ηδον, -τ^β δ' ΑΐτοΧλων, 
 Αι^ιδ' ε^^ων ε^ιτιμον ε^ειιτε δε τει^^ο^ Αχαιών 
 'Ρεια μαλ', ΰζ οτε τις ψαμαίον ιταΐζ "^Χ' 6αΚα^((γ\ς' 
 'Otf?•' ε*£ΐ βυν ^Όί-ηδγι αόυΡματα vri'ZiSrjdtv^ 
 Αψ αΐΐΐς β'ϋνεχευε ιτοβΊν χαι χε^Λν, αίΐ)|ων. 
 
 " Along this Avay then they poured forward in troops, and 
 Apollo before them, holding the awful yEgis. But he Je- 
 gtroyed the \vall of the Greeks very easily, as when a boy 
 would the sand near the sea ; who, when with childish incli- 
 nation he may have formed play-things, again overtuma 
 ihem with his feet and hands, sporting." 
 
 Δια oUTos' OS oCrog διέπομαι' φαλα^χηδβν ίμ*^οίόεν δε ό Ατολ- 
 λων .\17ii χατεχω ό μέγα\οτ\μος' xara^aWuP 6ε ο τείχος i Έλλην 
 ΐυχο'Κως λααν, ως ότΐ *-»g κότα h ψαμμο? ιται^ νλτ)ίιον ό ioXotftfa* 
 CtfTi.c eirsioav τοίεω^* «-αι^ιβ» ο αφιοβΊινη,Ρ «Όλιν (Lsta ovrof 9\ιγ• 
 ysu^ « «rowi xoj ό χεΐ|, tai^u. 
 
184 GREEK EXERCISES 
 
 η 257—265. 
 
 Οι (Γ άμα na'rPrx>.oj μεγαΧγ,τοξε ίω*ηχί£ντί? 
 Etfci^'/». 05*' Εν TiijiT• μέγα jiovjowtj o^o-j(fav. 
 Αΐιπχα Js ff^r.xjCCu .-οιχοτί; ίξίχίοντο 
 Σινοόιοΐί, oC; TttiJtg ε^ιίμαινουίιν idovrEj, 
 Αι:ι xsi>T-o.asovr=c, ic^ Sti οιχΓ ίχοντα^, 
 ΙΝτ;•τιαχο|• ju^-•' i^s καχον τοΧίϊίίΤι τιίειΟΊ, 
 Toug J' 61 cio ir^cpa τι; τί xiijw avd|:jcros οίιτηί 
 ΚινηΟ"»! acxujv, ο! '3' α>Λΐμον ητο^ s^ovt.-.c 
 TleOtftfu ca; ir£r:rai, χαι αμυνίΐ oitfi TixiCffi. 
 
 Thoio, howRver, '.vlio v/oro armed along witli the mag- 
 nrtnimous Patroclus, rnarchoil iu gocnl order, till, full of cour- 
 aire, tlicy rushed uj)0n the Trojans. Ininicdiatoly they pour- 
 ed out like to wa.^p.-? dwcllinfr by the road, %\hich fooli.-h 
 boys, acconlinrr to custom, irritate, con.«fantly vexing fhtrn 
 rnaiutainiu'i their habitations oa the road ; and cause a coin- 
 inou evil >uito many. For if perchance any way-faring man, 
 trtavelling there, disturb those unintentionally, then they, pos- 
 .«sessiiig a courageous heart, all, to an insect, fly forth and de- 
 fend their young." 
 
 Οϊτοζ δε άμα Πατροχλο.? ό μίγαΧο^υ'χρς ό'Τ>.ιξ:ο* τοΡί^υ,""" h.'.C 
 ίν ό Ύζως μεγαφξονί'^}" ειτιξαινω.' F.uOciJa δε (ίφτξ όμοιο; ϊτιτι^ημι"•- 
 ah:<iv ε5ίΐμι''Κ τα^οόιί;, ό; caig τα»οξυνω (ίυνηίη;, αϊι i'iot^u, ίτι ό 
 *ύας^ ί οιχικ s^oj, νητιο*;• χοινο; 6; xaxc; ό ΐ(ο}.\:ςτι6τ,μι. Ouco.c ya» 
 «ρν •τ$ξ τι; η ίΓ«»£^ομσι ctvdf^uriog Όόοίΐτοξος xivsw axuv. ούτο; δί κ!χ;- 
 ζις -Ι-^χι] :'/^u 615 το;)μ:Γξο(ίί£ν τα; τίΓομαι χαι 3or,d;u ό I'Jiof cixvov. 
 
 Π. 297—300. 
 
 Ώ; '5' ότ' ας)' ύψηλτ)^ xoξ■Jφr,ς ejsof μ?Λ όλοι• 
 Κινηίΐι ίτυχινην ν£φ;λτ,ν dTe'ocriye'Sra Zrv'f, 
 Κχ τ' ίφηνον craffai CxoTiai χαι tpujovs; αχΜ», 
 Και ναται, oyfavoiiv ί' α^' ΰιτί^ίαχη αίνετος aidyif. 
 
 " As wlicn from the lofty pummit of a vast mountain, Jove, 
 who collects the lightning, shall remove a thick cloud, forth 
 in an in.'*taiu appear all the rocks, and hifrh ridges, and forest.-<, 
 while from the heaveup, iinmcivflurable aiher thereupon bursts 
 hvh upon the new." 
 
GREEK EXERCISES, 135 
 
 'Ω^Τ:^ δί ότ' αφ' -υψηλοί κοξυφτ, ojof μ-ίγας xivcw ca)(up ve^tMj 
 β 9 αίτραίτη a^^ri^ij Zeu?, εκφαινωΡ^ δε <!τας ό (rxocia χαι ό ίζο'χ^^ζ 
 C αχ^α, χα» ό σύμφυτος τοίΓο?, ου^ανο^ίν 5ε (5/, cxXa/jwrw' ό αμέτρητος 
 
 Δ. 127—131. 
 
 OuJ: Ccdsv, Μ?;ελαε, ίίοι μαχα^ίί; λελαόοντο 
 Αίανατοι, cr^wr•/! οε Διοί δ^^ατη» αγελειτ:, 
 ΊΙ τοι ffpco'^ev (Tratfa ;i»Xoc: εχεαΛκε.ς κμ;;νίν• 
 ΊΙ (5ε Toffov μεν εε^χεν ατο χ^οο?, ώ? ότε μητγ;ί 
 iIa;uoj εε^^ει μυιαν, od' ήοεϊ λεξα^ο uirvoj. 
 
 " Nor were the blessed immortal gods forgetful of thee, 
 Menelaus, and first the plundermg daughter of Jove, wlio, 
 standing before thee, averted the deadly arrow. She repelled 
 it from his body, as much as v/hen a mother drives away a 
 fiy from her son, when he reclines in sweet sleep." 
 
 OvSs tfu, ω Μενέλαο?, ό βεος ο μακα?ιο^ ετιλανόομαι* ό αθάνατο?., 
 trp'^rog δε Ό Ζεις ό hyarr^' ό αχελειο?, crfcig• ΰ\) όμ.ιτξο<ίάεν ((ίτ'/ϊμί* β 
 βΐλοζ ό irixfcg ατοοΌ?εω•^ auToj δε τοΰουτοζ μεν κωλυω^ ατο c (Τωμα, 
 χα^ατε^ μητηρ εχ iraij χωλνω μυια, ότε yXuxu? χοιμαωΡ^"^ yTvog. 
 
 Γ. 10—14 
 
 Eyr' βίίο? λο^υφι^ίΊ NoTog χατεχε^εν ομιχλην, 
 Ποιμει^ιν 0-JTI φιλην, χλεττ;} ίε τε vuxrog αμείνχ», 
 Totftfov Tts τ' εηλευο'5'ει, οίον τ' ειτι λααν ίηοΊν• 
 *Ώ,ς αξα CUV ■j':ro τοίίσΊ κονίίίσ'αλοζ w^vuc' αελλτ;? 
 Ερχομένων μαλα 6' wxa ίιε'Τ^ηίΤσΌν τείιοιο, 
 
 " As when the south wind has poured down a mist upon 
 the brow of a mountain, by no means agreeable to the shep- 
 herd, but to the thief better than night, and one sees as far 
 as he ca.sts a stone, thus the excited dust rose from benealh 
 •heir feet as they advanced, and they crcssed the plain v;ith 
 great rapiility." 
 
 Καία*ερ ίη εν ό χο^υφη ofog ό Noro; ό ομ»χλη χαταχεω,' ό τοιατ)» 
 (κδαμ.ως τ^οί^ιλοί, ό xT^'iCrrig δε ο νυξ χξεκίδων, χαι τοδΌυτο? <ης ε^5β- 
 ^Oij, εφ' ό(Γο5 λιί)ο$ αφ»ημί• o-Jrw δτ, -j-to ύ crojS ούτο? xoviofTcj <5ι«- 
 yiiju?- αελλωίηί ^ο^ευω-^ε >^αν ϋε ταχέως ota ό •τε5»ον ί;ε|χομαι.^ 
 
18β CREEK E.XERC1.?M. 
 
 Γ. 23—29. 
 
 'Clin λίων ίχβ*ϊΐ μίχαλω Er» ί^.•μα«•ι χ•οξβα4, 
 Κ;^-•ν η £λαφον χΐ^αον, η a^ficv aiyo, 
 rif-vau-v μαλα γαξ ts χατί(Γ(3ιί(, eitj^ ov αντο» 
 Σ;,4Λται ϊ•οχ£ί$ τί χ^νίί, ia>^foi c' αιξηοι* 
 
 Οφίαλμίίίίν (όω*• (faro yc^ ηία^όα/ αλίιτην. 
 
 " He rrjoicetl like a lion having lighted, when huncry, 
 upon a liuge carcase, having found either a horned sia:* 
 or v,ild goiit ; for he gjeedily devours it, ahhough sv.u\ dogs 
 and blooming youths stir themselves in pursuit of him. ΎΊ\\ΐΛ 
 rtjoiced Menclaus, when he beheld -s^iih his eyes the hand- 
 BiMne Paris ; for he conceived that he would chaitiie th4 
 g-jiliy one." 
 
 φ«; χί^αιίφοξος, η αγξίοζ αΐζ Tirvaw, λίαν γαξ xaTurfx^u.•, xay»ff 
 arrcj oiwxcj τα-χυς τί xuu*, χαι ludo>.r|g vfcf. Oiru^g yaiCLP*' « 
 14ivE>.oos Αλίξανύ^βς όίοίιόης ό όμμα ό^αομαι•' etui'' ^α^ ημα^ί•^"" 
 ( όμο^Μ>.05. 
 
 Ρ. 1— β 
 
 O.'J' £>.αί• ΑτξΒος uiev, ορηϊςιιλον MivfXaov, 
 
 IlrtTfoxXcj Tfijsfftfi όαμίις fv or/ioTrt-i. 
 
 Βτ) Oi Jia τ^ομα^^ων χ(χο^ν()μίνο<: «i^cti ^a>.xU/' 
 
 Αμφ( J' «^' ajTOJ ,βηιν', ΰ$ τις crs^j τοί-ταχι μίΐΓ*;', 
 
 n»iJToroxof, xivjfr;, o'j •tpiv itOjta rcxoic, 
 
 ■*fiC «ί^ι riar^oxXij βαηΐ ξανίος MsvsXaoj. 
 
 " Nor did Patroclns, subdned in battle by the TrujiT.?, 
 Hude the obser\alion of th•'. .«^on of Atreu?, tlie warlike Me- 
 r4e!aus ; but he advanced through the foremo.-t rombaranrs, 
 nruiod in .«hining brass. Hound him then he stalk•.!, like 
 Λπν dam round its young, having brou<jht forth for »h•^ firfi 
 liiii'', moaning, not luing before accjuainted with pprturiljon : 
 •o stalked tln! yellow-haired Mom-laus round PatriKlus." 
 
 O.x λανίανω" Ss I I Ατξΐυς uiof ό φιλοτολίμς^ Μίν£λαί( Ό Ua. 
 
 rjoxXec i«o ό Τ»ν><: φονεύω' £ν ό μοχη. rio^cjwt** ί; ο»α ό ^τ^εμΛ. 
 ^β{ xaSoxyj^J^ λομίΓ^ος χα>Λΐ? • τ£ρι δ• όη α./Τ05 μάχομαι' uffrif 
 *-f(i ύαμαΚις μητ»;» τί^τιτοχοίτ, i;r,v»;rixo.i:, ου r^oTffov ίτκίτημαι 
 «»* « Toxc::» »νΓν> τ•"|ι 'J Ι1κτ»Όχλο; μάχομαι^ ;α>ί:ί MfviXabf. 
 
EXCERPTA 
 
 Ε DUOBDB 
 
 GR^CIS HOMERI PROSAICIS VERSIONIBUS, 
 
 Altera Paraphrase altera J\iIetaphrasi^ 
 ϋΛ EXTANT IN M6S. BODLEIANIS APUD OXONIENSES, 
 
 COLLATA COM 
 
 PLATONIS 
 
 BJUSDBM LOCI ENAARATIONS. 
 
 ILIADIS LIBRI PRIMI 
 
 LOCUS, QUI INCIPIT A VERSU OCTODECIMO. 
 
 I. 
 
 Ατ^ί<5α» η XRi άλλο» εϋχνημιίβ? Αχαιοί, 
 "fpuv μ•ν (?£5i ioisvj ολυμίΓία δί<)ματ' ίχοντε^, 
 ExiTf itfa» Π^ιαμοιο τολιν, eu ό' oixaiS' Ixstfiar 
 Παιόα ό£ (Αοι λυίαιτε φιλην, τα 5' α-Τοίνα ίεχείί?, 
 '^Λ^ΐ|Λενοι Διο^ υΐον 2χη§ολο» Α-ίολλωνα. $ 
 
 Evfl' άλλοι μεν -ravTSs ε'ττίνφημηβ'αν Αχαιοί, 
 ΑιίειίΆαι β' Ιε^ηα, χαι α^λαα ίεχίαι α^οινα* 
 Αλλ' OUX Ατξειύτι Α^αμεμνονι ήνίανΐ ίυμω* 
 Αλλα xax'jjs αφιει, χ^ατε^ον 5' firi μ,υίον ετελλβ* 
 Μη tfs, ysfov, χοιλ7)<τΊν ε^ω •τα^α νηυοΊ χιχειω, 1ϋ 
 
 Η WV ίηδυνοντ', η ίκίτΐξον αυτί? ιοντο, 
 Μη »ν τοι ου -χ^ξακίμ^ (ίχηιττ^ον χαι ίτεμμα ίεοιο. 
 Την 5' ε^ω ου λυ(ίω, irjiv μιν χαι ^η^α^ Sfl'Sitfiv, 
 ΉμετεΡω ενι οιχω, «ν Α^^ει τηλοδι «"«τ^ί:, 
 Ίστον ε^οιχομενην, χαι εμον λεχο^ αντιοω^αν. 11^ 
 
 Αλλ* ifli, μη μ' εξίύιξΐ, ύαωτΒξος ως χε νεηαι, 
 'Ωί 9φατ'• sikidev ί' ο ysgcov, χαι tifSidero μχΛψ. 
 Bn δ* axtcjt «rrafa ίινα *ολυφλοΐ(Τ§οιο 6α\αί^της, 
 ΙΙβλλβ ί' ίΐτειτ' αιτανευβε χιών T)god' * γΐζΟΛος 
 Μ2 
 
198 CREEK SXERCISte. 
 
 Ατβλλωνι avaxn, rov r,jxcu/.j rtxt \r,T'^. 20 
 
 Κιλ>>αν τ£ ^αί£ην, Ί'εν'όοιο rt t^» a.\a/iinc^ 
 
 Σμι•/6ί^• encore cci j(a»i:'wr' en vr,ov i^fya, 
 
 Η St (ίη «OfS Toi xara ciova μ.τ,ζ\ ίχτ,α 
 
 Τα\>ξ'^ν τ,6' αι^•ων, tc'3: μοι χ^ηηνον £:λ6ω^• 25 
 
 ΐιίίιαν ΔανοΜ ΐμα όαχ^υα tfotS't ,βίλίβ'ιΓιν. 
 
 " Ye sons of Atreua, and ye other "well-armed Greek?, may 
 the gods, who posseas the Olympic mansions, "rant that yc 
 ttay destroy the city of Priam, and return in safety to your 
 homes. But give freedom to my beloved daughter, and re- 
 ceive these ransoms, reverencing the son of Jove, the far-dart^ 
 ing Apollo." Then all the other Greeks ap.sentcd to n^jn-ct 
 ihe priest, and to accept the rich ransoms. But it pleapod noi 
 ihe mind of Agamemnon, the son of Atreu.=, but he db^missed 
 fcim with disgrace, and added a threatening speech. " Lcl 
 me not find thee, old man, either now loitering at the hollow 
 Fhips, or again retuniing, lest perhap-s the sceptre and garland 
 of the god avail thee not. For this female I will not free, old 
 agn fihaJl first come upon her, in my home in Argolis, far from 
 tit-r native land, plying the web, and pliaring my bed. But 
 t'^gono and irritate me not, in onlcr that thou mayeet de{>art 
 m Riifety." Thit^ he .«poke, and the old man wa.-= afraid, and 
 cbryed hL-5 order. He walked in silence along the .=hore of 
 the loud-roaring sea, and havincr £:οη»"ϊ apart, the old man tb'.'n 
 po jred forth an earnest prayer to king Apollo, whom the fiiir- 
 hairod Laiona bore : " Hear me, (.) god of the silver bow, thou 
 who protectest Chrysa and the glorious Cilia, and rulest 
 kr^.v• ly over Tenodo.s, Ο Sminiiiian god, if ever I decoratid 
 With garlanda thy beautiful temple for tliee, or if ever I con- 
 *an»)d in honour of thoe fat ihighs of buil.-^ or of iroafi, accora- 
 plish thi-i do'^ire for me ; May the Greeks, with thy arrows, 
 atonement for my tears."' 
 
 Π. 
 
 PARAPHRASIS. 
 
 il Ατξοζης τι xaa αΧλο? .λχαιβί τολίμκίΓηί;• (fu μ?ν nit iKJouu*"^ h 
 if»? '. oiirfij I e^faviof οιχημα, fxTOfif'..j* μίν ό iroXic ό Ππαμο?, xaXj'c: 
 it σ^τίρ^ομΛΐ" fij ό iajrcu 01x05 \%ααης• tyu Si I •χαΐζ ό jiXcc Xju,^ 
 
 ♦ trrr - »*f ■i-'fitv l'yiMJt\,' εκ>.'Τ*ιθμΓΊ 9 vloC ZftjT, ITOiJu.'t'fV fe^Si/CU 
 
eftF.F.K BXERCISBe. 139 
 
 αξ>οω' «ι•5:ομο:ι cs ό li^iui, χαι ύ <ίΐξΐκαΚΚτ,ς αυτός ttfoncv ίίχομαι•'' 
 αλλ' ουκ αξ^αχω^ Ι Aτf;Ί(Jηί: Λ^'αμβ,ανων οΰτο? wxTa ό «uTog ψυχή" τκαι 
 όη σχλτίίΐ'ωί aurct: α•!Γο•Γίμ•τω,' ετιτα^μα ϋ; ειτιτοττω' ^jvaffriia? xcu 
 Μ-ίχίατίΊα? ϊχω.'"& Όί:*"* ε»μι• Όραω, ω 7'^^^^*, '*'« Μ•1 <'''>^ '^σ.ξα 5 
 κοίλο? νανί*• ej'tj καταλαμβάνω," (10) η vjv ίηίυνο;, τ, ί(ίηξον f^rav. 
 ftar' ίνα μη oj χρηθΊ|ίΐίυω* tfu ό ^αξδϋζ χαι ό ίτεμμα ό όΐος, εφ' β^ 
 6a^ku r,xu. Οότοίτ (5s ε^ω ου λυτ^ονΡ ελευόε^οο), ir_^iv εα' aucoj ε^- 
 χομαι^ ό γν,ξας εν ό εμος οιχο?, εν ό Α^^'ολι?, ιτο^^ω ό «τατ^ι? aurc^, 
 liro.c μεταχει^Ί^ομαι χα» ό εμο5 χοιτ/,'' ύίττ^ρετεω* (15) β>>λ' ατειμι, 
 μη ε^ύϋ ϋιίγ^ίξω, ώζ αν α^ημιοί: ατε^^ομα).* Οίτως ειτιταο'ίω•' φο- 
 έ'εοοΡ^ οε ό γίξων, χαι irfidwP^ ό ε^τιτα^μα- ατε^ο|χα(" (5ε βΊωτταω μετ' 
 ίχτληξι?, ΊτληίΐΊον ό αι^ιαλο^Κ ό 6άλα(ί(ία, Ό ΰυνίγτ^ς ηχτ; ό «ίτα^α ό 
 αίΛίαλο^Ρ? ειτιχλυίΊ?'' ■τοιεω,'^ ό το^εια «τοιεω•"'? αίΓερχομαι" ίε •!Γο|^£4 
 ό γηξαιος εχιτεταμίνως αναιτεμιτω^ ευχή ό Ατολλων, ό αναξ, ο$ ς 
 χαλλιχομο? «τικτω^ Αητω• (20) λε^ω,^ εταχουω'' ε^ω, Ap^n^oTo^of:, 
 Ις β Χ^ϋίΤηδ ύτε^αίΐΊηξω, xoj ό Κιλλα ί ίια tfy όίιοτητος, χαι i Τε- 
 νείο^ε x|araiwf αναδύω ; Σμιν^ευε* ειβΌτί rfu ειτι ό ναο^ «'εριχαλλ•*)^ 
 αναόημα χαι ειτα^ωχο^Ρ" φε^ω^ ανατιίημι*' η ει*οτ3 tfu μΌ?οί λιτά. 
 ^ ταλΐ^5 χαι αι^ καταχαιω/ οίιτος ΐγω ειηθυμια τελειοω•* ώιίωμι*έ 
 Λαναο5 β «"^οίτιχω^τιμωΐια ?ΐ5 ίχδιχησΊ^ ί εμ^δ Oaxfu. 
 
 III. 
 
 METAPHRASIS. 
 
 Ω Ατξίνς caif, χαι ό λοι-ϊΌί: ευοτλο^ Έλλην Cu μεν ό ίϊος τα«- 
 ,.ω : : /Λ\ Λ.,. .5: τ-τ .• %.. ..-,^ _ 
 
 (5) Τότε ο μεν Ελλην άλλο? cag μετ ευφημία βοαω, ευλαεεομω 
 ψί 6 Ιεξενς, χαι ό Χαμτξος δζ-χομΜΐ' iw^civ αλλ' ου ό Ar^S'jg ναις 
 Α^αμεμνων^ αξχεω^ ο ψυχη,•^ άλλα μεό' ύ?^κ: αοΌΐτεμ'η-ω,* αιτειλη- 
 Tixog 5ε λοχοί λε^ω.^ Μηϋαμω<Γ, ω τ^ίίτβευτη-ί:, ετι ό /3α(3ϋί ε^ω 
 ίε vayg** χαταλαμ§ανω,^ (10) η νυν ΐγχξονιζω η εχ ϋευτε^ο?: ίταλ» 
 ιτα^'α^ινομαι,* μηιτω^ ουχ αν cTu βοτβϊω' Ό ^ottJof, χαι ό ίτεφανωμαΐ" 
 ό 4ieg. O'jToj ε^'ω oux ατολνω, Ι γτ,ξας αυτορ ΐΤ^οτε^ον χατ'αλαμ- 
 ^ανω εν ό ημέτερο? οικο<: εν ό Α^/ολιρ πο^^ω ό τατριρ, ίίτου^εω χα» 
 έίκίίνω χαι ΐις ό εμορ χοιτη ύτανταω. (15) Αλλ' ατειμι, μη ίγω 
 rafo^uvtj, Ινως αν ίω^ωΡ? είανε^ομαι.* Οίτως iiru,^ ό ίε γεξ(Μ 
 <pobt-jP'' χαι ίτειίω•"^ ό λο^ορ. Πο^'ε^ιοΡ^ ^ε ijtf'OC^'S) "«"α^α ό αι^^ιο- 
 λο^ ό ίτολυτα^αχοί: όαλσδ'ο'α• τολυ^Ρ" 5ε μετά οϋτο? ατο^εν V(>ξεJ(,)^ 
 ηχοματ ό ^sfOJv ό βαύι^^ευς Αιτολλων, ό^ έ καλλιχομ&ί γεννάω' 
 Atjtw. (20) Εταχουω' βγυ, Ααμ^Ροτοξο?, Όίίτις Ό Xgytfa* ί'^ίξ- 
 μαχω χαι ό ίειο^ χαι έαυμαιϊτ^ Κιλλχι, χαι ό Τενείο^Ρ Ιί/χυ^νδ .^β- 
 
140 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 C"c:ia»t'A)," 7; fiTfj co-ie tfj >jra#os xai μ»;?ιουοί oCtEov xniw^ τα-,ξ-'^ς 
 r «αϊ αιξ- c;^ro5 ty u i\ri>iui'' sτιflJμI;,αα" Ti/xwfia όιοωμ<*^ 9 Έλλτ;? 
 
 IV. 
 PLATOMS ENARRATIO. 
 
 Γfχoμoι*β ΰ;• ό le|;ji ίχχοααι' fJtiivoc μ£ν ό iiog ΰιϋωμι,* άλ^;νΡ• 
 ι Γ^οια, ο-ί•ο5 ίί iu^u••'^ ό όί dj^ar»;» oC** d.-jjoc^ Xjoj/ ύί^ομΛΐ-'? 
 aTMvov, λαι ό ίίο; αιό-οασ.ι.-'ϊ (5) Totouro? 6i ετω'ε a>rc<:,5 5 μΐν 
 Γ.λλο; ίίίομαι^ χαι ffjvaiv^uj•'* ό δί Αχομΐμνων α^|ια/να!,^ ϊνΓίλ>.9. 
 μαιΡ vgv -ί 5ΐμι,* (10) χαι ajiij μη έπομαι,* μη αντο^ τοτί ίχτ;τ- 
 «•^ον χαι 6 Q ί:(^ <ί::"μμαΡ ουχ ίτα^χ;(,Γ''** -τ^ιν ύε XjuP^^ fljroiS ό ό.» 
 •)αττ,ξ, £ν Af^os φηα» χη^αίχω' μίτο oj• (15) ατίιαι* ύί xt\z-j•^* 
 %fu μτ, Ci'idi^:^}, /να ffu^j οίχαόε ε^^χομαι.'^ Ό όό Tf.fftorjTr-.j axcjc^.•^? 
 ioiJcj-• Tt χαι ατ:Ίμι' ύιγη, οτοχω^εω^? 6' εχ ό ίτΡατο^τεόον, oX.-gP» 
 « ΑίΓολλί^ν' Γϋ5(ομαι,'- (20) ό «τ; ετωνυμιαΡ ό ύίοζ αναχαλεω,ε χαι 
 ίτοαιμ'/ηίχω,'^ χαι affavraw.P ει τι<: «Τιλ/τοτ: τ, εν vacj οΐχβύομηίΤιτ.Ρ η 
 ίν ί:j^;i:t'K ί-^διαΐ'^ Χ'^^ζ'ζ'•^^'^ ucjjtw"'''^ όςΡ ίη χο^ιν χατε•»•^οααι^ 
 πω' ό λ•χ€αος Ό ίς uax|u ό ε%ί\\ι% ββ'Κοζ. 
 
REMARKS 
 
 05 THE 
 
 GREEK dialects; 
 
 I. 
 
 " The Greek language, like every modern one, waa not 
 in ancient times spoken and written in the same manner in 
 all parts of Greece ; but almost every place had its peculi- 
 arities of dialect, both with respect to the use of single let- 
 tors, and of single words, forms of words, inflections and ex- 
 pressions. Of these dialects there are four principal ones, 
 the ^olic, the Doric, the Ionic, and the Auic. Originally,, 
 however, there was but one common language,^ and this 
 was the Doric ; not indeed the Doric of later times, but a 
 language spoken by the Dorians, from Λvhich were derived 
 the ^olic and Ionic varieties, after the colonization of tho 
 coasts of Asia Minor. It was not till the Greeks colonized 
 Asia Minor, that their language began to assume both con- 
 
 ' MatthiiE's Greek Grammar, vol. i. § L ei seqq. (Blomfield's trat»- 
 lation.) 
 
 * " tit omnium Grsecanim urbivim et nation lam origo refcrrnda est ad 
 Thessaliam, Macedoniam, Epiruni, et loca vicina, quoniain qui ra !oce 
 primis temporibus incolebant, ct antoa Γρ«ι»κοί vel ncXavyoi uiccbantur, 
 primum 'EXXr^tf leguntur noininuti fuisse ab Hellene, Deucalionis nlio, 
 qui, ut Deucalion, in Phthiotiile, Thessalia; regione, re£!;naist' traditur ; 
 ei quoniam 'BXXaj fuit urbs atque n^io in Thessalia, cuiii nondum uila 
 aba in t<'rranim orbe nota esset Έλλα? : ita linguuin antiquissuxiara ct pri- 
 mitivam Grsecorum, qu» proprie dicebatur 'Έ,Χληνικη, I'uisse Thcsialorum 
 Mve Macedoiium propriain, sed ab initio, si (juidein cum linfiua Gra:'ft> 
 rum, qualem in libris hodie exstantibus repcrinms, iinpriniis cum Attica 
 comparaveris, valdc horridani et incultain, et barbaram potiua qcain 
 Grajfam, reliquarum tameii Gra^'ia? dialectorum omnium fontfm et origi- 
 nem statuendam esse, non verisiniile modo, «rd pteue certum ert," StVkV- 
 zitu de Dialccto Macedonicu ct Alixand. 5 3. 
 
142 CRKEK KXERCisES. 
 
 «afcncy anJ polish. Tiie lonians uer*? ;ho nrst who cofter.ed 
 its ;u.p«j;ritics, and, by altoniion to euphony, Iriid aside by dt•- 
 grees, the broadne.^.•? and liardlines*, which were retained by 
 lhi;ir .lyjlian neiirhboiirs on Uie one hand, and by the Donans 
 on th<^ other. 'I'he rich soil of Ionia, and the harmonimis 
 icmp'irature of its cliniate, coinbiiUMl with the more proxiniate 
 causes of its vicinity lo Lydia, and iu commercial prosperity, 
 wiJl accottm for tliis cliange of language. It was from the 
 colonieis tlial the motlu r cuuntry first adopted any improve- 
 rucnlt? ill btjr own dialecia."' 
 
 " It .=ocms probable that till the Greek coloni.st.5 in Asia 
 Almor spoke at firui a common languag'e. One of the mo.sl 
 remarkable foixturee in the chanire which originated with 
 th<; Ionian-!, wa^ the «rradual di.-nie of the digarnma. This 
 letter the Dorians laid a,-ide at a later period. The iEolians, 
 on ihc contrary, always rerainetl it; whence its appellation 
 of JEolic. The lir.st change which the inhabitants of Attica 
 iTiad»'., was to modify their old Doric to the more elegarit 
 dinleot of their nclier and more polished colonist.•* ; .^o thar, 
 if we recur to the period of about 1000 years B. C, we may 
 conclude, that the language of Attica was nearly the sanie 
 a.s that in which the Iliad was compo.^fd. Subsequently, 
 howr.ver, as the people of Attica embarkeil in a niore ex- 
 tended commerce, tlie form of tlieir oiaiect was materially 
 altered, and many ciianjes wer^ in'r-jduced Horn foreign 
 id...::ii" 
 
 III. 
 
 " The ."ROLir DI.VI.ECT prevailed on the northern Fide 
 of the Isihinur: of Corinth, (except in .M»\!:aris, Afticu, and 
 Dori-i), as well as in the .Eolic colonics in A.-ia Minor, ami in 
 .«ome nor! hern islands of the iEgaau Sea; anil wa.•? cliiefly 
 cultivated by the lyric poet;; in Lesbti.s, as Alccus and Sappho ; 
 ajid in Birotia, by C'orinna. It retained the most numerous 
 iraecs of the ancient ( Jreek ; hence also the T.iatin coincides 
 more with this than with the other Grefk dialects. It is pe< •ι- 
 iiarlv distir.gni.-iiu'd by n-taining the old digarnma, called from 
 tht* circunir-tanre the A-lolic digcDiuna. Alcacus is considered 
 ΛΛ the model of this dialect." 
 
 IV. 
 
 ■'IV DORIC DIAI,E("T, ?.^ b^ing the Inngxtafire 'V 
 flicn, who wf re most of them originally nioun'.ujneers, vi as 
 
GHEES EXEnCISES. 143 / 
 
 hard, rough, and broad, particularly from the frequmt use 
 of α for η ;ind ω ; as for instance, ά \a6u, τάν xofav, for η ληίη, 
 τΰν xiP-Jiv ; and from the use of two consonants, Avhere the 
 other Greeks employed tlie double consonant ; as for iri,- 
 stance, aS for ζ, as μ,-λκτ^ίται, &c. The Doric tribe was the 
 largest, and the parent of the greatest number of colonies. 
 flence the Doric dialect Avas spoken throughout the Pelo- 
 ponnesus, in the Ihrica Teirapolis, in the Doric colonies of 
 Magna Gra;cia and Sicily, and in Doris in Asia Minor. It 
 is divided by the grammarians into the old and new Doric 
 diiilects. In the old, the comic Λvriter Epicharmus, and 
 Sophron, author of the Mimes, were the principal writers, 
 in the new, which approacherl nearer the softness of the 
 Ionic, Theocritus is the cliief writer. Besides these, the first 
 Pythagorean philosophers wrote Doric, fragments of whose 
 Λvorks are still remaining ; for instance, Tinueus, Archytas, 
 (who is considered as the standard of this dialect,) and Archi- 
 medes. Pindar, Stesichorus, Simonides of Ceos, (who proba- 
 bly, howeve,r, iised the Doric only when he was writing for 
 Doric employers,) and Bacchylides, use in general the Doric 
 dialect, but softened it by an approximation to the others, and 
 to the common one. Many instances of the dialect of the 
 ] jacedfemonians and Megarensians occur in Aristophanes. 
 Besides these, the Doric dialect is found in decrees and treaties 
 in the historians and orators, aiid in Inscriptions. This dialect 
 was spoken in its greatest purity by the Messenians." 
 
 V. 
 
 "The tONIC DlAt.ECf was the softest of all, on 
 account of the freqiient meeting of vowels and the deficiency 
 ot aspirates. Ii was spoken chiefly in the colonies of Asia 
 Minor, and in the islands of the Archipelago. It ivas disided 
 into old and new. In the former Momer and Ilesiod wrote, 
 and it was originally very little, if at all different from the • 
 ancient Attic. The new arose when the lonians began to 
 mix in commerce and send out colonies. The writers in 
 this were Anacreon, Herodotus, and Hippocrates.^ The 
 
 ^ " Tlip studrnt is to attribute to Anacreon only the fragments whieb 
 were collected by F. Ursinufj ;ind a few additional ones ; and not those 
 potniLS wtiich commonly go under LI? name, a few only excepted. Ae 
 Anacreon lived more than 1(*0 years before Herodotus, his dialect wa» 
 probably diflerent. With reupjoct to Herodetu.s•, it is to be observed that 
 Q€ adopted the Ionic for hie lastorj'. lining himself a Dorian, coneequeot- 
 
144 r.KEEK CXEBClSCSv 
 
 prinripal re*idencp of the Ionic tribe in th»• earliest times was 
 Attica. From this Γ'ί^οπ thev -"cnt forth their colohie* to the 
 ehorea of Arfia Minor. Λβ these colonics bepm earlier than 
 the mother country th<: inarch of cultivation an«l refinement. 
 Xlift term?, Ionia, Joniaiis, nnd Ionic, were used by way of errii- 
 nenci•, to ilonote their new settlements, tht-in.selvea, and their 
 dialect, and iiiially were extluiively appropriated to them. 
 The oriirinul lonian.e at home were now called ^iiticif, Alhfnt- 
 ύη.'. and thVir country, laying aside its primitive name of Ionia, 
 look thai uf Attica,''* 
 
 VL 
 
 * Th^ ΛΤΤΤΓ• ηΤΛΤ.ΕΓΤ underwent three chan?ei«. 
 Th»* old Attic was .joarcfly dith.-rtnt from the old loiuc, ad 
 Attica Λν;ι.•ί the original country of the Ionian? ; and hence 
 we find in Homer many form.« of word.-, which were other- 
 wise peculiar to the Attics. In thLs dialect Solon wrote hii 
 laws. Throuirh the proximity of the original lijoXic and 
 Doric in B<voiia and Megaris, the frequent intercourse with 
 the l>jriaiis in Peloponnesus, and with other (ireeks and 
 foreiirn nations, it was gradually intermixed wth words 
 which were not Ionian, and departed farther from the luriic 
 in many re.spects, and jKirticuKirly in using the lonjr α where 
 the lonian.s employed the η, after a vowel, or the letter ^ ; in 
 avoiding the collision of several vowels in two difft-rent 
 words, by contracting them into a diphthong, or long vowel ; 
 in prcfi-rring the consonants with an aspirate, whilst the loiii- 
 aa^ usptl the tfimesi ; 6ic. Thus arose the middle Attic, in 
 which (iorgias of Lcontium was the first who wrote. The 
 writers in this ilialect are, bLsidi\s the one jtist mentioned, 
 'I'hucyilidi•.-!, the trag'tlian.?, Aristophanes, and others. The 
 new Attic is datod from [Vmopthenos and /Eschines, aU 
 th^)U!rh i'lato, Xi'uophon, Aristophan»^, Lysias, anrl Isoorn- 
 tee, have many of its p«'culiaritir.•?. It differed chiefly from 
 the fi)ri>L'"oiiig, in prcfi-rring the softer forms ; for in.-tancf^ 
 the 2d .\or. tfjXXi^fi.c, αταλλα^ίι;, instead of the ancient Attic 
 arxd Ionic, βΊ;λλίχ<)'(<:. a^oKKitybu: ; the double i'^ iutifead of 
 the old ftf, which the old Attic kad in common with tbe 
 
 W tte Μ not a>w.i>« cin-n^trnt in hi» o*acrii, arul prrhap• in more loni* 
 man .1 tmI lonijii ««oulil havo Nni. Hid diuWvt Lt rrrtaijilv Jii!rn>nt 
 fi\>.i» tli.il of Ilijipurralp*." i/ii/miir.'W, UcmatK» en .\J(iit\\a.'* Gr. Gr. 
 p. I X τ liL 
 
 * \ti U-f »^ U IIouKT tbc Attic• nrni ttil] calkxl ko««|. 
 
GREEK EXERClSiaa. 145 
 
 Ionic, Doric, and ^Eolic ; the double ττ instead of the hiis• 
 ing• tfC. They said also, cXsu.aujv, ^ναφευ<:, for ίτνευμων, χναφι-^ζ, 
 and Cjv instead of the old ^υν." 
 
 VII.5 
 
 '• Athens having attained an important political elevation, 
 and exercising a species of general government over Greece, 
 became at the same time the centre of literary improvement. 
 Clieeks from all the tnbes went to Alliens for their educa- 
 lion, and the Attic Avorks became models in every depart- 
 ment of literature. The consequence was, that Avhen Greece 
 ίίοοη after, under the Macedonian monarcW, assumed a po- 
 litical imity, the Attic dialect, having taken rank of the other.?, 
 became the language of the court and of hterature, in which 
 the prose writers of all the tribes, and of whatever region, 
 henceforth almost exclusively wrote. The central point of 
 this later Greek literature, was established under the Ptole- 
 mies at Alexandria in Egypt." , 
 
 VIII. 
 
 '•' With the universality of the Attic dialect, began its de- 
 generacy. Writers introduced peculiarities of their provin- 
 cial dialects ; or in place of anomalies peculiar to the Athe- 
 nians, or of phrases that seemed artificial, made use of the 
 more regular or natural forms ; or instead of a simple phrase, 
 which had become more or less obsolete, introduced a more 
 popular derivative form, as νηχίίόαι for vsiv, io sivim, and 
 αξοτζίαν for α^ουν, to plough. Against this, however, the 
 grammarians often pedantically and unreasonably struggled ; 
 and, in tlieir treatises, placed by the side of these oiFensive 
 or inelegant modernisms, the true forms from the old Attic 
 Avriters. Hence it became usual to imderstand by Jlliic, only 
 that which was found in the ancient classics, and to give to 
 the common language of hterature, formed in the manner 
 indicated, the name of voiv>i, ' the vulgar,' or Ιλληνικη, ' the 
 Greek' i. e. ' the vulgar Greek.' This κοινή διάλεχτο? after all, 
 however, remained essentially Attic, and of course every 
 common Greek grammar assumes the Attic dialect as its 
 basis." 
 
 * Buttmann'6 Greek Gramniar, p. 2. (Everett'3 translation.) 
 Ν 
 
146 CREEK CXi:r.CI3ES. 
 
 IX. 
 
 " To the universality, however, of ihc Attic dialect, an 
 exceplioii was made in poetry. In this departnienl the At- 
 tics n.'inftin•-•'! thf models only in one bmnch, ι he rfra^^ev*. 
 For ih.; other iort.s of {«oetry, Homer and the other elde* 
 Ionic bank, who continued to be read in the school.-;, re- 
 niained the modeb. The Doric diakct, however, even in 
 later days, wa3 not exclnd<;d from poetry ; on the contrary, 
 it austainod itjelf in aomo of the .-jubordinaie branches of the 
 art, pariicnhirly in the pa>torul and humorou?. When, how- 
 ever, the langtiafrc which prevails in the lyrical j)orfions of 
 the drama, that i.-, in the choru^e.^ and pn.-iionate .<peeche^■, 
 ii called Doric, it ii to Ije remembered that the JJ^ricis/H 
 consists in little eL-ii' than the predominance of the lung a 
 frarlicularly in the place of η, wliich wa.s a featiirc of the 
 ancient hmgiiag-e in general, and retained it.self for its digniij' 
 in sublime poetry, while in comnion life u remained ia use 
 oiJy among the LlKjiian.i." 
 
 X." 
 
 " The .Macedoniiin dinlect niu.st be r.-^j^ecially regarded 
 among tlio.sc which were in vurioti.-; degre«s incorporated 
 with the later Grecli. The Macedonian.^ were allied to the 
 Greelcs, and niunbtTed them?elve.-5 wiih the Dorian.-. Tluy 
 introtlucod, a.^ conqneroi», the Cireek cultivation and refim•- 
 ι.ΊοηΙ among the roinpiered barbarians. Here al.-o the Cireek 
 wa.^ spoken and ^\'ritten^ not however Anthout t-omc pecidi- 
 aritics of form, which the grammarians denominateti JMuc-- 
 dininn. A.« Egypt, ;ind its capital city AUxaivIria, becanie 
 the prhicinal s»'at of tlio later (ireek culture, the.se forni.^ 
 Wf>rc comprelimded untler the name of the Akxiindriim ili.i- 
 I'-ct. Tlie native.^ also of the.-e conquered countrie.- began to 
 speak the Oreek (iXXrvi^fiv). and Mich aii.A.-iatic Greek wa.i 
 denominated ίλληνί'Ττη!:. Hence the .style of the writers of 
 this cla.s.=«, with which were incorporated many form.s not 
 Greek, and many oriental turns of expre.>»sion, was di'noini- 
 n.ileil IIcllriHStir. It need .scarcely b»• observed, that tbit 
 dialect is contained in the Jewish and Christian jnonutht>nin 
 of tha^e times, especially in the S<^ptuagint ami in the New 
 Teaiament, wln-nce it pns.sed mor-r or less into tin• works of 
 the Father.-). iVew liarbarisms of everv kind were intrmlucfd 
 
 ' Petton'• trinilttion of Huttmnnn'e ncrount of tho Cin-^k DUWctik 
 «fpoixlcd to TUiciv-h'i Urcek laWis.» Sote V2 
 
CREKK kxehcises. 147 
 
 durini!; the middle ag-cs, when Coiiitiiiuinoplo, the ancient 
 liyzanliuin, became the seal of the Greek empire and cemre 
 of literary rultivalion, Ont of this arose, the dialect of ilw 
 Byzantine writers, and finally, the yet living language of the 
 modern Greeks." 
 
 EXERCISES OX THE DIALECTS 
 
 MOIAO GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 
 
 SAPPHONIS FRAGMENTA. 
 I. 
 
 ΠοιχιΧοφΡον, αίανατ' Αφ^οίίτα, 
 Παι Λιοί: ooXocrXoxc, λκίσΌμα» τε 
 1\Ιη μ' «tfaitfij μη5' oviaitfi ύαμνα, 
 
 Ποτν;α, όυμον 
 Αλλα rui(5' εν9', α» -rora χατε^ωτα 
 Τα? εμα^ αιιία^ αϊοκΓα -τολλα^ 
 E'<^'je?, "ττατξοζ τε δομον XcnOicCa 
 
 Χρυίεον, r/voe?, 
 Α^μ' υ'Τοίόίίιχο'αο'α• χαλοι όε r' α^'ον 
 
 Πυκνά δίνε•ο\ιτεζ ττε^' α-π-' w^avw ίε- 
 
 .Pi-jj Ota [i.t(S<Su, 
 Αιτία 6' εχτΊχον-Γο• τιι ο', cj μάχαιρα, 
 
 H^cj oTTi τ' vjv, TO τετΓονία, xw-m 
 Δη Te χαλημ», 
 
 ■ί The rcadhigs here followe»], are those given in the " Cambridgt 
 Classical /icf-earthcii," vol. i. p. 3. et tc/^•. 
 
146 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 JNIajvoXa 6:μ-'^: — Tivoj αυ τυ τίιίί» 
 Ma-rj (Τα^ην^υία? f iXocara ; T15 τ', CJ 
 
 Σα*φ', αίιχηη j 
 Και γαξ αι 9-^7^' ''"'Χ-^» ^'t..|s', 
 Λι Js όω^ μ»5 ^''χ}'^\ α/.λα owtfe», 
 Λι 0£ μη p(>.£i, ταχίωί ςιι>.αίίΐ 
 
 KoJx ε^ςλοιίαν. 
 Evie μοι χαι νυν, χαλϊιταν τε λυΟΌν 
 Εχ μ.-ριμνάν otfcTa ό' εμοι τελειίόαι 
 Θϋμο5 ιμε^τί:', τελείον, tu ϋ' α.τα 
 
 Συμμα;^05 Stftfo. 
 
 το VENUS. 
 
 ο arlful-miixled, immortal Venus, \vi]y daughter of Jove, 
 do not, I entreat thee, Ο revered one, subchie me wiih trouble.-:, 
 jior my spirit with woes. But come hither, if ever even befor•• 
 I hi.'', hearing my earnest supplicationp, thou g-avcst an a.ssfni 
 to my prayer, and having• left the golden home of thy father, 
 came, having harnessed thy car : while thy beautiful sv.ifi 
 .«parrows mo\ing their rapid pinions, bore thee along from 
 heaven over the black earth amid the blaze of noon. Uuick- 
 ly they came ; but thou, Ο blessed one, having smiled with 
 thy heavenly countenance, inquired what it was that 1 suffer- 
 ed, and \vhy I now call thee, and what in particular 1 wish to 
 happen to my raging breast — whose love do you aeain fruit- 
 lessly seek to ensnare by your persuasive art, who, Sappho, 
 .«lights you 1 For if now he even flee, soon will he pursue ; 
 and if now he receive not gifts, 3'et will he soon bestow them ; 
 and if now ho love not, soon \\i\\ he love thee, even though 
 unwilling to make a return. — Come thou unto me now also, 
 and free mc from cruel cares ; and do thou accomplisli for me 
 whatsoever tilings my bosom dcsiies to be accomplished, and 
 be thyself my ally. 
 
•REEK EXERClSEe. 149 
 
 U. 
 
 E*5 Ε^ωμεναν.* 
 
 Φαίνεται μοι χηνο^ κίος iioitftv 
 Εμμ-εν' ανη^, ottij ενάντιος «rot 
 Itfiovei, χαι τλασΊον άίυ φωνο»- 
 
 Και γίΧ^ααζ ιμε^οεν. Το μοι 'μαν 
 Κα^ΰίαν εν tfraostfiv ί-τττοασΊΓν• 
 
 OjCiSV £τ' (Χ£|• 
 
 Αλλα χαμαεν ^λωδ'Α'α FiFays, λείΤτον ι 
 Αυτιχα. χ^ω *υ^ υ*οδ35^ομαχΓν, 
 ΟττατεοΊίι (5' ουΰεν ο^ημι, ]6ομ§ίυ- 
 
 rfiv ί' αχοαι μοι. 
 Καΰέ' »δ|ωί: '^τύυχξος χεεται, τ^ομο$ (5s 
 Tlatfcv αγρετ -χΧοίξοτίξα δε νοιας 
 Εμμ»• νίδναχψ δ' ί^ιγω ν»(5£υ<Γην 
 
 Φκινομκι acrvo-jg. 
 
 ΤΟ Α BELOVED ΟΝΕ. 
 
 That man seems to me to be equal with the god?, whe 
 ύΐα facing thee, and in deep silence liears thee sweetly speak- 
 ing, and laughing in love-inspiring accents. This always 
 causes my heart to tlirob in my bosom, for when I behold 
 thee, in an instant no portion of my voice any longer comes : 
 but my tongue falters, a subtile fire immediately runs be- 
 neath my skin, I see nothing with my eyes, my ears tingle, 
 fi cold sweat pours down, a trembling seizes my whole frame, 
 I become paler than the grass, and, breathless, eeem to want 
 but little of death. 
 
 • In thia ode, the readinge given in the " Cambridge Clasfical Re- 
 tearche»," voL i. p. 7, are principally followed. A few are a^pt«d frWBk 
 Wei*ke's edition of Longinue. __ ^• " * , 
 
 N5 
 
150 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 DORIC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 
 
 L 
 
 CORINNiE FRAGMENTUM. 
 
 Ex ApoUonia Dyscolo. 
 
 Μίμ-φο/ΧΛΐ ιων^α rav Xij'oi/^av Mu^iia, In βάνα φοχ,ύα stx 
 Ώηδαξαιο 'JTct' ί^ιν. 
 
 " I blame the melodious MjTtii!, because, being a womai\ 
 she engaged in a contest with Pindar." 
 
 II. 
 
 LACONUM LEGATUS. 
 .Ex ArUtophanis Li/sistrata, v. 1-^47 — 12T2, ed. Brunfk. 
 
 Tug χυ^ίανιω?, u ΛίναμοΛνα, 
 Ταν τ' £μα« μωαν, άτκ 
 Οιδεν αμμ?, τω^ τ' ΑίΤαναιωδ* 
 Όχα τοι μεν ετ' Α^ταμιτί'^ 
 
 ΙΙοττα χάλΛ, ΐΓω<: Mr.iujf ς•' tvixwv' 
 Αμΐ δ' αυ A:wvi(5a5 
 Aj εν, άτεξ TW5 χαιτ^ω? 
 Ga^ovras «"ον oJovra. IToXuj d* 
 Λμφι τας jsvjag «9^05 rvcTii, 
 rioXvj ί' άμα 
 Και χαττων ίχελων ιετο. 
 Ην ^α^ 7ψ\,δξίζ OJX ελαί'α'ως 
 Taj ψαμμαί, τοι iri^ifai. 
 Α^^οτε»' Λξτα.μ» CT;;Oxrov?, 
 Μολβ ίϊυ^ο, Ίτα^ο'ενί rfia, 
 Ποττο5 C'Tiiviaf, uj 
 ^•■ε-χρς *ολυν ομμ? χ^ονον• 
 Λ\ν J' αυ 
 
GR£EK EXEnCISES. l5i 
 
 Ταις Λν^ηχαι^• 
 
 Και τάν αιμυλαν aXufoxuv 
 
 Παυ(ίαιμ5<3'. Ω 
 
 Λευξ" ιό», isuf', ω 
 
 Κιινα^ε "ffaPcTsv?, 
 
 Arouse these youths, Ο Mnemosyne, and my muse, 
 Λv•hich knows us and the Athenians ; Λvhen the latter at Arte- 
 misium, like gods made an attack upon the vessels of the 
 foe, and vanquished the Medes ; while on the other hand, 
 Leonidas led us whetting• the tusk like wild boars. Much 
 foam frothed around our mouths, and much at the same 
 time flowed down even to our legs. For our opponents the 
 Persians were not fewer in number than the sand. Ο Diana, 
 who presides! over the groves, destroj^er of savage beasts, 
 come hither, virgin goddess, to our league, in order that 
 thou maj'est unite us . long in friendship : now again let there 
 always be unbroken amity to our agreements, and may we 
 cease without delay from the craft of foxes. Ο come liilher, 
 come, Ο virgin huntress. 
 
 III. 
 
 CHORUS LACONUM. 
 Ex Aristophanis LysUiraia, v. 1297—1323. 
 
 Ταϋγετον αιιτ' ε^αννίιν εχλι*ωα Μωα 
 
 Μόλε Αακαινα, ^ξεντ^ν ά/χιν 
 
 Κλεωα τον ΑμυχΚαις σΊον, 
 
 Και χαλχιοικου Atfavav, 
 
 Ύννδαξιδας τ' ayadug, 
 
 Το/ δι] Ίίαξ' Ευ^ωταν ψιαίίοντι. 
 
 Εια μαλ' εμξγι, ~\ 
 
 Ωϊα χουφα τταλλων, 
 
 *Ω.ς ΣιΤαξταν ύμ,νιοψεί, 
 
 Τα tficjw χοξοι μελοντι, 
 
 Και "Τοίων χτυ<κΌζ' 
 
 'Ατε *ωλοι 5' αϊ χο^αι 
 
 Πα^' τον Ευ^ωταν 
 
 Αμίταλλοντι ίτυκνα τοδοιν 
 
 Ε^χονιωίΤαΓ 
 Tcu 6s χομαι tfeiovo', ά^ίξ Βαχχα» 
 
152 CREEK tXZRCiSEi, 
 
 Άγτ,ται ό' ά Λτβας vaij 
 
 Αλλ' ay e, xooiiv τα^αμΤνΧΐίόε Γβ 
 
 Ά Tif i>jx.t05• xjOrc» d' άμα tcu 
 
 Kat rci» ίιάν ο' αυ τα)» xrantfrav 
 Χαλ.χίοιχον CfivE»! 
 Ταν '!Γα}Χ|χαχον. 
 
 Come again, Ο Laconian muee, having left lovely Tay- 
 goius, celebiaiing fur us tlie revernd iroil of Amycla', and the 
 Chalcicccan Miner\a, and ihe vulianl sons of 'lyndarus, \v\>o 
 f:j>ori along the Eiiroias. Coine, eiiter with ppint upon the 
 task, shaking the liglu borders of tliy garment, ihal we may 
 suiir the praisee of Sparta, to which llie choirs of the gods 
 are a care, and the noise of feel : since the damsels, hke 
 young colts, leap up along the Euroias, liastening oitwarde 
 with the frciiuenl beating of their feet. Their tresses stream 
 in .the air, hke those of female Bacchanalians, wielding the 
 thyrsis and sponing. The chaste daughter of Leda leads the 
 way, the beatiieous leader of the band. Bui come, with thy 
 hand contine thy hair under a fillet, and leap with thy feet, 
 leap like a stag ; and make at the same time a loud clapping 
 serviceable to the chorus, and celebrate again in song the 
 Chalcia:can, the most powerful of tile goddeoees, who con- 
 iciidi with every foe. 
 
GEEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 153 
 
 m. 
 
 SPARTANORUMiDECRETUM CONTRA TIMOTHEUM," 
 Cum Salmasii Versione. 
 
 DECRETUM. 
 
 ιταραγηο(ΐε\οξ ετταν ά^ετί^αν 
 coXiv, ταν "π-αλαιαν μωαν κτι- 
 (καΰογι, χαι ταν Λα ταν έ•7Ττα 
 χορίαν χκϊαξίξιν αιίο(ίτξεφομε• 
 νοξ ιτολυφωνιαν H(fuyuv λυμ,αι- 
 VHTKI τα^ αχοα^ των vscjv, ίια 
 TS τα^ "Π-ολυχο^δια? και τα^ και- 
 νοτατορ TW μελβο^ α^εννεα κα» 
 τοικιΧαν ανη άτλαρ xaj τε- 
 ία^μεναρ αμφιεννυται ταν μωαν, 
 «7•» χρώματος (Τυνισ'ταμίνο^ ταν 
 TCO μεΚεοξ βιεσΊν αντί ταρ εναρ- 
 μινιω ίΤοτταν αντκίτ^οφον αμοι- 
 €αν, 'iragcoikrjSsig Ss χαι εττον 
 ο,γωνα ταξ ΕλευυΊνια^ Δαμα- 
 TPC5 αιτ^ίτεα (^ιαίκ/ατο ταν τω 
 μικίω διαίίχευα.ν, ταξ ταξ Σεμε- 
 "Καξ ωδιναξ ουχ ενΰιχα τω^ ν£ω^ 
 Οίδαχχ-ή, δεδοχύαι φαν τερί 
 ■τούτων τω^ βαύϊΚεαξ τωξ Εφο- 
 ξωξ μεμψασ'ίΤ'αι Τιμοσεον, ε-ϊτα- 
 vayxarfai δε χμ ταν ενδεχα χο^- 
 όαν εκταμοντα τα^ •π'ίξιτταξ 
 ύτολι^ην μβνον τα^ ε'π'τη, οΊίωξ 
 εχαΰτοξ το τα^ -ττολιο^ β'^ξ^ξ 
 Ipuv ευλ᧕ηται ετταν Σ-ττα^ταν 
 είτιφβρην τί των ηδων μη νοτταξ 
 αξάταξ χΧεοξ αγοψτων. 
 
 SALHASII VERSIO. 
 
 Εΐτειϋη ΤιμοόεοίΤ 5 ΜιληοΊος 
 *α^α^ινομενο5 ει? την τ,μετεξαν 
 *ολιν, την τταλαιαν μοί/ίίαν ατι- 
 μαι^ει, και την (Jia των είττα 
 χο^όω-ν xioafirfiv ο.*ο(ί7ξεφί•Χί- 
 νος «τολυφωνιαν εκίαγων λυμαί- 
 νεται τα5 αχοα^ των νέων, οία 
 τε τη5 ffoXuyoPOiaff και της χαι- 
 νοτητοί του μελ&υ? κ^εννη και 
 "Γοικιλην αντι άίτλη^ χαι τε- 
 ro:γιJ-εvriς αμςιεννυται την μουίΤαν, 
 ειτ) γ^^ωΐ)Μτι>ς ΟΊινκίταμενο^ την 
 του μίλου? (5iiCiv αντί τη5 ενα^- 
 μονιου ίΤ^ο^ την αντιίτ^οφον άμοι- 
 ρη», «ταΓ-αχληόει^ δε χαι εις τον 
 σ.γω\α τν,ς Ελευύινιας Δημη- 
 τ^ος α.ττ'ξε-^Ύ] (5ιαεΐ(7'ατο την του 
 μυί)ιυ (5ια^κευην^ ταί τηδ Σεμε- 
 "Κτ,ς ωδιναίτ ουκ sv^jxa του^ νεουί 
 διδαϋχζι, ίείοχόαι έφαγαν τερι 
 τούτων του^ /βαοΊλεα^ του$ Ε^ο. 
 ^oug μεμψαίΤόαι Τιμοόεον, εττα- 
 να^καί^αι δε χαι των ένδεκα χο^. 
 δων εκταμοντα τα^ ΐΐεζιτιας 
 xi'Ko'ki'itsiM μόνον Tag Ι•*τα, οιτωΐ 
 εχο.(ί7ος το τη^ τολεω^ βαξος 
 άξων ευλα§ηται ει? την Στα^την 
 ειτιφε^ειν τι των ηίων μη 'π'ξος τγις 
 α^ετηί κλεοί αγόντων. 
 
 ^ This decree has come down to us in Boethius, "de 3Tusica," 1. 1. p. 
 1372, ed. Basil. 1570, fol. It is given in the notes to Scaliffer's edition of 
 Manilius ; in Casaubon's Comments on Athenaens, (8. p. 332. a ;) and in 
 Salmasius, " de HcUenistica." It is licrc prrsentpti lo the student, not as 
 an exercise, but as a species of classical curiosity. It fiirr.irhes a «tronrf 
 |>Γθθζ if such indeed were wanting, of the attachment of the ancient 
 
]54 OREPK CXERClSEa, 
 
 J'.'MC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC 
 
 L 
 
 Ex Herodoli HUtorid. 
 CLIO. c. ITS, 17?. 
 
 Tla'uXuiv \si-at εν -sioif) με^αλν, μ'.γα^; tojiCa μ£r:Jcov ίχαβ". 
 r'jv, Eixotfi wii ixarov (Τ-ταοκ-ιν, eojCr? τίτρα^^ονου• ο^τοι (ΓταΟι&ί CTig 
 Tfiioo'/j τη; τολιο? ^ινονί-αι gj-mravrs; O/OWkovra χαι i-£riaxo(r»oi. 
 To μ?ν vjv μίνα(3ο5 τοβΌυτον stfri του atfTjo.c του Βαονλ.ωνιου. Ext- 
 χοΤμητο OS oos ουόεν άλλο ιτολι-Τμα twv raiic ιόμ*^' «"«φ^β; μίν t^w- 
 Trt αιν βαίεα τϊ χαι ί-^εα χαι τλεη ΰοατο? ιτε^ιόίει• μ;τα όε, τειχοδ 
 τεν-ηχονς-α μεν irr;;;(£u)v βαΟΊλτ/ίων άον 70 Svjof, ύψο; ϋε 6»>ιχο(ί»ων 
 "τηχίων. Ό όε ,βασιληΐο; ΐΓτ;χυί: του μέτρου είη ιτ/,χε&ί με^^ων 
 ΤΡίί» όαχτυλοιΟΊ. Δ5» (5ri μί r^oi -ouroiCi β-τίφΡαίαι, ίνα τε εχ rrg 
 TrtjjO'j ή γτ, αναι-ΤκΑω^η, χα» το Ttt^sg Ιντινα τ;οιτον s^yrjj^ro. OpuC- 
 C'.iTtc άυ^ την ταφ'ον, ?τλ(Τί>Γν5ν Τ^ν γη" '''ψ i* '"OV c?;i-, ματο^ 
 ίχφίίομίνην 'λχυο'βτντί; is «rXiviou?: \χΜ(ί4, ωνττ-ο'αν ftu-fa^ ίν χ«μ(. 
 νοιβΤ μετά ί=, τελματι χ?soJμ£voι α^φαλτ^; ^i^^rj, χαι ίια τ^ιν^χοντα 
 ίομων τ-λινίου ταΡΟΌυίΤ χαλαμω» iSia'ircxoa^ows.r, εύειμαν vfuita μβ» 
 ί•ι:•5 τοφοου τα χειλεα" άευτε^α δε αυτό το Tii^rj τον αυτόν τΡΟίτον. 
 
 Β ibvlon lies in a larsre plain, and is in size oach u'ay a 
 huniiie i and twenty Rliidia, being a ?q :aro. These stadia of 
 The city'i circuit amount in all to four hundred and «-ight}•. 
 So ereat then is the sine of the Ribvlonian city. It was 
 embollishod iiioreover, sncb ais no other rity of those Λνίναΐι 
 ■wr know. III the fiv.-it phue, a iliirh Muoinpa=ses it, deep 
 Willi hroad, anil full of water ; next, a wall, which ii in l)re;^d;h 
 lifly royal culniis, Hiid in heiirht two hundred cubit.-!. The 
 royal cubit is greater than the coinnion one by ihre.e dii;-ii?. 
 I uUirhi, in adihiinn to these parlicular.-, to tiicntion, to wliat 
 use the earth from the ditch wa.-= applied, ami in what way 
 the wall w.ii built. Λΐ the .«aine time tlial thev were (ΙϊίΤίΐίι•? 
 
 Fpartuns to the f {canin» littern.) Tlic ^ColoTViric triSw wore nil lOinl 
 of tUo UiW of tliis K-Uor, nml sii.l ΐττοβ, vop, cop, \r. lor ir-ro>, toij, Otof. 
 So ;.Uo re,)) for »en, wlwui-f ilie L;itiii purr. I'hi• iloiil'lr Ι,ιιΐιη ι«•πιΓιηΜ• 
 lioti in «r und c, »h ΊυτινΓ, ,Ηοπο,» ; liihor, /,»,'•.->(. ; ma) thus Ix? *as»Iy tkO 
 CiunUxi §ar. Htc foruirr is tin• iiH>n• aiwHUl iofui. 
 
CREEK EXERCrSES. 155 
 
 the ditch, they formed into liricks the t^arth which was brong-ht 
 out of the excavation. AVhen they had a tMghed a sufficient 
 number of bricks, they baked them in furnaces. After this, 
 usiui^ for cement heated bitumen, and between every thirtieth 
 course of brick placing a frame-work of reeds, they first built 
 ttie sides of tlie ditch, and next, the wall itself in the same 
 Way. 
 
 II. 
 
 t\x cadem. 
 EUTERPE, c. 28. 
 
 Ταύτα μίν vuv fifTW w^ Siii is 5cat ug ^ξχχ^ ζγίνίτο. Του δ? 
 ΓΝϊΐλου ταζ "nr^yixg ουτί Κ\γνντι•^ν, O'jtc AiSuiJv, ούτε Έλλ•>;νο;ν 
 TWV εμοι αττικομίνων ζζ λο^οικΓ, ουίει^ ύιτείχετο εκϊενα), ο μη εν 
 AiyuirriJ εν Σαϊ 'ττολι ό γξαιχμ.ν.τκίττ,ς των Ι^ων ρ^^ηματων τ-ι;^ Αΐ'η- 
 ναι/;?. OUToff (5' εμοι ^ε ται^ειν εύοκεε, φαμενο^ ειόεναι ατξΒχίωζ. 
 Ελε^ε (5έ ώδί. " Είναι ίυο ου^εα ες οξυ τα^ χοξυφας ατι^μενα, 
 με•.•α|υ Συ^ινη^ τί ■π'ολιοί χειμενα 7τ,ς ΘηβαϊϋοίΤ, χαι Ελεφαντιν»)$• 
 6(^νοματα '5ε εινα; τοίοΊ ηυ^εοΊ, tw μεν, Κ^ως^ι, tw όε, Μωφι. Ύαζ 
 UV όη ιΐι\γας του Νείλου, εουίώ^ αβυδΌΌυ?, εχ του μεοΌυ των ou^fwv 
 toutJojv is£iv• xc /,ί το μεν ήμιο'υ του νδσ/τος, Sir' Αι^υττου |εειν χα» 
 νξος βο»ίι\\ ανεμον το 5' έτερον γ,μ.κϊυ, ε*< Αιόιοσιη^ τε χαι νότου. 
 'Γ25 (3ε abjCoOi ειΛ α! ίΤντ^αι, eg ύια'ττει^αν εφγ, τούτου Υαμμιτιχον 
 Αι^υττου ^ασΊλεα α-ίΤίχε'Τ'όαι. Πολλεων yae αυτόν χιλιάδων οξ. 
 ^υιεων -τλεξαμενον χαλον, κατεινα» ravTj], χα» ουχ εξικεί^αι ε^ βνα- 
 tfov. 
 
 ι» 
 
 Be these thing.? then both as they are, and as they have 
 been from the beginning. But of the sources of the Nile, 
 no one either of _the Egyptians, or Libyans, or Greeks, who 
 conversed with me, professeil to have any knowledge, except 
 in Egvpt, in the city of 8ais, the scrik^ of the sacred treasures 
 of Min('r\-a. 'I'his person apj>eare<l to me indeed to be jest- 
 ing, when he declared that he was very well acquainted Avith 
 them. He expressed hiiuself moreover in the following man- 
 ner : — ' That there are two mountains, whose summits termi- 
 nate respectively in a pharp point, situate between S\"ene, a 
 citv of Thebai?, and Elephantine ; and that these mountains 
 are named, the one Crophi, the οίΙκ^Γ Mophi. That ttie 
 sources of the Nile then, which are of unfathomable depth, 
 flow from bfclween these mountains ; and that one half of Um 
 
156 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 water runs tov/nrds Egypt, and in a northern direction, and 
 the other half lowarjs Ethiopia and the fouth.' Bui to show 
 tljat its sourci-s weic unfelhomablo, he stated, that Psanuniii- 
 chiis, king• of Eyypr, had aicertaintd this by actual trial : for 
 lliat, having causi-d a rope of niany tliousand falhoins to be 
 made, he lei it down in this place, and did not reach bottom. 
 
 111. 
 
 Ex cudem. 
 
 EUTERPE, c. lis, Ua.' 
 
 E»po/a6vcj δ: μίυ tojj IgSaf, ει μ«ταιον Xeyov λί^ουβΊ ol EXXij- 
 vij τα irept IXicv γε\ΐΰδαι, *) ου, ίφαίΤαν τξος ταύτα ταδ-, Ίδτο. 
 fl>j^i φαμενοι ίιδίναι *«»' αυτού Μενβλίω. EXdeiv μεν γαξ, μετσ. 
 <rr,\t Έλίνη5 αξ<αγτ,ν, ες Try ΤευκΡίία ^ην 'Ελλήνων ύτοατιψ ίΤο>.- 
 λ*;ν, /SorjOsuffav Μ£νίλΕ0ϋ• SXcatfav δε ες yry χα» ί^Ρυόειίαν την 
 Cr^aTuiv, ίΓέμ*όΐΟ ες το Ιλιον κ^^ελουί:• ίυν ίε (Γφι ιίναι και αυτόν 
 Μίνδλ.βων• τους ό' rirei τε είίελόίιν ες το τειχο?, αταιτε^ιν Έλεντ^ν 
 τε χα ι τα χρήματα τα ο» οιχετο χλεψα? Αλεξανό^οί, των τε αίιχη- 
 ματων δ^xa.ς αιτεειν του; (5ε ΤευχΡου; τον αυτόν λο^'ον λέγειν τότε 
 χαι μετϊτειτα, χαι ομνοντα; χαι ανωμοτι, μη μεν εχειν Έλεν7;ν, 
 μηόε τα ειτιχαλευμενα χρήματα, αλλ' είναι αυτά νταντά εν Αι^η^τ- 
 Tij• χαι ουχ αν oixaiwf αυτοί Jixa^ ΰ•η'εχίιν, ά ΥΙζωτΐυς h AiyuifTiocr 
 βαΰιΚεχις έχει. Ο) ίε Έλληνες χατα^ ελοί^αι ίοχεοντε; υ^*' αυ- 
 τών, ούτω δη είΓολιορχίον, ε; ό εξειλον. ΈλουοΊ δε το τειχο; ώ; ουχ 
 εψαινότο ή Έλενη, άλλα τον αυτόν λο^ον τω «τ^οτερω ετυνόανοντο, 
 ούτω ί5τι «■lO'TrjCavTfs τω λο^ω τω ν^ωτω ο! Έλληνε; αυτόν Μένε. 
 λτων α-ίτοίτΕλλουίι ταΡα Π^ωτεα, Α'ίΐΊχομενο? δε ό Μενελεωί f? ''ΐ•;*' 
 Λι^υ^ττον, χαι ονατλωΰ'α; ε; ττ,ν Μεμςιιν, ει^α? ττ,ς αλ•>;(?τ;ϊτ;ν ταν 
 ΐΓΡη^ματων, χαι ξΓ;ιων ηντηίε μ:J'αλ(,Jv, χαι Έλεντ;ν acaofa χαχων 
 ατελαβ'ε• c^oj 5ί χαι τα ί'ωϋτου χρήματα. 
 
 Upon my nskinfuf the priest.^, Nvhcthcr the Greeks relate 
 an idle talc rc^^pectinp• the occnrroiicc? at Troy, or not ; they, 
 in na^wcr to these thing•.^, nienlionod the ft)llo\ving- particulars, 
 havinp: assured me that tht^v had learnt them by actual in- 
 quiry fiom Men»Iaus him.';eir. Tiiat after tlie abduction of 
 Helen, κ numerous army of (treoks came to the Trojan land, 
 10 ns.ej.'it Mriielnus. That when the army had disembarked 
 and pitched their camp, they sent ambassadors to Troy, and 
 
εΚΕΕΚ EXERCISES. Ί57 
 
 that along \nth them went Menelaus himself. That these, 
 when they entered within the Avails, demanded back Helen, 
 and the wealth which Paris had stolen along; with her person ; 
 and also claimed satisfaction for the injuries inflicted. That 
 the Trojans, ΙιολνοΛΤΓ, made the same statement then which 
 tiiev afterwards did both under oath and not, that they had 
 not Helen, nor the wealth which was made the subject of 
 accusation, but that these were all in Egj-pt, and that it was 
 not just for them to render satisfaction for things which Pro- 
 teus the Egyptian king had. But the Greeks thinking that 
 they we:e trifled with by them, for this reason laid siege to 
 the cit}', until they took it. When, however, Helen did not 
 make her appearance on their ha-\-ing taken the city, but they 
 received the same statement as the former one in ans\ver to 
 their inquiries, upon this then the Greeks credited the assertion 
 first made, and send Menelaus himself to Proteus. And 
 when Menelaus had arrived in Egypt, and had sailed up to 
 INIernphis, having stated the true circmiistances of the case, 
 he both received splendid gifts of hospitality, and obtained 
 Helen back uninjured. 
 
 IV. 
 
 Ex eadem, 
 CLIO. c. 36. 
 
 Ev δ: ΐω 0MT(fj χ^ονω τούτω, εν tu ΜυοΊω Ουλυμ.'Κ'ω, (fucg χ^νι,αα 
 ■/ινΐται μΐγα' οξμζωμζνος Si ούτος εκ του ou^soj τοντου, τα twj Μυ- 
 (fuv εξγα διαφ&εΐξε(ίχε. Πολλαχι δε ο\ ΜυοΌ; ειτ' αυτού εξεΧβο'ηες, 
 Toiritfxov μΐν ουδίν κακόν, εταί^ζον δε <τίξος αυτού. ΎεΧοζ δε, αιτι- 
 χομ,ίνοι 7Γα»α τον KPoitfov των MucOiv αγγεΧοι, εΧεγον τάδε• " Ω 
 /oaCiXcu, υος γξ'ήμα μεγ{<ίτον ανεφανη γ,μιν εν τ'ρ χ^ξ^ι•, ος τα εξγα 
 όιαφόε(?ε<• τούτον Ίΐ'Ρού-ομ.εομενοι έλεειν, ου δυναμε6α• νυν ων ffjorf- 
 βϊομεία ΰεο, τον ναιδα \a\ Χογαδας νεψιας και χυνας ο'υμ'ττεμψαι 
 ij,ajv, ώ? αν μιν εξελςομεν εκ της X^Jf^S•" Ο' Μ•^" ^>) τούτων εδεον. 
 το. Κξοΐ(ΐος δε μνημ,ονευων του ονείρου τα ε'π'εα, εΧεγε (ίφι τάδε, 
 " Τίαιδος μεν ητεξί του εμ,ου μτη μνΎ\(}6'ήτε ετΓ ου γα^ αν νμιν ίυμ• 
 «ίτε,αψαι,αι• νεογαμος τε γα^ ε({η, κα» ταύτα ci νυν μέλει, \υδuτJ, 
 μεντοι, Χογαδας και το χυνη^εαΊον ιταν (ΐ'υμ'π'εμψω• και 5ιαχελευσΌμα« 
 τοιΟΊ ιουδΊ, είναι ύς τί^οίυμοτατοιΟΊ σ'υνεξελειν νμιν το θ-ηξίον εκ τη5 
 χω^η»•" Ταύτα αμειψατο. 
 
 At this same time, there is a large monster of a boar ia 
 the Mysian Olympus, and this boar rushing from this moun- 
 
 O 
 
i5S GBEEK EXEnClSES. 
 
 fam, \va3 accu.stouici lo deoiroy the agricul m'al labours of 
 the Mysians. The iMysians, alilwugh they cfien went forth 
 agaiiiHt him, did hi:.• no uijur\', but eufTered from hitn. Ai 
 I.;u9t, however, mes-cngers of ilic ^lysians came to Crcisue, 
 and siiid these thiug^s. " Ο king, a very large iiiODSler of a 
 boar 13 in the halit uf appearing m our country, which de- 
 stroys our labours. Although ile.=irou.s of takini: this boar 
 v.c are not able to do so. Now then, we request of thee, i.i 
 addition to other favours, to send thy son, and chosen young 
 men, and dogs, along with us, that we may dri\e hirn out ol' 
 the country." Tiiey liien made this request. Crasus, how- 
 ever, remembering the words of the dream, spoke thus to 
 them : " Do not make mention an}• longtr respocting niy son, 
 for he is both newly marrieii, and these iluug^s nov/ occiqiy hi3 
 attention. I will send chosen young men however, and dog-, 
 and every thing "bt-donging to the hunt ; and I will order thosB 
 Avho go, to be as acli\e iis possiblt; in aiding to drive the wild 
 btast out of your co'intry." Tlius he aiisv.ered. 
 
EXERCISES IN PROSODY. 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE REDUCED TO PROSAIC 
 ORDER, TO BE RETURNED INTO METRE.' 
 
 HEXAMETERS. 
 
 Ev αΐν sTi'jf ya;av, ev υ' cu^avov, εν 5b βα.\αί(ίαν, 
 (s) Αδάμαντα τ' rsXiiv, crX^iostfav tj (ίόληνην. 
 
 Εν 6s ταντα τα tbipco. ~ά sypavoj τ' είτεφανωτοί, 
 (s) ΠληΤα^α^ δ\ 'Taias τε, το rfiJsvoj r= Ω^ιωνο^, 
 
 Α^Ητον ό', Tjy χα» ίϊικληίιν καλίου ίιν αμαξαν, 
 
 Ή τ' (ίτ^ίφεται αυ-ου, χαι JoxJusi τ' Q^iwva* 
 
 0;η 'J' ΐίτι αμμοΐ^ί Ωκίανοιο λοετΡο;ν. 
 
 la it lis formed the earth, and the sky, and the sea, the 
 unwearied sun, and the full moony in it also, all the con- 
 stellation?, Vv'iih v.'hich the heaven is crowned, the Pleiades, 
 the Hyade?, and the strength of Orion, and the Bear, which 
 they likewise call by the appellation of the AVain. \vhich is 
 there turned rcmd, and watches Orion ; and it alone is de- 
 prived of ths baths of Oceanus. 
 
 Ev (5' ίπίΐι αλωην μϊγα βη&^ιία,Ί iTa^v'Kjidt, 
 Καλην, )^fjii5ir,v• βοτξ^Ες ο' μ.ίΚωί^ς rj(iav ανα• 
 
 ' The student will observe, that each line is separately reduced to pro- 
 saic orJer, and must be separately returned into metre. — Those lines wnicb 
 arc oiurked thus (s), axe spondaic ' •»• 
 
160 CREEK EXEHCISES. 
 
 Αμ;ι ii, «XatfCs χατ£τον kjav?y;v, τΐξΐ 6' }p«4 
 Kaffffifi^&w μια d' ara^ciro; η/ν οιη Ξτ' ανττ,ν, 
 Ύη φ'ί'τ,ΐς Midg'jvzo, or? αλωην T^uyouEw 
 Ilodivixai r)i χαι ηΐ3:οι, gjpoviovrsj αταλα, 
 <I'£*ov u.tXiro:a xa;>-rov fv r/.exco/i ταλα^οιΛ. 
 Δ' £v με1<Το>(Τ» τοιίιν craif XiyeiTj J3';^^r, χι 
 Κιίβ*!''; ία:ίο£ν• (5' ύιτο χαλον αίώ: λινον 
 Ι'ωνη λίτταλεη• coi οί ojxefrTj ^r^/JTovrcg 
 MnXirr) τ' luy^w τε, έ^βντο ffxai^ovrig coffi. 
 
 On it he likewise placed a vineyard very heavy wiih 
 grape?, beautiful, golden ; but the clusters throughout it \vcre 
 black ; and the vineyard (i. e. ihs vines) stood against silver 
 poles, placed in order. Round he drew an azure di;ch, and 
 around thL=i, an hedge of tin ; but one path alone was upon 
 it, by which the carriers went when they gathered the vintage. 
 Young girls and youths of tender minds, bore the luscious 
 fruit in twisted baskets, and in the rnidst of these a boy sweet- 
 ly played upon a shrill lyre, and with a soft voice sang beauti- 
 fully 10 the string ; whilst they, boating the eailh at the same 
 lime, with singing and shouts of joy, foUov.ed, skipping with 
 their feet. 
 
 3. 
 
 Κύμα 5' «μφ' ΑχιΧληα Ιίτατο Jiivov x^;XiJμεvov, 
 'Ροος ί' εν tfaxii iric -ων uSsi, ου5ε ToJci'a'iv 
 Στ•ηξιξα<ίόαι Ειχί" ό (5s έλ5 '^s^rfiv rfTSXetiV 
 Σ,υφυεα, με^αλην ή ό' ε^ιιτονσ'α εχ ^ιζων 
 Διω^ίν άταντα χίημνον, ενε<!-χΐ δ: hsi-'a χαλά 
 ΙΤυχινοιβΊ ό^οιι^ιν μιν a-jTcv όί ys^j^uifcv, 
 E^irowiff' Taff' siffui• ό δ' αξ' avoξo\J(faς sx λϋμν»;^, 
 Tliretioai xfaiTvoitfi ifoft τείιοη τμζΐν. 
 Δειράς• ουύ' μ.εγας 6εος ετ' ελη^ε, ετ' αν«•ον 6' ω^το 
 Αχ^οχελαινιοων, ίνα ιτονοιο μιν ταυίΐ'ίι» 
 Αχιλληα ίιον, αλαλχ•ι <5c λοιπόν Ύξωείαι. 
 ATflPcutfiv Πηλ5ΐί>;5 ό', ftri τ' όβΌν είωη 5ou<Off, 
 (s) Εχων οιματ' μελανό? αιετου, «του ^τρ-ηττιΡος^ 
 Ός ύ' άμα τετίτ,ν^* χαξτιιίτος τί χαι uxiSrog. 
 Ειχως τω ηϊ|εν• χαλχοί is ίβΊ (ίττ,Ιϋΰίι 
 Κοναοΐ^εν (fafP'SaXtciv Xiatftleij ίε ίναιόα τοιο 
 Φίυ^', ό J' έτίτο μ.-χαλω of υμα} 5ω, ^ίων oritfis. 
 'OtriTuxi ό' ΊΤύδαζχγις δη; Λχιλλευ^ ό^μ/](Τειε 
 Ενανη^ιον (ί^ψου, χαι ^Λίωμεναι, ίΐ a«rovref μιν 
 
GREEE SX£RCIS£St 161 
 
 , Φοβεο^ιίι αί3ανα•το<, tci ey^ovdi Su^uv oy^avov, 
 Mcya χύμα ύιί'χετΐος τοταμοιο Toa'Caxi μιν 
 KaouTeiJiV '^λα(ξ' waojir• ό (5' ετηία ίψοσ'ί coiiiiv, 
 ΛνίΛί^ων JujUtj)• *οταμο5 δ' ico ίί5αμνα γουνατ 
 AaS^oc, i;uv Wuiua, ΰτίξίτίτί ο' κονίτ,ν «δοιϊν. 
 
 Terrible round Achilles stood the swollen water, while the 
 wave, lulling upon his shield, pushed him along-, nor could he 
 stendy himself on his feet. He seized v/ith his hands a bloom- 
 mg large elm ; it, hawover, faUing from its roots, threw dov/n 
 the whole bank, and checked the beautiful stream with its 
 thick branches, and made a bridge over the river, falUng en- 
 tirely in. Then having leaped up from the gulf, he hastened 
 ■to floe \vith rapid feet tovv'ards the plain, filled with terror. 
 Not yet, however, did. the mighty god desist, but rose to rush 
 after him, blackening over the surface, that lies, might cause 
 the noble Achilles to cease from warlike toil, and avert de- 
 struction from the Trojans. But Pehdes leaped back as far 
 £13 a spear-cast, having the force of a dark eagle, the hunter- 
 bird, which is at once the strongest and fleetest of the winged 
 race. Like to this he rushed, and the brass rung dreadfully 
 upon his breast ; but bending obhquely, he fled from it, wiiile 
 it, fiowing behind,, followed with a mighty noise. As often as 
 the swift-footed noble Achilles attempted to stand against it, 
 and to know whether all the imm.ortals who possess the wide 
 heaven put him to flight, so often did a vast billov/ of the river 
 tioAving from Jove wash his shoulders from above : v\-hilst he 
 leaped high with his feet, sorrowful in his mind, 'and the rapid 
 stream subdued his knees under iiim, and forced away the 
 sand from beneath his feet. 
 
 Κϋλλ&*ο5ιον, Juov Tjxoj, o^tfio, αντα γαξ (fscsv 
 Ηϊίίκομίν OiV/jivra Ηανίον ίΐναι μαχ^* 
 Αλλ' τα^;3'τα :•?αμνν?, «τολλι^ν δε φλο^'α «iijaU'Txic. 
 Eyu αυτά? Ζίφ^ιοιο xaj Νοτοιο αργ;ίϊταο, 
 ΕιύΌμα» cfJ'cuc'a γνΧενγ^ν 6^s\Xav ίξ ά.Χοΰίν, 
 Ή χίφαλα^ "ΚΙ τίυχεα I'^ojojv xsv uvo yir,at, 
 ΦοίίουΟ'α καχον φλε^•μα• ffu Ss «αξ' οχίας Savi3oio 
 ΚαΓ δίνύί'ία, εν ο' ίει ιΐυξΐ αυτόν μηοε -ίΤαμίταν ffs 
 Α-πΌτ^είτετω μειλίχιοι^ ετεείίΐίν, χα» αξειγι' 
 lVIr,5s τεον μίνο^ '!''^<Ί' απΌ'ττανε• αλλ' ό-ιτοταν 5η 
 2 
 
162 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 Eyuv ιαχοΐιία ^6Βγξομ\ tots tv| αχαματον C^tiv. 
 *Clg ίς;αθ'• itjp is ifif'ridai? τιτυ^χετο 'II^jaitfToj. 
 rijwra μΛ τυ? δουίτο £v «-idiw, νεχίον? όί χαΐ5 
 Πολλου<, οί ^α £(fav άλις χατ' αντον, cyg A;;^iXX£jj χτα*' 
 IlsJiiv iraw 6' £^η?ανίτ), i'Jui^ (5' αχλαον (f^t'TD. 
 Ώδ 6' ότ' aXuj>jv vioai'Js' Βο|£»;5 οιτω^ινο^ 
 Ηη^αιντ? αιψ' αν, otfrig 5ί £(3£ι^;Ί μιν χαΐ|ε»• 
 *fij COV Τίίίον εξη^ανίη, χαί(3' ν£χ^ο;;5 α^α 
 Κϊ;£ν, ό is ιτααφανοωβ'αν φλο^α τ^ίψ; 5^ ίΤ&τααον, 
 Γίτ£λ£αι τ£, xa< ίτ£σι, r,i: ^u^iXijy, xaiovro, 
 AcjToj 5s τ' χαι£το, %δ: ^pjov, τ]ίη xjceiPjv, 
 Τα τεφυχει ΰ.}^ς τϊ»! χα).α ^ί-3ξσ. τοταμοίο• 
 Εχ)<ελυε? re, χα» i^JuSg τεΡοντ', ο* xafa 5ιναί, 
 01 ενία χαι ενία x^^itf-wv χατα 1^:3ξα χαλά 
 (?) ΤεΡομίνοι crvc';i Ήφαιίτοιο ττολυμηπο?. 
 
 AiTso, Vulcan, mj' son ; for ag^ainst thco do we iloem etl- 
 (hiiig Xiuiilius to be a fit opponent in fight: but assist with 
 all haste, an>l show forth abundant flame. In the mean whilu 
 I will go to excite a severe storm of the west \vind and rapid 
 souUi from ihc sea, which, bringing a destructive conflagra- 
 tion, may consume the heads and armour of the Trojans. 
 IBurn thou, however, the trees along tlie bank•» of Xanihr..", 
 and send l!iy fire against himself; nor let Jihn at air turn thee 
 away with kind words, or threatening: neither do ihoir pre- 
 viuttsly restrain th}' violence ; but when I, .shouting, shall 
 give the signal, then check thy unwearied fire. 'I'hus .*hti 
 F|K)ko ; and Vulcan darted forth his fierce-buniing fire. First 
 uf all ho lighted a fire in the plain, and burni'd up the mune- 
 roua dead, whom Achillo.s slew, ;,vhirh were in h in vast num- 
 ber.^, luid the whole plain v.-as dried up, and the hmpid water 
 r-strainod. A? when an autiunnal north wind immediately 
 diios a newly-wcl garden, while he njniccs, whosoever culti- 
 vates it ; so w.a.5 the whole plain dried up, and he cons>inicd 
 the dead : whereupon he turned his shining fiame against the 
 river. The elms were burned np, and willow.^, and tamarisk? ; 
 tile lotus was consumed, and rushes and reeds, which grew in 
 great abundance around the beautiful strcanis of the river. 
 The eels and the fishes, which through the whirlpools, wliich 
 throucrh the fair streams dived here and there, were fatigued, 
 wearied out by the breath of the various-aitificer Vulcan. 
 
GREEK exercise's, 163 
 
 HEXAMETERS AND PENTAMETERS, 
 
 1. 
 
 Τα δξοίίοεντα τα ho5a, χαι εκείνη η χαταιτνχνοζ 
 
 ΈξννλΧος τοις ΈλιχωνιασΊ χίιται, 
 Ται δί (5ας;ν:'.ι μίλα|Λ;;υλλοι τιν, Παιαν Πυόιε' 
 
 E.'zSi "τΤίτ^α Δίλφΐ5 αγΧάίΰί couro τοι. 
 OuTof ό' ό μαΧπζ χί^αυς τζαγας «ίμαξίΐ /3ωμ,ο 
 
 T|o.yi/jv ΕίΤ'χατον αχ^ΐμονα Τί^μινόου. 
 
 Tl'iose dewj roses, and that thick wi!d-thyme, nre sacred 
 to the Muses of Helicon : Liit the dark-lea\'ed laurels, to 
 thee, Ο Pythian Apollo ; for the Delphian rock adorns thee 
 with these. That white horned he-gOat, which crops the 
 lowest twig of the turpentine tree, shall stain the altar with 
 liis blood. 
 
 2. 
 
 A Θ-Ρ(Τι ίίιλαιί Γ -j• τι "jrXc-sv το/, ει κατατα^ίι^ 
 
 Δΐ7λν;νον? ojirog δαχξ-^ΰι οίΐ'Ρομενο? ; 
 Ά ■χ\μαξος οι^/ίται, το τϊχίς χαΧον, Eg 'Αδανοιχ; 
 
 Αίικο? ya^• τξαγνς αμς;eclaςr -χυΧαις• 
 Κ}.ο.γγίΊ'^τι δϊ ο.'ι χ-^ίς' <ri τλί&ν τοι, avixa τηνκ^ 
 
 Or/jj^:t'jag ουίε λει^τίται offrsuv Πψξα ; 
 
 Ah wretched thou, Ο Thyrsis ! what will it avail thee, if 
 mourning; thou waste away both ihy eyes with tears 1 The 
 younir she-goat, beautiful offspring•, is gose to the shades ; 
 for a fierce wolf seized her with his fangs. The dogs are 
 barking ; but Avhat will it avail thee, since there is not even 
 left thee the ashes of her bones 1 
 
 .1 
 
 3. 
 
 Ποτ' εν αλωϊ] ιζαΧος εντίωγοιν toCij ai/Oj 
 Έίαψε rravTO.; του? άταλου? xXaoo'jj οινη?. 
 
 Το(Τον ίιτοζ α-πΊ-ε tw εκ γαιτ,ζ' κει ρε, κακιίτε, 
 'Ημετε>ον το κα^ιτοφο^ον κλημ,α ^ναθμοι^• 
 
 Γα? ^ι^α o-jtfa εμτεϋοί: γΧυχν ΜΒχ-α.ξ ταλιν av/jO'si, 
 'Otftfov tfoi, τ^α^ε, όυομενω ε'7ηα''π'ειΑ'αι. 
 
 Once in a vineyard, the wanton, well-bearded husband of 
 <he she-goat, de\Oured all the tender branches of the vine. 
 
164 CHEEK EXERCISES 
 
 TLia cry issued forth unto him from the earih : ''• Gnaw, 
 tUest animal, our fruitf-ol branch ; fur the root remaining 
 vic-orou.?, shall again yield swcci nectar, suincient, Ο εοαΐ, 
 for a libation at thy sacrifice. 
 
 4. 
 
 Me r5vra;Tr,^e» ταιία, έχοντα αχ/;5ία juftov 
 
 ΗξΊταϋ νηλίιηζ 'λΊδηζ, Καλλιμαχον. 
 Αλλα μη χλαιοΐ5 μ; μίτίίχον γαζ χμ /ίιοτϋί 
 
 Παν|ον, και των /Sioroio xuxuv ταύρων. 
 
 Cruel death carried off me Callirnachu?, when a boy n\ β 
 
 iears old, possessing a rniod aa yet untlist-uVbed by cares. 
 )o not weep for rne ; for 1 pariicip-.^.tcd in little of life, and in 
 few ofthe evile of existence. 
 
 I.\MB1C DIMETER CATlLSCTlC VEI^SE. 
 
 1 
 
 Τα Θ7\ξrζ tfj 'key;:g μ?; 
 δ' αυ ό νξυγων ajrac, 
 Άλω'?'::;: ■? ΐμ-ας £γ•^\ 
 Ms ωλΐίίν ονχ' ΐ-ττοίτ, 
 
 Αλλο? US xaivog Cr^a-cg 
 βΐ: ατ' ομμα-ωι /3α>^•ν. 
 
 Thou indoetl dost tell of the wars of Thebc?, and ho, on the 
 other han(>, of the loud shouts of the Piiry^ians ; I, however, 
 of my own cajitivity. No horse, nor foot soldiery, nor floftt 
 destroy nic; but another new host, woun'iing me froai the 
 cyos of the fair. 
 
 Ilivii ή μίλαινα γη, 
 Autt;v δε *ivfi δ-Μδξα* 
 Aujcts β' uaXx'fScf. Tivs», 
 Θαλα^ίαν 6' Ό >;λ/ο;, 
 ^Ιεληνη δ' τον ηλιον. 
 Τι, Eroij'oi, μαχ'^ΐ)' μοι ; 
 ΙΙ<ν(ιν ί-λοντι χ' aurij ; 
 
GREEK EXEUCISnS. 165 
 
 The black earth drinks, and the troes drink it ; the sea also 
 drinks the breezes, and the sun the sea ; and the moon the 
 sun. "Why do you contend with nic, Ο companions ! when 1 
 myself have also a mind to drink 1 
 
 3.• 
 
 Ω y-jvaixs;., 5jt\ Sots μ -ci, 
 
 H()>3 γοίξ ΰττο χανμ.ατϋζ 
 
 Δ' εχϊΐνων δοτέ avosojv 
 Δ' oioug irwaPu C-Tsipavouj 
 'Πιχαι;ι μr'J <ra μετο.'π'α• 
 Των (5; ί^ωτων το καυμ-α, 
 Τινι dxinta.tSdu, κ|α5ιη ; 
 
 Give me, give, Ο women ! to drink copiously of Bacchus ; 
 for now exhausted by sultry heat, I pant : and give rne of 
 those ί^OΛvers, for my forehead scorches the garlands which I 
 vv-ear : but, Ο heart ! with what shall I screen Ihce from the 
 ardour of love 'i 
 
 4. 
 
 Ova§ τ^οχαξίΐν εβοχονν 
 Ετ"' ωμών φί?ων crf^u^ag* 
 Ό ό' Ερω^ μολυ§5ον έχων 
 Πε^ι TCI5 ffoiitfxois χαλοι^ 
 Εϋιωκε, χαι ν^χανεν. 
 Τι y' ονα^ «το 6' ίελει είναι ; 
 .^Δ' ζγωγε ΐΤοΧΚοΐζ ίοκεω 
 ΡιΊε τλακεντα εν ε^ωαΊ, 
 Εν άλλοις ίιολίίόανίΐν, 
 Συν(5ε57)ναι ενι τωδε. 
 
 Ι seemed in a dream to run with speed, bearing wings 
 upon my shoulders ; but Love, having lead round his beauti- 
 ful little feet, yet pursued and overtook me. What does this 
 vision mean 1 I think indeed, that I, being involved in many 
 loves, shall escape from the rest, to be enfettered l)y this one 
 alone. 
 
 * In this and the following ode, the first foot of the measure is an ana- 
 neel. 
 
16C GREEK EXTRCISEe. 
 
 lAMSIC TRIMETEn ACaTALECT!•: VuKSE. 
 
 Ω iT'M Aa^rtcj, au μ€ν osucpux as 
 
 Ko.i vyv OJ"^j ii irj Jxr,\ais νπν*ηϊ««ι$ 
 
 irjvr,^ Ξτουντα ταλαι χαι μίτ^ΟνμΓ.ον 
 ' Τα νίτ/αξαγ^' ί•χ^:•/\ Xcivou, ότω; (5r,j, 
 Ειτ' ενϋον, £1-' fjx ενδύν. Ευ c; εχς:«/•' ""' 
 'P.; τις i-jfmg βαη; Aaxojv.•;; χ.<ν:;. 
 Αν»;ί JO» Γ^χρ^ανίΐ α»η fvJr^, χα|α 
 Κα» jcoxTcvoj; χϊξι^ζ Ί^ξχτί Cra^uv. 
 Και Tacraiviiv (>' 6ΐ3'ω Γ>:(7ύ£ ττ-,λ»}? CuJ^ 
 Efyov ϊτ' £?τ•ν, ο' ε•.ν£ίΓϊιν, ^£»?ιν croj 
 
 •lb 
 
 On every occasion, Ο son of Laertes, have I b.;hoM ihee 
 v.-atchin!^ to seize some opportunity ngaiast ihy foes, and 
 now do I perceive thcc at iho naval tents of Ajax, wlurc he 
 occupies the Ia=t station, ranging for a long time back. anJ 
 exploring with thine e3'c the fresh iirijireidons of liis steps, m 
 order li'.at thou niaycst see wheiht-r lie be within or absen*. 
 In good season, doui as i", were some jK-^-gacious movement cf 
 η Spcirtan hound lead theefonh to the object of thy search, for 
 the Avarrior chances at present to 1 e within, dripping v.iih 
 Fweai as to liLs hcail an<l Uiurderous Lands, li is needless fiT 
 thee any longer to be l'X)king. within this entrance ; but declare 
 wily thou tli-lsi undertake iliis loilsoi.AC task, that thou rnayest 
 Icurn from her who knows all tilings. 
 
 Ω Toj τότε rv T^owt (Τϊ-ραττ^η/ανη^ 
 ' Παι Α}•αμεμνονο5, vuv εξί<ί•.ι Cci ."χ;»ν' 
 
 Tcii γαξ 90 ίταλαιον Αξγος ού eoifif. 
 
 ' Λ Dact_\l U1 the iluni plac». 
 * Ad Anjpxtit to the liibt I'laoe. 
 
GREEK EXCHCI?»). 167 
 
 AXCos >rr,; οιίτξοζ>.τ,^ ας Χ':ργ]ζ Ιναχου* 
 Αντη ο', Ο^είτα, του ^εον λι-^οκτονο-^ 
 ' Auxsios αγ(ιξα' ooa ο' οΟ^ αξιίτερα;, 
 Ό xXsivos ναο5 Ή|α5• οι 6' ixavojixfi', 
 Φαίχίίν ί^αν τας σο'Κ-οχξαΰο-ος Μ^κηνα^•, 
 
 Όι3εν εκ φόνων carpoj ενω cere .is 
 
 Νυν ουν, Οξείτα, >.«ι Cu ^svi^v φίλτατί 
 * Πυλαο»:, /3ou>>.iJT;ov εν τα;),^Ξ» rj p/pv; ό|αν 
 'P.S r,3-/) λαμτΡίν tfcXa^ νλιου vjasv 
 Σοί^η k;vc» ε^;α φίί^ματ' οξ\;ι5ων, 
 Ευφίονϊ) τ' μ.;λκινα «tf-r^'i^ Γ/./.ίλοιτεν. 
 n^iv cuv ε|οθ;ίίτο|ϊ(ν ccv&jiov civ" Crcyr.j, 
 AojOKiiv ΙυναίΓτότονί' ug εμεν ενταυΆ', 
 Ίύ' ci,;< £7' καιξος szviriv, αλλ' αχμη epj'cjv. 
 
 Ο son of the Agamemnon v?he- once, led ov:: forces at Τ1Ό3•, 
 it is now penrdtied thee lo behold, in person those things 
 which thou wast alwajs desirous to view; for this is the an- 
 cient Argos, after wIugu thou longest, the grove of the gadfly- 
 smitten daughter of Inachus, ami tills, Orestes, the Lvcaean 
 forum of the v.-olf-slajing god ; wiiile diat edifice on the left 
 hand is the celebrated tuuiple of Juno. But as regards the 
 place to Λvllich we ha\-e cor;~.G, say that tliou bekoldeit the 
 rich MjTencs, and tire blood-stained abode of the descendants 
 of Pelops, whence iu forihei• daj-.S; after thy. father's murder, 
 having received thee fropi' her v. ho. was of the saufic blood 
 with thee, and tiiine own sister, ί bore awa}', and saved, and 
 nurtured thee, for an avenger of the miirder of thy father. 
 Nov.- then, Orestes, and thou, Pylades, dearest of strangers, 
 quiciiiy must 3OU deliberate what plan 3'ou should purstje, 
 since already the. bright beam of the sun calls forth in clear 
 st.-ains for us the matin songs of the birds, and the gloomy 
 night arrayed in stars liath departed. Before then any one of 
 the irihabitants come forth from beneath his roof, arrange to- 
 gether your plans, since we are here, where there is no time 
 for delay, but instant action is demanded. 
 
 ^ An AnapiBsl in the first place, 
 
 4 A Tribrach in the fourth place. 
 
 5 An Anap!E£t In the first place. 
 
1Θ8 CHEEK EMEr.CISES. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ου ^)3ovij Ϋ ovv <Γον<Γθΐ5Ί μ; ν η yaf Jci μ£ ; 
 'Λ δ' γ,μαοτγ,χ: εις εμ.\ riu.'^ ξτ,^ομ^.ι 
 ' Εν Tr,5' τ.μίξχ ΊίΤ^τολυτον τα ιτολλα J; 
 Π^οχοφαί' ίτα^.α», ou &:Ί μί τολλου roveu. 
 Ν IV ^α^ -τοτ' ελίοντα £χ ίομον Πιτίδω^^, 
 Es όψιν χαι τ£λ-<] ί^μνί.,; μϋίτχ,ριων, 
 Γην Πανοιονο^, evyivijg ζαμαζ νατξος 
 Φαιδξα. ιέουία, xaTScT^srD κα^διαν 
 Δίιννι ε»ν)•Γΐ, coiff /3ουλενμ«σΊ εμοι^. 
 Και τ^ιν e>,d-:iv μίν τηνί;• Τ^ίΐ^ηνιαν y^v 
 Πα^•' αιτ/,ν Cer^av Παλλαοο?, χατοψιον 
 
 * TrjiJc ^njr, iyxadeiCaro v«ryv Kir^iJog 
 ^ Εχίϊτ,μον ί^ωτ' 5^ω<ί'• fci ό' Ίτττολυτω 
 
 Τολν«•7Γον ίίαν (J^vffJai ίμνηοΌυίιν. 
 
 * EffSi Js Θη^ϊ-α^ λϊΐτίι Κΐχ^οτιαν χαονκ, 
 Φόυ^ων μιχιίμα αίματο? ΠίχλλαντιΟων, 
 Και ίίυν ίαμα^τι νανί'τολϊι τηνί; νόονα, 
 
 ' Λινίία^ ενια'νΐ'ιαν ίχΟΓ,μον φυ^ην 
 
 Στενου^ία δη εντΛνϋα, χάχΐτί'ίτλε^μίνη 
 
 EfUTos xivrfoib, ατολλυ7&:ι ή ς-αλαιν' 
 
 Σι^ ί)' oi>fii ο" οιχότων ξυνοιίϊ νοβΤον. 
 
 Αλλ' ούτι χ|η τ&νυ' £^ωτα ταΐ/ττ) crSffeiv• 
 
 Π^αχμα (5; 0»;Cii o;i|jj, κακφαν/,Λται. 
 *■ Κ«ι rev μίν τϊ^ϋχοτα τολεμην ν;μίν 
 
 Πατη^ αβαιβΊν xrivii, «g ϋ Tovricj; 
 
 Ανα| noCsiJtJv Θν^ίΤει yfjaj ucatfcv, 
 
 Εν^αίΤ^αι ίζ τξις βί^) μηοεν ματαιον. 
 
 Ι fed no envy, howcvcF, on account of these things — why 
 shouM 1 1 But I Λνίΐΐ punish Hippolytus this day, for the 
 oflTencos which he has commiited against mo. As I long ago 
 brought the most of these my plans to maturity, there is no 
 need now of much romaining labour. For Pha-dra formerly, 
 the illustrious wife of his father, having seen him when he 
 came from the abode of Pittiicus to behold and celebrate 
 
 ' A Dactyl in llic I'.rst place. 
 2 Λ DactU ill l]w third placo. 
 ■" An Aiiira.st in the /ilih placo. 
 * A Dactyl in the third placo. 
 ' An Anai>.Tst in tho first place. 
 ^' A Dtictyl in the third place. 
 
onEEK EXERCISES. 169 
 
 the sacred mysteries, was seized in heart with X'iolent love, 
 iu accordance with my decrees. And ere she came to this 
 Troezenian land, cherishing a passion for an absent one, she 
 founded near the very rock of Minerva, a temple of Venus, 
 obvious to the view of this land ; and for the time to come 
 they shall record in song that the tempte of the goddess was 
 founded on account of Hippolytus. But when Theseus leaves, 
 the Cecropian land, flying from the pollution occasioned by. 
 the blood of the Pallan tides, and with his wife, sails to this 
 country, submitting for the space of a year to a voluntary 
 exile in a foreign land, here then, deeply groaning and wound- 
 ed with the stings of love, the wretched woman pines away 
 in silence, nor does any of her attendants know the cause. 
 This love, however, shall not thus be in vain. I will disclose 
 the affair to Theseus, and it shall openly display itself. The 
 father shall destroy the son become hostile to me, by the im- 
 precations which Neptune, monarch of the main, bestowed 
 as a gift upon Theseus, that he should not thrice fruitlessly 
 ask a favour of the god. 
 
DOCTRINE 
 
 OF 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Te κα\ονμ(ια μεσοτητοί ρήματα ηιιμτττωσιν ανΰεζατο ενψγίτικης και ταΘητικης 
 ίιαβίσίωί. Αικ)11οη. lib. iii. c. 7. • 
 
 1. 
 
 The Λΐίιΐιΐΐο Voice in Greek is so called, because it has a 
 middle signification between the Active and Passive Voices, 
 impl}-ing neither action nor passion simply, but an uiiion in 
 some degree of both. 
 
 2. 
 
 IMiddle A'erbs may be divided into Five Classes. 
 
 In mi.Mle verbs of the FIRST CLASS, the action of the 
 f erb is reflected immediately back upon the agent, and hetice 
 verbs of this class are exactly equivalent to the aclive voice 
 joined with the accusative of the reflexive pronoun ; e. g. 
 λούω, " I wash another," λούομαι, (i. q. λούω εμαυ-ον) " I wash 
 myself." 
 
 4. 
 
 In middle verbs of the SECOND CLASS, the agent is 
 the remote object of the action of the verb, with reference 
 to Λνΐιοιη it takes place ; so that middle verbs of this class 
 arc etpiivalent to the acUvc voice, with the dative of the 
 reflexive pronoun, εμαυς•^, ΟΈαυτω, έαυτω : e. g. αίΓίιν, " to take 
 up any tiling for another, in order to transfer it to another ;" 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 171 
 
 «fi'ao'Jai. " to take up in order to keep it one's self — to transfer 
 to one's self;" αφαι^ειν, " to take any thing from another," 
 without any reference to one's own advantage ; αφαΐξ;ιΰ6αι, 
 " to take any thing from another, for one's self, in order to re- 
 tain or use it." 
 
 Middle verbs of the THIRD CLASS, express an action 
 which took place at the command of the agent, or with regard 
 to it ; which is expressed in English by, " to cause." In other 
 words, this class may be said to signify, " ίο cause any thing to 
 be done ;" e. g. γξοι-φω, " I write ;" ^^αφομκι, " I cause to be 
 written, I cause the name, as of an accused person, to be fiiken 
 down in Avriting by the magistrate before \vhom the process is 
 carried ; or simply, " I accuse." 
 
 The FOURTH CLA SS of middle verbs, includes those 
 which denote a reciprocal or mutual action : e. g. cf'jrsvSegSai, 
 " to make libations along with another, to make mutual liba- 
 tions, i. 6. to make a league ;" διαΧυείίύαι, " to dissolve along 
 with another, i. e. to dissolve by mutual agreement." — To this 
 class belong verbs signifying to contract, quaiTel, contend, be 
 reconciled, &c. 
 
 ^ The FIFTH CLASS, comprehends middle verbs of the 
 first class, when folloAved by an accusative or some other case ; 
 in other words, it embraces all those middle verbs which de- 
 note an action reflected back on the agent himself, and are at 
 the same time followed by an accusative or other case, which 
 that acuon farther regards ; e. g. 
 
 είτϊερ αν αυτόν 
 
 Χευωνται ταχεεζ τε κυνες, κ. τ. λ. Iliad. Γ. 25. 
 
 Althougii fleet dogs stir themselves in pursuit of him. 
 
 ' Tliis class of middle verbs is in fact only a branch of the second. 
 Thus γραφεσθαι, "to accuse," implies for one's self, i. e. to gratify one's 
 love of justice, or one's desire of reparation for injuries received ; ποίεισθαι, 
 "to cause to be done (for one's self);" διίασκεσθαι, "to cause to be in- 
 structed, (for one's self, as a father Us son, to gratify his parental feel- 
 ings)." 
 
172 
 
 GUEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CO 
 
 ε 
 
 c la 
 c « 
 
 2Λ 
 
 
 
 .- - ο 
 
 
 ο to = ο 
 
 
 ε r; fe ο -i: :^ 
 
 >> 
 
 1 
 
 ο 
 
 
 . 8 -" i- 
 
 g-g a-8 
 
 3 s ^ fc- 
 
 a. > > > 
 
 t; < -^ <5 
 
 ^ 
 
 ο 
 
 
 > 
 
 ο 
 
 
 α 
 
 
 η 
 
 
 
 
 
 Η 
 
 W 
 
 υ 
 
 5 
 
 >< 
 
 δ 
 
 ο tJ 
 0= ο 
 
 ν- c3 
 
 C 
 
 ^ § « 
 
 ο >-• 
 
 Cit! Ci. 
 
 ο d ^S 
 
 3 -Γ 
 
 •—ι .ΐ5 
 » to 
 
 ^a 
 
 to a, 
 
 •C ο 
 
 ~ >.; 5 •« 
 
 S I- ^- 
 
 ο -=: -Ξ 
 
 S ο 2 
 
 κΐ c s 
 
 - s <y >^ 
 
 iz ci >^ 
 
 < 
 
 „ 3 
 
 - „ 3 
 
 3 I ^ S 
 i > > > 
 
 to 
 
 c 
 
 7? 5 - 
 
 t— 1 fj to 
 
 3 
 
 < 
 
 : <2 
 
 1.8- 
 
 C ο 
 'S u 
 
 ο g 
 
 — S ■ 
 
 ^ V ?> 
 
 oi-2" 
 
 c !s 3 
 
 f J-l 
 
 cog 
 
 3 '^ Μ 
 
 "II 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 173 
 
 
 ρ ^ ο 
 
 f> •-< 
 
 α, 
 
 ο 
 
 - rf 
 
 G χ ^ ί>^ i« 
 
 
 
 
 l-H >— ( 
 
 1— 1 t— 1 
 
 H-< HH 1— i 
 
 
 »— ι ΗΜ 
 
 >—t 
 
 •« 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 ri. 
 
 
 :i. 
 
 a _♦> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 cvr> 
 
 
 fc• •» 
 
 a. s 
 
 |-:l 
 m 
 
 r* ■• ** 
 
 a „ 
 
 Μ 
 
 
 ο ο 
 
 1 Ϊ - 5 1 
 
 
 δ 
 
 ο 
 
 ΐ= b 
 
 ν fe 
 
 V 5 ^- 
 
 ϊ^ ΐ= =vp-to ΰ 
 
 a ο 
 
 QJ5 
 
 < < 
 
 <3 < 
 
 <i U Η 
 
 Η Κ Γ- r W 
 
 Ui '^ 
 
 Ο 
 
 
 Ι 
 
 -Β S 
 
 S-4 -^ 
 
 ο 
 
 ci 
 
 ither. 
 down. 
 
 S 
 
 φ 
 
 ο 
 c 
 
 
 
 ο ο 
 
 «3 
 
 
 
 f . .^ 
 
 ο 
 
 ci 
 
 
 ^ΐ 
 
 s - 
 
 
 § ■"§ '^ 
 
 s 
 
 Tj 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 
 s 
 
 bo 
 
 •-■ ΰ ο 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ο Μ 
 
 'S Γ§ 
 
 ,-- -^w 
 
 ^ 
 
 ο δ *-" 
 
 -ίΤ* 
 
 © 
 
 
 is 
 
 §1 
 
 CO ^J 
 
 g 
 
 
 ρ 
 
 rG !-, iJ '-• 
 
 « &^ δ s rf 
 
 iP " ° a 
 
 3: CO Μ 
 
 ^ .2 fc/J 3 rt 5 
 
 Γ3 
 ^ 
 
 73 
 
 i 
 
 Ο 
 Ο 
 
 
 
 ι— ι Η-4 
 
 Cj ο 
 
 ci 
 
 "Sj 
 
 Ch rf ii rf -7^ rf 
 
 
 ΰ 
 
 ci 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 1— 1 "H 
 
 ΗΗ 
 
 '^ %H ^ ϋ & 
 
 1— ( H-( 
 
 C/2 =^' 
 
 
 3" 
 
 
 
 
 
 .3; 
 
 
 
 
 3" ^ 
 
 ©- 3 
 
 ί 
 
 •> 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 Ρ 
 
 a s 
 
 
 
 ί^3 
 
 ο ^ 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 3" 3^ :f 3^ 
 
 CS ~ 3 l•- Ό 
 
 1 3-" 
 
 
 
 b ^ 
 
 b te 
 
 ν 5 
 
 ^s! 
 
 r-^ b <^J3^g a 
 
 a ο 
 
 ^ <vn 
 
 
 << 
 
 << 
 
 <1 ί-^Η 
 
 w wr rlii 
 
 MMi^O 
 
 
 P2 
 
in 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 «5 
 
 '2 
 
 3 
 
 Ο ^_ 
 
 ο 
 
 ']= HM =i 
 
 ο -r. 
 
 
 s '-' ϋ <u 
 Ξ '^ s ^ _ 
 
 •Z. 2 2 is 5 <_-« -^ 
 
 -r" <II •_ '*- - ■-« T• „•_- 
 02 .-3 ii fy — i-H .'Λ -— r ο 
 
 
 «22 
 
 >> >. ^ '^ 
 
 c 
 
 ο ο 1) h ::; c 
 > en m ;5 ο — 
 c ~ ~ ο =J ^ 
 
 
 Η 
 
 
 ό 
 
 
 
 
 fcu 
 
 s 
 
 
 ci 
 
 J3 
 
 
 
 rf 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 C) 
 
 -^ 
 
 ,-^ 
 
 r^ 
 
 
 fcc 
 
 »— 4 
 
 ^-:' 
 
 rt 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 W 
 
 >^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 cti 
 
 c; 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^• 
 
 bf 
 
 
 C 
 
 >. 
 
 
 9^; .-'gi^-sio 
 "ot i So ^ "^ "^ 
 
 β a 
 
 CK 
 
 § i s §- § 
 
 ° 2 =*- S S 
 
 S « ° 5 i^ 
 
 C i_ Π >s w 
 
 5. " _•~ =*■ 
 ° δ a S 
 
 3 g S « 
 3- a "o 3 
 
 Η ■5• -e- "S• 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cd 
 
 
 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 tn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 e5 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 Ρ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 sJ 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •.-> 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 α 
 
 ν 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rf 
 
 >> 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 
 Ο 
 
 ο 
 
 to 
 
 ο 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 ο 
 
 > 
 
 .3 
 
 ο 
 
 Ο 
 
 ϋ 
 
 Ο 
 
 c 
 
 Ο 
 53 
 
 ■μ 
 
 ο 
 5 
 
 ι-• 
 C 
 
 Ο 
 
 C 
 
 ο 
 
 -3 
 
 3* 
 tn 
 
 c5 
 
 3 
 
 Ο 
 
 α 
 
 ο 
 
 C 
 
 C 
 
 Ο) 
 Ο 
 
 1 
 
 Ι 
 
 > 
 CJ 
 
 c 
 a 
 a 
 
 CJ 
 
 V.-. 
 
 ο 
 a 
 ."2 
 
 ο 
 
 «2 
 
 -3 
 cS 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 > 
 
 α 
 
 to 
 
 5 
 (β 
 
 3 
 
 C3 
 
 ο 
 
 'ο 
 
 to 
 
 5 
 •g 
 
 ς; 
 
 «3 
 
 > 
 'S 
 
 •< 
 
 OQ 
 
 rt 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 rt 
 
 rt 
 
 « 
 
 Μ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 α> 
 
 
 "p. 
 
 
 ο 
 
 Οι 
 
 ο 
 
 y 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 -3 
 
 Λ 
 
 tn 
 
 
 to 
 
 Ό 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 
 H-l 
 
 »-4 
 
 Η-( 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^Η 
 
 Η- 1 
 
 Η- « 
 
 
 t-K 
 
 •-^ 
 
 ΗΗ 
 
 ΗΗ 
 
 hH 
 
 3 3 
 
 t=;c 
 
 5 3 
 
 § 5 3 5 >< 
 
 >3 ^ ^ a ^• 
 
 txn '^ <\/ι ;j a 
 
 C C C Η H 
 
 5^ Α ^ ^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 175 
 
 m 
 
 Pi 
 Q 
 
 DQ 
 
 <i 
 
 Ο 
 
 Ο 
 Ο 
 Η 
 
 Ο 
 
 w 
 .J 
 
 o-^^S-g 
 
176 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 i 
 
 a. 
 
 I-! 
 
 £ 
 
 'H 
 
 '8 
 
 a 
 
 ο 
 
 .^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 «-Τ- 
 ο 
 
 _o 
 
 00 
 
 %s 
 
 c 
 
 93 
 
 a 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 <d 
 
 2 
 
 
 ο »< 3} 
 
 S^ .5-5 
 
 1- ? X 
 
 α, Ο -^ 
 
 ω . - — 
 -3 ^, G 
 
 " S 
 
 '3 ,rt ■= 
 
 
 
 CQ ~ ' — • 
 
 >, " ο 
 
 C .^ ?^ . 
 
 ^ J ^-^ 
 
 ^ £ -- ζ 5 
 
 ^ ρ 5 νΞ 2 
 
 <Β " § iS .S — ' 
 
 v. .5^0 
 
 .2 .£ ΐ 
 
 'Z3 a "a Ti '^ ^ 
 
 a a i 3 
 
 C "S ~ 
 
 -'^ 3 
 
 c u- ο 
 
 ^ ο κ 
 
 υ ο 
 
 -^ rf 
 
 ο ." =ί 
 
 s ϊ* s 
 
 ^^ Ci Ο 
 
 tC ;-i 5 
 
 .Λ .Λ « 
 
 «3 « S 
 
 4) .^ ο 
 
 c 2 ^ 
 
 (- ο ο ΛΛ 
 
 ^- S - f ^0 
 
 1 :^ -2 ο £ 
 
 rt γ: « 
 
 ^ - s ;;ia 
 
 ε Cd trj 
 
 ο 
 
 -5 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 t, i) u. « 
 
 
 Φ 
 
 3 
 
 3 ° 
 a - «v/i ο 
 
 (, ο ^ CVjJ 
 
m 
 
 > 
 
 Ρ 
 Q 
 
 GREEK 
 
 Ο 
 
 Q 
 
 m 
 
 Ο 
 CO 
 
 Hi 
 
 }^ 
 w 
 
 
 ΰ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 g. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :i. 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 ■xo 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 ό 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 β 
 
 
 
 
 Cj 
 
 
 
 
 nQ 
 
 
 
 
 ra 
 
 
 
 
 :=i 
 
 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 
 
 
 φ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 (μ 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 Η 
 
 tJ 
 
 
 
 Ο 
 
 •3 
 
 
 
 δ 
 
 CQ 
 
 ^.^ 
 
 
 > 
 
 W 
 
 C) 
 
 
 > 
 
 t- 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 Q;> 
 
 Η 
 
 Π 
 
 s 
 
 
 υ 
 
 cS 
 
 •c 
 
 •«! 
 
 s 
 
 s» 
 
 ^ 
 
 li 
 
 < <\ 
 
 
 a. 
 
 ο 
 
 a 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 V- 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 s_i 
 
 
 
 
 
 **■' 
 
 <u 
 
 CO 
 
 
 C 03 
 
 Λ 
 
 ο 
 
 Si 
 
 Gi 
 
 
 
 ν 
 
 J3 'ZS 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 ^ 
 
 •tJ % 
 
 σ 
 
 > 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 ->-> 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 δ 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 •a 
 
 
 % 
 
 '0 
 
 
 
 3 
 Θ- 
 
 a 
 
 3 3" 
 
 ^ Θ- 
 
 3^ 
 3 
 
 a 5 
 < <1 
 
 
 X 
 
17S 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 11. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FOURTH CLAS3 OF 
 MIDDLE VERBS. 
 
 'Λμιλλαβ'ϋαι, 
 
 BouXe'jEiiJai, 
 
 Διαχοντιξεο'ίαι, 
 
 Δ»αλ5χ;ίΤίαι, 
 
 AtaXkaTTSddou, 
 
 ΔιαλυεοΊ}αι, 
 
 Διαξιφι^Εί^αι, 
 Δια'τληκηξίΟ'^αΐ, 
 
 ' Δια•7£ΐν£(3Ό'αι, 
 
 Δίατοξίοεί^αι, 
 
 Eifi'^MTi&stfdai, 
 Καταλυ£(}'(}αι 
 
 KoivoXoyfitfoai, 
 
 Κ^ιν£ί()αι, 
 
 Αο'ρζβδύαί, 
 
 Το contend tog-ether. • 
 
 To skirniish together. 
 
 To contend together. 
 
 To deliberate together with another or 
 with one's own self. 
 
 To throw darts at one another. 
 
 To converse together. 
 
 To become reconciled with one an- 
 other. 
 
 To di.-solve a contest between one an- 
 other, to become reconciled toge- 
 ther. 
 
 To combat together with the sword. 
 
 To smite one another. 
 
 To stretch across together, to contend 
 together. 
 
 To contend together in using the bow. 
 
 To reflect together with one's self, to 
 pontler in one's own mind. 
 
 To deposit \\-ith another. 
 
 To di.^solve a contest between one an- 
 otlier, to become reconciled toge- 
 ther. 
 
 To commune together. 
 
 To contend together. ■ 
 
 To reflect together with one's self, to 
 deliberate in one's own mind. 
 
 > Thid verl) is more frrquontly found with the signilication of the first 
 cla.'«a, as harttviaOat, td cxiTt one's .self, to urge. 
 
 ' The various meanings of tliis verl), and the connexion suhsisting hc- 
 twtvii ihem, are worthy of the student's notiee. 'I'luis, κ^ινω, I ^tpariiie, 
 I e«'|iar.ite the various partieulars of a case, 1 consider tlieni seiwralely, I 
 jMisa iin i>|>inion u|K)n tlieni, I jtitl^e, I comleriin: κρίνομαι, I separate niy- 
 eelf, I wjiarate niyiu'if in Imltli• tron> otliers, (for example), I distinguish 
 niyscif in haltle, i. e. I βι^ΙιΙ strenuously, &c. Vid. αιτοίρπω, ill the cx- 
 aui]>los of the llrnt clues of middle verU•. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 179 
 
 ΜαξνΒίίύαι, 
 
 ΣίΓονδο'ίΌι£ι3'<)αι, 
 Σ-.νΓίόϊίόαι, 
 
 To revile one another. 
 To contend together. 
 
 η )) 53 
 
 To make (peace) together. 
 To make hbations together, to make a 
 mutual treaty. 
 
 )) » Η 
 
 To agree together. 
 
 12. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FIFTH CLASS OF 
 MIDDLE ΛΈΕΒδ. 
 
 Ανκμναίίίαι τι, 
 
 A'l'oousCiai τι, 
 
 EvSustfdai τ;, 
 Kii|ei(ia» κομην, 
 Ko'iTTStf^ai τίνα, 
 AoDStfiiai ίωμα, 
 Λυίίίίαι ^ωνην, 
 Mvacdai τι, 
 ?ν i-TTScTOai χΒίξας, 
 Οξεγΐαύαι τι, 
 Us^aio-oduai τοταμον, 
 
 ΣτεοανουίΤίαι κεφαλήν, 
 Στ-φεΰίαι κεφαλήν, 
 ΦοξϊΚίίαι τ;, 
 Φϋλαττ2<τ3ϋΐι τι, 
 
 Το recall any thing to one's own re- 
 collection. 
 
 To strip any thing oil one's self. 
 
 To wash one's own hands. 
 
 To put any thing on one's self. 
 
 To cut one's own hair. 
 
 To mourn for a person. 
 
 To Λvash one's own body. . 
 
 To loosen one's own gii'dle 
 
 (See ανοψ-ναΰβαι.) 
 
 (See (xwovcTrTsrfdai.) 
 
 To desire any thing. 
 
 To ferr}^ one's self across a river, to 
 cross a river. 
 
 To croAvn one's own head. 
 
 !) J) ) 
 
 To fear any thing. 
 
 To guard one's self against any thing, 
 
 to be on one's guard against any 
 
 thino•. 
 
 3 This verb is very rarely found with the signification of this ckss oi 
 middle verbs, but almost always with that of the second. 
 
ΙβΟ GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 7Ea:ses of the middle voice. 
 
 1. 
 
 The proper signification of the Middle Voice is most appa- 
 rent, as has been remarked, in the Aorists, especially the first. 
 In the present and imperfect the distmction betΛ\•een the pas- 
 sive and mitldle voices is often indeterminate, as the form in 
 both is exactly the same. 
 
 2. 
 
 The future middle has usually the sense of the active, also 
 sometimes of the passive. The future passive, on the contra- 
 ry, has seldom if ever the signification of the middle. 
 
 In many verbs the aorist passive has also a middle signifi- 
 cation ; as xaTakXivHtfoai, Mid. to lay one^s self clown ; xarsxXi- 
 όην, / laid myself down : αΊΤαΧΚαττεΰόαι, Mid. ίο depart, {send 
 one's self away) : ατηλλαχην, / departed. The same holds 
 good in irf^aiou, φοβίω, Teidw, χοιμαω, ο^β^ω, ατοχ^ινω, αίχω, 
 
 4. 
 
 In such verbs as those, where the aorist passive has a mid- 
 dle signification, the aorist middle is generally obsolete or rare. 
 Sometimes, however, it has one of the significations of the 
 verb appropriated to itself, and the passive aorist another. 
 Tl^is, tlie aorist passive ίς-αληναι, is attached with the medial 
 si,gnificatiun to dTsKksdiai, to journey ; whereas cfTEiXaffuai, the 
 proper aorist middle, belongs only to (Ττβλλίίόαι, ίο clothe ons^s 
 eelf, or send for. 
 
 5. 
 
 The perfect middle is called by the grammarians of the 
 present day, the second perfect active. They maintain that 
 k novcr has the signification of the middle, but ahva3's that 
 of the active voice ; and that this signification is an intranei- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 181 
 
 live one. This d'^^trine does not appear to be well founded. 
 That in some verbs we find the perfect middle supplying 
 the place of the perfect active, is readily admitted ; as, εκτονα, 
 αχηχοα, εί'πΌξα, λελοιτα, <ηε:ρυγοι, οιία, ιε-τονΰα, τΐτολα, είτο^^α. 
 ίη these verbs, however, the perfect active is obsolete on. 
 account of euphony, and therefore, it is conceived, no argu- 
 ment v/hateyer can be deduced from the use of these middle 
 perfects, which can have a bearing on the present quesiion.7 
 In the case of other verbs, the peculiar meaning of the perfect 
 middle may easily be recognized. The following examples 
 will serve to illustrate this remark : to understand the mode in 
 which the last meaning is obtained, the student must bear in 
 mind merelj- the peculiar force of the perfect tense of the verb, 
 in all the voices ; viz. its reference to an action already done, 
 but continued in its relations and consequences to the present 
 time, in other words, its reference to continued action, . ' 
 
 AyvuiAi, I break. 
 Αν•ο;^ω, I open. 
 
 E/Si^w, I waken. 
 ΕλίΤΜ, I give hope. 
 Ολλυμι, I destroy. 
 Πείθω, I persuade. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 Perf middle, zu.ya., I have caused my- 
 self to be broken, (by not offering, 
 for example, sufficient resistance,) 
 and I continue broken, i. e. / arti 
 broken. \ 
 
 Perf middle, ανεω/α, I have caused 
 myself to be stood open, (speaking, 
 for example, of a door wliich does 
 not offer sufficient resistance in re- 
 maining shut,) and I continue open, 
 i. e. I stand open. 
 
 Perf middle, εγξνιγοξοι., I have wakened 
 mj'self and continue awake, i. e. I 
 am aivake. 
 
 Perf middle, εολ-τα, I have given my- 
 self hopes, and I continue in hopes, 
 i. e. / hope. 
 
 Perf middle, ολωλα, I have destroyed, 
 ruined myself, and ί continue ruined, 
 i. e. I am undone. 
 
 Perf niiddle, ίτειτοι^α, I have persuaded 
 myself and I continue persuaded, 
 i. e. I rely upon, trust, confide, (in 
 
 α 
 
162 
 
 CHEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 another, for example, in whose argu- 
 ments or assertions I have persuaded 
 myself lo acquiesce, or whose wishes 
 or commands I have persuaded my- 
 self to obey.) I 
 
 Πηχνυμ*, I fix. Peif middle, •χ'.'τψ/α, I have fixed my- 
 
 self and continue fixed, i. e. I am 
 fixed. 
 
 ϋ^αο'β'ω, I do. Perf. middle, •:ηκξαγα, I have caused 
 
 myself to do, I have acted in such a 
 way as to do ; ffSir^aya χαΧως, I have 
 caused m3'self to do weU, I have 
 acted in such a \va.y as to do well, 
 and I continue doing well, i. e. / do 
 well, I am fortunate, or prosperous. 
 
 Φαινι*, I show. Perf. middle, *εφηνα, I have shown my- 
 
 self and continue shown, i. e. I appear. 
 
 Mevcj, I remain. Perf middle, μίμονα, I have caused my- 
 
 self to remain, and 1 coutinue remain- 
 ing, i. e. / persevere — (stronger in its 
 meaning than the perfect active, 
 μίμενηχα, which signifies simply, / 
 have remained.) 
 
 The list might be still farther extended, but a sufficient 
 number of examples have been cited, it is conceived, to show 
 that the perfect middle, in numerous instances, has the true 
 signification of its voice ; and to make it fully ai)parcnt, how 
 very unphilosophical it is, and how much at variance with the 
 principles of the language, to maintain that the perfect middle 
 ia nierely neuter in its signification, when that very neuter 
 meaning can only be deduced from, and is in fact based upon 
 the peculiar meaning of the middle voice. 
 
 6. 
 
 The perfect and pluperfect passive are sometimes used in a 
 middle sense. This is the case when the conesponding mid- 
 dltt tenses are either obsolete or used for those of the active 
 voice. Vid. page 181. 
 
STATEMENT OF SOME OPINIONS 
 
 .RESPECTING THE 
 
 GREEK ACCENT. 
 
 (From the Museum Criticum, No. 5, pp. 65— 69.) 
 
 The question respecting Ihe pronnnciation of the Greek 
 language has divided itself into two distinct parts ; one relating 
 to the sound of the νοΛνεΙβ, diphthongs, and consonants ; the 
 other referring to the manner which should be adopted in the 
 prolation of words Avith a proper regard to accent. In the 
 controversy which arose on the former part of the subject, 
 many scholars of the continent Λvere engaged : among our 
 own countrymen, Bishop Gardiner, Professor Cheke, and Sir 
 T. Smith, took the most active part. The diversity of opinion 
 which has been entertained on the expediency or inutility of 
 attending to the information pointed out by the Greek accents, 
 has produced many treatises. The works of Primatt, Gaily, 
 Foster, Horsley, and Mitford, are those of our own couniiy, 
 which contain the most detailed information on the subject. 
 
 It is probable, that on neither one nor the other of these 
 questions will the learned world ever come to an entire agree- 
 ment ; accents will still be considered by many, " mute and 
 unmeaning marks" — (Gibbon) : nor will the most strenuous 
 advocates for the use of them either understand clearly, or be 
 able to explain to others satisfactorily, " that secret power of 
 harmony and tone,"' which was so pleasing to the ear of a 
 Greek. With respect to the pronunciation of the letters of the 
 language, the various nations of Europe diifer from each other, 
 
 » Milton. 
 
Id-i GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 and all (Jifler in a greater or less degree from the right mode. 
 In England, wc arc almost singular m the erroneous and \-i- 
 tiated pronunciation of some It-uers : '• Wc EngUshmen," 
 Bays Milton, in his 'IVactate on Education, " being northerly 
 do not open our niou{h in the colj air wide enough to grace 
 a southern tongue." — Scaligcr was once complimented by an 
 Irishman in Latin, but the sound of the words was so unlike 
 any tiling to which the ears of that scholar Lad been accus- 
 tomed, that he supposed the stranger was arldrcssing him in 
 his native idiom ; luVd in answer to liis address, he replied — 
 Doviine. non i.itci^igu Irlundke. If it coidd be pjssible to cite 
 the best Echoitxr.3 in Europe before the ΙΙλίκια at Athens, or 
 the assembled senate of Rome, we suspect that few entire 
 sentences of a pleading of Isreiis, or a A'errine oration, would 
 be so spoken by them, as to be comprehended by their audi- 
 ence. — These questions must, from the nature of them, con- 
 tinue to be involved in doubt and obscurity ; and although 
 some hghl may be tlirown upon them from what Ave find ia 
 Dionysius of Hahcarnassus, and giammarians and scholiasts, 
 yet there will be many things, which, to use the words of 
 Sanctius,_/i/^;cH/ nos:ras avrcs. 
 
 The first opponent of the propriety of accents was Isaac 
 Vossius ; for it does not appear that Scaliger doubted whe- 
 ther these virgula were properly placed, as we find them ; 
 he ob.served only, that if the nice tonical pronunciation of 
 the ancients could be expresscil by a moilern, it would be 
 disagreeable to our ears — (Foster). But Vossius questioned 
 their situation upon the words, and thinking them inconsis- 
 »•ίοηΐ with the short syllable?, he removed them to those v.-hich 
 were long. 
 
 It has been remarked, that in examining the question con- 
 cerning the use of accents, we ought to attend to the testi- 
 monies which the ancients themselves atTord, for they alone 
 are competent to give propia• evidence on the subject. Did 
 they, then, consider them as opposed to quantity 1 The de- 
 fenders of the accents answer in the negative ; for quantity is 
 the foundation on which the accentual system stands ; it is 
 the circumstance which tiie most general rules for the scat, or 
 species of accent, regard — (llors. 39). " The ancient Attics, 
 eays Eustathius, (Od. H. p. 2S4), made the final a of such 
 words long ; wficrc/ure they acutcd their penultima, and said 
 riyvoia" — (Foster, 339). 
 
 The opjxjnents of the accents say, that in the time of 
 Aristophanes the graimnarian, and his immediate successors, 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 1S5 
 
 they were placed according to quantity ; but that afterwards, 
 the grammarians departed from that system, used tliem in a 
 different manner, and assigned to them their actual position. 
 Vossius contended, that until tiie time of Antoninus and 
 Comraodas, and indeed to the seventh centurj^, accents and 
 quantity agreed ; and that the marks Λvere employed for 
 instruction in metre. But the observations of iElius Diony- 
 sius, Apollonius, Herodian, and other critics of the time of 
 Hadrian, show that they read their copies of the ancient 
 writers by the same visible notation of accent which was 
 used by the grammarians of Alexandria ; and the scholiasts 
 and commentators of subsequent ages to the times of Eus- 
 tathius, Lascaris, Gaza, agree Avilh those who preceded them. 
 The chain of evidence on this part of the subject is unbroken. 
 
 Bishop Horsley endeavoured to show, that the accentual 
 sj'stem, as handed do\vn to us, was not phonetical merely, 
 before the time of Aristophanes, but was a written notation 
 used in Greece. The decision of this point does not appear 
 very important. If it be asked why accents were not used 
 in writing, as in pronunciation, before the time of the Alex- 
 andrian critics, a visible notation, it is answered, was not 
 wanted : this was necessary at Alexandria, not at Athens ; 
 it was of use to strangers and the children of strangers leani- 
 ing Greek, but not to those Λνΐιο were acquainted with it as 
 a vernacular idiom. Mr. Blomfield has observed, that in 
 the Venetian Scholia, when mention is made of the gram- 
 marians who succeeded Aristophanes, they are said to use 
 the accentual marks ; but that nothing of the kind is stated, 
 when the names of those who li\'ed before him are referred 
 to : and this, he adds, is a strong presumptive proof in favour 
 of the common opinion, which ascribes the first introduction of 
 them to that, grammarian. 
 
 But accent (■jr^orfwiia), it is said, had a reference to music 
 only : it is defined, τόνο? *foi ov άίομεν. — This, it was replied, 
 is only one part of the definition ; the other adds, και <τους 
 Xoyous ιτοιούμε^α, which extends it to reading and speaking.^ 
 Dionj'sius also, when he mentions the constituent parts of 
 perfect writing or speaking, uses the Avords, τάΰΐΐς φων^?, ai 
 καλούμενα», cr^ οο'ωδίαι, διάφοροι, " different tones of voice that 
 are called accents." — They were musical marks. — Ans. This 
 is not true ; music had its own marks, namely, characters 
 
 a Foster, p. 6. 
 
 a2 
 
186 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 formrJ from alphabetical letters. (Hors. 37). — They were 
 metriral marks. — ./iijs. duantity bad its own separate marks. 
 The literary researches which are now aciivcly carried 
 on at Naples, will inform the learned world whether the 
 virgulre are observable in the Uerculanean AISS. A'illoi- 
 Bon,^ on the authority of Winkelrnann, quotes the word 
 OTKOTN, from the treatise of Phuodemus en Rhetoric, as 
 having• accents. They have been seeii on no in.<?cription of 
 the cursive character, of old date ; for that which was said to 
 have been discovered on a Vv^all at Ilerculaneum, is now con- 
 sidered by the best scholars on the confinent as rpurious. In 
 the following words, Avhich we give from Gruler, we fmd a 
 rare instance of an accented inscription in uncial letters : — 
 
 λιλιΊμω.χ 
 
 ΠΡΟΜϋΙΓΟΣ 
 
 ΝΩΣΛΣ. 
 
 Varionan Corrigenda, cccxlvii. 
 
 That the want of a visible notalion of them might sonic- 
 times lead to a misapprehension of a passage in the ancient 
 writers, is evident from the "instances quoted by H. Siopha- 
 nus, of the confusion of Λα^αλών, cWiaXuv, ίία^ολών, in a pa"^- 
 sage of Plato — (Fo.sfer, 341). Origen, we arc told, read the 
 words 0ΤΛΙΣ01ΧΩΓΑΖΙΝ as if they meant, " ΛΥοο to thee, 
 land of Zin," instead of " W^oe to thee, Chorazin." We may 
 add, that Jerome confoundeil a^voj and «^vrcr, "and under- 
 ftood by ΚΑΘΑΙΓΚί, .sH/ar/Zi/, (xadaijEr), wliL^n the meaning 
 of the passage requires xftJai^et, imundav't. — (G. AOssiu.•!, De 
 A. G. L. 2. c. 8). 
 
 It Avas contended by those Λνΐιο assertctl that accent affect- 
 ed the syllable over which it avjis placed, that the scholiast 
 on Hcpha'.siion quotes thi.s line of Homer in-the 12ih Iliad, 
 and adds, thai the acute in ojiv lengthens the first syllable. 
 
 Τ^ώ£5 ο' fjj;iyr)(7av, iVsi TJov μίόλον o^iv — 
 
 and that Eustaihius, on the line (Od. K. v. 60), B^v sip Λΐόλου 
 χλυτά ίώματα, ^nys, there is a violation of the metre, of which 
 the acute in A/jXou is to be the de^airs/a, the restorative re• 
 
 TroUg. !>. 11. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. • 187 
 
 medy. (Foster's Reply, 38).— ^/is. The scholiast's expla- 
 nation is Avrong-, upon this principle ; that If accent had 
 made any part of the doctrine of quantit}^, '' is strang-e that 
 Hephies'ijn, professing to treat on the uitter, should not 
 have mcmioned the former in the course of his work — 
 (Ilorsley, 137). With respect to Eustathius, it appears, says 
 Foster, that he was far from being satisfied \v'\(h. his own 
 explanation. The two. Avords were probably pronounced 
 ο-τφ^ν, AiojXou. The reader will fiml in Pvir. Gaisford's Hcphces- 
 lion, two passages, cited from EiL^taihius and Scaliger, res- 
 pecting the firstof these word3-^-(pp. 181, 182). 
 
 In examining the >vork of Dr. Gaily we may remark, 
 that a great part of it is irrelevant to the discussion of the 
 question between himself and Dr. Foster ; for he observes 
 towards the end of if, tiiat his chief object was to show, 
 '• that the Greek language cannot be prouQunced according 
 to qccent, i. e. according to that actite accent wlilch we 
 use, witiiont spoiling the quantit}•." This w'ould be readily 
 conceded by every one v.dio lias attended to the first prin- 
 ciples of the question ; becaiise, in our own, language, quan- 
 tity and accents usually go together ; " the longest syllable 
 in almost every word, being; that. .on -which the accent falls." 
 (Hors.p. 4). Dr. Gaily should have sho,wn that they were 
 not separated, nor separable jn the Greek language-! — If, as 
 he asserted, eleva.tion necessarily implied prolongation, some 
 one of the sjdlables ίη•λϊ7?, X-sj'Srtj.Xs^'Oiasva, must be long; 
 the acute must be placed on one of them ; but which would 
 be length3ned ? — (Foster, 25,5;. - 
 
 The prejudice against dip Greek accents. (; he defenders 
 of theni rentiark) seems to •havc'ansen from sui'-posmg that, 
 because in most modern; laiTguage's, a long lime is com- 
 monly conuec led with elevation of λ;οϊοο, they w^ere neces- 
 sarily connected in tJie lan.£>^;ages of Greece and Rome. 
 '■ You are deceived," ■ says , idelancihon, "if j^ou ^^J that 
 acute and long, or grave and short, are the same. The ge- 
 nerality of grammarian.s are apt to blunder wretchedly in 
 this aftair. ΑΠ long syllables are not acuied : in' Virg-ilhis, 
 Vir is lona", but not acuted ; nor are all acuted s^yllables 
 long; in VirgiHuSy gi is acuted, though short."— (Foster. 
 120). The distinction between accent and Vjuantity, in 
 Greek, as well as their vise in ordinary pronunciation and 
 discourse, are pointed out by Dionjsius in the following 
 passage : — " When we are taught our letters, we first learn 
 their names, then their forms and powers ; — after this," he 
 
188 CKEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 addi?, " we proceed to whole words, with their particular 
 modes and qualities : I mean the length and shortness of 
 them, and their accmts. — (Foster, 160). 
 
 In answer to a question asked bj Dr. G., whether an 
 acute accent may be sounded in such a manner, as will not 
 make the short syllable on which it is laid appear long ? — ■ 
 Dr. F. replied, that he Avoiild elevate and shorten the pe- 
 nultimate of χυ^ίου in the judgment of any c»r that can dis- 
 tinguish a high from a low tone, in as easj' and discernible 
 a manner as he could shorten the gra\'e pcnullima of maxi- 
 mos. He quoted Cheke's words, who said that many of his 
 Greek scholars were capable of expressing the true sound 
 of the letters, their quantit}', their accent, Avith great ease. 
 He had already referred to the words of Michaelis, who 
 approved of the opinion of Gesner, " that the accents do 
 not at all determine which S3'llable is to be pronounced 
 longest ; that the accent for instance οΐ ανίξωητος being placed 
 on the first syllable, doth not oblige us Jo pronounce the 
 wor<l as a dactyl : thus, as the Greeks spoke somewhat 
 more musically than we, they pronotmced some syllables 
 more distinctly than others ; they raised their tone and drop- 
 ped it ; and the accents are evidences of this." The learned 
 translator of Michaelis was informed by Professor Reiz, that 
 he had frequently heard Eugenius, a Greek priest, after- 
 wards Archbishop of Clierson, read Greek verse, and that he 
 marked by his proniuiciation both accent and quantity.— 
 J\Iurs/i's Mich., vol. 2, p. 901. 
 
 It is to be regretted that some of those eminent scholars 
 who were well qualified to treat this subject \vith great 
 accuracy and clearness, have only left us a few remarks 
 upon it. Eentlcy uses the words, Rntio hodie prcrposicra 
 atfjue perversa Grcecorum acccntnum. — (Epist. ad Miluum, p. 
 S2). He seems to have thought with Dawes, that the use 
 of them now would be wrong, because it would be difficult 
 to aji])ly them without vitiating the t[uantity of the syllables. 
 Bui whatever Avas his opinion in the passage we have cited, 
 in a later work, as Foster remarks, written professedly on 
 Metre and Rhythm, {de Terenl. metris,) he considers the 
 Greek accents as differing from the Lathi, Avithoul hinting 
 the least suspicion of their present visible sj-stem being vicious 
 or corrupted. 
 
 Valckenaer allowed that ihey Averc to be used, as being 
 necessary to " deti-rminea diversity of signification in words," 
 but was of opinion that no one verse of a poet, or sentence 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 189 
 
 of an orator, should be read according to them. — Vid. Dawes. 
 JMisc. Crit. edit. Burgess, p. 369. 
 
 D'Orville thought they were foniicrly used, non quantiiatis 
 indicandcs causa, sed ad proniuiliationcm ct rytJanum regendum, 
 Crit. Vann. p. 333. 
 
 The remarks of Gerard Yospius (c. 10, \. 2, de A. G.) 
 show that he thought the Romans shortened and sharperied 
 the penuhimate of calefacis, tepcfaciSy saying χαλεφκκι?, ts-its• 
 φάχις, but that the- moderns either pronounce χαλεφακι?, 'rs'irs- 
 (paxij, or καλεφαχι?, τειτέφ^'χΐζ ; similar errors, he says, pervade 
 our pronunciation, of Greek. Jludic guisquis Podce aUcujus 
 versus recital, aut accentus tanium rationem habet, aut solum quan- 
 tiiatis. Veteres, vae judice, longe aliter, qui uiriusque rationem 
 habehant.. 
 
 Markland, in a letter to Dr. Taylor, thinks they ΛνοΓβ 
 designed by those who left Greece to settle in a nation of a dif- 
 ferent tongue, and were desirous that their children or succes- 
 sors should continue in the knowledge or use of speaking the 
 Greek language. 
 
 Those who have directed their attention to the subject of 
 accent, cannot have forgotten the two remarks m.ade by one of 
 the most judicious and accurate scholars of modern times : — - 
 Ου, the negative particle, vv^as pronounced, in the age of Aris- 
 totle, οξυτόνω?, but we never find it acuted in the middle of a 
 sentence : again, the same particle ou, and the adverb w, aspe- 
 rate and circumfiexed, were confounded in pronunciation in 
 .Aristotle's time. — {Tyrwhitt in Aristot. Poet. sec. 46). As 
 nothing can be collected from the treatises on accent which we 
 have examined, we should be glad to see some solution of 
 these difficulties. 
 
 If, after all that has been written, we might venture to offer 
 an opinion, we .should say that the pronunciation, according 
 to the marks invented by Aristophanes, was attended to by 
 the Alexandrians and their successors ; that a gradual abuse 
 of the povver of the acute was introduced, and at last prevailed 
 to a great degree. Part of the evidence which we should 
 bring to prove this, would be taken from many verses in 
 Greek, in which Λve find the acute lengthening the s}• liable 
 over which it is placed. That this tone, in the days of the 
 scholiast on Hephaestion, and of Eustathius, was considered 
 by some as afFeciing the metre, is evident from the passages 
 we have referred to. We have no doubt, that if we were to 
 attempt to use the accents, the same erroneous pronimciation 
 would be adopted, which has been established among the 
 Greeks for many centuries. If a modern Greek was to recite 
 
190 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 the following vcr.=e of Archilochus, it λνουΐιΐ be impossible to 
 discover the second and fourth iambic feet: cf-rapae'vos <5t' όδτέων. 
 In alterutrum vitium incidtbant omnes, gui, me audiente, acccntuum 
 vim in Graca ling-u<E pronuntiatione exprimere conati sunt ; aiU 
 eniin, voce sublaia el sbno inteniiore vocalem producebant ; aiU ictu 
 vel iinpelu quodam vehetncntiore articulandi, consonatUem sccutam 
 co/iduplicabaiU. — (Knight, Proleg. 8S.) 
 
 The abuse of the accents in their poetical compositions, is 
 one of long standing among the Greeks, and must have arisen 
 from a wrong application of them in common discourse. Mr. 
 IVhlfard remarks, " that we arc no way positively assured 
 U'hetJier the Greek restorers of Grecian learning in the ΛνεεΙ, 
 expressed exactly the ancient quantities of syllables j but \vc 
 know that in poetical couipoiilion they Avere justly attentive 
 lo them." We cannot agree \vith him in this observation, 
 because instances of metncal inaccuracy may be found not 
 only in the writings of C Lascaris and Piiilclphus, but in the 
 works of Greeks who preceded ihem more than a thousand 
 years. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE GREEK SYNTAX. 
 
 1. GENITIVE. 
 
 The Greek language takes a much wider range in its use 
 of the genitive case than the Latin. In Greek, words of ali 
 kinds may be foHowed by other words in the genitive, when 
 tlie latter class limit and show in what respect the meaning of 
 the former is to be taken. 
 
 In the case of Verbs : as ΚΆψαιοί 5s, us ι^οδων ειχον, εβο-ηδεον, 
 " the Athenians brought relief, as they had themselves toith 
 respect to their feet" i. e. " as fast as they could run ;" kcikus 
 εχειν μϊ^η?, " to have one's self well with respect to intoxica- 
 tion," i. e. " to be pretty drunk ;" ώ^ εγ,ατ'ίξος rtg εύνοιας η μνή- 
 μην εχοι, " as each one had himself with respect to favour or re- 
 membrance," i. e. " as each one wished well to a party, or re- 
 membered the past ;" ευ ήχειν του /3iou, " to have come on well 
 with respect to the means of subsistence," i. e. " to be in pros- 
 perous circumstances ;" ειτειγεαθαι α,ξΥιος, " to urge one's self 
 an with respect to the fight," i. e. " to be eager for the fight ;" 
 ανιεναι <rr)g εφοίου, " to slacken with respect to one's approach," 
 i. e. " to slacken in one's approach ;" ο'φαλλβίΤ^αιελ'τηίοί, " to 
 be deceived luith respect to hope," i. e. " to be deceived in one's 
 hope ;" κατεαγα της κεφαλή?, " I am broken loiih respect to my 
 head," i, e. " I have broken my head." 
 
 In the case of Adjectives : as (ΐ'υχ^νωμων των ανί^ω-ηΊνων αμαξ* 
 βημάτων, " forgiving with respect to human errors ;" α^αΐζ 
 «^tfsvoc yovou, " cliildiess with respeci to male offspring ;" 
 
192 GRKKK EXEHCISES. ΑΡΓΕΝΟΙΧ. 
 
 Γΐμηί αη,αο^ 'καΠγς s(Stu^ "Jet liiin be unlionoured with re- 
 spect to all honours," i. e. " let all respect be denied him ;" 
 tyj\)S <ry\g -zo^euic, near with respect to the city," i. e. " near 
 the city;" ξυνί^τείον ες τούτο ανα^χ-ΐ!?, ''they fell into this 
 vit/t respect to necessity," i. e. " they fell into such nec.es- 
 sily;" ες toJouto μΐοΌυ? ηλίον, " ibey came to so much wtVA 
 respect to hatred," i. e. " they feli into so much hatred ;" 
 £v To'jTu τα^'αο'χευ»!? η7αν, " they were in tliis state with re- 
 spect to preparation," i. e. " tliey were in this state of pre- 
 paration ;" y-n cXsia xaxuv, " a land fall toith respect to enls," 
 i. e. " full of evils ;" ύξμ,α χενον τ,Μίο-χου, " a chariot empty with 
 respect ίο a driver," i. e. " Λvithout a driver ;" μίΐ^ων τατξος, 
 " greater ιοϊίΊ respect to his father," i. e. " greater than liis fa- 
 ther." 
 
 The giinciples to be deduced from all this, are easy and 
 natural. 
 
 1. That all words which represent a situation or opera- 
 tion of the rnind, which is directed to an object, but without 
 afTectlng if, are followed by a genitive ; such are, the verbs 
 " to remember," " to forget," " to concern one's self about any 
 thintr," " to neglect," " to consider," " to reflect," " to undcr- 
 Ktanii," " to be desirous of," 6ic. ; the adjectives " experienc- 
 ed," " ignorant," " remembering," " desirous," a:c. 
 
 2. All words which indicate fulness, to be full, defect, 
 emptintss, are followed by a genitive ; because the worcl 
 which expresses of what any thing is full, or empty, indicates 
 the respect in which the signification of the governing word 
 is taken. Under this head fall the adjectives "full," " rich," 
 ♦'abounding in," "empty," "deprived of," "destitute of;" 
 thn verbs ""'to fdl," "to 'want," "to bereave," " to deliver," 
 " to desist from," " to cease from ;" adverbs denoting abund- 
 ance, want< sufficiency, deprivation", &c. 
 
 3. The .'^amc original signification of the genitive appears 
 to be the basis of the construction of the comparative with 
 the geniii e : thus μ£ΐ£ ων «τατ^ο^ signified, " greater with 
 respect to his father." From this construction, all words 
 which involved a comparison, took the object of this com- 
 pari-^iin in the genitive: such are verbs which tigiiify " to 
 surpa.^ii," or the contrary, " to be surpassed," " to be infe- 
 rior to another ;" as -χεζίγηομω, ήτταομαι, «Sec. ; those also 
 
GREEK EXERCISES.— APPENDIX. IS^ 
 
 which signify " to rule," or the opposite, together wdth 
 many verbs which are derived from substantives, and are 
 equivalent to the primitive with the substantive verb ; as 
 κυ^ιευ£ΐυ, («ufioj είναι) ; κοι|ανειν, (xoi^avog είναι) ; α^χειν, {α.ξ-χΐΜ 
 είναι) : — such again are adjectives and substantives in which 
 the same itlca of governing is in)plied ; us ε^κραττ)^ ηδονής, 
 " master over pleasure ;" τ^ττων ήδονη?, " a slave to pleasure |" 
 ήττα του ιτομ-ατος, " defeat by means of drinking," i. e. " iriF 
 temperance in drinking ;" εχκ^ατεια ίτονου, " mastery over la« 
 hour." 
 
 To this same head must be referred all Λvords which im- 
 ply a comparison with respect to value^ or require a defini- 
 tion of value ; as άξιο?, wliich properly signifies " equiva- 
 lent," " equal in value ;" so that άξιον τούτου, which we com- 
 monly render " worthy of this," strictly rendered would be, 
 " equal in value loith respect to this." Hence too the adjective 
 ανάξιο?, and the adverbial forms αξιω? and αναξιω? take the 
 genitive ; and hence moreover this case is joined with all words 
 in. which a determmation of value is contained ; as, for exam- 
 ple, verbs signifying " to buy," " to sell," " to exchange," &c. 
 On this is foundeil the general rule — " The price of a thing is 
 put in the genitive." , 
 
 And lastlj'•, to this head belong all words which express a 
 difference^ and in which, of course, a comparison is imphed, 
 as ίιαφο^ο?, ϊ-εξος, άλλο?, αλλοιο?, αλλότριο? : as διαφοξον τούτου, 
 " diiferent tcitk respect to this," i. e. " different fi-om this ;'* 
 έτερον τούτου, " other with respect to this," i. e. " other thaa 
 this." 
 
 4. From the meaning of the genitive "ivith respect to" 
 we deduce also the general meaning ,of the cause of any 
 thing's being done, in which case the genitive is to be ren- 
 dered by " on account of" Thus with verbs : Δαναών κεχο- 
 λωμενοι, " enraged on account of the Greeks," i. e. " with 
 the Greeks ;" 'κενθιχως εχουία του αδελφού τεόνηκοτο?, " melan- 
 choly on account of the death of her brother;" φΟονειν τινι 
 οΌφια?, " to envy any one on account of wisdom ;" ονεκίκΤαι tcj 
 βεοο τούτων, " to upbraid the god on account of these things." 
 Hence the genitive is foimd with verbs signifying " to ac- 
 cuse," " to criminate," with verbs of praying, with verbs of 
 beginning, the genitive being that of the person or thing, on 
 account of which the accusation is made, the prayer oif'^red 
 lap, or the affair begun. So too the genitive stands alone 
 ia exciamaiions with and without an interjection, or a wor4 
 
 R 
 
194 GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX." 
 
 that i.'xpresses adiniration, indiirnation, compassion, &c. ; as 
 AffoA.Xov, του ■χ^α.ίμ.τιμ.ατος, " Apollo ! what a swallow !" Ω Zrj 
 /ίαίιλευ, τη? λίττοτητοί των (pievcjv, " Ο king• Jupiter ! the aciite- 
 ness of his miml !" Ύτ,ς τυχ/,?, " the misfortune !" In all 
 the instances above enumerated under this head, however, 
 artd in others of a similar nature, the grammarians supply 
 Jvexa, or some equivalent term. ι 
 
 Π. '■ 
 
 i The second principal relation which is expressed by tho 
 genitive, is that of the proportion of a Avhole lo its parts, in 
 other words, the genitive is put partitively. This use is 
 •ommon to the Greek, the Latin, and other languages, ex- 
 tcpl that in Greek it has a much more extensive range. 
 Thus in the latter language the genitive is put with verbs 
 tff all kinds, even w^ith those which govern the accusative, 
 when the action does not refer to the whole object, but ordy 
 to a part. This is expressed in Engli.-;h by the omission of 
 the article in the singular, or by the word "some;" as 
 vaicis δ' ΰλος, " he sprinkled salt over it ;" oirTr,(fai χρίων, " to 
 foast some of the flesh ;" ε/ω oiSa των εμων ήλ/χιωτων, " I know 
 some of those of the same age with myself;" αναόίιν των ται. 
 νιων τον Σωχρατη, " to bind Socrates with some of the fillets ;" 
 «"^.c 711? ετίμον, " they laid Λva3te a part of the land." On the 
 kke princijile the genitive is put Avith many other ^•orbs which 
 signify participation, or in which at loast this idea is im]ilied : 
 euch are the verbs μίτεχίιν, κοινωνην, ΟΊιλλαμ,βανειν, μετίίτι, 
 ΐΓ^οίΤηχίιν, μετα(5ΐ!5οναι, α-τολαυειν, &c. 
 
 Upon this principle of the reference to a part, is founded 
 Uie construction by which, with the verbs " to take," " lo 
 seize," " to touch," " to carry," a:c. the part by which any 
 thing• is taken is put in the genitive, while the whule is put 
 in the accusative; as ελαβοντο τη^ ^ωνη^ τον Ο^οντην, " they 
 took ( )runtes by the girdle." The same construction is ro- 
 taineil also with the verbs which signify the oppo.-ile of to 
 take, or to seize, viz. " to let go," " to loo.se," " not to obtain 
 5nv thing," " to miss," &c. ; as αφιεται του Jo^aro.c, "he leta 
 go til•• spoar ;" while αφιεναι το δοξυ, in the accusative, would 
 iignifv, " he hurls the spear ;" in the first, reference being made 
 to a fiarl — in the latter, lo the tvhole. 
 
 Upon this principle also arises the construction of the su- 
 firlative with the genitive, that .^iubstantive being i)ut in ihi* 
 eaee which marks the class from which the supevlaiive lakee 
 the chief est as a part. 
 
GREEK KXERCISES. APPENDIX. 195 
 
 in. 
 
 ^' Tlie genitive is used also to mark the person or thing to 
 which any thing belongs, whether it be a property or quahty, 
 habit, duty, &lc. ; and those also from which any thing arisoe. 
 Probably here also an obscure idea of the relation of this qtia- 
 lity, duty, &c. to that which possesses it, as-of a part to the 
 whole, is the basis of the construction. Hence the common 
 rules, that " verbs denoiing possession, property, duty, &c. go- 
 vern the genitive," and that the " material oi which any thing 
 is made is put in the geniiive." 
 
 IV. 
 
 The genitive is also put with verbs compounded with pre- 
 positions which govern the genitive, that is to say, when these 
 prepositions may be separated from the verb, and placed in> 
 mediately before the case, Λvithoαt altering the signification of 
 the verb ; as αντιτα^ίχειν τι τίνος, for ΐίαξε-χ^ειν τι αντί τινο^ ; 
 α'τΤο'τΤηδαν άρματος, for •π-ηδαν αφ' άλματος ; εξί^χείθαι οικίας, fos 
 εξχ_ειΐόαι sg οικίας : not, however, αντιλε^'ειν τίνος, " to contra- 
 dict any one," for τινι, becatise λε^ειυ αντί τίνος would give an 
 entirely dilferent sense, " to speak in the place of any one." 
 
 V. • 
 
 Tlie genitive serves also to determine place and time, m 
 answer to the questions, " where ?" " Λvhen ?" &c. Hence 
 the adverbs oD, irou, όίτου, loherel which are in fact old.^e-- 
 niiives. 
 
 2. DATIVK 
 
 The Dative in Greek expresses two senses, one that of the 
 dative in other languages, answering to the question, " to 
 ΛνΙιοηΊ 1" and one that of the Latin ablative. 
 
 1. The dative expresses the distant object of a transitive or 
 intransitive action, with reference to Avhich this action takes 
 place. It answers thus in most cases, as in Latin and Eng- 
 lish, to the question "toAvhonn?" as ίιίοναι τι τινι, " to give 
 any thing to any one ;" «ττει^εο'ίαι τινι, " to obey any one." 
 Thus also with adjectives : φίλος τινι, ιχ6ξος τινι, εονους τινι, &c. 
 Α larger proportion of verbs, however, are joined with the 
 dative in Greek than in Latin. 
 
196 GREEK EXLKClStS. APPENDIX. 
 
 II. 
 
 The Greek dative also supplies the place of the Latin abla- 
 tive, and in this case expresses tb^ relation of the connection 
 or companionship to the qiiestions '• wherewith ?" of an instru- 
 ment Of mean to the question " whereby?" of an impulse or 
 excitement, " froin what ?" of an external cause, '• by what 
 means ?" " on what account 1" " for what 1" &c. 
 
 III. 
 
 The dative expresses the relation of the tncasiirc, degree. 
 Arc. wiih the comparative. Hence the dutivos wsXX^, ύ^ιγφ, 
 β^α-χει, wiih the comparative. 
 
 IV. 
 
 It is put in deftnitions of time and place, in answer to the 
 question " when 1 and where 1" 
 
 3. ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The accusative, as in other languages, marks the person 
 or thing which is aflected by the action of the accompanying 
 verb, i. e. which suffers a change of any kind. 'I'he verbs 
 which govern an accusative are hence called verbs aclive or 
 transitive, i. e. which show an action passing on to an object, 
 and affecting and determining it in any actual manner. There 
 are, however, other verbs not properly transitive, which yet 
 govern an accusative in Greek ; tliis is particularly the case 
 in iho.^e verbs which do not mark the passive object of the ac- 
 tion, but the object to which an action has only generally au 
 bnmcdiate reference ; as cr^otfxuvfiv, ίο^υφο^ειν, ffftsiv, TjoCcj^jiv, 
 φίανίΐν, επΓ^οτευίιν, βτιλειιτειν, «kc. In these and others of a 
 similar nature, the construction with the dative ΛνοηΜ appear 
 to be the most natural one. 
 
 n. ' 
 
 Many verbs which signify' an emotion, a feeling, with re- 
 ganl to an object, as, " to bo ashamed," " aiiaid," " to 
 com{>assionalc iuiy one," are accompanied by an accusative, 
 which expresses the object, and at the same time the effec- 
 tive cause of this emotion ; as, ακίχυνομοι τον Θεον, " 1 revere 
 the Deity ;" αιδεκτίαι ιανζ αργονταζ, " Ιο respect rulers j" ί«οι>»- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX. 197 
 
 τίίξο viv, " I compassionate him ;" ύμα^ ελέω, " Ι pity you.** 
 The same takes place \vith some neuter verbs which express 
 iin emotion, ahhough, even without indicating the object, 
 tliey convey a perfect idea ; such are aXystv, ^ηόείν, ειτ»χα*- 
 ξει -j, &c. 
 
 Many verbs have the accusative not only of the nearer 
 and more immediate object of the action, but also of the 
 more remote object of it, i. c. the person or thing to ΛνΜοΙι 
 the action with its immediate object passes, which in Eng- 
 hsh is generally expressed by a dative ; as ευ or χαχως 'κοιαν 
 τίνα, " to do good or harm to any one ;" ευ or χαχως Χεγειν τίνα, 
 " to speak well or ill of any one." Hence these verbs often 
 take two accusatives at the same lime : such are •π-&(ειν, irpar. 
 τείν, δξαν, εξδϊιν, " to do :" λέγειν, ειπείν, αχο^ευειν, " to speak of 
 or against ;" ε^ωταν, " to ask ;" α*αίτειν, " to ask ;" " to re- 
 quire," " to desire ;" αφαίξεκίύαι, αιτούτΐξειν, &c. " to take away," 
 " to deprive of a thing ;" MadASiv, " to teach ;" εχδυααι, εν^κίαι, 
 "to put off" or "on," &c. 
 
 Other uses of the accusative have been enumerated under 
 the rules of syntax. 
 
APPENDIX II 
 
 NOTES ON THE RULES OF SYNTAX 
 
 Given in the Commencement of the Volume. 
 
 The object of the following Notes is merely to remo%*e 
 such little difficulties as might otherwise impede the pro- 
 gress of the learner. The doctrine of Ellipses, which was 
 resorted to in almost every instance by Dr. Neilson, in the 
 •dition of his Exercises from which the first American im- 
 pression was made, is here only retained in part. It appeared 
 far more advisable to refer the stiidunl as often as jx)ssihle to 
 the principles of grammatical solution, Avliich are laid down 
 in Appcivlix I. 
 
 Rile 1. 
 
 Καχων (•τ^α^ματων) των ir^i» (ovrcov) μνειαν εχειν. — Τα (χξτ,μΛ- 
 «•α) ίξ'^. — Εν ς-ω φρονειν. (t is from tlic infinitive, obsen'es 
 Harris, {Ilermcs, p. 164, n,) thus participating in the na- 
 ture of a noun or substantive, that the best granmiariane 
 have called it somclinies όνομα ^ηματιχον, a verbal noun ; some- 
 times όνομα ^ημαί-οί:, the verb's noun. The reason of this ap- 
 pellation, ho mhh, is in Greek more evident from its taking the 
 prrjxjsitive article before it in all cases. The same construe- 
 lion is not uidcnown m English : thus Spenser — 
 
 For not to have Ικτη (Γιρ|Μ<ϋ in Lflhc lako, 
 Could save the ηοπ υΓ Thrlw from lo die." 
 
 A*• τον iaveiv. In like manner we say, He did it, lo b€ rich^ 
 
OHEEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX Π. 199 
 
 where we must supply by an «'llipsis, the preposition for : 
 He did it- for to he rich, the same m-, if we had said, JIc did it 
 for gain : in Greek, ένεχα του "ττλουτειν, hsxa του χε^(5ο.υ?, in 
 French, pour s^enric/ier. Even in such sentences as the fol- 
 lowinij, / choose to philosophize, ra/hcr than to be rich, το φ<λο(ϊΌ- 
 φειν |βουλο,αα( μάλλον η το τλουτειν, ilie infinitives are in nature 
 as much accusatives as if we were to say, / choose philosophy 
 rather than riches, την φιλο(Τοίριαν /τ'ουλομαι, μάλλον η τον •τλουτον. 
 Thus too Priscian, speaking of infinitives, observes ; " Cur- 
 rere eni'm est cursus ; et scriberc, soiptura ; ei legere, lectio ; 
 itague freqixerder et nominibus adjnnguntur, et aliis casualibus, 
 Tiiore nominum ;" and soon after, '' cum enim dice, Bonum est 
 legere, nihil aliud significo, nisi, Bona est lectio." Lib. 48, p. 
 1130. 
 
 Ό (avilpwirog) ερχόμενο?. This mny also be rendered more 
 in accordance Aviih the Greek idiom, by the person coming. 
 In Laliii, however, the relative and indicative are always re- 
 quired in such expressions ; as, ό ε^'χ^μενοί, qui vcni't : u τυατων, 
 gui verherat. 
 
 T' avilfwirs/ov ^ενος τύ\ μεν (με^Ί'^ι) fx^/a^DV, ττ] L• (μεριίι) φκυλον. 
 The student must understand by I lie term partly, as emidoyed 
 in the language of the rule, that a reference is always made 
 in this use of the article to a division. Thus, ό μεν, ό L•, the 
 one, the other, or the former, the latter ; and so of the jilnral, 
 01 μει/, ol δε. This construction is based upon the original 
 pronominal meaning of the article ; thus, ό μεν α•7Γηλ<)εν, ό δε 
 εμεινεν ; the one departed, the other remained ; literally, t/lut one 
 indeed departed, but this one remained ; as in the Latin ill&—' 
 hie. 
 
 0^5ov [-χ^ξ^γιμα) ή αλήθεια αει. — ΊΙ 'τ(ατξ\ς φιλτατον (ρ^^ίμα) 
 βξοτοις. This construction is often imitated by the Lathi wri- 
 Icrs ; as, Triste lupus stabulis, supply negotium — Varium et mih 
 tabile semper femina — Triste maturis frugibus imbres — JJukt 
 sails humor, &c. 
 
 4. i 
 
 Ό θΌφο5 (ανκ]^).— Ή οξύη (Ιδοζ). — Τα εμ.α (■χξίηματα), 
 
 5. 
 
 Αόηνη Αιος τεκο^ (θυγατίξ) ατξυτωνη. — Ω ψυχή (οΌυ)" Ις μηδ* 
 ν^ηδ. Such is the grammatical mode of supplying those 
 
aOO GREEK EXERCISES. — ΛΓΡΕ.νΟΙΧ Π. 
 
 ellipses. I am inclined to think, however, that in all such 
 cases it is simpler to say, that the gender of the person^ and 
 not of the preceding noun, is considered. 
 
 6. 
 
 For οιομενοΛ» ajroi είναι flO;;;jraT&i, the nominative before the 
 infinitive, there being no change of person. 
 
 8. 
 
 This idiom is more observed by the Attics, than by the 
 older writers in the Ionic and Doric dialects. The latter often 
 join the neuter plural with a plural verb ; as, oote η νωϊ« hξx^a 
 etftfovTai, //. χ, 266 — αμήχανα ε>-/α. ^ενοντο, //. λ. 310. The 
 scholiasts on these passages observe that they are constructed 
 αζχαίχ^ς. The Attics also sometimes join the verb in the plu- 
 ral with the neuter plmal, especially in two cases ; I. AVhen 
 the neuter plural signifies Uving persons ; 2. When the abstraci 
 is put for the cmcrele, and animate creatures, not things, are 
 referred to. Perhaps the construction of neuters plural with 
 singular verbs may be accounted for on the principle of the 
 association of ideas ; neuter and inanimate objects being con- 
 eidered generally, but animate agents individually. 
 
 12. 
 
 The construction of the nominative with the infinitive de- 
 pends upon the principle of attraction, that is, upon the asso 
 ciation of ideas. 
 
 15. 
 
 For ΊΤζπς τούτοις a. Χίγει Ηενοφων — and οίτοί ffrn α\/&Ρ(>3*ος Ui 
 "Κεγίις. With reganl, however, to the antecedent's being 
 attracted into the same case with the relative, it may be 
 considered as nothing more than the full e.xpression of whal 
 is couuTionly uttered elliptically ; for the relative is in fact a 
 epecics of adjective, having its substantive alwa^'s under- 
 etooil, if iK>t expressed ; as οίτο; srfTiv avi?o>«ro5, όν ανί^ωτον 
 λίχίι;. So also in the passage oj-pj sdriv όν avsxc^ciktda Ιωαν• 
 νην, the full expression is, cutoj siTtiv Ιωάννης, όν Ιωαννην ατεχβ- 
 ψαΚκία. 
 
 18. 
 
 See the ob.^ervations of Emesti, Gcsner, and Gilbert Wak* 
 field, on the ilual used as a plural, refuted by Dalzol in tho 
 Botes of the second volume of the CoU. Alajora, pp. 36, 37. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. 201 
 
 19. 
 
 Eo'riv a'iPSra. (■χξημ.α.τα). — Τα διχαια [ητξαγμητα). When two 
 or more substantives are united by η, or, which reciprocally 
 exchide eacli other, the verb wliich is common lo them ia 
 sometimes in the phiral ; as, '^fus αν Πλάτων η Λη,αοίίθίνη^ 
 Οψωβ'αν, η εν ιίτο^ια Θουκυδίδη?. Longin. 14. So in Cicero, 
 Or. 2. 4. 16. ne Sulpicius — aut Coda plus qiiam ego apud te va- 
 le! e videantur. 
 
 20. 
 
 So in Latin ; tanta circa fa ga atque irepidaiio fuit : Liv. 21. 
 7. — figritia ei dssperatio in omnium vidiu eiTiineret. Id. 21. 35, 
 
 22. 
 
 To iratfiv a^Sifa» δυ<ίαξζ(ίτα.τον {εξγον) sdri. 
 
 24. 
 
 Similar to these are expressions both in our own and 
 other languages ; as, sea-water, icine-glass, steam-boat. The 
 only difference between the English and the Greek languages 
 in this respect is, that the former requires the qualifying noun 
 immediately to precede that which it limits, and be joined to 
 it by a hyphen, Λvhile the latter admits of their being uncon- 
 nected, and even separated by other words. The principle on 
 which this construction depends, however, is the same in all 
 languaires.; and proceeds from the great law of the human 
 mind, the association of ideas. The juxtaposition of two 
 terms suggests that one of them is a quality of the other ; 
 and hence the former losing its ΟΛνη independent meaning, as« 
 sumes the dependent character of an adjective, 
 
 26. 
 
 The grammarians commonly make a noun to be under- 
 stood in this construction, which governs the genitive : thus 
 the examples under the rule, when the ellipsis is thus sup- 
 plied, become. To Xwcrov (με^οί:) τη? Ί]\ΐΐΡα.ς. — To χξα.τιιϊ7ον {με- 
 ξος) φ(λο(Τος;ια<:. Α much more rational solution, however, ίβ 
 given in Appendix I., in the remarks on the genitive. 
 
 27. 
 
 Hence ΤΤατ?^ ή,αων in our Lord's Prayer, not Πατε^ ί;μετε^ί. 
 Tliis last would be emphatic, and convey a meaning which 
 is not intended : it would signify, our Father, as if God Λverβ 
 ft Father of only a pari of his creatures. Πα-ε^ ήμων, cm 
 
S02 GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX 11. 
 
 the contrary, expresses the true idea, Father of us, or, cnu 
 Father, i. e. Father of us all. 
 
 2S. 
 
 Δια^αξουβΊ τα εμα (χ^τ,μ,ατα) του χαχο5αιμονοί, foi' διαξναζον 
 it ΤΛ χ^η.αατα εμο^ του καχοίαιμονο^. 
 
 Ι ''■ . 
 
 The grammarians supply the elhpses as follows : — Έ-ξγο. 
 (αντί) ΐΓλϊίΤτου άξια. — Γΐ/μνα(7ια μΒ(ίτα {ιξ) ανό^οΑ. — (ΓΙ:"^ι) ύ» 
 νΡ96•4μος γ^ιίά' α£ΐ. See however Appendix I., Remarks on the 
 Genitive. 
 
 30. 
 
 AvaiTiof (ειτ') Oippotfuvyjg. — ΤΙ(,ξΐ<ίτκος (*ε|ι) ειτιτη^ειων. So the 
 grammarians supply the ellipses. See however Appendix 1. 
 
 31. 
 
 Oi ιταλαιοι (jx) των Ποιητών. — Μονό? (εκ) /3^οτων. — Οι νεώτεροι 
 (εξ) αν6ξωιτων ; and so of the rest. It is somewhat surprising 
 tliat they Λvho framed these ellipses, did not tliink of others 
 far simpler: thus, 01 ταλαιοι (τοι/,Γαι) των «πΌΐηί-ων. — jMovoff 
 (βξοτοζ) /3|οτων. — Ο) νεώτεροι (ανίβωτοι) αν(?Ρωτων — &c. That 
 is, " Tlio old poets among the poets." — '• The only mortal 
 among mortals'' — &c. The true principle, however, is laid 
 down in Appendix I. 
 
 32. 
 
 The preposition αντί, or *fo, is said to be understood, and to 
 govern this genitive. See however Appendix I. 
 
 35, 36. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Dative. The gramma- 
 rians pretend, that with the dative of the measure of excess, 
 βίΓΐ, or some preposition of equal force, is understood. 
 
 37. • -f 
 
 Ό ιτΐίραο'χομενοδ ';ηξου [κτηαα) ^ινε-αι. See however Ap- 
 pendix I. 
 
 38, 39, 40, 41. 
 
 The principle on which each of these ndes is based, has 
 already been explained in .Vppondix I. The roinarks there 
 made, apply with peculiar force to \'erbs which indicate an 
 operation of the extcrnftl senses. Since the subject of thorn 
 is not represented as affucted by them, α genitive in cons©- 
 
βΚεεΚ EXERCISES. ΑΡΡ 
 
 quence folloAvs. The use of the accuscUive after verbs of see- 
 ing, has been supposed to arise from ihisi circuinstaiice, t^iat .• 
 tlie Greeki considered the eye as deriving 'its images from its 
 man operations on the presented objects, and not frum the im- 
 pressions of these objects upon itself The objective noua 
 therefore, as being thus an effect, is put in the accusative 
 
 \ 
 42, 43, 44. • 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks upon the Dative. | 
 
 47. 
 
 In this construction, if the verb be an active transitive one, 
 the government of the accusative is evident enough. If, 
 however, it be an active intransitive or a neuter verb, we must 
 pesort to an ellipsis of κατά, or some equivalent preposition : 
 such is the opinion of Perizonius, in his Notes on the Minerva 
 of Sanctius, vol. ii. p. 21, ed. Baver. Perizonius understands 
 a preposition also in the corresponding Latin idiom, viv&rs 
 viiam, ciarcre cur sum, &c. 
 
 48, 49, 50, 51. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive and Dative. 
 With regard to the double accusative which follows some 
 verbs, Sanclius, Perizonius, and other grammarians, make 
 are of them to be always governed by a preposition under- 
 stood ; maintaining that no verb can govern more than one 
 accusative. According to this opinion, the following ellipses 
 CKicur in the examples under the rule : — Χ^η airsiv rcug 0£oug 
 (χατ-α or sot) τα aya&a. — Aita^ta. (ει?) ίε (5(5«|ομαι. — Αιτοιίτε- 
 |3ΐ με (κατά) τα χ^ημκτα. This ellipsis ^νάΐΐ indeed answer 
 extremely well, and in fact may be considered as necessary, 
 in verbs of ansΛvering, using, dividing, and many others. It 
 will not however suit all passages, but makes the expression 
 in some cases stiff and a\vkward, especially in inany of those, 
 where, besides the proper object, another accusative, com- 
 monly that of a pronoun, is added, which mdicates the whole, 
 of Avliich the proper object is a part. It is much more pro- 
 bable that in these a species of apposition tokes place, hy 
 means of Avhich the whole is more accurately defined by the 
 addition of a pai't. 
 
 53. 
 
 To ιιιγΐόος {"ίτοίξα.) βχεινω ΐ(ί'ΐτξαγμε\;ων. 
 
ί04 GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX Π. 
 
 54. 
 
 Many of the verbs which are called impersonals, that is, 
 verbs belon^ng to no subject or person, are in strictness per- 
 sonal verbs, that is, have a real subject to which thej• belong. 
 The peculiarity connected with them is, that the action to 
 Λvhich they reft-r, whether expressed by an infinitive or other 
 dependent clause, is their true object : thus, ίξϊί'τι μοι ατιένα/, 
 i. c. TO arrisvai φίτι μοι, " the going away is lawful to me." 
 So in the example under the rule ; με^ιίτον αυτω εβοξεν είναι, 
 i. c. fo ειναι μί^ιίτον εϋοξίν αυτω, "its being greatest appeared 
 to him." Of this kind are (5ει, χζτ„ αιτοχξη, le^evu, ενδζ-χεται, 
 &c. 
 
 57. 
 
 The infinitive is in fact a verbal noun, (see Remarks on 
 Ride 1,) hence, when governed by verbs, participles, or adjec- 
 tives, it is precisely the same construction as if a noun supplied 
 its place, and were governed by them. 
 
 58. 
 
 Zeune, in his Notes on Viger, makes an ellipsis of some 
 verb in those and similar constructions. AVhen the particles 
 Avhich are joined with the infinitive in such cases, have the 
 meaning of (i/ier, to/tai, before, wilil, «kc, he supposes ίΤυμ^αινει, 
 or ΛΊ-νεβη, or 'i ι;,?»»-*), or ίυμβη, (accordmg as the context re- 
 quires a present or a past tense, the optative or the subjunctivis 
 mood,) to b^ nmler.itood. "■ When, however, the particle has 
 llic meaninir of asov s), he understands φ(ίτι, on, ειχο? e(frt, 
 or some einiiv.'iknt term. Thus, ώ? ετο» εΐ'τειν, is for ΰ^ φ•ΐτι 
 e-rof ειίΤίΐν, (■/ •ηΙ) so ίο speak : ^rPfv ίηλον ειναι, for irjiv 
 
 (β'υμβαινει) , h<fore {it happnis thai) it is ei-idcnt. So 
 
 also, ώδ i(5;i he saio him, for ύς {<ί•ονι°τη) ιδαν αυτόν : 
 
 νξΐν αλεχτί.; /Ore the cock creio, for "Jt^iv (συνεοη) αλεχ. 
 
 το^α φωνητ 
 
 59. 
 
 Matthi.T 1. ii. p. 824) thinks that this use of 
 the infiniM • '. a remnant of the ancient simplicity 
 of the I;• I which the action required was ex- 
 pressed li li'i verb absolute, or the mocxl of the 
 verb will "licates the action without any refer- 
 ence to ■ .«peech. It seems much simpler, 
 however, ι ellipsis of a verb ; as, Λυτο^ (ό^α) 
 πι ir^uror / thou see to) fight among the first, 
 
 i 
 
GREBK EXERCISKl — APPENDIX Π. 205 
 
 -A similar ueage, and it is presumed a eimilar ellipsis, occurs 
 in the subjunctive ; as M») ■toitjs τούτο, Do not do this, for (Ό^α) 
 μη iroiTjg τούτο, {See that thou) do not do this ; like the Latin ne 
 facias,, with vide or cave understood. The use of the infinitive 
 as above mentioned, was very common in Ionic ; see especial- 
 ly the Aphorisms of Hippocrates. An infinitive and impera- 
 tive sometimes are coupled together in the same sentence, as 
 in the beautiful prayer cited by Plato, Alcib. 2. Ζευ βαύιΧευ, 
 τα μ.Βν etfdXa χαι ευχόμενοι^ χαι ανευχτοκ Αμμ» δίδο\)' 7(t ^s Χυγξα, 
 xai ευχόμενων α-ταλεξειν. 
 
 60. 
 
 Thus, μέλλω 7^αφε»ν, scripturu^ sum ; βμελλον ^^αφειν, scnjp- 
 tums eram ; μελληο'ω ^^αφειν, scripturus era ; εμε'ΚΧ'ηίία. γξα., 
 φειν, scripturus fui. In English this is expressed by ahout to 
 do any thing, intending to do, &c. The student will observe 
 that the Greeks joined μέλλω with all the tenses of the infini- 
 tive except the perfect, never with this. Μέλλω, together 
 with τυγχάνω and others mentioned in Rule 62, are of singu- 
 lar use and beauty in the Greek language. By associating 
 μέλλω with the infinitive, and τυγχάνω, ειμί, &c. with the 
 participles of other verbs, the tinje and circumstances of an 
 action are most accurately defined. They may with proprie- 
 ty be called auxiUaries, and they bear a remarkable analogy 
 to verbs of that kind in the English language. Instances of 
 their peculiar use are here added ; thus : — Inceptive present, 
 μέλλω γζαψζη, scripturus sum, I am going to ηψϊΐβ. Middle or 
 extended present, τυ/χανω γξαφων, scribo, I am writing. In-^ 
 ceptive past, εμελλον ^^αφειν, scripturus eram, I was beginning 
 to icrile. Middle or extended past, εγξαφον or ετύγχαναν γξα- 
 φων, scribebam, I was loriting. Inceptive future, ιχεΧΚ-ηΰω γξα. 
 φειν, scripturus ero, I shall be about to write. Middle or extend- 
 ed future, εοΌμαί γξοφων, scriba^n, I shall be writing. Comple- 
 tive future, εοΌμαι γεγξαχ^<ύζ^ smpsero^ I shall have done mriling, 
 
 62. 
 
 P" Τυγχάνω answers to the Latin forte, φΛχνω to fT<B^ Xaviavw 
 to dam. See also Remarks preceding. 
 
 63. 
 
 This construction constitutes a peculiar feature of the 
 Greek syntax, and as it is of frequent occurrence, is well 
 ■worthy of the student's notice. If a verb is governed by an- 
 
106 G&EEE EXERCISC9. — APPEXDIX II. 
 
 Other verb oi an adjective, a double relation is established, 
 according to which the use of the infinitive or certain par- ■ 
 tides is determined. Either the verb or adjective conveys 
 in itself a perfect and indi^pendent idea ; or it has no perfect 
 idea, but expresses an action which first becomes perfect by 
 the addition of its reference. Thus the verbs I pray, I per- 
 euade, I willy «SiC. always require an addition Λvhich expresses 
 for what I pray, to ivhat I persuade any one, what I will. Now 
 when such an imperfect verb or adjective refers to a verb, this 
 reference expresses either the consequence in \'iew, the end, 
 or merely the object of the first verb or adjective. Thus in 
 the propositions, 1 will write, I command you to write, 1 admo- 
 nish you to go, «sic. the English infinitive is the consequence in 
 view of the fiirst verb, and is in most cases expressed in Latin 
 by ut. On the contrary, in the propositions, 1 saw him fall, I 
 heard hint say — ecio me esse mortalem, intelligo me errasse, the 
 infinitive i.* ca<?Tely the object, lUDt the end, of tl^e verbs to see, 
 to hear, &.c. — Thus much having been premised, we deduce 
 the following rules : — 
 
 1. AVhcn an imporfect-verb or adjective is followed by a 
 verb which expresses the object or the consequence of it, 
 the latter in Greek is put in the infinitive ; as iso/xai tfou ελ- 
 flsiv, / entreat thee to a/me ; τα^αινω tfoi ^?αφίΐν, / exhort thee 
 to write. To this rule^ hoΛvever, there is a regular exce}>- 
 tion in it^kiKuctbaty which is followed by Itug and the finite 
 verb. 
 
 2. When an imperfect verb is accompanied by another 
 vhich u^arka merely the object of the former, the latter is 
 put in the participle — sometimes where in Latin the parti- 
 ciple 13 used, as vidω te scnbeniem, audio te doccntcm, όξω <Sb γξα. 
 φόντα, axovu ffi JjiaixovTa — sometimes after verbs which indi- 
 cate a perception by means of the external senses, or the un- 
 derstanding, where in Latin tho accusative with the infmitivo 
 is used, as scio me esse mortalem, seiiiio te iralum esse, οιδα ύνητος 
 tjv, aιιJ^avoμΛ^ di χαλδίΤαιν&ντα. 
 
 3. The verbs to say, to announce, to mean, to think, to hope, 
 constitute a regular exception to this rule, and take the infini- 
 tive. The first two also take ότι with the finite verb ; ίηλουν 
 however takes the jvorticiplc- 
 
 4. If the former verb is of itself perfect, or be preceded 
 by a pn)position entirely perfect, then the object of it is ex- 
 prc.=«scd by means of tJic conjunctions ίνα, οφρα, ό^ω^ ; as ira- 
 |αινω (foi μαίϊιν ^ βάμματα ινα (Τοφωτίξος γίνη ; but the conse- 
 
 qutnc• not iuuncdiaieJy in ^iow is expressed by Mtfrs wiUi the 
 
SREBK EXERCISES. — AtPBNDlX Π. SOT 
 
 infinitive ; this takes place especially after τοσΌυτο^, roiwrog, 
 
 65, 
 
 Eiff TO (ίτξατιωτας &υναγαγει\/, ad congregandnm vel congr&• 
 gandos milites. Eue^j'erwv, benefacimdo. (E»s το) «ovsiv Mi- 
 χξον, iurpe/aciu. 
 
 , 66. 
 
 Γξά.'π'τεον μοι εττίο'τολην, scribendum est mihi epistolam. Ελ- 
 μελητβον rfoi τούτου, ^oc //έί curanduTn est. So also ταύτα tfoi 
 «τοιητδα, ^icc tibifacienda sunt. 
 
 67. 
 
 The preposition is often omitted, as Σουνίον I^ov aφ^xoμε&'' we 
 tame to the sacred Sunium ; Αιβε^ι ναιων, dialling in the upj)er 
 regions of the air. 
 
 69. 
 
 The adverbs in tfi Avere originally datives .plural from the 
 Ionic dialect. After however that this ΰι was once considered 
 merely as an adverbial termination, and no longer as a termi- 
 nation of the dative plural, it was annexed also to other names 
 preceded by α ; as Ολυμ^ιαίίι, ΠλαταιαοΊ, &c. 
 
 70. 
 
 Εφε3Ό$ ανεγει (κα4') o5ow τ^ιων ijfxs^wv, 
 
 71. 
 
 The grammarians commonly understand ίια to govern the 
 genitive in tliis rule : see however Appendix I., Remarks on 
 the Genitive. The other ellipses are, (εν) ήμί^α μι^; ο^^η 
 φιλουντων (κατ') ολα^ον ιΰγνει χ^ονον. 
 
 72, 73. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive. 
 
 74. 
 Τα (χ^*ΐματα) Πλάτωνος. Ολυμίτια^ (ή μητη^) Αλε|αν5|ου. 
 
 76. 
 
 The rule is given according to the usual mode of enun- 
 ciating it, and the passages cited as examples stand thus 
 wlien the ellipses are supplied : — Ε'Ταινω Cs (§vixa) νί\ζ φίλο= 
 
203 OaE£K BX£RCI6CS. — APPENDIX II. 
 
 μου^ίΟ^.— ΔειλΛίί (svexa) του »ou. — (EJs) «rowuv yivou μοι. — Hrfo» 
 (rivif) των «Τταυ^ων. The most rational explanation however 
 has been given in Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive 
 
 77. 
 Vid. Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive. 
 
 81. 
 
 Tl^c CTammariang understand by the term ahsoluie, merely 
 that there is no governing word crprcssed. They make the 
 preposition siri to be understood with the genitive, tfuv or ίτι 
 with the dative, and xara or μετά with the accusative. Thus, 
 {εφ') ίμ-ου ιταξοντος, ttpon tiiy appearing ; (tfjv) ιτα^ιοντ» ενιαυτω, 
 together wilh (he departed year ; (μετά) δ-ον hsea, after other 
 things were suitable. The genitive absokite seems to have 
 been in its original force an expression of time, and hence the 
 use of the genitive case. When this duration of time is ascer- 
 tained by an historical person, the prcposiiion en is often used 
 Λνίιΐι these genitives, as, sm Kujou fSufftXsvovrog, in the reign of 
 Cyrus. This circuuistance no doubt led the grammarians to 
 imagine, that wherever sir» was not expressed Λvith the geni- 
 tive absolute, it was to be understood. 
 
 As regards the genitive absolute, the Greek language dif- 
 fers from the Latin : for Avhere the liatin, in the use of the ab- 
 lative absolute, is obliged, on account of the want of a parti- 
 ciple in the perfect active, to turn the sentence, and to use the 
 perfect participle passive ; the Greek, on the other hand, 
 whose principal tenses all have their own pariici]iles, can re- 
 tain the active construction, and then their participle is rcfciTed 
 to the subject of the principal proposition ; as, viso Ivpo diffn- 
 gaiint ores, is in Greek, looutfai τον λυχον, α! οϊε^ ατί-ι,^ον, not 
 οφΰεντος του λυχου. Thus too ναυτα αχοικίας, his aw.litis, and in 
 all similar cases. The nearest approach which tlie Latin 
 language can make to this construction, omitting the ablative 
 absolute, is the use of a past participle of a depi»nent verb, 
 when they have one to employ, or else of gtium or mm with 
 the pluperfect subjunctive ; as conspicati iiiptim ; (juiun hcec 
 audissct. In Greek, this construction of the pariiriplo which 
 wo have just been mentioning, is universally mhnis.sible when 
 tlic accompanying action, wliich is expressed by the partici- 
 ple, belongs defiiiiiiveiy to the subject of the principal pro- 
 po.sition ; whereas the passive construction obtains wht>re the 
 action cxprcsseil l)y the participle does not refer, or does not 
 relW «mirely, to the svd'jsct of the principal propoiition : thus, 
 
GEHEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX 11. £0β 
 
 rwv ίτολί,αιων οφίεντων, εφνγον ο) τολιται, when they (not the 
 citizens merely) saw the enemy, the citizens fled. 
 
 In the case of the nominative absokite, the grammarians 
 in general consider the construction as an elliptical one ; the 
 finite verb, with some conjunction preceding, being under- 
 stood ; as, ("Οταν) αϊ ί;μ,ε^α» ε^χομεναι (ηίαν), lohen the days 
 were come. — {Ε-ττόιδ-η) oi ίτ^ατωται χατα το μϊοΌν «ττίδιον (ετυ^χα. 
 νον) ovTec:, iuAen /Ac soldiers loere ia the middle of the plain, &c. 
 It is certainly far simpler, however, to view these construc- 
 tions as αναχολουόίαι, where the writer considers the thing 
 which he is about to speak of, abstractedly or as a subject, 
 but takes occasion, by means of a parenthesis, or in some 
 other way, to change the construction. These αναχολουίιαι 
 occur in the best writers in every language, and when used 
 sparingly and with caution, give a pleasing variety and ani- 
 mation to plain narrative, or didactic style. Our absolute case 
 in English is ahvays a nominative ; and in Latin the nomina- 
 tive absolute often occurs. Thus in Cicero, de Fin. 2. 33, 
 " H(ec leviora, poema, orationem cum aut scribis out legis — signum^ 
 tahula, locus amoenus, ludi•, vcnaiio, villa LucuUi [nam si iuam di- 
 cerem, latebram haheres ; ad corpus diceres pertinere) sed ea, gucs 
 dixi, ad corpuscle refers ?" 
 
 83, 84. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive. 
 
 85. 
 
 The ^vriters on ellipsis supply the verb ομ.νυμ( with the par- 
 ticles of swearing ; as, μα (ομνυμι) Δια ; νη (ομνυμι) Δια. Ι 
 cannot resist the temptation of making the student acquaint- 
 ed with another mode of resolving these constructions, Λvhich 
 I have no doubt he will find exceedingly ingenious and plau- 
 sible, though it must be confessed that the foundation on which 
 it rests is none of the most stable. Hoogeveen first suggest- 
 ed, in his work on the Greek Particles, (c. 2.5, p. 630,) that 
 μα might l*c formed from άμα, as |a from αξα ; and that the 
 root of άμα might be the verb αμαο), whence comes μαω, / de- 
 sire loith eagerness, I imjuire, investigate. Everard Scheide, 
 the editor of Van Lennep's " Etvmologicon Linguse Grsecre," 
 seizes upon this hint, and supposes μα to be the imperative, 
 second person, contracted from μσ.ε ; and hence the accusa- 
 tive Δια, for example, is governed by this imperative ; and the 
 expression, μα Δια, is equivalent to, " ask Jupiter, ^^ i. e. " ask 
 JupU&r if I do not speak the truth ;" so να» μα rov Απόλλωνα, 
 
ilO OHEEK EXEaclflES. — APPE5DIX Π. 
 
 " yes ! ask ApoUo if I do not speak the tmlhP The eame ΤΛτί- 
 ter makes ναι or νη to be an okl dative form from νη, frmaiio, 
 etabililio ; so that, according to him, ναι μα Δια, or νη μα Λια, 
 or simply vou or νη Δια, {μΜ being supposed to be understood,) 
 "W'ill properly signify, " in confirmation," or, " as a strengthening 
 of what I have said, ask Jupiter if J do not utter the truth.'' Vid. 
 Valckenacr de Analogia, L. Gr. ed. Scheidc, p. 250. 
 
 It is a matter of more importance for the student to know 
 that the particle μα neither afirms nor denies, but only strength- 
 ens or adds intensity to what is affirmed or denied. Whether 
 the oath taken be one in affirmation or denial of any thing, is 
 to be ascertained from the context. In general, however, ναι 
 is added when an αβηναήοη is intended to be conveyed, and 
 cu, or some other negative, or else adversative particle, when 
 a negation is implietf. Vid. Hoogevecn Doctrina Parlicula- 
 rum L. G. ed. Schiitz, p. 292. 
 
 86. 
 
 Tn Greek, after an ontire proposition is negatived, it is al- 
 ways customary to oegative again all other definitions of α 
 general nature which are to be attached ; such as any one^ 
 at any time, any tohere, &c. Hence in this language two ne- 
 gatives do not, as in Latin and English, destroy•, but, on the 
 contrary, strengthen each other. We sometimes find on the 
 part of the Latin writers, more especially the earl}' ones, an 
 imitation of the Greek idiom in this respect : thus — Ennius, 
 (ap. Fcst.) Lapideo corde sunt multi, guos non miscret neminis. 
 — Plautus, Mil. 5. 1. 18. Jura te non nocituram homini hac de 
 re ncmini. — Id. Bacch. 4. 9. 114. JVejue ego haud committam ui 
 fecisse dicas. — Id. Epid. 4, 1,6. JYeque ea nunc ubi sit nescio. — 
 Ibid. 5, 1, 57. J^'eyue Hie haud okjicict mihi. And among later 
 Avriters — Propcrtiiis, 2, 15, ult. Ahsenii nemo ne nocuisse velit, 
 — Ovid. Pont. 1, 1, 66. .Vc nonpeccarim, mors quoquc non fa• 
 del. 
 
 91. 
 
 Those prepositions which govern two cases, answer for the 
 most part to the question whither with the accusative, and to 
 the question where with the dative. The genitive admits of 
 variou.-i significations, though more or less connected \vith the 
 idea, out nf from. The limits of ihe present work forViid en- 
 lariring upon the meanings of the prepositions re.=:pcciivi'ly ; 
 thin falls mort> within the .«cope of grammatical treatises ; to 
 those the sliidcnt is referred. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II; 211 
 
 92. 
 
 This rule is retained verbaiim from the former edition of 
 tliis work. It may be as well to quote the words of Dr. Neil- 
 son ; — " Πα^α and ιτξος are joined, in this rule, for the sake of 
 conciseness, as they may commonly be translated by the same 
 words : 3'et tliere is a marked distinction in the ideas re- 
 spectively expressed by them : iraga in general implying dura- 
 tion or possession, and ir^os contingency.'" To this may be 
 added, as a caution to the student, that the term beside, in the 
 language of the rule, does not mean besides, or in addition lo, 
 (which is included in the meaning with for the dative,) but by^ 
 or along side of; and that this signification is confined exclu-. 
 sivebj to ■π-α^α. 
 
 99. 
 
 The student must not confound χάν with the accent, which 
 is compounded of xai αν, with καν, for χα» sv, which has no 
 accentual mark. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
ίΙΟ OHEEK EXEaCIflE9. — APPENDIX II. 
 
 " yes ! ask ΛροΙΙο if I do not speak the truth." The eame wri- 
 ter makes ναι or νη to be an old dative form from νη, finnatio^ 
 stabilitio ; so that, according to him, ναι μα Δια, or vtj μα Δια, 
 or simply woj or νη Δια, (μα being supposed to be understood,) 
 will properly signify, " in confirmation" or, " as a strengthening 
 of what I have said, ask Jupiter if I do not utter the truth." Via. 
 Valckenacr de Analogia, L. Gr. ed. Scheide, p. 250. 
 
 li is a matter of more importance for the student to know 
 that the particle μα neither affirms nor denies, but only strength- 
 ens or adds intensity to what is affirmed or denied. Whether 
 the oath taken be one in affirmation or denial of any thing, is 
 to be ascertained from the context. In general, however, ναι 
 is added when an affirmation is intended to be conveyed, and 
 cu, or some other negative, or else adversative particle, when 
 α negation is implied. Vid. Hoogevecn Doctiina I'articula- 
 rum L. G. ed. Schiitz, p. 292. 
 
 86. 
 
 Tn Greek, after an fmtire proposition is negatived, it is al- 
 ways customary to Qegativc again all other definitions of α 
 general nature which are to be attached ; such as any one, 
 at any time, any where, &c. Hence in this language two ne- 
 gatives do not, as in Latin and English, destroy, but, on the 
 contrary, strengthen each other. We sometimes find on the 
 part of the Latin writers, more especially the earl}' ones, an 
 imitation of the Greek idiom in this respect : thus — Ennius, 
 (ap. Fest.) Lnpidco corde sunt mnlti, quos non miscret ncminis. 
 — Plaulus, Mil. 5. 1. 18. Jura te non nocituram homini hac de 
 re ncmini. — Id. Bacch. 4. 9. 114. JVeque ego hand committam ut 
 fecisse dicas. — Id. Epid. 4, 1,6. .Vfywe ea nunc vbi sit nescio. — 
 Ibid. 5, 1, 57. JS'cjue tile hand objicict mihi. And among later 
 writer.s — Propcrtius, 2, 15, ult. Ahsenti nemo ne nocuisse velit. 
 — Ovid. Pont. 1, 1, 66. Λδ tion peccarim, 7nors quoquc non fa- 
 del. 
 
 Λ 
 
 91. 
 
 Those prepositions which govern two cases, ajiswer for the 
 most part to the question whithrr with the accusative, and to 
 the question where with the dative. The genitive admits of 
 variou.•! significations, though more or less connected with the 
 idea, out rf from. The limits of llie present \vork forbid en- 
 Inri^iug iqion the meanings of the prepositions re.^pectivfly ; 
 this fall.s mor•• within the .«cope of grammatical trefttises j te 
 those the student is referred. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDSX 11; 211 
 
 92. 
 
 This rule is retained verbatim from the former edition of 
 this work. It may be as well to quote the Avords of Dr. Neil- 
 son ; — " Πα^α and ΐίξας are joined, in this rule, for the sake of 
 conciseness, as they may commonly be translated by the same 
 "words : j'et tliere is a marked distinction in the ideas re- 
 spectively expressed by them : irotfa in general implying dura- 
 tion or possession, and νξος contingency." To this may be 
 added, as a caution to the student, that the term beside, m the 
 language of the rule, does not mean besides, or in addition ίο, 
 (which is included in the meaning with for the dative,) but by, 
 or along side of; and that this signification is confiiaed exclu- 
 sively to ca^a. 
 
 99. 
 
 The student must not confound χάν with the accent, which 
 is compounded of χαι αν, with καν, for χαι εν, which has no 
 accentual mark. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
i 
 
? f 
 
/ ί 
 
 .4 •- '* '^'• 
 
 1. 
 
'f *•*. 
 
 ^ *. 
 
 
 I . 
 
 f i 
 
 4 
 
 # 
 
 ' # 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 f i Λ 
 
 ^ 4 
 
 ii^ 
 
 
 ^4 
 
RETURN 
 
 CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 
 202 Main Library 
 
 LOAN PERIOD 1 
 HOME USE 
 
 2 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 6 
 
 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 
 
 1 monrh loans niay be renewed by calling 642-3405 
 
 6 month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation Desk 
 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 doys prior to due date 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
 BCUL ocn 
 
 i"82 
 
 
 SENT ON ILL 
 
 
 
 JUL 1 9 1995 
 
 
 
 ■ 1 ^ niO^fTi PV 
 
 
 
 U• C DCnlVCLCT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY 
 12/80 BERKELEY, CA 94720 
 
υ. C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 CD^7D3SL•3Ξ 
 
 y" 
 
 - -- .< rf 
 
 y"''.- -,,,^ί-ο,^- 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 

 •«<ί,%